A cement and concreteindustry publication

User Guide to v3
RC Spreadsheets:
User guide to Excel spreadsheets for design to BS 8110:Part 1, 1997 (Amd. 3)
and BS EN 1992: 2004 Part 1-1 and its UK National Annex

C H Goodchild BSc CEng MCIOB MIStructE

R M Webster CEng FIStructE
Foreword
This publication was srcinally produced by the Reinforced Concrete Council (RCC) as part of its
project ‘Spreadsheets for concrete design to BS 8110 and EC2’. Since their release in 2000 the
spreadsheets have proved enormously popular and have been maintained by the RCC and its
successor The Concrete Centre.

The release of Version 3 of the spreadsheets follows the publication of BS EN 1992-1-1 (Eurocode 2)
plus its UK National Annex and the publication of Amendment 3 to BS 8110 Part 1: 1987.
The requirements within these standards have necessitated the revision of all the published
spreadsheets. This user guide gives guidance on the use of all design spreadsheets to BS 8110 and
Eurocode 2 contained on the CD ROM RC Spreadsheets: v3, published by The Concrete Centre
(order ref. CCIP-008CD).

Acknowledgements
The ideas and illustrations come from many sources. The help and guidance received from many
individuals are gratefully acknowledged.

Thanks are due to members of the srcinal project’s Advisory Group for their time and effort in
helping to make the project feasible and in bringing it to fruition. The members of the Advisory
Group are listed on the inside back cover.

Special appreciation is extended to: Richard Cheng, BSc, CEng, Eur Ing, FIStructE, author of the
retaining wall and basement wall spreadsheets, Peter Noble for conversions and checking, and to
Andy Pullen for initial studies into compatibility of spreadsheet software. Also the late Sami Khan
for help with post-tensioning spreadsheets.

Published by The Concrete Centre

Riverside House, 4Meadows Business Park, Station Approach, Blackwater, Camberley,ey
Surr
GU17 9AB
Tel: +44 (0)1276 606800 Fax: +44 (0)1276 606801

CCIP-008
Published July 2006
ISBN 1-904818-38-2
Price Group O
© The Concrete Centre

User Guide v1 publishedby the British Cement Association on behalf the

of Reinforced Concrete Council.
User Guide v2 publishedelectronically by The Concrete Centr
e.

CCIP publications areproduced by The Concrete Society on behalf of the Cement and Concrete Industry
Publications Forum – an industry initiative to
publish technical guidance in support of concrete design
and construction.
CCIP publications areavailable from the Concrete Bookshop www.concretebookshop.com
at
Tel: +44 (0)7004 607777

All advice or information from The Concrete Centre is intended for those who will evaluate the significance and limitations of
its contents and take responsibility for its use and application. No liability (including that for negligence) for any loss resulting
from such advice or information is accepted by the Concrete Centre or their subcontractors, suppliers or advisors. Readers should
note that The Concrete Centre publications are subject to revision from time to time and should therefore ensure that they are in
possession of the latest version.

Cover artwork: D J Kil loran - The Concrete Society.

Printed by Cromwell Press, Trowbridge, UK.
 User Guide to
RC Spreadsheets: v3

Contents
INTRODUCTION 1
GENERAL NOTES 3

SPREADSHEETS TO BS 8110 17
Elements 19
Analysis 35
Slabs 38
Beams 72
Columns 113
Walls 125
Stairs 139

Foundations 146
Tabular versions 158

SPREADSHEETS TO EUROCODE 2 179

Elements 185
Analysis 205
Slabs 208
Beams 243
Columns 270
Stairs 284
Foundations 287

ADMIN FOLDER 298

REFERENCES AND FURTHER READING 299

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd i 17/07/2006 17:00:56

 User Guide to
RC Spreadsheets: v3
Contents in full
INTRODUCTION 1
GENERAL NOTES 3
Using the spreadsheets 10
Menu.xls 16
SPREADSHEETS TO BS 8110 17
Elements RCC11 Element Design.xls 19
RCC12 Bending and Axial Force.xls 26
RCC13 Punching Shear.xls 28
RCC14 Crack Width.xls 33
Analysis RCC21 Subframe Analysis.xls 35
Slabs RCC31 One-way Solid Slabs (A & D).xls 38
RCC31R Rigorous One-way Slabs.xls 43
RCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A & D).xls 50
RCC32R Rigorous Ribbed Slabs.xls 56
RCC33 Flat Slabs (A & D).xls 64
Beams RCC41 Continuous Beams (A & D).xls 72
RCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams (A & D).xls 78
RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D).xls 85
RCC43 Wide Beams (A & D).xls 107
Columns RCC51 Column Load Take-down & Design. xls 113
RCC52 Column Chart generation.xls 118
RCC53 Column Design.xls 120
RCC54 Circular column charting .xls 123
Walls RCC61 Basement Wall.xls 125
RCC62 Retaining Wall.xls 132
Stairs RCC71 Stair Flight & Landing - Single.xls 139
RCC72 Stairs & Landings - Multiple.xls 142
Foundations RCC81 Foundation Pads.xls 146

RCC82 Pilecap Design.xls 149

Tabular versions RCC91 One-way Solid Slabs (Tables).xls 158
RCC92 Ribbed Slabs (Tables).xls 161
RCC93 Flat Slabs (Tables).xls 166
RCC94 Two-way Slabs (Tables).xls 173
RCC95 Continuous Beams (Tables).xls 175

ii

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd ii 17/07/2006 17:01:53

 SPREADSHEETS TO EUROCODE 2 179
General notes to Eurocode 2 versions 181
Elements TCC11 Element Design.xls 185
TCC12 Bending and Axial Force.xls 194
TCC13 Slab Punching.xls 196
TCC14 Crack Width.xls 201
Analysis TCC21 Subframe Analysis.xls 205
Slabs TCC31 One-way Slabs.xls 208
TCC31R Rigorous One-way Slabs.xls 214
TCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A&D).xls 221
TCC33 Flat Slabs (A&D).xls 228
TCC33X Flat Slabs (A&D).xls 237
Beams TCC41 Continuous Beams.xls 243

TCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams.xls 249

TCC42 Post-tensioned Analysis & Design.xls (Beta) 256
TCC43 Wide Beams (A & D).xls 264
Columns TCC51 Column Load Take-down Design. xls 270
TCC52 Column Chart generation.xls 276
TCC53 Column Design.xls 278
TCC54 Circular Column Design.xls 280
TCC55 Axial Column Shortening.xls 282
Stairs TCC71 Stair Flight & Landing - Single.xls 284
Foundations TCC81 Foundation Pads.xls 287
TCC82 Pilecap Design.xls 291
ADMIN FOLDER 298
REFERENCES AND FURTHER READING 299

iii

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd iii 17/07/2006 17:01:53

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd iv 17/07/2006 17:01:54
 Introduction

Introduction
The RC spreadsheets were srcinally produced under the Eurocode 2 parts 1-1 and 1-2 together with their UK National
Reinforced Concrete Council’s project, ‘Spreadsheets for concrete Annexes have now been published. Students and both
design to BS 8110 and EC2’. They were released in January 2000 inexperienced and experienced engineers will all need to grasp
and have been maintained and extended by the RCC and its an understanding of design to this code. There are differences
successor The Concrete Centre. They continue to be supported between EC2 and BS 8110. The spreadsheets should help with
by The Concrete Centre. the transition.

In recognition of the new and updated spreadsheets made Whilst the spreadsheets to BS 8110 provide a consensus of current
available as part of the version 2.x issue, it was decided to revise commercial reinforced concrete design practice, the spreadsheets
(but not publish) the second edition of the User Guide. to Eurocode 2, provide a consensus of design proceedures to this
new design code. The introduction of Eurocode 2 will provide
The introduction of Eurocode 2[3], its National Annex and commercial opportunities for those who are prepared to use it.
Amd of BS 8110:1997 [2] has necessitated the revision of all the
spreadsheets and publication of version 3 of the User Guide. This It is believed that both novices and experienced users of
third edition of the User Guide provides guidance on the use of all spreadsheets will be convinced that spreadsheets have a great
spreadsheets produced to date (July 2006). potential for teaching BS 8110 and Eurocode 2, improving
concrete design and, above all, improving the concrete design
For the experienced engineer, the spreadsheets allow the and construction process. The spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 should
rapid production of clear and accurate design calculations. The help all engineers to familiarise themselves with the details of this
spreadsheets allow younger users to understand concrete design new design code.
and help them to gain experience by studying their own ‘what if’
scenarios. The individual user should be able to answer his/ her
own questions by chasing through the cells to understand the
logic used. Cells within each spreadsheet can be interrogated and
Version 2.x
can have their formulae checked and values traced. The srcinal The version 2.x released in 2003 [3] introduced new spreadsheets
spreadsheets reflected
issues. The version a consensus
3 Eurocode of opinionreflect
2 spreadsheets on several design
a consensus to BS 8110, to the more finalised EN 1992-1-1 (Eurocode 2) and
an overarching menu spreadsheet. Previously issued spreadsheets
of opinion of a limited number of engineers. Students and young to BS 8110 were updated.
engineers may follow the ‘model’ calculations presented in the
spreadsheets to form an understanding of current reinforced The new spreadsheets introduced were:
concrete design.
■ Menu
The spreadsheets are intended to follow normal design practice
and cater for the design of low- to medium-rise multi-storey BS 8110
concrete framed buildings. They are offered as shareware.
However, users are required to register when using them in ■ RCC31R Rigorous One-way Slabs
any commercial capacity. Registration is through The Concrete ■ RCC32R Rigorous Ribbed Slabs
Bookshop (07004 607777 and www.concretebookshop.com). ■ RCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams
■ RCC43 Wide Beams (A&D)
The srcinal project was jointly funded by the RCC and the
Department of the Environment Transport and the Regions ■ RCC54 Circular Column Design
(DETR) under its Partners in Technology scheme. It was made ■ RCC82 Pilecap Design
possible by the support and contributions of time given by
individual members of industry. The project was managed by the
RCC and guided by an 80-strong Advisory Group of interested Eurocode 2
parties, including consulting engineers and software houses. ■ RCCen11 Element Design
■ RCCen12 Bending and Axial Force
In producing the srcinal spreadsheets several issues had to be
addressed. Firstly, which spreadsheet package should be used? ■ RCCen13 Punching Shear
Excel (© Microsoft Corporation) appeared to hold about 70% of ■ RCCen14 Crack Width
the market amongst structural engineers and was thus adopted. ■ RCCen21 Subframe analysis
More specifically, Excel ’97 was srcinally adopted as being de
■ RCCen31 One-way Solid Slabs (A & D)
facto the most widely available spreadsheet in the field. To avoid
complications, it was decided not to produce corresponding ■ RCCen31R Rigorous* One-way Solid Slabs
versions using other spreadsheet packages. The spreadsheets are ■ RCCen32 Ribbed Slabs (A & D)
compatible with later versions of Excel.

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:1 17/07/2006 17:01:54

 ■ RCCen33 Flat Slabs (A & D) Using and improving the spreadsheets
■ RCCen41 Continuous beams (A & D)
■ RCCen41R Rigorous* Continuous Beams Since their release in 2000 the spreadsheets have proved to be
enormously popular. They may now be regarded as having now
■ RCCen43 Wide Beams (A&D)
been thoroughly tested by engineers in practice but this does not
■ RCCen52 Column Chart generation mean that they are infallible! The user is referred to Managing the
■ RCCen53 Column Design spreadsheets and other General Notes that f ollow.
■ RCCen55 Axial Column Shortening
The older spreadsheets’ usefulness and robustness have
■ RCCen81 Foundation Pads been enhanced by users reporting problems or suggesting
■ RCCen82 Pilecap Design improvements. Comments or suggestions for improvement
are welcomed. Contact The Concrete Centre’s Helpdesk at
[email protected] or on 0700 4 500 500.

Version 3
The release of version 3 of the spreadsheets follows the
publication of BS EN 1992-1-1 (Eurocode 2)[3] and the UK
National Annex and the publication of Amendment 3 to BS
8110 Part 1: 1987[2]. The requirements within these documents
necessitated the revision of all previously published spreadsheets.
The opportunity has been taken to introduce new spreadsheets
as follows:

BS 8110
■ RCC82 Pilecap Design

Eurocode 2
■ TCC33X Flat Slabs (Whole floor)
■ TCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams
■ TCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs and Beams (A&D) ( β version)
■ TCC43 Wide Beams (A&D)
■ TCC54 Circular Column Charting
■ TCC71 Stair Flight and Landing - single
■ TCC81 Foundation Pads
■ TCC82 Pilecap Design

Spreadsheets numbered RCCen11, RCCen12 etc released as Beta

versions have been released for use as TCC11, TCC12 etc.

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:2 17/07/2006 17:01:55

 General notes

General notes
The limitations of the program may not be sufficiently
Managing the spreadsheets ■
apparent to the user.

Use ■ For unusual structures, even experienced engineers may not

have the ability to spot weaknesses in programs for analysis
and detailing
Spreadsheets can be a very powerful tool. Their use has become
increasingly common in the preparation of design calculations. The committee’s report continued: “Spreadsheets are, in principle,
They save time, money and effort. They provide the facility to no different from other software…” With regard to these
optimise designs and they can help instill experience. However, spreadsheets and this publication, The Concrete Centre hopes to
these benefits have to be weighed against the risks associated have addressed more specific concerns by demonstrating “clear
with any endeavour. These risks must be recognised and evidence of adequate verification” by documenting the principles,
managed. In other words appropriate levels of supervision and theory and algorithms used in the spreadsheets. The spreadsheets
checking, including self-checking, must, as always, be exercised have also had the benefit of the Advisory Group’s overview and
when using these spreadsheets. inputs. Many, especially the spreadsheets to BS 8110, have had
several years use and maintenance. Inevitably, some unconscious
assumptions, inconsistencies, etc.[9] will remain.
Advantages
For the experienced engineer, the spreadsheets help in the Liability
rapid production of clear and accurate design calculations for
reinforced concrete elements. The contents are intended to be A fundamental condition of use Is that the user accepts
sufficient to allow the design of low to medium-rise multi-storey responsibility for the input and output of the computer and how
concrete framed buildings. it is used.

Spreadsheets allow users to gain experience by studying their As with all software, users must be satisfied with the answers
own ‘what if’ scenarios. Should they have queries, individual these spreadsheets give and be confident in their use. These
users should be able to answer their own questions by chasing spreadsheets can never be fully validated but have been through
through the cells to understand the logic used. Cells within each Beta testing, both formally and informally. The BS 8110 versions
spreadsheet can be interrogated, formulae checked and values have been used for several years and as a result of feedback they
traced. Macleod[7] suggested that, in understanding structural have been updated to address known errors. However, users
behaviour, doing calculations is probably not a great advantage; must satisfy themselves that the uses to which the spreadsheets
being close to the results probably is. are put are appropriate.
Other benefits include quicker and more accurate reinforcement This is especially true with the spreadsheets to Eurocode 2. While
estimates, and the possibilities for electronic data interchange the Eurocode 2 versions have been through Beta testing, they
(EDI) Already, bending schedules derived from spreadsheets are have not yet been used in anger. Also, Eurocode 2 is a completely
the basis of some EDI and the control of bar-bending machines. new code to most designers and so there is little experience of
Standardised, or at least rationalised, designs make the checking design to this standard.
process easier and quicker.

Control
Appropriate use
Users and managers should be aware that spreadsheets can be
In its deliberations{8} the Standing Committee on Structural changed and must address change control and versions for use.
Safety (SCOSS) noted the increasingly wide-spread availability The flexibility and ease of use of spreadsheets, which account
of computer programs and circumstances in which their misuse for their widespread popularity, also facilitate ad hoc and
could lead to unsafe structures. unstructured approaches to their subsequent development.

These circumstances include: Quality Assurance procedures may dictate that spreadsheets are
■ People without adequate structural engineering knowledge or treated as controlled documents and subject to comparison and
training may carry out the structural analysis. checks with previous methods prior to adoption. Users’ Quality
■ There may be communication gaps between the design Assurance schemes should address the issue of changes. The
initiator, the computer program developer and the user. possibilities of introducing a company’s own password to the
spreadsheets and/ or extending the revision history contained
■ A program may be used out of context. within the sheet entitled Notes! might be considered.
■ The checking process may not be sufficiently fundamental.

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:3 17/07/2006 17:01:56

 Application The spreadsheets are intended to follow normal design practice
and cater for the design of low- to medium-rise multi-storey
The spreadsheets have been developed with the goal of producing concrete framed buildings. Each type of element may be designed
calculations to show compliance with codes. Whilst this is the in several different ways, e.g. horizontal frame elements may be
primary goal, there is a school of thought[10] that designers are designed using:
primarily paid for producing specifications and drawings that work ■ Element design: design of simple elements to BS 8110: Part
on site and are approved by clients and/ or checking authorities. 1[2] or BS EN 1992 [3]
Producing calculations happens to be a secondary exercise, ■ Tabular design: design of elements based on moments and
regarded by many experienced engineers as a hurdle on the way shears derived from BS 8110: Part 1 Tables 3.12 and 3.5
to getting the project approved and completed. From a business
■ Analysis and design: design of elements based on moments
process point of view, the emphasis of the spreadsheets might,
and shears from analysis, e.g. sub-frame analysis, embodied
in future, change to establishing compliance once members,
loads and details are known. Certainly this may be the preferred within the spreadsheets
method of use by experienced engineers.

The spreadsheets have been developed with the ability for users
Element design
to input and use their own preferred material properties, bar sizes The element design spreadsheets illustrate the basic principles
and spacings, etc. However, user preferences should recognise of reinforced concrete design from input material properties,
moves for efficiency through standardisation. dimensions, moments, shears and axial loads, etc. They form the
basis of element design used in succeeding spreadsheets. The
Another long-term objective is automation. To this end, moments, shears and axial loads used should be derived from
spreadsheet contents might in future be arranged so that input separate analysis (e.g. hand calculations, sub-frame analysis
and output can be copied and pasted easily by macros and/ or spreadsheet or other analysis package). For further explanation
linked by the end-user. There are counter arguments about users the user is referred to BS 8110, BS EN 1992-1-1 or a number of
needing to be closer to the calculations and results in order to standard reference works[11, 12 , 13] .
ensure they are properly considered – see Appropriate use above.

We emphasise that it is up to the user how he/ she uses the Tabular design
output. The spreadsheets have been produced to cater for both

first-time usersoff.
first-time user andNonetheless,
the very experienced without
their potential putting the
applications are The
8110:tabular
Part 1 design spreadsheets
to automate use Tables
the derivation 3.12 and
of design 3.5 fromand
moments BS
innumerable. shears. However, the use of these tables is restricted for slabs.
BS 8110: Part 1, Clause 3.5.2.4, restricts the use of Table 3.12 to
where:
Summary ■ In a one-way slab, the area of a bay (one span x full width)
With spreadsheets, long-term advantages and savings come exceeds 30m2
from repeated use but there are risks that need to be managed. ■ The ratio of characteristic imposed loads, Qk , to
Spreadsheets demand an initial investment in time and effort, characteristic dead loads, Gk does not exceed 1.25
but the rewards are there for those who make the investment. ■ The characteristic imposed load, Qk, does not exceed 5
Good design requires sound judgement based on competence kN/m2 , excluding partitions
derived from adequate training and experience, not just computer
■ Additionally, for flat slabs, there are at least three rows of
programs.
panels of approximately equal span in the direction being
considered.
Familiarisation For beams, Clause 3.4.3, Table 3.5 is valid only where:
There are many different ways to present structural concrete ■ Characteristic imposed loads, Qk, do not exceed characteristic
calculations. ‘Calcs’ should demonstrate compliance with dead loads, Gk
relevant design codes of practice, but different designers want ■ Loads are substantially uniformly distributed over three or
to investigate different criteria and want to set out calculations more spans
in different ways. Spreadsheets cannot satisfy everyone. The
■ Variations in span length do not exceed 15% of the longest
spreadsheets presented
criteria that may here‘usual’.
be deemed have been set out tooncover
It is incumbent the
the user span
to judge whether these criteria are pertinent and sufficient for
the actual case in hand. It is also incumbent on the user to ensure If design parameters stray outside these limits, the tabular design
that inputs are correct and that outputs are of the correct order spreadsheets should be used with caution.
of magnitude.

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:4 17/07/2006 17:01:57

 General Notes

Analysis and design Column design

To provide for more general application, these versions combine Column design is presented in, essentially, two different ways;
sub-frame analysis with design. Spreadsheets for one-way slabs, either an amount of reinforcement is determined or the capacity
ribbed slabs, flat slabs and beams provide powerful design tools. of a section is checked – two valid design approaches.
Sub-frame analysis is also used in the post-tensioned concrete
design spreadsheets. Under RCC11 Element Design.xls (or RCC11.xls for short) or
TCC11, the amount of reinforcement is calculated by iterating to
The sub-frame analysis spreadsheet RCC21.xls may of course be find the neutral axis depth in order to solve two simultaneous
used alone (and the elements designed by other means such as equations.
RCC11.xls).
Under RCC52.xls for single axis bending and RCC53.xls for two
The flat slab spreadsheet RCC33 is intended to be used one- axis bending, N-M interaction charts are derived from presumed
direction at a time. TCC33x designs flat slabs to BS EN1992-1-1 in reinforcement arrangements. Individual load cases are checked
two directions at one time. The post-tensioned concrete design against the capacity of the column with the various reinforcement
spreadsheet follows the 1994 ‘BS’ version of Concrete Society arrangements. TCC52 and TCC53 similarly.
TR43[14] and involves sub-frame analysis at various limit states.
The principles used are applicable to both beams and slabs with RCC51.xls is set out so that the user may undertake a traditional
either bonded or unbonded tendons being designed to BS 8110. A column load take down, assess design moments and critical axis
Beta version of the post-tensioned concrete design spreadsheet before calculating theamount of reinforcement required. TCC51.xls
to Eurocode 2 and the 2005 version of Concrete Society TR43 is similarly.
included. The examples of the retaining wall and basement wall
spreadsheets are based on common UK practice. RCC12.xls determines the capacity of an unsymmetrical
reinforced column (or beam). TCC12.xls similarly.
Deflections
Others
In most spreadsheets deflection checks are based on span:depth
criteria in the codes. Estimates of actual deflections are available Other spreadsheets provide for the design of pad foundations
within the ‘rigorous’ spreadsheets.
catering
as single for one and
flights or two columns,
single punching
landings shear,
or flights and stairs (either
landings as
Rigorous spreadsheets in a stair core), small retaining walls and basement walls. More
detail and further references are given within the spreadsheets
Deflection can be the governing criterion of many designs. These themselves.
spreadsheets allow the estimation of deflection to BS 8110 Parts
1 and 2 or Eurocode 2 Part 1-1. Rather than just check span-to-
effective depth ratios, the spreadsheets calculate deflections at
Terminology
1
/20 the spans using vigorous methods.
As with all software, spreadsheets have their own jargon. The basic
[30] terminology for layout is shown on the screen dump below:
The Eurocode 2spreadsheets follows methods described in TR58 .

Spreadsheet terminology

Excel file name Drop down menu bar

Toolbars
(use View/Toolbars to
switch on and off)
Cell reference Formula bar

Cell
Scroll bar

Worksheet area

Sheet tabs

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:5 17/07/2006 17:01:58

 Sheet Architecture Project
Client
Spreadsheets to BS 8110
Advisory Group Madeby
T h e Co n cr et e Cen t r e

Date Page
Location Level 2, Beam on line 6, from B to E RMW 11-Apr-06 36
SUBFRAME ANALYSIS to BS8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo

Each spreadsheet may contain several linked sheets (i.e. layers BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAMS
(kNm)
Originated fromRCC21.xls v3.0 onCD © 2006 TCC ch g - R 68

or pages) that deal with different aspects of design. The sheet’s 1000 1000
800

name on the sheet tab gives an indication of the content. For

800
600 600
400 400
200

the more involved spreadsheets, individual sheets are devoted to 200

-200
0
0
-200
-400

a full explanation of the design (with references for educational -400

-600
-600
-800
-800 -1000

and validation purposes) or analysis, etc. and other sheets give

0 10 20 30 40 0 10 20 30 40

B Elastic Moments E B Redistributed Envelope E

an abridged version more in keeping with the requirements
S U P P ONRoT 1 2 3 4 5
of experienced practicing engineers. Further sheets may ElasticM
RedistributedM
95.3
90.5
743.3
557.5
868.6
694.9
427.6
406.2
34.3
32.6
~
~
kNm
kNm

contain analysis calculations, data for graphs and calculation Redistribution

ßb 0.950
5 .0%
0.750
25.0%
0.800
20.0%
0.950
5.0%
0.950
5.0%
~ ~

of reinforcement weight. All spreadsheets have a Notes! sheet ElasticM 185.0

S PNAo N 1 2
633.1
3
400.1
4
121.4 ~ ~ Based on support
where disclaimers, status and revision histories relating to each RedistributedM 152.1
ßb 0.822
746.8
1.180
373.5
0.934
118.8
0.979
~
~
~
~
moments of
min(ßbM, Malt/ßb)
SHEAR FORCE DIAGRAMS(kN)
spreadsheet are incorporated (sheet names are differentiated by 500 500

the use of an appended exclamation mark). 400

300
200
400
300
200
100 100
0 0
-100 -100
-200

Those sheets with names in capitals are intended for printing

-200
-300 -300
-400 -400
-500 -500

out as design calculations. Other sheets are available to view 0 10 20 30 40 0 10 20 30 40

in the spreadsheets. These may need to be printed for checking B Elastic Shears E B Redistributed Shears E

purposes and parts of them, such as simple design routines, may N oS P A N

ElasticV
1
191.0 312.6
2
435.6 432.2
3
356.9 282.0
RedistributedV 177.7 302.0 422.8 433.2 345.1 273.7
be pasted into word-processed calculations.
ACTIONS! sheet
Sheet tabs (from RCC 41.xls) Main graphical output of Bending Moment Diagrams, Shear Force
Diagrams. Also input for redistribution percentages.
Sheet tabs

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location D & DM
: a inB ea m,f ro mg ridCt oH r mw Ap r- 20 0 6 59
RIGOROUS C ONTINUOUS BEAMS to BS 8110:2005

Typical spreadsheet screens

Checked Revision JobNo
OriginatedfromRCC41R .xlsv3.0 onCD ©2006TCC chg - R6 8

The spreadsheets are intended to be as consistent as possible. SPAN 3

AC TIONS M kNm 208.9
L EF T
192.7
C EN T RE RI GHT
206.6
Generally, upper sheets consist of calculations, notes and DESIGN
ßb
d mm
1.00
327.5
0.99
322.5
0.86
327.5
workings as illustrated in the examples below, which gives an As mm²
As' mm²
1860
286
1447
0
1799
357

indication of the contents of a typical spreadsheet. The first sheet TOP STEEL Layer 1
Layer 2
4
0
H 25 2
0
H 16 4
0
H 25

consists of input, followed by results of analysis, design, weight As prov mm²

BTM STEEL Layer 1 3H1
1963
6
As'prov
3H2
402
5
As
prov
3H1
1963
6
Layer 2 0 0 0
of reinforcement, analysis, detailed design with references, graph As' prov mm² 603 As
prov 1473 As'
prov 603
DEFLEC TION Permanent=13 .00<24.00 Imposed=5. 77<12.00 Precamber(mm)= 0
data and finally a revision history. mm Affecting partitions = 15.56 < 17.14 ok Increase btm As by 0%
SHEAR V kN 222.2 Li n k
Ø V 215.8
v N/mm² 2.262 10 v 2.197
vc N/mm² 0.743 No m in a l v c 0.743
LINKS H1 0@1 2 5f o r1 8 75 H1 0@2 25 H1 0@1 50f o r1 8 0 0
legs No 2 2 2
Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 T h e Con cret e Cen t re

Client Advisory Group M ade

by Date Page C HEC KS % As ok ok ok
Location L ev el2, B e amo nl i n e6 f r o mB t o E RMW 1 1 - A p r -2 0 0 6 35 Cover ok ok ok
S UB FRAME ANALYS IS to B S 8110 :20 0 5 C hecked Revision JobNo
min S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Originatedfrom R v3.0 onCD © 2006TCC chg - R68
Main bars ok ok ok
LOCATION Supportsfromgrid B to grid E
max V ok ok
Crack width ok 0.233 ok 0.300 ok 0.266
SPANS
L( m ) H( m m ) b w( m m ) h f( m m ) Ty pe b f( m m ) LOADING PATTERN SPAN 4 L EF T C EN T RE RI GHT
SPAN1 7 .000 600 375 150 T 1355 min max
AC TIONS M kNm 209.9 169.7 57.3
SPAN2 12.000 600 375 150 T 2055 DEAD 1 1.4
ßb 0.85 0.98 1.00
SPAN3 1 2.000 600 375 150 T 2055 IMPOSED 0 1.6
DESIGN d mm 327.5 325.0 332.0
SPAN4 6 .000 600 375 150 T 1215
As mm² 1819 1264 421
SPAN 5 0
As' mm² 403 0 0
SPAN 6 0
TOP STEEL Layer 1 4 H 25 3 H 16 3 H 16
SUPPORTS
A B O VE ( m ) H ( mm) B ( mm ) E n d C o nd B E L OW ( m) H( m m ) B ( mm) E nd C o n d
Support
1 2.95 400 300 F 3.10 400 300 P SPANS! sheet
Support
2 3.00 400 300 P 3.10 300 300 P
Support
3 0.00 3.10 400 300 P This sheet shows the design of the left, centre and right hand
Support4 K
Support
5 4.00 400 300 P 3.10 300 300 P side of each span. Input is needed for the diameter of bars and
Support 6
Support 7

LOADING UDLs (kN/m) PLs (kN) Position (m) number

out. of legs of links required. Extraneous spans are blanked
D e ad I mp o s e d P o s i ti o n L o ad e d D e ad Im p o s e d P o s it i o n L o ad e d
Span 1 L o ad L o ad f r o ml e f t L e ng t h Span 4 L o ad L o ad f r o ml e f t L e ng t h
UDL 3 2.20 12.50 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL 17.50 5.60 ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL
1 ~~~~~ PL1 24 6 2.000 ~~~~~
PL2 ~~~~~ PL
2 5 18 4.500 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
2S p an 5S p an
UDL 32.20 12.50 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
1PL ~~~~~ 1PL ~~~~~
2PL 25 25 5.000 ~~~~~ 2PL ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
3S p an 6S p an
UDL 24.42 8.65 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~

MAIN! sheet

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:6 17/07/2006 17:01:59

 General notes

Project Spreadshee
tsto BS8110
Location Level2,Beamon line6 ANALYSISI R EINF ORC EMENT DESIG N SPAN1 Span = 7.500 m BS8110
SUBFRAMEANALYSISto BS8110 :20 0 5 To p Steel Ref
OriginatedfromRC C21.xlsv3.0onCD ©2006TCC
LE F T SP A N R I G HT 0. 2 5 L
Total Design M kNm 92.8 319.9 328.5 58.8
ANALYSIS
M in l o ad 1.0 xde adlo ad ßb 1.000 1.077 0.800 1.000 3.4.4.3
Live l o ad 0.4 xd eadl oad+ 1.6 xi mposedl oad (Table 2.1)
Be mm 625 2175 Fig3.13
D is tr ib u tio n Facto r s Mt max kNm 176.6 614.5 3.7.4.2
1 S U PT 2 S U PT 3 S U PT
U pc o l L oc o l R L U pc o l L oc o l R L U pc o l Loco l R MIDDLE STRIP
A w 225000 225000 225000 225000 225 000
A f 147000 147000 252000 252000 25 2000
b mm 3425 1875 1875 1875 Fig3.12
X b ar 211.088 71 211.08 871 181.132075 18 1.132075 181.13
M kNm 1.8 144.0 82.1 20.6 Table3.18
I 1.6E+09 1.6E+09 1.1527E+10 1.1 527E+10 1.6E+09 675000000 1.324E+10 1.324E+10 0 1.6E+09 1E+1 0
S t if f n es s 5423728 8 1 3 8 7096774 16466798 68 16466798 68 400000000 163306452 110 3349057 1103349057 0 38 7096774 1E+ 09
Sum 2576149523 3.E+09 3.E+09
Bar dia mm 12 20 16 12
Fact o r 0.2105 0.1503 0.6392 0.4970 0.1207 0.0 493 0.3330 0.4254 0.0000 0.1492 0.4254 d mm 219.0 215.0 217.0 219.0
4 S U PT 5 S U PT 6 S U PT
L U pc o l L oc o l R L U pc o l L oc o l R L U pc o l Lo
co l R K' 0.156 0.156 0.132 0.156 3.4.4.4
A w 225000 225000 225000 0 0 0
A f 252000 126000 126000 0 0 0 K 0.0003 0.0415 0.0233 0.0057 3.4.4.4
X b ar 18 1.132075 219.230769 219.230769 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
I 1.324E+10 0 0 1.1075 E+10 1. 1075 E+10 1. 6E+09 675000000 # DIV/0! #DIV/0! 0 0 #DIV/0!
z mm 208.1 204.3 206.2 208.1 3.4.4.4
S t if f n es s 1103349057 0 0 18 458 6538 5 18 458 653 85 300000000 163306452 0 0 0 0 0
As mm²/m 6 865 489 121 3.4.4.4
S u3.E+09
m 2.E+ 09 0.E+00
Fact o r 0.3741 0.0000 0.0 000 0.6259 0.7994 0.1299 0.0707 0.0000 1.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 As enhancementdeflectioncontrol 47.52% 0.00%
S U PT 7
L U pc o l L oc o l As final mm²/m 325 1276 489 325 3.12.5.3
A w 0 Par tial UD Lfacto r s
A f 0 123 4 5 6
S mm 325 225 400 325
X b ar #DIV/0! a 0 0 0.2 0 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! ? Clause
b No Yes No No 3.12.11.2.7
I #DIV/0! 0 0 b 0 0 0.225 0 #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
S t if f n es s 0 0 0 S max mm 657 ok 378 ok 651 ok 657 ok 3.12.11.2.7
Sum 0.E+00
Fact o r 0.0000 0.0000 0.0 000 As prov mm²/m 348 1396 503 348
Fixe d En d Mo me n ts =% % 0.159 0.649 0.232 0.159
S P1A N S P2A N S P3A N S P4
AN S P5A N S P6A N
lo a d Mi n L R L R L R L R L R L R fs N/mm² 5.7 191.7 405.1 116.2 Eqn8
C an t 788.90 2443.40 1806.84 385.50 0.00 0.00
UDL 131.48 131.48 386.40 386.40 293.04 293.04 52.50 52.50 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Deflection Baseratio2 6 ktens1 .478 kcomp1 .050 Allowed 36.335 > 34.88
PL 1 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 21.33 10.67 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! COLUMN STRIP
PL 2 0.00 0.00 42.53 30.38 0.00 0.00 1.41 4.22 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
p art U D L 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 28.24 8.71 0.00 0.00 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! b mm 625 2175 2175 2175 Fig3.12
FEM 131.48 131.48 428.93 416.78 321.28 301.75 75.24 67.39 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Live l o ad
M kNm 92.8 176.0 246.4 38.2 Table3.18
C an t 805.56 2617.36 1765.87 464.28 0.00 0.00 Bar dia mm 16 20 16 12
UDL 134.26 134.26 39 4.5 6 394 .56 283.30 28 3.30 47. 88 47.88 0.00 0.00 0.00 0. 00
PL 1 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 17.07 8.53 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! d mm 217.0 215.0 217.0 219.0
PL 2 0.00 0.00 85.07 60.76 0.00 0.00 8.66 25.99 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
p art U D L 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 38.40 11.84 0.00 0.00 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! K' 0.156 0.156 0.132 0.156 3.4.4.4
FEM 134.26 134.26 479.63 455.32 321.70 295.14 73.61 82.40 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 K 0.0789 0.0438 0.0601 0.0092 3.4.4.4

Mo mentD istributio n
z mm 195.9 204.0 201.4 208.1 3.4.4.4
H iC o l S U P1T Lo C o l H iC o l S U P2T Lo C o l H iC o l S U P3T Lo C o l Hi C o l As mm²/m 1743 912 1294 194 3.4.4.4
M in l o ad -131.48 131.48 -428.93 416.78 -321.28
27.68 84.04 19.76 35.91 147.83 99.05 14.66 0.00 -40.63 -40.63 -14.25 0. 00 As enhancementdeflectioncontrol 54.36% 0.00%
73.91 42.02 -20.31 49.53 -42.37 As final mm²/m 1743 1408 1294 325 3.12.5.3
-15.56 -47.25 -11.11 -2.62 -10.79 -7.23 -1.07 -3.04 -3.04 -1.07
-5.39 -23.62 -1.52 -3.61 8.84 S mm 100 200 100 325
1.14 3.45 0.81 3.04 12.50 8.37 1.24 -2.22 -2.22 -0.78
6.25 1.72 -1.11 4.19 -5.01 ?Clause
b Yes Yes Yes No 3.12.11.2.7
-1.32 -3.99 -0.94 -0.07 -0.30 -0.20 -0.03 0.35 0.35 0.12
-0.15 -2.00 0.18 -0.10 1.31
S max mm 175 ok 358 ok 189 ok 657 ok 3.12.11.2.7
0.03 0.10 0.02 0.22 0.90 0.61 0.09 -0.52 -0.52 -0.18 As prov mm²/m 2011 1571 1508 348
0.45 0.05 -0.26 0.30 -0.66
-0.10 -0.29 -0.07 0.03 0.10 0.07 0.01 0.15 0.15 0.05 =% % 0.927 0.731 0.695 0.159
0.05 -0.14 0.08 0.03 0.21
-0.01 -0.03 -0.01 0.01 0.03 0.02 0.00 -0.11 -0.11 -0.04 fs N/mm² 289.0 179.7 357.5 186.0 Eqn8
Sum 11.87 -20.34 8.47 36.50 299.79 -3 51.20 14 .90 421.11 -404.97 -16.14
Deflection Baseratio2 6 ktens1 .485 kcomp1 .050 Allowed 36.489 > 34.88

ANALYSIS! sheet BAR! sheet

This sheet shows calculations carried out using moment This sheet shows the design of the distribution concrete section in
distribution. detail and gives references to the appropriate clause numbers in
BS 8110. The designs for Spans 2,3 etc follow on.

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8 110 The Concrete Centre
Location Level 2, Beam on line 6 GRAPH DATA I
Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page SUBFRAMEANALYSIStoBS8110:2005
Originatedfrom RCC21.xlsv3.0 onCD ©2006 TCC
Location 3 rdF l o o rsl a b,f ro m1to5 a r mw A pr - 2 0 0 6 / 47
RIBBED SLABS to BS 8 110:2005 (Analysis & Design) Checked Revision JobNo
Originatedfro m RCC32.xlsv3.0onC D ©2006TCC c hg - R6 8 LOADING DIAGRAM 26
BEAM 0 37
0 0
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT of REINFORCEMENT SUPPORTS 0 0 7 7 19 19 31 31 37 37 37 37
-80.7 76.8 -80.7 78.1 -80.7 0 -26 0 -80.7 104 -26 26
UDL
D 0 0 7 7 7 19 19 19 31 31 31 37 37 37 37 37 37 3
TOP STEEL No T yp e D ia L e n g th U n iW
t t We i ght 0 32.2 32.2 0 32.2 32.2 0 24.4 24.4 0 17.5 17.5 0 0 0 0 0
Support
1 2 H 12 1025 0.888 1.8 U L DL 32.2 44.7 44.7 32.2 44.7 44.7 32.2 33.1 33.1 24.4 23.1 23.1 17.5 0 0 0 0
5 H 8 1025 0.395 2.0 PUDL
D 0 0 0 0 7 7 7 7 20.52 0.52 2.92 2.9 31 31 3
Span
1 1 H 16 2225 1.578 3.5 44.7 44.7 44.7 44.7 44.7 44.7 44.7 44.7 33.1 40.6 40.6 33.1 23.1 23.1 2
LPUDL 44.7 44.7 44.7 44.7 44.7 44.7 44.7 44.7 33.1 37.6 37.6 33.1 23.1 23.1 2
Support
2 2 H 20 2250 2.466 11.1 1 PL 0 0 7 7 19 19 333 3 373 7 373 7
4 H 8 2250 0.395 3.6 44.7 44.7 44.7 44.7 33.1 33.1 23.1 47.1 0 0 0 0
Span
2 4 H 12 4425 0.888 15.7 44.7 44.7 44.7 44.7 33.1 33.1 47.1 53.1 0 0 0 0
2PL 0 0 12 12 19 19 35.53 5.5 37 37 37 37
Support
3 2 H 20 3625 2.466 17.9 44.7 44.7 44.7 69.7 33.1 33.1 23.1 28.1 0 0 0 0
4 H 8 3625 0.395 5.7 44.7 44.7 69.7 94.7 33.1 33.1 28.1 46.1 0 0 0 0
Span
3 3 H 12 4675 0.888 12.5
Support
4 2 H 20 2400 2.466 11.8 MOMENT DIAGRAMS
SPAN 1
4 H 8 2400 0.395 3.8
X 0 0 0.35 0.7 1.05 1.4 1.75 2.1 2.45 2.8 3.15 3.5 3.85 4.2 4.55 4.9 5.25 5
M(e ) all 0 36 -10 -48.1 -78.2 -100 -115 -121 -119 -109 -91.5 -65.8 -32.1 9.57 59.2 117 182 2
M(e ) o dd 0 95.3 32.4 -22.5 -69.4 -108 -139 -162 -177 -184 -183 -175 -158 -133 -100 -59.3 -10.6 4
M(e ) e v e n 0 -39 -45.7 -48.4 -47.2 -42 -32.9 -19.9 -2.93 18 42.9 71.7 104 141 182 226 275 3
B e am 00000000000000000
M(r ) all 0 37.8 -11.9 -53.7 -87.5 -113 -131 -141 -143 -137 -123 -101 -71 -33.1 12.9 66.7 129 19
M(r ) o dd 0 90.5 32.3 -17.9 -60.2 -94.5 -121 -139 -150 -152 -146 -133 -111 -81.9 -44.5 0.96 54.4 11
M(r ) e v e n 0 -40.9 -48.5 -52.1 -51.7 -47.5 -39.2 -27.1 -10.9 9.11 33.1 61.1 93 129 169 212 260 3
70 %max 0 66.7 22.7 -15.7 -33 -29.4 -23.1 -13.9 -2.05 12.6 30 50.2 73.1 98.8 127 158 192 2
70 %min 0 -27.3 -32 -33.9 -54.8 -75.8 -97.5 -114 -124 -129 -128 -122 -110 -93 -70.1 -41.5 -7.41 3
Lo we r b o u n d 0 -40.9 -48.5 -53.7 -87.5 -113 -131 -141 -150 -152 -146 -133 -111 -93 -70.1 -41.5 -7.41
Uppe r b o u n d 0 90.5 32.3 0 0 0 0 0 0 12.6 33.1 61.1 93 129 169 212 260 3
B e am 00000000000000000
BOTTOM STEEL Support
1 1 H 16 1150 1.578 1.8 SPAN 2
Span
1 1 H 20 400 2.466 1.0 Lo cal X 0 0.6 1.2 1.8 2.4 3 3.6 4.2 4.8 5.4 6 6.6 7.2 7.8 8.4 9 9
Support
2 1 H 16 3475 1.578 5.5 X 7 7.6 8.2 8.8 9.4 10 10.6 11.2 11.8 12.4 13 13.6 14.2 14.8 15.4 16 1
M(e ) all 743 501 282 85.9 -86.4 -235 -361 -463 -541 -566 -553 -516 -456 -373 -266 -135 1
Span
2 2 H 25 4750 3.853 36.6 M(e ) o dd 354 245 149 63.5 -10 -71.9 -122 -161 -188 -194 -183 -160 -126 -80.1 -22.7 46.3 1
Support
3 2 H 16 3475 1.578 11.0 M(e ) e v e n 741 491 265 62.2 -117 -273 -406 -515 -600 -632 -626 -597 -543 -467 -367 -244 -9
Span
3 2 H 25 5900 3.853 45.5 B e am 0000000000000000
M(r ) all 557 316 97 -98.1 -270 -418 -543 -644 -722 -747 -733 -695 -635 -550 -443 -312 -1
Support
4 3 H 16 1725 1.578 8.2
M(r ) o dd 442 335 240 156 83.3 22.6 -26.5 -64 -89.9 -94.3 -82 -58.2 -22.7 24.3 82.9 153 2
M(r ) e v e n 557 316 97 -98.1 -270 -418 -543 -644 -722 -747 -733 -695 -635 -550 -443 -312 -1
70 %max 520 351 197 60.1 -7.01 -50.4 -85.6 -113 -132 -136 -128 -112 -88.1 -56.1 -15.9 32.4 8
70 %min 248 172 104 43.6 -82 -191 -284 -360 -420 -443 -438 -418 -380 -327 -257 -171 -6
Lo we r b o u n d 0 0 0 -98.1 -270 -418 -543 -644 -722 -747 -733 -695 -635 -550 -443 -312 -1
Uppe r b o u n d 557 351 240 156 83.3 22.6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 24.3 82.9 153 2
B e am 0000000000000000
SPAN 3

WEIGHT! sheet GRAF! sheet

Calculates the theoretical weight of reinforcement required. Data for graphs used in charts.

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:7 17/07/2006 17:02:10

 Alladvice orinformationfrom theBritish CementAssociationand/orReinforced ConcreteCouncilis intendedfor those
contain variously checks, print boxes and combo-boxes, (see
whowillevalua tethesignific anceandlimit ationsof itscont entsandtakerespo nsibilityforitsuseandapplica tion. No
liability(incl udingthatfor negligence)forany lossresu ltingfromsuchadviceor informationis acceptedby theBCA,
TCCor their subcontractors, suppliersor advisors. Usersshou ld notethatall TCCsoftwareand publicationsare
Help in Excel). Print buttons (buttons with macros assigned to
subjectto revisionfromtime totime and shouldtherefore ensure thattheyare in possessionof thelatestversion.

Thisspreadsheetshould be usedin compliance withthe accompanyingpublication'Spreadsheetsfor concrete designto

them) automatically print out the calculation sheets providing
BS8110andEC2' availablefromTheConcre teCentre , RiversideHous e,4 MeadowsBusines sPark,StationAppr oach,
Blackwater,Camberley,Surrey GU17 9AB. macros that have not been switched off. Combo-boxes allow
Publicrelease version.
This spreadsheet is shareware. It may be dist ribut ed f reely, but may not choices between specified options.
be used f or commercial purposes unt il t he user has regist ered wit h t he
RCC

Da t e
15-Feb-06
V e r s io n
RCC11 v3.1
A ct io n
Differentiationbet weenfl atsl absan dot her slabsonSL ABp age.
Size (kB)
331
To the right hand side of many spreadsheets are intermediate
20-Oct-05 RCC11v3.0 Updated to 2005 versionso fBS8110&BS8666 317
Minorco rrectiont ocel lN12o n"SL AB"(>changedto < ).
calculations, datatofor graphs, etc. the
These ‘workings’they
are may
not
03-Feb-04 RCC11v2 .2 289

considered vital understanding calculation;

21-Jan-03 RCC11v2.1 DETR logo replaced by DTI. 289
11-Oct-02 RCC11v2.0 Version 2 enhancements 304
01-Oct-02 RCC11 v1.7 COLUMN:Mi nor modst oN3 7:U37;C harta tU2r eactivated. 284
22-Jun-01
26-Jan-01
RCC11v1.6
RCC11v1.5
Addition ofinput controls.
Addition ofinput controls.
284
283
nonetheless be viewed and investigated. ‘Workings’ may also be
05-Dec-00

24-Nov-00
RCC11v1.4

RCC11v1.3
SHEAR:K22l aterall inks pacingc orrected.
SHEAR:C19& C20 reformatted,andlateral linkspacingcheck added(C
189

185
contained on supplementary sheets.
Braidwood).
30-May-00 RCC11v1.2 γcrefsetc).
RLawson commentsincorporated( 183

RevisionstoTEE~BEAM. Optionof requiredcompressionrebar added.

08-May-00

03-Aug-99
RCC11v1. 1

RCC11v1.0
Neutralaxis, x allowedbelowflange soffite -IStructE'Greenbook' method 182
followedwhere flangesoutside bwhave z= d-hf/2,and bwacts asbeam.

Firstpublic release.
190
Other sheets
Includesβ versioncomments& chgmodsto COLUMN

These sheets are not necessarily intended for printing out and
NOTES! sheet
Disclaimers, status and revision history of the spreadsheet. may not be understandable without reference to the printed
calculations. For instance, in the case of RCC52.xls Calcs!, the N-
M relationship in a particular column is calculated for increments
of neutral axis depth. Many iterations are required in order to
Upper sheets construct the N-M graph. Therefore there are many calculations
and these are set out in tables. The volume of calculations makes
The calculations are intended to mimic hand-written calculations
it difficult to produce legible print-outs on a limited number of
as far as possible with a little more explanation by way of
sheets.
references to codes and derivation of numbers than would
usually be the case in normal submissions. Sheets intended
for printing out are divided into three sections: calculations, Notes!
operating instructions and workings. The output is intended to be
sufficient to allow detailing, although the designer should always The Notes! sheet shows the disclaimer, status and revision
consider and allow for rationalising reinforcement both within history of each spreadsheet. The disclaimer and status should be
and between elements. Input cells are in blue and are underlined read and understood. The revision history provides a record of
(so they can be recognised in black and white printouts). the spreadsheet being used and may provide a basis for users’
Quality Assurance procedures. The revision/ version and name of
The cells under Operating Instructions to the right hand side the spreadsheet should appear on all print-outs. This example is
contain help and error messages that are intended to help the taken from RCC52.xls Notes!
user with the correct operation of the spreadsheet. They also

Typical Upper sheet

Combo-box
Concurrent software being used (Used for automated choices)

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:8 17/07/2006 17:02:24

 General notes

Example of an ‘other’ sheet

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110
Location Columns at A1, A2 etc
COLUMN CHART FOR SYMMETRICALLY REINFORCED RECTANGULAR COLUMNS BENT ABOUT THE X-X AXIS TO BS 8110:2005

Originated from 'RCC52.xls' v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC

.67fcu/m= 13.40 N/mm² ALL CALCULATIONS DERIVED FROM 0.00 408.42

fy/m= 434.78 N/mm² FIGURE 3.3 AND CLAUSE 3.4.4.1 480.00 480.00
net fy/m= 421.38 N/mm²

32 d'
= Bar d
54iameter mm d= 346 mm Asc = 4825.5 mm²

N=0quadratic a=4 824.000 b=# ####### c= -9.E+07

nmax= 913.2 Interval= 5.497 (24 intervals between N=0 and Nbal)
N=0 (solve for zero N)
n Neutral axis 88.26 93.76 99.25 104.75 110.25 115.74 121.24 126.74 132.23 137.73 143.23 148.72
Fc Conc comp force 425764 452281 478797 505313 531830 558346 584862 611379 637895 664412 690928 717444
c strain Steel comp strain 0.00136 0.00148 0.00160 0.00170 0.00179 0.00187 0.00194 0.00201 0.00207 0.00213 0.00218 0.00223
t strain Steel tens strain 0.01022 0.00942 0.00870 0.00806 0.00748 0.00696 0.00649 0.00606 0.00566 0.00529 0.00496 0.00464
fsc Steel comp stress 258.32 283.43 305.76 325.74 343.73 360.02 374.82 388.34 400.74 412.15 421.38 421.38
fst Steel tens stress 434.8 434.8 434.8 434.8 434.8 434.8 434.8 434.8 434.8 434.8 434.8 434.8
Fsc Steel comp force 623255 683837 737709 785928 829338 868625 904349 936975 966888 994414 1016688 1016688
Fst Steel tens force 1049019 1049019 1049019 1049019 1049019 1049019 1049019 1049019 1049019 1049019 1049019 1049019
z Conc lever arm 306.28 303.81 301.34 298.86 296.39 293.92 291.44 288.97 286.49 284.02 281.55 279.07
N Fc + Fsc - Fst 0.00 87.10 167.49 242.22 312.15 377.95 440.19 499.34 555.76 609.81 658.60 685.11
M MOR 312.39 324.37 335.24 345.15 354.22 362.56 370.26 377.36 383.94 390.04 395.25 397.07
Labels for chart
Ndiff 87.10 80.39 74.73 69.93 65.80 62.24 59.14 56.43 54.04 48.79 26.52 26.52
M
diff 11.98 10.87 9.91 9.08 8.34 7.69 7.11 6.58 6.10 5.20 1.82 1.69
25 Bar diameter
d'= 50.5 mm d= 349.5 mm Asc = 2945.2 mm²

N=0quadratic a=4 824.000 b= 370831.72 c= -5.E+07

nmax= 922.5 Interval= 6.253 (24 intervals between N=0 and Nbal)

Notes! sheet
D
Alladviceor information from the British Cement Associationand/orReinfor ced Concrete Council is intended forthose
who willevalua te the significance andlimitati onsof its contentsand takerespons ibilityfor its use and application. No
liability(inc ludingthat for negligence) for any loss resultingfrom such advice or informationis accepted by the BCA,
TCC or their subcontractors, suppliers or advisors. Users should note that all TCC software and publications are
subject to revision from time to time and should therefore ensure that they are in possession of the latest version.

This spreadsheet should be used in compliance with the accompanyingpublication 'Spreadsheets for concrete design to
BS 8110 andEC2' available from TheConc rete Centre, RiversideHous e, 4 Meadows Business Park, Station Approach,
Blackwater, Camberley, Surrey GU17 9AB.

This spreadsheet is shareware. It may be distributed freely, but may not

Public release version. be used for commercial purposes until the user has registered with the

Date V e r sio n A c tio n Size (kB)

15-Feb-06 RCC11 v3.1 Differentiationb etweenf lat slabs andother slabsonS LABp age. 331
20-Oct-05 RCC11v3.0 Updatedto2005versionsofBS8110&BS8666 317
03-Feb-04 RCC11v2.2 Minor correction to cell N12 on "SLAB" ( > changed to < ). 289
21-Jan-03 RCC11v2.1 DETRlogoreplacedbyDTI. 289
11-Oct-02 RCC11v2.0 Version2enhancements 304
01-Oct-02 RCC11 v1.7 COLUMN: Minor mods to N37:U37; Chart at U2 reactivated. 284
22-Jun-01 RCC11v1.6 Additionofinputcontrols. 284
26-Jan-01 RCC11v1.5 Additionofinputcontrols. 283
05-Dec-00 RCC11v1.4 SHEAR:K22laterallinkspacingcorrected. 189
SHEAR:C19 & C20 reformatted, and lateral link spacing check added (C
24-Nov-00 RCC11v1 .3 185
Braidwood).
30-May-00 RCC11 v1.2 R Lawson comments incorporated ( γc refs etc). 183

Revisions to TEE~BEAM. Option of required compression rebar added.

08-May-00 RCC11v1 .1 Neutral axis, x allowed below flange soffite - IStructE 'Green book' method 182
followed where flanges outside bw have z = d-hf/2, and bw acts as beam.

First public release.

03-Aug-99 RCC11 v1.0 190
Includes β version comments & chg mods to COLUMN

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:9 17/07/2006 17:02:30

 Using the spreadsheets
to the right hand side of the spreadsheets, cells under
Frequently Asked Questions ■
Operating Instructions contain help and error messages.

Macros ■ Queries may be e-mailed to [email protected].

Preference will be given to those who have registered.

When loading the individual spreadsheets, Excel may warn about

the presence of macros. All the macros provided in the files are Support
either to allow automated printing of the ‘calculations’ or to
provide choices by way of combo-boxes. The printing macros E-mailed questions, comments, developments and suggestions
have been assigned to buttons. Turning the macros off may affect are welcomed. Send them to [email protected].
the actual function of the spreadsheets but will certainly make Preference will be given to those who are registered, as detailed
printing of the sheets as configured more difficult and make the above.
choice of options very much more difficult.
Shareware
Fonts
These spreadsheets are offered as shareware. This can be
Unless the appropriate fonts Tekton and Marker (supplied in the considered a ‘try before you buy’ system where you are expected
CD-ROM) have been installed by the user, the appearance on to pay the program owners a registration fee if you find the
screen will be different from that intended. These upright fonts program useful or if the programs are used for commercial
have been used to emulate a designer’s handwriting and to allow use. In general you may pass on copies of shareware programs
adequate information to be shown across the page and in each to colleagues within the UK, although commercial (for a fee)
cell. distribution requires special written permission from the
publisher.
If problems are experienced it is most likely that the fonts on your
computer screen will have defaulted to the closest approximation
of the fonts intended (e.g. the toolbar may say Tekton but a Availability/registration
default font such as Arial will have been used). The spreadsheets
will work but not as intended – ends of words may be missing, The RC Spreadsheets are made available as shareware from The
numbers may not fit cells resulting in a series of hashes, #####. Concrete Centre see www.concretecentre.com/rcsp readsheets.
Column width and cell overlap problems only occur when the However, the spreadsheets may not be used for commercial
correct fonts are not loaded. purposes until the user has purchased and validated a licence.

It is strongly recommended that the Tekton and Marker fonts are Licences may be purchased from The Concrete Bookshop
copied into your computer’s font library. The Freewave fonts may (www.concretebookshop.com, Tel +44 (0)7004-607777) or via
be found in the Fonts folder on the CD-ROM. The Concrete Centre website. Licences may be validated via
www.concretecentre.com/rcspreadsheets. The purchase price
They may be copied in the following manner, either: includes
■ Start/Settings/Control Panel/Fonts/ File/ Add Fonts and when ■ Permission to use the spreadsheets for commercial purposes
asked ‘copy fonts to system directory?’ answer ‘yes’. for at least one year
or
■ A hard copy of this publication, User Guide to RC
■ Through Microsoft Explorer and copying (or dragging) Spreadsheets: v3
the font files into your font library, usually contained in
■ CD-ROM containing RC Spreadsheets: v3, together with
Windows/ Set-up/ Fonts
Admin files, which themselves contain fonts, issue sheets,
user guide files etc.
Help ■ Occasional e-mails to inform them of any revisions
orchanges to the spreadsheets or other relevant information
A printed copy of this User Guide is available from The Concrete ■ Details of how to download updates of the spreadsheets
Bookshop (07004 607777 or www.concretebookshop.com). The
User Guide is also available as an Adobe Acrobat file UserGuid ■ Preferential treatment with regard to support
pdf, (on the CD-ROM). A copy of Adobe Acrobat Reader will be
required to read this file. Further information, updates, FAQs, free trial download versions
of some spreadsheets, latest news and other information on
Help is also available at the following places: the RC-Spreadsheet suite is available on www.concretecentre.
■ Within Excel under Help com/rcspreadsheets

10

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:10 17/07/2006 17:02:37

 General notes

Overseas use software and networks only recognise eight characters for a file
name. In use, users may be requested by the system to allow
The spreadsheets have been developed and maintained for use abbreviated names, e.g. RCC11.xls .
within the UK. The Concrete Centre reserves the right to pass
details of non-UK registrants to any future owner of the non-UK As shorthand, the spreadsheets are generally referred to by their
copyright or overseas distributor of the spreadsheets. number rather than their name in full, i.e. RCC11.xls is used as
shorthand for RCC11 Element Design.xls.

Updates Loading a spreadsheet for the first time

It is intended that The Concrete Centre’s website will include
updated versions of the spreadsheets. Registrants will be provided Under Windows ’98, NT, 2000, 2002 or XP insert the spreadsheet
with information on how to download updates. CD-ROM into the CD drive (drive D: assumed).

A spreadsheet can be loaded using one of the following

Using the spreadsheets for the methods:
■ Your computer may automatically present a view of the files
first time available on the CD-ROM in which case double click the
mouse pointer on the spreadsheet of your choice, e.g.MENU.
xls//. If not already loaded and presuming it is available, Excel
Base versions will boot up and load up with MENU.xls ready for operation.
Excel will most probably warn about macros before loading
Initially, always start from the base versions on the CD-ROM. If in
the spreadsheet fully. In order to proceed, enable macros (see
doubt, go back to the version on the CD-ROM. These safeguards
below).
are to avoid using corrupted or bespoke files. Eventually, familiarity
with the spreadsheets and Quality Assurance procedures may
overtake this basic precaution. Otherwise
■ From ‘My Computer’, double click(//) on My Computer, double
Please note that whilst all spreadsheet cells, apart from input click on D (assumed CD drive) //double click on spreadsheet of
cells, are covered by nominal protection, it is possible to change ones choice //.
the contents
or from of cells. Original
The Concrete versions www.concretecentre.com.
Centre’s website are available on CD-ROM ■ Successively click Start/ Programs/ Microsoft Explorer/ double
click mouse on CD Drive (D)//. Double click the mouse pointer
Also, please note conditions of use and disclaimers associated on the spreadsheet of your choice, e.g.Menu.xls//. If not
with the use of the spreadsheets contained within the sheet already loaded and available, Excel will boot up and load up
titled Notes! and elsewhere in this User guide. with Menu.xls.

Excel ■ Successively click Start/ Programs/ Microsoft Excel. Once

Excel has booted up, click mouse pointer on File in top menu
The spreadsheets are normal Excel files. Excel (© Microsoft bar/ click mouse on Open/ click mouse on the ‘Look in’ box
Corporation) is a standalone package or may be included as part and scroll through to the CD Drive
of the Microsoft Office package on PCs or Macs. The files are ■ Click mouse on the CD Drive (D)//. Double click mouse on the
compatible with Excel 2002, part of Office 2002, and are likely spreadsheet of your choice, e.g. Menu.xls//.
to be compatible with future versions of Excel. Those not familiar
with Excel are directed to the Help functions within Excel and
The design spreadsheets may, if the user wishes, be loaded direct.
relevant literature available at book and computer shops.
In the above instructions replace MENU.xls with the name of the
spreadsheet required. The advantages of using MENU.xls are
Please note that the spreadsheets will not necessarily work with
previous versions of Excel (e.g. ’95, 5.x etc.) or other spreadsheet explained later.
programs. This is due to incompatibility between software and
No installation program per se is included. Under file managers
backward incompatibility between versions. (To check which
such as Microsoft Explorer, the CD-ROM versions of the
version of Excel you are running see sign-on screen, or Help/
spreadsheets can be dragged and dropped into an appropriate
About Microsoft Excel). Those running Excel 2000 are advised
to use the Save As/ .xls function to avoid inordinately large file folder specifiedcan
spreadsheets by be
theloaded
user. Alternatively,
directly fromfrom
the within
CD-ROM Excel, the
– but
sizes.
should users wish to save the modified spreadsheet, it has to be
saved to an alternative drive.
Long file names
The base versions of the spreadsheets are saved with long file
names to aid familiarity with each spreadsheet’s purpose. Some

11

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:11 17/07/2006 17:02:39

 Default font size or cleared by using a blank or hyphen; clearing the cell completely
would produce ‘0’ on subsequent sheets.
Even with the correct fonts installed, the appearance of the sheets
might be different from those intended. This may be due to the
default font size on the user’s computer being different from the
Values in red or red backgrounds
font size 12 used in the development of the spreadsheets. For
During operation, values in red or cells with red backgrounds
instance if the user’s default font size is 10, pages will appear and
flag either incorrect data to be changed or excess data to be
print narrower than intended (as unformatted cells will revert to cleared (manually). Even a space as an entry might generate red
a narrower cell width than intended).
backgrounds.
Please ensure that the default font size is set at 12. (In Excel check If you make a mess of it, start again from the base version of the
Tools/ Options/ General/ Standard font and size). If standard font
spreadsheet on the CD-ROM.
or size is changed it will become effective only after rebooting
Excel. While the spreadsheets were developed using Tekton 12,
many True Type font size 12 (e.g. Arial or preferably Times New #DIV/0! (Divide by zero) errors
Roman 12) may give adequate presentation. If a series of hashes
(#####) still appears, it may be necessary to resize the column In some spreadsheets, #DIV/0! results may arise and be displayed.
width. In sheets intended for printing out, #DIV/0! indicates an error in
or invalid input. In sheets of workings, they have no relevance to
the validity of the sheet or the spreadsheet as a whole.
Screen view
The spreadsheets have been developed assuming that part, if not Please note that in many cases, but not all, a very small value
the whole, of the Operating Instructions column is in view. This has been used rather than zero in order to avoid #DIV/0! (divide
column contains comments, instructions, checks, explanations, by zero) problems in Excel, e.g. [RCC53.xls] Cases!B3:B8 where
etc. and is important for the correct operation of the spreadsheets. =IF(ERROR(G3),0.000001,G3) has been used.
Generally, a screen zoom of 75% has been used as a default size
on the sheets. Occasionally, other zoom sizes have been used in Printing
order to aid comprehension.
The sheets may be printed out in several ways:
Screen resolution ■ Through the automated print buttons in the spreadsheets
(using these print macros will over-write print areas defined
The spreadsheets have been developed in 1024 x 768 resolution, elsewhere)
so that their appearance will be acceptable between SVGA (800 ■ Using the Print icon on Excel’s standard toolbar
x 600) and 1280 x 1024.
■ Using File/ Print within Excel
They will obviously work in VGA (600 x 480), but higher ■ Copying and pasting (special) parts of the spreadsheets to
resolutions are recommended. a word processor or other package. Pasting (special) into a
word processor file as a bitmap produces a wysiwyg image.
■ Pasting as other formats will probably require some
Input pre-copying formatting of the spreadsheet and/ or post-
In the spreadsheets, input data is blue and underlined. New data formatting of receiving cells.
may be input by overwriting default values or by entering values Print areas may be defined by:
in ‘greyed-out’ cells. Entering data in far-left greyed-out cells
may also remove the grey conditional background to other cells, ■ Highlighting area then clicking File/ Print Area/ Set Print Area
which will then require data entry. Some input cells refer back to ■ Clicking View/Page Break Preview and adjusting boundaries
data on previous sheets within a workbook. These are coloured to suit
magenta, but change back to blue if other data is entered.
Print previewing can be achieved using the Print Preview icon on
Do not copy and paste input from one cell to another as this the standard toolbar.
may cause formatting and other errors. Do not use Space,
Enter (the space equals text). If similar input is required in other Print formatting
cells then use ‘= cell reference’ with caution, e.g. ‘= B16’ in the
appropriate input cell.
Different hardware and software are configured in many different
ways. This situation leads to many variations on the actual print
All non-input cells should have nominal protection and the
from individual printers. Best results are likely to be obtained
contents of these cells can only be overwritten if the user has
from Windows printers but even these may not produce printing
taken positive steps to overwrite srcinal contents. In the page
that is identical to that intended. Some manipulation for printing
headers the ‘Made by’ and ‘Checked’ boxes should be completed
with your configuration may be inevitable.

12

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:12 17/07/2006 17:02:41

 General notes

AutoComplete be used as record copies to help identify changes. Users’ Quality

Assurance procedures may dictate the use of more sophisticated
Excel’s facility for AutoCompleting cells (e.g. entering ‘T’ might protection measures.
autoComplete to ‘Type’) can be a mixed blessing. In most
spreadsheets it should be turned off via Tools/ Options / Edit and Development
clearing the Enable AutoComplete for cell values box.
The nominal protection within the spreadsheets may be over-
ridden to allow customisation and individual development.
Continued use Any development of the spreadsheets should be undertaken
by experienced staff who have a good understanding of the
problems and pitfalls of both design and spreadsheets. It may
Conditions of use: disclaimers take an experienced engineer four or five times longer to prepare
a spreadsheet than it would to produce the equivalent manual
A fundamental condition of use that the user accepts responsibility
calculation. Robust, commercially acceptable spreadsheets may
for the input and output of the computer and how it is used.
take 50 times as long. They can take even longer to test, check
Whilst the spreadsheets have been checked with all reasonable and correct. Only repetition of use makes the investment of time
care and diligence, they cannot be guaranteed for every worthwhile.
eventuality.
With relatively open files, designers are at liberty to alter the
Users must satisfy themselves that the uses to which the spreadsheets as they wish. However, they must satisfy themselves
spreadsheets are put are appropriate. Users must have read, that any alterations are correct and do not interfere with any
understood and accepted the disclaimer contained on the inside other aspect of the spreadsheet in question and conform to any
front cover of this publication (and repeated in the sheet named Quality Assurance procedures.
Notes! in each spreadsheet).
Notwithstanding the above, copyright of the spreadsheet
contents remains with The Concrete Centre. Altered or amended
Nominal protection versions of the spreadsheets may not be sold or hired without
the written permission of the Centre. Please inform The Concrete
Users and managers should be aware that the spreadsheets can Centre of any major discrepancies found or improvements
be changed. Beyond nominal cell and sheet protection, the files
are open and can be changed. made.

There are several reasons for this: Saving files/ file management
■ The files can be customised by users to their own preferred
methods of presentation and design (e.g. deflections might be Many users save spreadsheets to a directory and/ or folder of their
calculated to part 2 of BS 8110; individual firms’ or project choice. This is particularly true where spreadsheets pertaining to a
logos might replace the The Concrete Centre logo). particular project are saved to a folder given the project’s name.
■ The protection should stop inadvertent changes and
corruption of cells. Linking spreadsheets
■ Developments and improvements can be made and fed back
to The Concrete Centre. Such feedback is encouraged and To avoid complications, links between different design
allows a wider consensus to be gained. spreadsheets have not been used. Nonetheless, for the
■ Protection can always be overcome by determined users. experienced user, linking provides a powerful tool. The results
of one spreadsheet can be linked through to become the input
■ Fully protected files can hide cell contents . for another, or project data can be auto-loaded. This minimises
■ Spreadsheet emulators are at present unsuitable for this the amount of input required and at the same time reduces the
application. scope for error in data transfers. For example, the results of a
■ Different designers want different facilities available to them beam analysis can be carried through to beam design. Any links
and should not be restricted. created by the user are at his or her discretion.

The spreadsheets are all protected but with no password, in other

words users have
any formulae, to must
and do something
thereforepositive if they are to for
take responsibility change
any Assumptions made
deliberate or accidental changes. The project’s Advisory Group During the course of development of these spreadsheets, a
held this to be a sensible position. number of structural and computing assumptions have been
made. These are discussed below.
Users and managers must address change control and versions
for use. The Concrete Centre can only control the base versions
issued on CD-ROM (and web page). The published examples can

13

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:13 17/07/2006 17:02:43

 As enhancement Reinforcement densities
Several of the BS8110 spreadsheets contain automatic routines Some spreadsheets give an indication of weight of reinforcement
that increase As in order to reduce service stress f s and therefore in the margin under ‘ Operating Instructions’. These densities
increase modification factors in order to satisfy deflection checks. should be used with great caution. Many factors can affect actual
The ‘As enhancement’ values are the percentages by which A s reinforcement quantities on specific projects. These include
required for bending are increased in order to satisfy deflection different methods of analysis, non-rectangular layouts, large
criteria. holes, actual covers used, detailing preferences (curtailment, laps
and wastage), and the unforeseen complications that inevitably
occur. As may be examined in the sheets entitled ‘Weight’,
Redistribution the densities given relate to simple rectangular layouts and
the author’s interpretation of BS 8110. They make no specific
Those spreadsheets with analysis allow redistribution in allowance for wastage.
accordance with BS 8110: Part 1, Clause 3.2.2.1 or Eurocode 2
Clause 5.5. The user may choose between three options. These The densities assume that the areas or volumes of slabs are
options do not affect redistribution at supports but do determine measured gross, e.g. slabs are measured through beams. Beam
how span moments are calculated, as shown in Table 1. reinforcement densities relate to web width multiplied by overall
depth.

Table 1
Redistribution options in spreadsheets with analysis

Spreadsheet Design Design span moments

option support
Support moment from Comments
number moment which span moment is calculated
0 ßbM ßbM Designspanmomentswillprobablybelessthanelasticmoment
(minimum of 70% of elastic moment).

This option may lead to a kinked bending moment diagram as the

70% kicks-in in the spans.

In the case of thin sections such as slabs, consideration of span

deflection and service stress often leads to reinstatement of any
reinforcement theoretically saved.

1 ßbM Minimumofß b
M and Malt/ßb Design span moments might be less than elastic moment but less
likely than with option 0.

Increasing the minimum support moment for the calculation of

span moment from Malt to Malt/ßb is seen as a sensible compromise
between options 0 and 2.

2 ßbM Minimumofß b
M and Malt Design span moments cannot be less than elastic moment.

Most often used but, if, typically, 20% redistribution is specified at

supports, design span moments will increase by about 10% over
elastic span moments.

Again, in thin sections, consideration of deflection and service

stress can limit additional amounts of reinforcement due to
increased span moment.

Where
ßb = (moment after redistribution)/(moment before redistribution)
= 100% - % redistribution requested
M = elastic moment at support, all spans loaded
Malt = maximum elastic Moment at support, alternate spans loaded

14

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:14 17/07/2006 17:02:45

 General notes

Rationalisation of reinforcement Analysis: cantilever deflections and

Although it may appear that many of the spreadsheets give
support rotation
least weight solutions (hence more bars, more work), the
Support rotations are ignored. Support rotation cannot be
amounts of reinforcement derived are actually accurate (and
determined except as part of a rigorous deflection analysis.
not necessarily rationalised). It is intended, therefore, that the
Rotations cannot be easily derived from moment distribution,
amounts of reinforcement derived from the spreadsheet should
be considered as minimal. and in any case,
is assumed gross
that BS section
8110’s slopes are
or Eurocode 2’sof little or no value.l/d
deemed-to-satisfy It
checks are adequate.
The user should specify more rationalised reinforcement layouts
to the detailer. Rationalisation should be done manually – there
If support rotations are expected to be critical additional checks
would seem to be too many variables and personal preferences
should be undertaken.
to enable automatic rationalisation. A detailer can always close
up spacing and/ or reduce bar diameters if desired.

Most often the spreadsheets require bar size as input, rather than
bar spacing. This can lead to unusual, but correct, spacings. Where
bar diameter input is available, it may be worth investigating
larger bars (at larger centres). For instance, in the design of a flat
slab it would probably be preferable to use 4828 larger bars at
greater centres rather than 6840 smaller bars at small centres
(weight is marginally different, 82.5 kg/m 3 c.f. 80.8 kg/m3).
This results in 30% fewer bars compared with 2% extra steel.
Rationalised arrangements with least number of bars (without
breaking the spacing rules) and least number of bar marks are
always preferable. Eventually, it may be possible to automate this
process, but for the time being it is between the program user
(i.e. the designer) and the detailer to decide how to rationalise
bar arrangements. Any estimates of reinforcement must take this
process into account.
Other spreadsheets tend to size bars in such a way that minimum
centres (or clear spacings) are not exceeded.

It is assumed that issues of detail will be considered by the

engineer and detailer. Issues such as radius of bottom bars and
beam bearings, space between bars in narrow beams, spliced
bars at supports of beams, connection details, etc. need to be
considered.

Definitions of imposed and live loads

For the BS8110 spreadsheets, imposed load is taken to be the
characteristic imposed load input by the user. For floors this
might be the minimum imposed floor loads described in BS
6399[19] Part 1 Table 1.

Live load is taken to be that part of the ultimate load that is not
characteristic dead load (i.e. in BS8110 spreadsheets, live load
= n - gk ).

(For the Eurocode 2 spreadsheets no such distinction is needed.

Variable actions should be as described in BS EN 1991-1 [35]. For
permanent actions, γG is intended to be constant across all spans
and therefore not ‘live’.)

15

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:15 17/07/2006 17:02:46

 Menu.xls
This spreadsheet acts as both menu program, allowing the user to Welcome!
load the spreadsheet they want to use, and as a version checker.
It is intended to help the user designing a number of elements at
one session and to help ensure that the most up to date versions
of the spreadsheets are in use. To work properly it must reside in
the same folder as the design spreadsheets themselves.

Depending upon the level of security you have set up on your

version of Excel, you may be asked whether you wish macros to
run; please answer ‘Enable macros’. Once Menu.xls is loaded,
you may also be asked whether you want to update links. If you
wish the current version numbers in your folder to be displayed
answer ‘Update’.

BS8110!
Welcome!
Welcome gives a quick introduction to the spreadsheets by
covering in outline:

Limitations & Assumptions System requirements

■ Disclaimer
■ Licence conditions
■
Instructions for Use
■ Basic Instructions
■ Macros
Eurocode 2!
BS8110!
This sheet shows the spreadsheets available for the design of
elements to BS 8110. Adjacent to the title of each spreadsheet is a
button which may be clicked in order to load that spreadsheet.

Eurocode 2!
Similarly, this sheet highlights the spreadsheets available for the
design of elements to Eurocode 2.

Adjacent to the title of each spreadsheet is a button that may be

clicked in order to load that spreadsheet. Versions!

In due course further spreadsheets will be released and made

available.

Versions!
This sheet shows the version number of each spreadsheet in your
folder.

16

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:16 17/07/2006 17:02:47

 Spreadsheets to BS 8110

Spreadsheets to BS 8110

17

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:17 17/07/2006 17:03:09

 18

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:18 17/07/2006 17:03:09

 RCC11 Element Design.xls

RCC11 Element Design.xls

RCC11.xls includes sheets for designing:
TEE~BEAM!
■ Solid slabs,
■ Rectangular beams TEE~BEAM! designs T beams and L beams in single simply-
■ T beams (and ribbed slabs) for bending supported span, end span, internal span or cantilever locations.
Again, these choices have a bearing on deflection limitations
■ Beam shear an and the user should choose the appropriate location from the
■ Columns with axial load and bending about one axis combo-box to the right hand side. With respect to the effective
width of the flange, the user may also choose that the section is
RCC11.xls designs elements to BS 8110: Part 1, 1997 including considered as a tee- or inverted L beam.
Amd 3[2]. It is assumed that loads, moments, shears, etc. are
available for input from hand calculations or analysis from A default value for the width of the flange bf is calculated and
elsewhere. A governing criterion can be deflection; span-to- displayed as input. This cell may be overwritten if, for instance,
depth ratios are used as per BS 8110: Part 1, Clause 3.4.6. say the user wishes to allow for openings, etc. The default is
calculated as being:

SLAB! web width + 0.14 span for T beams, internal span

web width + 0.16 span for T beams, end span
This sheet allows for the design of a section of solid slab in a web width + 0.07 span for L beams, internal span
single simply-supported span, in a continuous span, at supports web width + 0.08 span for L beams, end span
or in a cantilever. These choices have a bearing on deflection
limitations and the user should choose the appropriate location In the determination of compression steel, where the neutral
from the combo-box to the right hand side. The user may axis lies below flange, the concrete in web, bw, below flange has
also choose to allow for no or nominal compression steel; this been ignored. This is seen as a valid alternative to the approach
again affects deflection factors. To an extent the spreadsheet in Clause 3.4.4.5.

will automatically
service stresses and increase reinforcement
enhance allowable in depth
span to orderratios.
to lower
The In order to calculate the appropriate deflection factor for
spreadsheet allows a certain amount of theoretical over-stress as compression reinforcement, there is a facility to specify
defined by the user in cell M7. Engineering judgement is required compression reinforcement. When considering deflection, the
to ensure that any over-stress is acceptable and that specified spreadsheet will, where necessary, automatically increase span
reinforcement is sensibly rationalised. reinforcement in order to lower service stresses and enhance
allowable span-to-depth ratios.
Slight variances in reinforcement requirements may be found.
These are due to the spreadsheet allowing marginal over-stress
and allowing centres in increments of 25 mm. SHEAR!
This sheet checks beams or slabs for shear and calculates any
RECT~BEAM! shear reinforcement required. It is hoped that the input is self-
explanatory. Providing the applied load is fundamentally a UDL,
This sheet designs rectangular beams. The location of the beam or where the principal load is located further than 2d from the
may be either in a single simply-supported span, in a continuous face of the support, BS 8110: Clause 3.4.5.10 allows shear to be
span, at supports or in a cantilever. These choices have a checked at d from the face of support.
bearing on deflection limitations and the user should choose
the appropriate location from the combo-box to the right hand Checks for maximum shear (either 5.0 N/mm2 or 0.8fc u 0.5 )
side. are carried out automatically. In beams, the designed links will
be necessary for a distance from the support before reverting to
When considering span reinforcement, the spreadsheet will, nominal link arrangements. A maximum link spacing of 600 mm
where necessary, automatically increase reinforcement in order is used; this is seen as a sensible maximum.
to lower service stresses and enhance allowable span-to-depth
ratios. In checking deflection, the sheet entitled RECT~BEAM! Apart from punching shear, shear in slabs is rarely critical (see
includes two bars of the specified reinforcement diameter to RCC13.xls).
derive a modification factor for compression reinforcement.
The facility to specify additional compression reinforcement to
enhance span-to-depth ratios is contained within TEE~BEAM!

19

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:19 17/07/2006 17:03:10

 COLUMN!
This sheet designs symmetrical rectangular columns where both
axial load, N, and maximum design moment, M x are known
(see BS 8110: Part 1, Clauses 3.8.2, 3 and 4). It iterates x/h to
determine where the neutral axis lies. The sheet includes stress
and strain diagrams to aid comprehension of the final design.

For simplicity, where three or more bars are required in the top
and bottom of the section, it is assumed that a (rotationally)
symmetrical arrangement will be required for the side faces.
This appears to be common practice, for small to medium sized
columns. For more detailed consideration see RCC52.xls. In
particular, see RCC53.xls regarding the issue of side bars.

COLUMN! assumes that the moment entered has already been

adjusted, if necessary, for bi-axial bending.

For many side and all corner columns, there is no other choice
than to design for bi-axial bending, and the method given in
Clause 3.8.4.5 must be adhered to, i.e., RCC53.xls or sheets 2 and
3 of RCC51.xls should be used.

In theory, negative amounts of reinforcement required can be

obtained but these are superseded by requirements for minimum
amounts of reinforcement in columns. No adjustment is made
in the area of concrete occupied by reinforcement. Theoretical
overstressing by up to 2% is considered to be acceptable.

Maximum link centres are given. The routine in the area L61:U81
investigates shear when, in accordance with Clause 3.8.4.6, M/N
> 0.6h. In such cases either a maximum allowable shear is shown
where shear is critical, or input of shear and number of legs in
links allows the links to be designed for the applied shear. Even in
unbraced structures shear is rarely likely to be critical.

Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history

20

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:20 17/07/2006 17:03:11

 RCC11 Element Design.xls

RCC11 Element/ SLABS!

ELEMENT DESIGN to BS 8110:2005

SOLID SLABS
Originated from RCC11.xls v3.1 © 2006 TCC

INPUT Location D&D: interior span solid slab

Design moment, M 216.0 kNm/m fcu N/mm² γc = 1.50
ßb 1.00 fy 500 N/mm² γs = 1.15
span 6500 mm steel class A
Height, h 1000 mm Section location CONTINUOUS SPAN
Bar Ø mm Compression steel NONE
cover 50 mm to these bars (deflection control only)
ONE or TWO WAY SLAB
OU TPUT D&D: interior span s olid slab Compression steel = NONE
d = 1000 - 50 - 20/2 = 940.0 mm .
(3.4.4.4) K' = 0.156 > K = 0.006 ok .
(3.4.4.4) z = 940.0 [0.5 + (0.25 - 0.006 /0.893)]^½ = 933.6 > 0.95d = 893.0 mm
(3.4.4.1) As = 216.00E6 /500 /893.0 x 1.15 = 556 < min As = 1300 mm²/m
PROVIDE H20 @ 225 = 1396 mm²/m .
(Eqn 8) fs = 2/3 x 500 x 556 /1396 /1.00 = 132.8 N/mm²
(Eqn 7) Tens mod factor = 0.55 + (477 - 132.8) /120 /(0.9 + 0.244) = 2.000
(3.4.6.3) Permissible L/d = 26.0 x 2.000 = 52.000
. Actual L/d = 6500 /940.0 = 6.915 ok .
. .

21

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:21 17/07/2006 17:03:12

 RCC11 Element Design/ RECT~BEAMS!

ELEMENT DESIGN to BS 8110:2005

RECTANGULAR BEAMS
Originated from RCC11.xls v3.1 © 2006 TCC

INPUT Location D&D: Main beam 1st Floor @internal support

Design moment, M 282.0 kNm fcu N/mm² c  1.50
ßb 0.70 fy5 00 N/mm² s  1.15
Span 8000 mm steel class A
Height, h 500 mm Compcover 40 mm to main reinforcement
Breadth, b 300 mm Tenscover 48 mm to main reinforcement
Tens Ø mm Sidecover 35 mm to main reinforcement
Comp Ø mm Section location CONTINUOUS SPAN

O UTPUT D&DM
: ainbeam1stFloor@internalsupport .
d = 500 - 48 - 25/2 = 439.5 mm
(3.4.4.4) K' = 0.104 < K = 0.139 compression steel required
(3.4.4.4) z = 439.5(0.5 + (0.25 - 0.104/0.893)^½ ) = 380.7 < 417.5 mm
(3.4.4.4) x = (439.5 - 380.2) /0.45 = 131.9 mm
d' = 40 + 12/2 = 46.0 mm .
(Fig 3.3) Gross fsc = 434.8 N/mm² from strain diagram .
(Fig 3.3) net fsc = 434.8 - 0.67 x 35 /1.5 = 419.1 > 0 N/mm²

Excess M = M - Mu = 282.0(0.139 - 0.104) /0.139 = 70.4 kNm

As' = 70.4E6 /419.1 /(439.5 - 46.0) = 427 mm²
.
(Fig 3.3) fst = 434.8 N/mm² .
As = (70.4E6 /393.5 + 211.6E6 /380.2) /434.8 = 1692 mm² .
PROVIDE 4H25 tension steel = 1963 mm² As enhanced by 14% for deflection
(Eqn 8) fs = 2/3 x 500 x 1,692 /1,963 /0.70 = 410.3 N/mm²
(Table 3.11) Comp mod factor = 1 + 0.343 /(3 + 0.343) = 1.103 < 1.5
(Table 3.10) Tens mod factor = 0.55 + (477 - 410.3) /120 /(0.9 + 4.866) = 0.646 < 2
(3.4.6.3) Permissible L/d = 26.0 x 1.103 x 0.646 = 18.533
(3.4.6.1) Actual L/d = 8000 /439.5 = 18.203 ok .

22

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:22 17/07/2006 17:03:17

 RCC11 Element Design.xls

RCC11 Element Design/ TEE~BEAMS!

ELEMENT DESIGN to BS 8110:2005

SIMPLE TEE & L BEAMS
Originated from RCC11.xls v3.1 © 2006 TCC

INPUT Location D&D: Main beam, 1st Floor 8m span

M 280.0 kNm fcu N/mm² c  1.50
ßb 1.00 fy 500 N/mm² s  1.15
span 8000 mm steel class A
h 500 mm Compcover 48 mm to main reinforcement
bw 300 mm Tenscover 40 mm to main reinforcement
bf 400 mm Sidecover 35 mm to main reinforcement
hf 100 mm Section location INTERIOR SPAN

Tens Ø mm Section shape T BEAM

Topsteel 2n o&Ø .

O UTPUT D&DM
: ainbeam1,sFtloo8
r mspan .
d = 500 - 40 - 32/2 = 444.0 mm
(3.4.4.4) K' = 0.156 > K = 0.089
(3.4.4.4) x = 444 /0.45(0.5 - (0.25 - 0.089 /0.893)^½) = 110.4 mm (within flange)
(3.4.4.4) z = 444 - 0.45 x 110.4 = 394.3 < 421.8 mm
As' = 0 < 226 mm²
(3.4.4.4) As = 280.0E6 / 394.3 /500 x 1.15 = 1633 mm² .
PROVIDE 3H32 bottom = 2413 mm² .
(Eqn 8) fs = 2/3 x 500 x 1,633 /2,413 = 225.6 N/mm²
(Table 3.11) Comp mod factor = 1 + 0.170 /(3 + 0.170) = 1.054 < 1.5
(Table 3.10) Tens mod factor = 0.55 + (477 - 225.6) /120 /(0.9 + 3.551) = 1.021 < 2
(3.4.6.3) Permissible L/d = 24.1 x 1.054 x 1.021 = 25.961
(3.4.6.1) Actual L/d = 8000 /444.0 = 18.018 ok

23

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:23 17/07/2006 17:03:19

 RCC11 Element Design/ SHEAR!

ELEMENT DESIGN to BS 8110:2005

BEAM SHEAR
Originated from RCC11.xls v3.1 © 2006 TCC

INPUT Location D&D: Main beam, 1st Floor 8m span, RH end

fcu = N/mm² c  1.50 d b
fyl= 500 N/mm² s  1.15 540 400
steel class A
MainSteel Link Legs Sidecover Shear V UDL
4 2 35 264.0 97.9
No mm
Ø mm
Ø No mm kN kN/m

OUTPUT D&D: Main beam, 1st Floor 8m span, RH end

As = 1963 N/mm² = 0.909%
(Eqn 3) v = 264.0 x 10³ /400 /540 = 1.222 N/mm²
(Table 3.8) vc = 0.685 N/mm², from table 3.8
(v - vc)bv = 214.9 N/mm

PROVIDEfor2 distance
Provide legs H10 @ 300 mm
of 300 = 227.7 N/mm
then nominal links = 2 legs H10 @ 400

24

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:24 17/07/2006 17:03:22

 RCC11 Element Design.xls

RCC11 Element Design/ COLUMN!

ELEMENT DESIGN to BS 8110:2005

SYMMETRICAL RECT-ANGULAR
COLUMN DESIGN COLUMN DESIGN

Originated from RCC11.xls v3.1 © 2006 TCC

INPUT Location D&D: external column

Axial load, N 1654 kN fcu N/mm²
Moment, M 125.0 kNm fy 500 N/mm²
height, h 300 mm fyv 500 N/mm²
breadth, b 300 mm γm 1.15 steel
Max bar Ø mm γm 1.50 concrete
cover (to link) 30 mm steel class A

CALCULATIONS D&D: external column Link Ø mm

from M As = {M - 0.67fcu.b.dc(h/2 - dc/2)}/[(h/2-d').(fsc+fst).gm] (3.4.4.1)
from N As = (N - 0.67fcu.b.dc/gm) / (fsc - fst) (Figs 2.1, 2.2 & 3.3)
where As = Ast = Asc: dc=min(h,0.9x)
.67fcu/gm= 17.9 N/mm² d'= 54.0 mm
fy/gm= 434.8 N/mm² d= 246.0 mm
from iteration, n.a. depth, x, = 225.9 mm dc = 203.3 mm
0.67.fcu.b.dc/gm = 1089.7 kN
Steel comp strain = 0.00266
Steel tens strain = 0.00031
Steel stress in comp. face, fsc = 435 N/mm² (Comp. stress in reinf.)
Steel stress in tensile face, fst = 62 N/mm² (Tensile stress in reinf.)
fromM, As= 1515m m² fromN, As= 1516 mm²
OK
O UTPUT D&D: external column
As req'd = 1515mm² T&B:- PROVIDE 4H32
(ie 2H32T&B - 1609mm² T&B - 3.6% o/a - @ 192cc.)

Links : - PROVIDE H8 @ 300

.

Strain diagram Stress diagram

0.00350 0 17.9 N/mm²
0.00266
435

Notes
-0.00031 Stresses in N/mm2
-62 Compression +ve
-0.00115 0 - - - Neutral axis

25

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:25 17/07/2006 17:03:26

 RCC12 Bending and Axial Force.xls
This spreadsheet gives an interaction chart for moment
against axial load for rectangular sections with asymmetrical
reinforcement arrangements. Initially intended for beams with
axial load it is also applicable to asymmetrically or symetrically
reinforced columns.

MAIN!
Moments are considered to be about the x-x axis. All applied
loads and moments should be ultimate and positive, as positive
moments induce tension in the bottom reinforcement.

With asymmetrical arrangements of reinforcement the diagram

indicates that negative moments are theoretically possible. After
much consideration, the diagram is considered to be correct but
strictly is valid only for load cases where the member is operating
above 0.1fcu and with at least minimum eccentricity.

These limits are shown on the graph. A reciprocal diagram

is generated automatically when top and bottom steels are
reversed in the input.

Calcs!
Calcs! Shows the derivation of the chart where moment capacity
is calculated at intervals of neutral axis depth from n.a. depth for
N = 0 to n.a. depth for N = Nbal , then in intervals from n.a. depth
for N = Nbal to n.a. depth for N = Nuz. This sheet shows workings
and is not necessarily intended for printing out other than for
checking purposes.

Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.

26

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:26 17/07/2006 17:03:30

 RCC12 Bending and Axial Force.xls

RCC12 Bending and Axial Force/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M adeby Date Page

Location Beam C1-2, Level 3 RMW 11-Apr-06 25
27
BENDING AND AXIAL FORCE to BS 8110:2005
C hecked Revision JobNo
Originated from R v 3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

MATERIALS
fcu 35 N/mm² γs 1.15
fy 500 N/mm² γc 1.50

S ECTION COVER(to
S main steel)
h 450 mm TOP 30 mm
b 300 mm BOTTOM 30 mm
SIDES 30 mm
REINFORCEMENT
B aØr No Ar ea % Sp ac e
TOP 25 2 982 0.727 190.0 .
BOTTOM 32 3 2413 1.787 72.0 .

M:N interaction chart for 450 x 300 section, C35 concrete.

4000

3000

2400
N
k
N 2000
, M min
N
IO
S
S
E
R 1000
P 1000
M
O
C 0.1Acfcu
L
A
I
X 0
A

-1000

-2000
-200 -100 0 100 200 300 400 500
MOMENT, Mxx kNm

LOADCASES (ULS) C AS E N M xx CA S E N M xx
1 2400 100 2 1000 300

27

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:27 17/07/2006 17:03:31

 RCC13 Punching Shear.xls
This spreadsheet designs punching shear links. Essentially it is Reinforcement can be increased both ways to increase vc to
intended to be used with simple rectangular flat slabs to BS 8110 overcome problems with rules regarding v > 2v c (see Clause
i.e. with RCC33.xls. Equally it can be used in conjunction with 3.7.7.5). In the case of edge columns, a factor of 1.25 can be used
RCC81.xls or to check wide beams in, say, troughed slabs. if bending is about an axis parallel to edge and 1.4 if perpendicular
(Clause 3.7.6.3). A worse c ase should be taken.
The spreadsheet is presented as four pairs of sheets dealing with
internal, edge, (external) corner and re-entrant corners.
Int Dets! (Edge Dets!, Corner Dets!
It should be remembered that in slabs these traditional links are
time-consuming to fix on site – proprietary systems are generally and Re-ent Dets! similar)
much quicker to fix on site and this can far outweigh material
costs. These sheets show design calculations, determination of critical
perimeters, enclosed areas and link requirements complete with
references to BS 8110. They are not necessarily intended for
INTERNAL! (Similarly EDGE!, printing out other than for checking purposes. The area load is
deducted from Vt , before V t is enhanced.
CORNER! and REENTRANT!)
These sheets use the relationship Veff /Vt to calculate shear at
These sheets constitute the input and main output. Input is successive perimeters. Deductions for holes in the calculation of
fairly self-evident but, as ever, care must be exercised in ensuring shear perimeters are calculated by finding the angle defined by
correct values are used. The top diagram acts as a legend and the the extremities of the hole.
chart at the bottom of the sheet shows the column, any holes
and link perimeters, and should act both as a check for input and The projection of this angle is deducted from the appropriate
help explain output. The x-x axis is across the page. perimeter.

To the right is a combo-box that allows either:

Notes!
■ Input of both Vt (design shear transferred to column) and
Veff (design effective shear including allowance for moment This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
transfer) is required. These figures should be available from
sub-frame analysis e.g. output from RCC33.xls/ACTIONS!
B55:J62 under Reactions. A value of Veff, computed from
Vt and the factor according to location of the column (see
BS 8110: Part 1, Clause 3.7.6) is suggested under Operating
Instructions: in general this figure may be regarded as a
maximum: calculating effective shear from moment transfer
generally results in lower figures.

or

■ Input of Vt alone. Veff defaults to the values given in BS 8110:

Part 1, Clause 3.7.6

The areas of steel in the two directions should be averages in each

direction, i.e., ensure that it reflects the actual reinforcement
in the sides of the perimeter, an average of column strips and
middle strips as appropriate.

Except when checking column face shear, holes under half the
slab depth or 1/4 column side are ignored as in the second
paragraph of BS 8110: Part 1, Clause 3.7.7.7. Multiple holes should
be aggregated pro-rata as if they were one hole at one position.

The shear at 1.5 d from the face of the column and at the first
perimeter requiring no reinforcement is shown under Results.

28

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:28 17/07/2006 17:03:35

 RCC13 Punching Shear.xls

RCC13 Punching Shear/ INTERNAL!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M adeby Date Page
Location ECBPTypicalFloorColumnB3 rmw 11-Apr-2006 31 29

PUNCHINGSHEARtoBS8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo

INTERNAL
Originated from R v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC COLUMN chg - R68

MATERIALS fcu N/mm

2
40 STATUS Legend
fyv N/mm
2
500 VALID DESIGN
link Ø mm 10
steel class A
DIMENSIONS A mm 300 E mm 150
B mm 500 F mm -50
G mm 125 H mm 100

LOADING Vt kN 2954 0 0 3397.1

ult UDL kN/m2 16.10

SLAB h mm 525 dx mm 484

2
Asx mm /m 5362
2
dy mm 455.5 Asy mm /m 3908
ave d mm 469.75 aveAs % 0.983

RESULTS Veff = 3397.1 kN vc = 0.7349 N/mm2 (Table 3.8)

2
At col. face, v max = 4.899 N/mm At 1.5d perimeter, v = 1.0886 N/mm2
At 3d perimeter, v = 0.5896 N/mm2

PROVIDE LINKS (singleleg) .

Perimeter1 15 H10 @ 240 234fromcolface

Perimeter2 21 H10 @ 295 587fromcolface
Perimeter3 29 H10 @ 300 940fromcolface
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0 Plan
0 0 0

29

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:29 17/07/2006 17:03:36

 RCC13 Punching Shear/ EDGE!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M ade

by Date Page
Location ColumBn2 rm w 11-Apr-2006 3230
PUNCHING SHEAR to BS8110:2005 EDGE C hecked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC13.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC COLUMN chg - R68

MATERIALS fcu N/mm

2
40 STATUS Legend
fyv N/mm
2
500 VALID DESIGN
link Ø mm 8
steel class A
DIMENSIONS A mm 200 E mm -62.5
B mm 200 F mm -275
D mm 50 G mm 150
H mm 125

LOADING Vt kN 223 0 0 1399

2
ult UDL kN/m 14.40

SLAB h mm 250 dx mm 207

2
Asx mm /m 2010
2
dy mm 187 Asy mm /m 1005
ave d mm 197 aveAs % 0.754

RESULTS Veff = 312.2 kN

2
vc = 0.8032 N/mm2
2
(Table 3.8)
At col. face, v max = 1.976 N/mm At 1.5d perimeter, v = 1.0364 N/mm
2
At 2.25d perimeter, v = 0.7813 N/mm

PROVIDE LINKS (singleleg) .

Perimeter1 6 H8 @ 220 98fromcolface

Perimeter2 7 H8 @ 265 246fromcolface
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0 Plan
0 0 0

30

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:30 17/07/2006 17:03:40

 RCC13 Punching Shear.xls

RCC13 Punching Shear/ CORNER!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M ade
by Date Page
Location ColumnsA1D, 1A
, 5&D5 rmw 11-Apr-2006 33 31
PUNCHINGSHEARtoBS8110:2005 CORNER
Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC13.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC COLUMN chg - R68

MATERIALS fcu N/mm 2

40 STATUS Legend
fyv N/mm2 500 VALID DESIGN
link Ø mm 8
steel class A
DIMENSIONS A mm 400 E mm -50
B mm 250 F mm -250
C mm 0 G mm 100
D mm 0 H mm 100

LOADING Vt kN 272.0 0 0 350

ult UDL kN/m2 16.10

SLAB h mm 250 dx mm 215 Asx mm2/m 2010

dy mm 195 Asy mm2/m 2010
ave d mm 205 aveAs % 0.983

RESULTS Veff = 340.0 kN vc = 0.8686 N/mm2 (Table 3.8)

2 2

At hole face, vmax = 2.745 N/mm At4.5d

At 1.5d perimeter,
perimeter, vv =
= 1.6585
0.7741
N/mm2
N/mm

PROVIDE LINKS (singleleg) .

Perimeter1 6 H8 @ 140 102fromcolface

Perimeter2 8 H8 @ 125 256fromcolface
Perimeter3 5 H8 @ 275 410fromcolface
Perimeter4 6 H8 @ 265 564fromcolface
Perimeter5 7 H8 @ 265 717.5fromcolface
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0 Plan
0 0 0

31

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:31 17/07/2006 17:03:44

 RCC13 Punching Shear/ REENTRANT!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M adeby Date Page

Location Aenxample rmw 11-Apr-2006 3432
PUNCHING SHEAR to BS8110:2005 RE-ENTRANT C hecked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC13.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC CORNER chg - R68

MATERIALS fcu N/mm

2
40 STATUS Legend
fyv N/mm
2
500 VALID DESIGN
link Ø mm 10
steel class A
DIMENSIONS A mm 350 E mm -125
B mm 350 F mm -425
C mm 0 G mm 250
D mm 0 H mm 250

LOADING Vt kN 447.0 0 0 591.6

ult UDL kN/m2 14.40

SLAB h mm 250 dx mm 202

2
Asx mm /m 2580
2
dy mm 180 Asy mm /m 2580
ave d mm 191 aveAs % 1.355

RESULTS Veff = 558.8 kN vc = 0.9841 N/mm2 (Table 3.8)

2
At col. face, v max = 2.534 N/mm At 1.5d perimeter, v = 1.1738 N/mm2
At 2.25d perimeter, v = 0.9209 N/mm2

PROVIDE LINKS (singleleg) .

Perimeter1 6 H10 @ 220 95fromcolface

Perimeter2 8 H10 @ 255 239fromcolface
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0 Plan
0 0 0

32

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:32 17/07/2006 17:03:48

 RCC14 Crack Widths.xls

RCC14 Crack Width.xls

acr is the distance from the point considered to the surface of
Crack Width! the nearest longitudinal bar. The input value is defaulted to the
distance at the point on the tension face midway between two
In the design of reinforced concrete structures, it is assumed bars. However other values can be entered to suit other locations,
that the tensile capacity of concrete does not contribute to the
e.g. corner bars. The default value can be reset by pressing the
strength of the structure, and steel reinforcement is provided
blue button on the right hand margin.
to resist the internal tensile forces that develop. Because steel
reinforcement can develop the resisting tensile force only by
extension (i.e. steel needs to extend to develop stress), and Notes!
hence causes cracks to form in the surrounding concrete, cracks
in reinforced concrete structures cannot be avoided. In day-to- This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
day practical design, crack widths are controlled by limiting the
maximum spacings of the tension reinforcement. However there
are times when the engineer will need to carry out more rigorous
analysis and calculations, e.g. in the design of water-retaining
structures, and design for severe exposure where estimation/
prediction of crack width is important.

This spreadsheet calculates crack widths in accordance with BS

8110 and BS 8007.

Crack width limits are set as:

■ BS 8110: Part 1, Clause 3.12.11.2.1 0.3 mm – In ‘normal’

reinforced concrete structures
■ BS 8007 0.2 mm – In water-retaining structures under severe
or very severe exposure
■ BS 8007 0.1 mm – In water-retaining structures with critical
aesthetic appearance

In calculation of crack width, elastic theory with ‘cracked section’

is adopted. Both BS 8110: Part 2 and BS 8007 appendix B gives
the crack width formula.

w = 3a ε
cr m
/{1+2(acr-c)/(h-x)}

In calculating crack width, w, the average strain, εm , at the level

where cracking is being considered allows a stiffening effect, ε2 ,
of concrete between cracks

where ε1 is the theoretical strain at the level considered, calculated

on the assumption of a cracked section using half the concrete
modulus Ec to allow for creep effects.

ε 2 = b(h-x)2/3EsAs(d-x)

BS 8007 allows an additional enhancement factor of 1.5 in

calculating e2 for structures designed with a crack width limit
of 0.1 mm. The spreadsheet provides an option to adopt this
enhanced factor if design crack width is limit to 0.1 mm. To
choose this option, select the blue ‘check box’ on the right hand
margin.

33

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:33 17/07/2006 17:03:52

 RCC14 Crack Widths/ CRACK WIDTHS!

Project
Spreadsheets to BS 8110etc The Concrete Centre
Client
Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location
Glr1iinde RC 11-Apr-2006 33 34
Crack Width Calculations to BS8110: 2005/ BS8007:1987 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC14.xls v 3.0on CD © 2006 TCC ch g - R68

CRACKWIDTHCALCULATIONS-FLEXURE -

INPUT
2
35 N/mm
= 500 N/mm
Area of reinforcement " A " = 2093 mm
= 1000 mm
= 250 mm
= 200 mm
Minimum cover to tension reinforcement " C " = 40 mm
Maxmum bar spacing " S " = 150 mm
Bar dia " D " = 20 mm
" a " =(((S/2)^2+(CO+DIA/2)^2)^(1/2)-DIA/2) as default or enter other value = 8 mm
"acr " is distance from the point considered to the surface of the nearest longitudinal bar
Applied service moment " M "= 69.0 KNm

CALCULATIONS
moduli of elasticity of concrete " E " = (1/2)*(20+0.2*fcu) = 13.5 KN/mm
moduli of elasticity of steel " E " = 200.0 KN/mm
Modular ratio " " = (Es/Ec) = 14.81
" " = As/bd = 0.010
.
depth to neutral axis, "x" = (- α.ρ +((α.ρ) + 2. α.ρ) .d = 85 mm

" Z " = d-(x/3) = 172

Reinforcement stress " f " = Ms/(As*Z) = 192 N/mm
Concrete stress " f " = (fs*As)/(0.5*b*x) = 9.50 N/mm
Strain at soffit of concrete beam/slab " " = (fs/Es)*(h-x)/(d-x) = 0.001375
Strain due to stiffening effect of concrete between cracks " " =
= b.( h-x) /(3.Es.As.(d-x)) for crack widths of 0.2 mm Used

= 1.5 .b.(h-x) /(3.Es.As.(d-x)) for crack widths of 0.1 mm= 0.000189

n/a
Average strain for calculation of crack width " = 0.001186

Calculated crack width, " w " = 3.acr.εm/(1+2.(acr-c)/(h-x))

CALCULATED CRACK WIDTH, 'w' = 0

34

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:34 17/07/2006 17:03:54

 RCC21 Subframe Analysis.xls

RCC21 Subframe Analysis.xls

RCC21 Subframe Analysis.xls analyses sub-frames in accordance The user is required to input desired amounts of redistribution
with BS 8110 using moment distribution. Inputs are required on to the initial moments in line 26. Cell L14 allows three types of
two sheets. distribution according to the user’s preference for calculating span
moments (see Redistribution). Redistribution input is included
close to the bending moment diagrams in order to give the user
MAIN! control rather than relying on blanket redistribution.

This single sheet consists of the main inputs, most of which should The sheet also tabulates elastic and redistributed ultimate shears
be self-explanatory. As in other spreadsheets, avoid pasting input and column moments according to the various load cases.
from one cell to another as this may cause formatting and other
errors.
Analysis!
The dimension of the flange width, bf, is automated to be either
bw + 0.07 x span for L beams or bw + 0.14 x span for T beams. This sheet details the moment distribution analysis carried out
but is not necessarily intended for printing out other than for
Unwanted data cells are ‘greyed-out’. Supports may be specified checking purposes
by giving dimentions and end conditions in cells C21:J27. The use
of C, K, or E in column C can alter the characteristics of a support
from cantilever to knife-edge to encastre. Where supports are Graf!
dimentions the remote ends of supports may be F for fixed in
columns F and J; otherwise they default to pinned. Extraneous This sheet comprises data for graphs used on other sheets,
data is highlighted in red or by messages in red. Under Operating particularly in ACTIONS! It is not necessarily intended for printing
Instructions a number of checks, mainly for missing entries, are out other than for checking purposes
carried out and any problems are highlighted. At the bottom
of the sheet a simplistic but to-scale arrangement and loading
diagram is shown. This is given to aid data checking.
Notes!
It may prove prudent to write down expected values for This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
bending moments at each support down before progressing to
ACTIONS!

Also, under Operating instructions, the user should input the

type of redistribution required as explained more fully under
Redistribution.

■ 0 means full redistribution.

■ 1 limits alternate span upward redistribution to the
percentage specified.
■ 2 means no span moment redistribution.

UDLs are input as line loads e.g. 4kN/m2 for a 5.0 m wide bay
would be input as 20 kN/m. Point loads should be at least
0.001m from supports.

Ultimate and characteristic support reactions are given at the

bottom of the sheet

ACTIONS!
This sheet includes charts showing the elastic bending moment
diagram, redistributed moment envelope, elastic shear forces
and envelope of redistributed shear forces. These diagrams are
based on data from the analysis undertaken in Analysis! at 1/20
span points. Maximum span and support moments are given.
35

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:35 17/07/2006 17:04:04

 RCC21 Subframe Analysis/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M ade
by Date Page
Location L e v e l2 , Be a m on l ine 6 from Bto E RM W 1 1 - A p r - 2 0 06 35
36
SUBFRAME ANALYSIS to BS8110:2005 C hecked Revision JobNo
Originated from R v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

LOCATION Supports from grid B togrid E

SPANS
L( m) H( mm) bw( mm ) hf( mm) Type bf(mm ) LOADING PATTERN
SPAN1 7.000 600 375 150 T 1355 min m ax
SPAN2 12.000 600 375 150 T 2055 DEAD 1 1.4
SPAN3 12.000 600 375 150 T 2055 IMPOSED 0 1.6
SPAN4 6.000 600 375 150 T 1215
SPAN 5 0
SPAN 6 0

SUPPORTS
AB O V E ( m ) H( mm) B( mm) E nd Co nd B E L O W( m ) H (m m ) B( m m ) E n dC on d
Support
1 2.95 400 300 F 3.10 400 300 P
Support
2 3.00 400 300 P 3.10 300 300 P
Support
3 0.00 3.10 400 300 P
Support4 K
Support
5 4.00 400 300 P 3.10 300 300 P
Support 6
Support 7

LOADING UDLs (kN/m) PLs (kN) Position (m)

D ea d I m p o se d P o si t i o n L oa d e d D ea d I mp ose d Posi t i o n L oa ded
Span 1 L oa d L oa d fr oml e ft L e ng t h Span 4 Load L oa d f r o ml ef t L e n g th
UDL 32.20 12.50 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL 17.50 5.60 ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL
1 ~~~~~ PL
1 24 6 2.000 ~~~~~
PL2 ~~~~~ PL
2 5 18 4.500 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
2S p a n 5S p a n
UDL 32.20 12.50 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
1PL ~~~~~ 1PL ~~~~~
2PL 25 25 5.000 ~~~~~ 2PL ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
3S p a n 6S p a n
UDL 24.42 8.65 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
1PL ~~~~~ 1PL ~~~~~
2PL ~~~~~ 2PL ~~~~~
PartUDL 7.5 4.5 1.500 2.400 PartUDL

LOADING DIAGRAM

B E
REACTIONS(kN)
S U PP O R T 1 2 3 4 5
ALLSPANSLOADED 153.5 724.8 778.3 478.4 75.0
ODDSPANSLOADED 177.7 465.9 568.4 415.9 -8.2
EVENSPANSLOADED 27.2 621.0 636.4 271.0 116.7
CharacteristicDead 72.8 354.6 386.7 237.2 30.5
CharacteristicImposed 47.4 142.7 148.1 91.4 46.2

36

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:36 17/07/2006 17:04:06

 RCC21 Subframe Analysis.xls

RCC21 Subframe Analysis/ ACTIONS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Madeby Date Page

Location Level 2, Beam on line 6, from B to E RMW11-Apr-06 37
36
SUBFRAME ANALYSIS to BS8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo

Originated from RCC21.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC

chg - R6 8
BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAMS
(kNm)

1000 1000
800 800
600 600

400 400
200
200
0
0
-200
-200 -400
-400 -600
-600 -800
-800 -1000
0 10 20 30 40 0 10 20 30 40

B Elastic Moments E B Redistributed Envelope E

S UPPONRoT 1 2 3 4 5
ElasticM 95.3 743.3 868.6 427.6 34.3 ~ kNm
RedistributedM 90.5 557.5 694.9 406.2 32.6 ~ kNm
ßb 0.950 0.750 0.800 0.950 0.950 ~ ~
Redistribution 5 .0% 25.0% 20.0% 5.0% 5.0%

S PNAoN 1 2 3 4
ElasticM 185.0 633.1 400.1 121.4 ~ ~ Based on support
RedistributedM 152.1 746.8 373.5 118.8 ~ ~ moments of
ßb 0.822 1.180 0.934 0.979 ~ ~ min(ßbM, Malt/ßb)
SHEAR FORCE DIAGRAMS (kN)

500 500
400 400
300 300
200 200
100 100
0 0
-100 -100
-200 -200
-300 -300
-400 -400
-500 -500
0 10 20 30 40 0 10 20 30 40

B Elastic Shears E B Redistributed Shears E

N oS PAN 1 2 3
ElasticV 191.0 312.6 435.6 432.2 356.9 282.0
RedistributedV 177.7 302.0 422.8 433.2 345.1 273.7

SNPoAN 4
Elastic
V 203.4 118.4 ~ ~ ~ ~
Redistributed
V 204.7 116.7 ~ ~ ~ ~

COLUMN MOMENTS(kNm) 12345

ALL SPANS Above 21.0 80.7 -4.1
LOADED Below 15.0 32.9 -40.2 -2.2
ODD SPANS Above 55.6 0.7 17.5
LOADED Below 39.7 0.3 51.6 9.5
EVEN SPANS Above -22.7 116.5 -22.2
LOADED Below -16.2 47.6 -108.0 -12.1

37

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:37 17/07/2006 17:04:10

 RCC31 One-way Solid Slabs (A & D).xls
This spreadsheet analyses and designs (A & D: Analysis and With regard to deflection, the area of steel required, As mm2 /
design) up to six spans of one-way solid slabs to BS 8110 using m, shown under heading Design, may have been automatically
continuous beam analysis. There is user input on each of the increased in order to reduce service stress, fs, and increase
first four sheets and choice of reinforcement for each span is modification factors to satisfy deflection criteria. The percentage
implicit. increase, if any, is shown under Deflection. With respect to
cantilevers, neither compression steel enhancement nor
consideration of rotation at supports is included.
MAIN!
Hogging moments at 1/4 span are checked and used in the
This single sheet consists of the main inputs, most of which determination of top steel in spans. Careful examination of the
should be self-explanatory. Bending Moment Diagram and Graf! should help to determine
whether any curtailment of this reinforcement is warranted.
The number of spans is altered by entering or deleting data in
cells C16:C21 under L (m). Unwanted data cells are ‘greyed- To avoid undue sensitivity, especially with regard to deflection,
out’. The use of C, K or E can alter the characteristics of the end reinforcement may be over-stressed by up to 2.5%.
supports from cantilever to knife-edge to encastre. Extraneous
data is highlighted in red or by messages in red. Under Operating
Instructions a number of checks are carried out and problems are WEIGHT!
highlighted.
Weight! gives an estimate of the amount of reinforcement
For the purposes of defining load, the section is assumed to be required in one direction of the slab per bay and per cubic metre.
1.00 m wide. At the bottom of the sheet a simplistic loading Bay and support widths are required as input.
diagram is given to aid data checking. Great care should be
taken to ensure this sheet is completed correctly for the case Simplified curtailment rules, as defined in BS 8110 Clause 3.12, are
in hand. It may prove prudent to write down expected values of used to determine lengths of bars. The figures should be treated as
bending
ACTIONS!moments at each support down before progressing to approximate estimates only as they cannot deal with the effects
of designers’ and detailers’ preferences, rationalisation, etc, etc.
They do allow for distribution steel but not for reinforcement in
Support reactions are given at the bottom of the sheet. supporting beams or for mesh.

ACTIONS! Analysis!
This sheet shows bending moment and shear force diagrams This sheet details the moment distribution analysis carried out
from the analysis undertaken in Analysis! The user is required to but is not necessarily intended for printing out other than for
input the desired amount of redistribution to the initial moments checking purposes.
in line 25. Cell J14 allows three types of distribution according to
the user’s preferences. Requesting redistribution at a cantilever
produces a warning message in the remarks column. Bar!
This sheet shows design calculations, complete with references
SPANS! to BS 8110. It is not necessarily intended for printing out other
than for checking purposes. In many instance service stress, fs,
In SPANS! the user is required to choose top, bottom and link has been set to 1.0 or 0.0001 N/mm2 to avoid problems with
reinforcement for each span. The amounts of bending and shear division by zero.
reinforcement required and checks are derived from detailed
calculations in Bar!Unwanted cells are ‘greyed-out’.
Graf!
Unless
support overwritten, reinforcement
carries through both sides diameter specifiedi.e.forthe
of the support, a This sheet comprises data for graphs used on other sheets,
diameter specified for the right hand support of a span carries particularly in ACTIONS! It is not necessarily intended for printing
over to the left hand support of the next span. It may be possible out other than for checking purposes.
to obtain different numbers of bars each side of the support due
to differences in moment either side of the support, differences
in depth or to comply with minimum 50% span steel; practicality
Notes!
should dictate that the maximum number of bars at each support
should be used. This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.

38

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:38 17/07/2006 17:04:12

 RCC31 One-way Solid Slabs (A & D).xls

RCC31 One-way Solid Slabs (A & D)/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M adeby Date Page

Location 8tFhloosrlab from
tAGo rmw 11-Apr-06 39
38
ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 c/w ANALYSIS C hecked Revision JobNo
Originated from R v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC
chg - R68
LOCATION Supportsfromgrid A togrid G

M ATERIALS COVERS
fcu 35 N/mm² hagg 20 mm Topcover 25 mm
fy 500 N/mm² γs 1.15 steel Btm cover 25 mm
fyv 500 N/mm² γc 1.50 concrete
steelclass A
SPANS L (m) H (mm) SUPPORTS
SPAN 1 8.000 350 Su pp or t N o T y pe
SPAN 2 7.200 250 1 K
SPAN 3 7.200 250 LOADING PATTERN 5 K
SPAN 4 4.500 250 min max K(nife), C(antilever) or E(ncastre)
SPAN 5 DEAD 1 1.4
SPAN 6 IMPOSED 1.6

LOADING UDLs (kN/m²) PLs (kN/m) Position (m) LOADING

D e ad Im po s ed P o s i t io n D e ad Im po s ed P o s it i o n
Span 1 Lo a d Lo a d f r o mle f t Span 4 L o ad Lo a d f ro ml e f t
UDL 9.70 5.00 ~~~~ UDL 6.00 1.50 ~~~~
PL 1 35.00 1.000 PL 1
PL 2 PL 2
2 Span 5 Span
UDL 6.00 1.50 ~~~~ UDL ~~~~
PL 1 PL 1
PL 2 PL 2
3 Span 6 Span
UDL 8.50 5.00 UDL ~~~~
PL 1 PL 1
PL 2 PL 2

LOADING DIAGRAM

A G
REACTIONS (kN/m)
SUPPORT1 2 3 4 5
Characteristic Dead 63.80 72.78 49.39 51.45 6.59
Max Imposed 19.00 27.17 22.79 25.77 3.28
Min Imposed -0.72 6.45 5.46 3.07 -3.75
MAX ULTIMATE 120.17 141.99 108.37 110.70 16.35

39

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:39 17/07/2006 17:04:13

 RCC31 One-way Solid Slabs (A & D)/ ACTIONS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Madeby Date Page
Location 8thFloorslab,fromAtoG rmw 11-Apr-06 39
40
ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 c/w ANALYSISChecked Revision JobNo

Originated from RCC31.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC

chg - R68
BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAMS (kNm/m)

100 100

50 50

0 0

-50 -50

-100 -100

-150 -150

-200 -200
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25 30

A Elastic Moments G A Redistributed Envelope G

SUPPONRoT1 2 3 4 5
Elastic M 85.0 60.4 71.2 ~ ~
Redistributed M 72.2 60.4 64.1 ~ ~
ßb 1.000 0.850 1.000 0.900 1.000 ~ ~
Redistribution 15.0% 10.0%

SNPoAElastic
N M 1 168.7 2 19.6 3 69.3 4 13.5 ~ ~
Redistributed M 166.4 15.6 72.1 12.4 ~ ~
ßb 0.986 0.798 1.040 0.917 ~ ~

SHEAR FORCE DIAGRAMS (kN/m)

150 150

100 100

50 50

0 0

-50 -50

-100 -100

-150 -150
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25 30

A Elastic Shears G A Redistributed Shears G

No SPAN 1 2 3
Elastic V 120.9 103.1 42.3 35.5 70.1 74.4
Redistributed V 120.2 101.5 43.6 37.2 71.1 73.6

SPANNo 4
Elastic V 40.1 17.1 ~ ~ ~ ~
Redistributed V 38.5 16.4 ~ ~ ~ ~

40

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:40 17/07/2006 17:04:16

 RCC31 One-way Solid Slabs (A & D).xls

RCC31 One-way Solid Slabs (A & D)/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location 8 tFhl o osrl a bf,r o m
A
tGo rmw 1 1 -Ap r- 0 6 40 41
ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:200 5 c/w ANALYSIS Checked Revision Job
No
Originated from RCC31.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R 68

SPAN 1 LE F T CE N T RE RIG HT
Av mm 1000 7000
ACTIONS M kNm/m 0.0 166.4 72.2
ßb 1.00 0.99 0.85
V kN/m 120.17 101.47
DESIGN d mm 319.0 315.0 317.0
As mm²/m 455 1287 552
As' mm²/m 0 As' 0 As' 0
TOP STEEL H 12 225
@ @0 H 16 @3 5 0
As prov mm²/m 503 0 prov
As 574
BTM STEEL H 12 @
200 H 20 @
17 5 H 16 @
350
As' prov mm²/m 565 As
prov 1795 As'
prov 574
SHEAR v N/mm2 0.377 0.320
vc N/mm2 0.420 0.424
Linksnotrequired
DEFLECTION L/d 25.397 Allowed 26.178 ok (As increased by 32.8%)
& CHECKS % As ok ok ok
d'/x ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok

SPAN 2 LE F T CE N T RE RIG HT
Av 0 7200
ACTIONS M 72.2 15.6 60.4
ßb 0.85 0.80 1.00
V 43.56 37.24
DESIGN d 217.0 219.0 219.0
As 807 325 668
As' 0 top As 412 0
TOP STEEL H 16 @
225 H 10 @
17 5 H 12 @
150
As
prov 894 As'
prov 449 As
prov 754
BTM STEEL H 16 @
60 0 H 12 @
30 0 H 12 @
300
As'
prov 335 As
prov 377 As'
prov 377
SHEAR v 0.201 0.170
vc 0.613 0.576
Linksnotrequired
DEFLECTION L/d 32.877 Allowed 55.325 ok
& CHECKS % As ok ok ok
d'/x ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok

41

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:41 17/07/2006 17:04:19

 RCC31 One-way Solid Slabs (A & D)/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location 8 tFhl o osrl a bf,r o m
tAGo r mw Ap r-2006 41 42
ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 c/w ANALYSIS Checked Revision Job
No
Originated from RCC31.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC c hg - R 68

SPAN 3 LE F T CE NT R E RIG HT
Av 0 7200
ACTIONS M 60.4 72.1 64.1
ßb 1.00 1.04 0.90
V 71.13 73.63
DESIGN d 219.0 219.0 219.0
As 668 797 709
As' 0 As' 0 As' 0
TOP STEEL H 12 @
150 10 @
0 H 12 @
15 0
prov
As 754 0 prov
As 754
BTM STEEL H 12 @
200 H 12 @
100 H 10 @
200
As'
prov 565 As
prov 1131 As'
prov 393
SHEAR v 0.325 0.336
vc 0.576 0.576
Linksnotrequired
DEFLECTION L/d 32.877 Allowed 36.934 ok (As increased by 18.3%)
& CHECKS % As ok ok ok
d'/x ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok

SPAN 4 LE F T CE NT R E RIG HT
Av 0 4500
ACTIONS M 64.1 12.4 0.0
ßb 0.90 0.92 1.00
V 38.55 16.35
DESIGN d 219.0 220.0 219.0
As 709 325 325
As' 0 top
As 406 As' 0
TOP STEEL H 12 @
150 H 12 @
275 H 12 @
30 0
As
prov 754 As'
prov 411 As
prov 377
BTM STEEL H 10 @
225 H 10 @
225 H 12 @
30 0
As'
prov 349 As
prov 349 As'
prov 377
SHEAR v 0.176 0.075
vc 0.576 0.457
Linksnotrequired
DEFLECTION L/d 20.455 Allowed 55.050 ok
& CHECKS % As ok ok ok
d'/x ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok

42

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:42 17/07/2006 17:04:21

 RCC31R Rigorous One-way Slabs.xls

RCC31R Rigorous One-way Slabs.xls

This spreadsheet allows the estimation of deflections in one-way in hand. It may prove prudent to write down expected values of
solid slabs according to BS 8110 Part 2. The spreadsheet is based bending moments at each support down before progressing to
on RCC31 but has an initial sheet JOBDATA! to allow input of all ACTIONS!
the variables and performance criteria required. The calculation
of deflection is not carried out automatically. The user is required Support reactions are given at the bottom of the sheet.
to press the ‘Calculate deflections’ button in column N of
SPANS! (or elsewhere) when every other aspect of the design has
been completed. Deflections are given as a range in a chart at the ACTIONS!
bottom of ACTIONS! They are shown as a range due to potential
pattern loading. In SPANS! the worst case is compared with the This sheet shows bending moment and shear force diagrams
specified serviceability criteria. from the analysis undertaken in Analysis! The user is required to
input the desired amount of redistribution to the initial moments
It should be noted that the number of assumptions and in line 25. Cell J14 allows three types of distribution according to
uncertainties in the material and design criteria and construction the user’s preferences (see Table 1). Requesting redistribution at a
process mean that deflection calculations carried out in cantilever produces a warning message in the remarks column.
this manner can be notoriously inaccurate (and usually over
conservative) compared with actual measured deflections. For The chart at the bottom of the page shows calculated deflections
instance, a slab’s deflection is very dependent upon whether the at construction of partitions, and ranges for longer term
slab has cracked in bending during construction or not. deflections due to patterns of permanent and imposed loading.
The worst case is taken in subsequent checks and this might be
The calculated deflections might be regarded as being akin to a viewed as being unduly conservative.
95% confidence limit that they will not be exceeded in service.

The spreadsheet analyses and designs up to six spans of one-way SPANS!

solid slabs to BS 8110 using continuous slab analysis. There is user
input on each of the first four sheets and choice of reinforcement In SPANS! the user is required to choose top, bottom and link
for each span is implicit. Input of spans and loads is in MAIN! User reinforcement for each span. The amounts of bending and shear
input is required for bar sizes used in SPANS! reinforcement required and checks are derived from detailed
calculations in Bar!

JOBDATA! Unwanted cells are ‘greyed-out’.

This sheet consists of the main inputs of material, loading, Deflection calculations involve many iterative calculations,
construction and serviceability criteria pertaining to the which may take some time on even the fastest of computers.
calculation of deflection to BS 8110 Part 2. Users are expected to Calculation of deflections is therefore controlled by clicking
use their knowledge of the project and judgement in completing the ‘Calculate Deflections’ button in column N and should be
this sheet. The default values given in this sheet are not unusual. undertaken once all the design is complete. Deflection results will
For creep reference is made to Eurocode 2 Annex B. only appear on this sheet after the ‘Calculate Deflections’ button
has been used and the macro has been allowed to complete its
iterations. They will disappear if relevant data (e.g. span, load) is
MAIN! changed. Should the span fail deflection criteria, the user has the
option to increase bottom steel at cell M24 etc, and reuse the
This single sheet consists of the main inputs of span and loads, ‘Calculate Deflection’ button.
most of which should be self-explanatory. The number of spans
is altered by entering or deleting data under L (m). Unwanted Unless overwritten, reinforcement diameter specified for a
data cells are ‘greyed-out’. The use of C, K or E can alter the support carries through both sides of the support, i.e. the
characteristics of the end supports from cantilever to knife-edge diameter specified for the right hand support of a span carries

to
in encastre.
red. UnderExtraneous
‘Operatingdata is highlighted
Instructions’ in red orofbychecks
a number messages
are over to thedifferent
to obtain left hand supportofofbars
numbers the next
each span. It may
side of be possible
the support due
carried out and problems are highlighted. to differences in moment at the edge of support,differences in
depth or to comply with minimum 50% span steel; practicality
For the purposes of defining load, the section is assumed to be should dictate that the greater number should be used.
1.00 m wide. At the bottom of the sheet a simplistic loading
diagram is given to aid data checking. Great care should be Hogging moments at 1/4 span are checked and used in the
taken to ensure this sheet is completed correctly for the case determination of top steel in spans. Careful examination of the

43

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:43 17/07/2006 17:04:24

 Bending Moment Diagram and Graf! should help to determine
whether any curtailment of this reinforcement is warranted.
Def!
This sheet calculates deflections at 1/20th points for each span
WEIGHT! and for each load condition. For each point and condition it
considers moment - As, As’, d, d’, inertia - I, cracked neutral axis
Weight! gives an estimate of the amount of reinforcement depth - x, cracked inertia – I, uncracked moment capacity – Mcr,
z, final x, concrete stresses – fc, moment of resistance – MOR,
required
Bay and insupport
one direction
widthsofand
the distribution
slab per bay and
steelper cubic metre.
diameters are curvature -1/r, load, slope and curvature to calculate deflection.
required as input. The sheet is rather large and is not necessarily intended for
printing out other than for checking purposes.
Simplified curtailment rules, as defined in BS 8110 Part 1, Clause
3.12, are used to determine lengths of bars. The figures should be
treated as approximate estimates only as they cannot deal with Graf!
the effects of designers’ and detailers’ preferences, rationalisation,
etc. They do not allow for reinforcement in supporting beams or This sheet comprises data for graphs used on other sheets,
for mesh. particularly in ACTIONS! It is not necessarily intended for printing
out other than for checking purposes.

Uls! Notes!
This sheet details the moment distribution analysis carried out
at the ultimate limit state but is not necessarily intended for This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
printing out other than for checking purposes.

Sls!
This sheet details the analysis carried out at the serviceability
limit state at 1/20th points along each span. The results are used
in Def!. This sheet is not necessarily intended for printing out
other than for checking purposes.

Bar!
This sheet shows design calculations, complete with references
to BS 8110. It is not necessarily intended for printing out other
than for checking purposes. In many instances, service stress, fs,
has been set to 1.0 or 0.0001 N/mm2 to avoid problems with
division by zero.

44

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:44 17/07/2006 17:04:25

 RCC31R Rigorous One-way Slabs.xls

RCC31R Rigorous O ne-way Slabs/ JOBDATA!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M adeby Date Page

Location 8tFhloosrlab from

tGo
A rmw 11-Apr-06 45
38
RIGOROUS ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 C hecked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC31R.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC ch g - R 68

LOCATION Supportsfromgrid A togrid G

MATERIALS COVERS
fcu 30 N/mm² hagg 20 mm Top cover 25 mm
fy 500 N/mm² γs 1.15 steel Btm cover 25 mm
fyv 500 N/mm² γc 1.50 concrete Concrete density 24 kN/m³
steelclass A
SERVICEABILITY CRITERIA Maximum permanent ∆ = L / 250 3.3.3 (Pt 2)
Maximum imposed ∆ = L / 500
Max ∆ affecting partitions/walls = L / 350 or 20 mm
Maximum precamber = 50% of permanent ∆
Permanent portion of imposed loading = 25%
Design crack width, Wk= 0.3 mm 2.2.3.4.2
CREEP COEFFICIENTS (to EN 1992-1)
RH 50 % relative humidity fcm = 32 N/mm² Table 3.1
Cement N Type (S, N, R or RS) Ecm= 30.16 kN/mm² & Annex A

AMBIENT TEMPERATURES ºC from 0 to 7 days from 7 to 100 days from 100 days on
20 20 20

LOADING SEQUENCE - Span 1 At 70 years At 70 years At 90 days

Loading At age Et Et Et
Ø0 Ø0 Ø (t,t0)
kN/m² Days kN/mm² kN/mm² kN/mm²
Selfweight 5.40 7 3.44 6.80 3.44 6.80 1.84 10.64
Partitions/walls 1.00 90 2.11 9.68 2.11 9.68 0 30.16
Otherdeadloads 1.50 100 2.07 9.82 2.07 9.82 1.55 11.83
Permanentimposed 0.63 90 2.11 9.68 2.11 9.68
Variable load 1.88 ∞ 0 30.16
Composite 10.40 2.94 7.65 2.41 8.84
Permanent Totalload

45

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:45 17/07/2006 17:04:26

 RCC31R Rigorous One-way Slabs/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M adeby Date Page

Location 8tFhloosrlab from
tGo
A rmw 11-Apr-06 38
46

RIGOROUS ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 C hecked Revision JobNo

Originated from R v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC c hg - R68

SPANS L (m) H (mm) SUPPORTS

SPAN 1 6.000 225 Supp ort N o Type
SPAN 2 6.000 225 1 K
SPAN 3 6.000 225 LOADING PATTERN 4 K
SPAN 4 min max K(nife), C(antilever) or E(ncastre)
SPAN 5 DEAD 1 1.4
SPAN 6 IMPOSED 1.6

LOADING UDLs (kN/m²) PLs (kN/m) Position (m) LOADING

Dead I m p o se d P o si t i o n D ea d I m p ose d P o s it io n
Span 1 L oa d Load f r o ml e f t Span 4 Loa d Loa d f r o ml e f t
UDL 6.90 3.50 ~~~~ UDL ~~~~
PL 1 PL 1
PL 2 PL 2
2 Span 5 Span
UDL UDL
PL 1 6.90 3.50 ~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~
PL 2 PL 2
3 Span 6 Span
UDL 6.90 3.50 UDL ~~~~
PL 1 PL 1
PL 2 PL 2

LOADING DIAGRAM

A G
REACTIONS (kN/m)
SUPPORT 1 2 3 4
Characteristic Dead 16.56 45.54 45.54 16.56
Max Imposed 9.45 23.10 23.10 9.45
Min Imposed -1.05 11.55 11.55 -1.05
MAX ULTIMATE 38.14 99.34 99.34 38.14

46

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:46 17/07/2006 17:04:29

 RCC31R Rigorous One-way Slabs.xls

RCC31R Rigorous One-way Slabs/ ACTIONS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Madeby Date Page
Location 8thFloosrlab,fromAtoG rmw 11-Apr-06 39
47
RIGOROUS ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC31R.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68
BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAMS (kNm/m) Elastic Redistributed
80 80
60 60
40 40
20 20
0 0
-20 -20
-40 -40
-60 -60
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

A G A G
SUPPORT No 1234
Elastic
M 0 .0 54.9 54.9 0.0 ~ ~ ~
Redistributed
M 0.0 46.7 46.7 0.0 ~ ~ ~
ßb 1.000 0.850 0.850 1.000 ~ ~ ~
Redistribution 1 5.0% 15.0%

SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic
M 5 0.2 28.8 50.2 ~ ~ ~
Redistributed
M 47.7 22.8 47.7 ~ ~ ~
ßb 0.950 0.792 0.950 ~ ~ ~

SHEAR FORCE DIAGRAMS (kN/m) Elastic Redistributed

80 60
60 40
40
20 20
0 0
-20 -20
-40
-60 -40
-80 -60
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

A G A G
SPAN No 1 2 3
ElasticV 39.1 54.9 45.8 45.8 54.9 39.1
Redistributed V 38.1 53.6 45.8 45.8 53.6 38.1

SPAN No
Elastic
V ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
Redistributed V ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~

DEFLECTIONS (mm) Precamber not included

10

-10

-20

-30

-40

SPAN No 1 2 3
Before partitions 8.8 0.1 8.8 mm
Permanent 22.4 2.8 22.4 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! mm

47

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:47 17/07/2006 17:04:32

 RCC31R Rigorous One-way Slabs/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location 8tFhl o osrlabf,r o m
A
tGo r mw 1 1 -A p r -0 6 40 48
RIGOROUS ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job
No
Originated from RCC31R.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R6 8

SPAN 1 LEF T C EN TRE R IG H T

Av mm 0 6000
ACTIONS M kNm/m 0.0 47.7 46.7
ßb 1.00 0.95 0.85
V kN/m 38.14 53.56
DESIGN d mm 195.0 194.0 195.0
As mm²/m 293 595 580
As' mm²/m 0 top2
As 93 As' 0
TOP STEEL H 10 @
2 50 H 10 @
2 50 H 10 @
125
As prov mm²/m 314 As'
prov 314 As
prov 628
BTM STEEL H 10 @
2 50 H 12 @
175 H 10 @
2 50
As' prov mm²/m 314 As
prov 646 As'
prov 314
SHEAR v N/mm2 0.196 0.275
vc N/mm2 0.437 0.551
Linksnotrequired
DEFLECTIONS Permanent=1 7.43<24.00 Imposed=1 0.32<12.00 Precamber (mm) = 5
mm Affecting partitions = 13.67 < 17.14 ok Increase btm As by 0%
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
d'/x ok ok ok
Crack width ok 0.00 ok 0.20 ok 0.22

SPAN 2 Av LE0F T C EN TRE R IG H T

6000
ACTIONS M 46.7 22.8 46.7
ßb 0.85 0.79 0.85
V 45.78 45.78
DESIGN d 195.0 194.0 195.0
As 580 293 580
As' 0 topAs 293 0
TOP STEEL H 10 @
125 H 10 @
2 50 H 10 @
125
As
prov 628 As'
prov 314 As
prov 628
BTM STEEL H 10 @
2 50 H 12 @
3 50 H 10 @
2 50
As'
prov 314 As
prov 323 As'
prov 314
SHEAR v 0.235 0.235
vc 0.551 0.551
Linksnotrequired
DEFLECTIONS Permanent=2 .77<24.00 Imposed=7 .93<12.00 Precamber (mm) = 0
mm Affecting partitions = 2.62 < 17.14 ok Increase btm As by 0%
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
d'/x ok ok ok
Crack width ok 0.22 ok 0.15 ok 0.22

48

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:48 17/07/2006 17:04:34

 RCC31R Rigorous One-way Slabs.xls

RCC31R Rigorous One-way Slabs/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location 8tFhlo osrlabf,r o m
tAGo rm w A p r - 2 0 06 41 49
RIGOROUS ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job
No
Originated from RCC31R.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC ch g - R6 8

SPAN 3 LEF T C E N T RE RI G H T
Av 0 6000
ACTIONS M 46.7 47.7 0.0
ßb 0.85 0.95 1.00
V 53.56 38.14
DESIGN d 192.0 194.0 195.0
As 589 595 293
As' 0 top
As 293 As' 0
TOP STEEL H 16 @
3 00 H 10 @
2 50 H 10 @
2 50
As
prov 670 As'
prov 314 As
prov 314
BTM STEEL H 10 @
2 50 H 12 @
1 75 H 10 @
2 50
As'
prov 314 As
prov 646 As'
prov 314
SHEAR v 0.279 0.196
vc 0.568 0.437
Linksnotrequired
DEFLECTIONS Permanent=1 7.42<24.00 Imposed=1 0.33<12.00 Precamber (mm) = 5
mm Affecting partitions = 13.66 < 17.14 ok Increase btm As by 0%
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
d'/x ok ok ok
Crack width ok 0.28 ok 0.20 ok 0.00

SPAN 4 Av LE0F T C E N T RE R0I G H T

ACTIONS M 0.0 0.0 0.0
ßb 1.00 0.00 0.00
V #VALUE! #VALUE!
DESIGN d -30.0 -31.0 -30.0
As 0 427 413
As' 0 top
As 413 As'- 196
TOP STEEL H 10 # D I V / 0! H 10 @
1 75 H 10 @
175
As
prov #DIV/0! As'
prov 449 As
prov 449
BTM STEEL H 10 @
4 50 H 12 @
2 50 H 10 @
4 50
As'
prov 175 As
prov 452 As'
prov 175
SHEAR v #VALUE! #VALUE!
vc #NUM! #VALUE! #NUM!
#VALUE! #VALUE! #VALUE! #VALUE!
DEFLECTIONS Permanent=# DIV/0! Imposed= #DIV/0! Precamber (mm) = 5
mm Affecting partitions = #DIV/0! #DIV/0! Increase btm As by 0%
CHECKS % As # DIV/ 0! 4 %> 4 %>
d'/x ok ok FA I L S
Crack width #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0!

49

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:49 17/07/2006 17:04:37

 RCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A & D).xls
Using continuous beam analysis, this spreadsheet analyses and Practicality should dictate that the greater number of bars are
designs up to six spans of ribbed slab to BS 8110. There is user used for detailing. Hogging moments at 1/4 span positions
input on each of the first three sheets and choice of reinforcement within a span are checked and are used in the determination of
for each span is implicit. top steel in spans.

MAIN! WEIGHT!
This single sheet consists of the main inputs which should be WEIGHT! Gives an estimate of the amount of reinforcement
self-explanatory. The number of spans is altered by entering or required in one direction of the slab per rib and per square metre.
deleting data under L(m). Unwanted data cells are ‘greyed-out’. Simplified curtailment rules, as defined in BS 8110: Part 1, Clause
3.12, are used in the determination of lengths of bars. The figures
The use of C, K or F can alter the characteristics of the end should be treated as approximate estimates only as they cannot
supports from cantilever to knife-edge to fixed. Extraneous data deal with the effects of designers’ and detailers’ preferences,
is highlighted in red or by messages in red. Under Operating rationalisation, etc, etc. They do not allow for reinforcement in
Instructions a number of checks are carried out and any problems supporting beams or for mesh.
are highlighted.

For the purposes of defining load the section under consideration Analysis!
is assumed to be 1.00m wide. It will be seen from Bar! that
moments per metre are converted to moments per rib, and This sheet details the moment distribution analysis carried out.
calculations of reinforcement areas required etc., are based on It is not necessarily intended for printing out, other than for
moments and shear per rib. Great care should be taken to ensure checking purposes.
this sheet is completed correctly for the case in hand. It may
prove prudent to write expected values of bending moments at
each support down before progressing to ACTIONS!
Bar!
Support reactions are given the bottom of the sheet This sheet shows design calculations, complete with references
to BS 8110. It is not necessarily intended for printing out other
than for checking purposes. In spans, service stress, fs, may be
ACTIONS! reduced to satisfy deflection criteria. In many instances, minima
of 1.0 or 0.0001 have been used to avoid problems with division
This sheet shows bending moment and shear force diagrams by zero.
from the analysis undertaken in Analysis! The user is required to
input desired amount of redistribution to the initial moments in
line 26. Cell L14 allows three types of distribution according to Graf!
the user’s preferences. See Redistribution (page XX).
This sheet comprises data for graphs used on other sheets,
particularly in ACTIONS! It is not necessarily intended for printing
SPANS! out other than for checking purposes.

In SPANS! the user is required to choose top, bottom and link

reinforcement for each span. The amounts of bending and shear Notes!
reinforcement required and checks are derived from detailed
calculations in Bar!Unwanted cells are ‘greyed-out’. This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.

The reinforcement diameter specified for a support carries

through both hand

for the right sides support
of the support, i.e. carries
of a span the diameter
over tospecified
the left
hand support of the next span. It should be noted that hogging
moment is checked both at the centre of support (solid section)
and the solid/ rib intersection (ribbed section). As the moments
at the solid/ rib intersection each side of the support may differ,
it may be possible to obtain a design giving different numbers of
bars each side of the support.

50

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:50 17/07/2006 17:04:40

 RCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A & D).xls

RCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A & D)/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The ConcreteCentre

Client Advisory Group M adeby Date Page
Location 3rd Floor slab from 1 to 5a rmw 11-Apr-06 43
51
RIBBED SLABS to BS 8110:2005 (Analysis & Design) C hecked Revision JobNo
Originated from R v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

LOCATION Supports from grid 1 to grid 5a

MATERIALS COVERS (to links, or if no links, to reinf)

fcu 35 N/mm² hagg 20 mm Topcover 20 mm
fy 500 N/mm² γm 1.15 steel Btmcover 20 mm
fyv 500 N/mm² γm 1.50 concrete Sidecover 20 mm
steel class A RIBS
Density 23.6 kN/m³ (Normal weight concrete) slab depth, hf 100 mm
SPANS Solid (mm) Ribwidth 150 mm
L (m) H (mm) Lef t Rig h t Centres 900 mm
SPAN
12 .000 275 450 1100 in1 10 taper
SPAN2 7.000 275 1100 1100 SUPPORTS
SPAN3 7.500 275 1100 450 Su p p o r t N o Ty pe
SPAN4 1 C
SPAN5 4 K
SPAN 6 (nife), C(antilever) or E(ncastre)

LOADING UDLs (kN/m²) PLs (kN/m) Position (m)

Self A d dDe ad Imp o s ed P o sitio n Self A d dD e ad Imp o s ed P ositio n
Span 1 W e i g ht L o ad L o ad f ro mle ft Span 4 W e i g ht L o ad L o ad f ro ml e f t
UDL 5.73 2.50 4.00 ~~~~ UDL ~
~~~~
1 PL 1 PL~
2~~~~
PL 2 PL ~
Span 2 ~ ~ ~ ~ Span 5 ~ ~ ~ ~
UDL 4.19 2.50 4.00 ~~~~ UDL
PL1 ~~~~ 8.50 1.00 1.450 PL1 ~
2~~~~
PL 2 PL ~
Span 3 ~ ~ ~ ~ Span 6 ~ ~ ~ ~
UDL 3.82 2.50 4.00 ~~~~ UDL ~
1~~~~
PL 1 PL~
2~~~~
PL 2 PL~

LOADING PATTERN m in max

DEAD 1 1.4
IMPOSED 0 1.6
LOADING DIAGRAM

1
REACTIONS (kN/m)
5a
SUPPORT 1 2 3 4
Characteristic
Dead 43.0 58.0 18.2 ~ ~ ~
MaxImposed 20.4 34.9 13.3 ~ ~ ~
Min
Imposed 7.3 17.3 -1.6 ~ ~ ~
MAXULTIMATE 94.9 133.0 46.6 ~ ~ ~

51

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:51 17/07/2006 17:04:41

 RCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A & D)/ ACTIONS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Madeby Date Page
Location 3rdFloosrlab,from
t15o a rmw Apr-2006 44 52

RIBBEDSLABStoBS8110:2005(Analysis&Design) Checked Revision JobNo

Originated from RCC32.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R 68
BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAMS (kNm/m)

120 120
100 100
80 80
60 60
40 40
20 20
0 0
-20 -20
-40 -40
-60 -60
-80 -80
-100 -100
0 5 10 15 20 0 5 10 15 20

1 Elastic Moments 5a 1 Redistributed Envelope 5a

S U P P ONRo T 1 2 3 4
Elastic
M 0.0 35.9 97.9 0.0 ~ ~ kNm/m
RedistributedM 0.0 35.9 83.2 0.0 ~ ~ kNm/m
ßb 1.000 1.000 0.850 1.000 ~ ~ ~
Redistribution 0.0% 15.0%

SNPoA N 1 2 3
Elastic
M 0 .00 66.48 75.34 ~ ~ ~
RedistributedM 0.00 62.29 71.04 ~ ~ ~
ßb 1.000 0.937 0.943 #VALUE! #VALUE! #VALUE!
SHEAR FORCE DIAGRAMS (kN/m)

80 80
60 60
40 40
20 20
0 0
-20 -20
-40 -40
-60 -60
-80 -80
0 5 10 15 20 0 5 10 15 20

1 Elastic Shears 5a 1 Redistributed Shears 5a

N oSP A N 1 2 3
ElasticV 0.0 35.9 58.2 66.8 70.3 47.9

RedistributedV 0.0 35.9 59.1 67.1 68.3 46.6

S PNAoN
Elastic
V ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
Redistributed
V~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~

52

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:52 17/07/2006 17:04:44

 RCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A & D).xls

RCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A & D)/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made

by Date Page
Location 3rd Floor slab, from 1 to 5a rm w 1 1 - A p r- 0 6 45
53

RIBBED SLABS to BS 8110:2005 (Analysis & Design) Checked Revision JobNo

Originated from RCC32.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC ch g - R 68

SPAN 1 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS M kNm/m 0.0 0.0 35.9
ßb 1.00 1.00 1.00
DESIGN d mm 243.0 239.0 (x=26.6<hf/0.9) 239.0
As mm² 16 0 327
As' mm² 0 T As 188 As' 0
TOP STEEL 2H 12 /rib 1H 16 /rib H2 20 /rib
H8
5+between H8
4+between
As prov mm² 478 AsTprov 201 Asprov 829
BTM STEEL H1 16 /rib H1 20 /rib H1 16 /rib
As' prov mm² 201 As
prov 314 As'
prov 201
SHEAR V kN/m 0.00 V 35.85
v N/mm² 0.000 v 0.423
vc N/mm² 0.658 Link
Ø 6 vc 0.935
LINKS . 1,@
2H0602 .
DEFLECTION L/d 8.368 Allowed 14.000 ok
& CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Bar Ø & cover ok ok ok
Bar spacing ok ok ok
Dist to link ok ok ok

SPAN 2 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS M kNm/m 35.9 62.3 83.2
ßb 1.00 0.94 0.85
DESIGN d mm 239.0 236.5 (x=26.3<hf/0.9) 239.0
As mm² 327 574 (710mm²fordefln) 759
As' mm² 0 TAs 356 As' 12
TOP STEEL 2H 20 /rib 4H 12 /rib 2H 20 /rib
H8
4+between H8
4+between
As prov mm² 829 AsTprov 452 Asprov 829
BTM STEEL 2H 16 /rib 2H 25 /rib H2 16 /rib
As' prov mm² 402 Asprov 982 As'prov 402
SHEAR V kN/m 59.09 V 67.12
v N/mm² 0.945 v 1.126
vc N/mm² 0.935 Link
Ø 6 vc 0.935
LINKS 2 H6 @ 175 for 175 2 H6 @ 1,200 2 H6 @ 175 for 525
DEFLECTION L/d 29.598 Allowed 36.887 ok (As increased by 23.8%)
& CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Bar Ø & cover ok ok ok
Bar spacing ok ok ok
Dist to link ok ok ok

53

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:53 17/07/2006 17:04:47

 RCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A & D)/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location 3rdFloosrlab,from
t1o5a rmw Apr-2006 /46 54
RIBBED SLABS to BS 8110:2005 (Analysis & Design) Checked Revision JobNo

Originated from RCC32.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC

c hg - R 68

SPAN 3 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS M kNm/m 83.2 @col face 71.0 0.0
ßb 0.85 0.94 1.00
DESIGN d mm 239.0 236.5 (x=26.3<hf/0.9) 239.0
As mm² 759 654 (955mm²fordefln) 0
As' mm² 0 T As 265 As' 0
TOP STEEL 2H 20 /rib 3H 12 /rib 2H 20 /rib
H8
4+between H8
4+between
As prov mm² 829 AsTprov 339 Asprov 829
BTM STEEL 2H 16 /rib 2H 25 / r ib H3 16 /rib
As' prov mm² 402 Asprov 982 As'
prov 603
SHEAR V kN/m 68.30 V 46.55
v N/mm² 1.152 v 0.890
vc N/mm² 0.935 Link
Ø 6 vc 0.935
LINKS 2 H6 @ 175 for 700 2 H6 @ 1,200 .
DEFLECTION L/d 31.712 Allowed 32.266 ok (As increased by 45.9%)
& CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Bar Ø & cover ok ok ok
Bar spacing ok ok ok
Dist to link ok ok ok

54

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:54 17/07/2006 17:04:49

 RCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A & D).xls

RCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A & D)/ WEIGHT!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location 3rdFloosrlab,fromt1o5a rmw Apr-2006 /4 7 55
RIBBED SLABS to BS 8110:2005 (Analysis & Design) Checked Revision JobNo

Originated from RCC32.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC

chg - R68
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT of REINFORCEMENT

TOP STEEL No Ty pe D ia Le ng t h U n iW
t t W eig ht
Support
1 2 H 12 1025 0.888 1.8
5 H 8 1025 0.395 2.0
Span
1 1 H 16 2225 1.578 3.5
Support
2 2 H 20 2250 2.466 11.1
4 H 8 2250 0.395 3.6
Span
2 4 H 12 4425 0.888 15.7
Support
3 2 H 20 3625 2.466 17.9
4 H 8 3625 0.395 5.7
Span
3 3 H 12 4675 0.888 12.5
Support
4 2 H 20 2400 2.466 11.8
4 H 8 2400 0.395 3.8

BOTTOM STEEL Support

1 1 H 16 1150 1.578 1.8
Span
1 1 H 20 400 2.466 1.0
Support
2 1 H 16 3475 1.578 5.5
Span
2 2 H 25 4750 3.853 36.6
Support
3 2 H 16 3475 1.578 11.0
Span
3 2 H 25 5900 3.853 45.5
Support
4 3 H 16 1725 1.578 8.2

LINKS Span
1 1 H 6 800 0.222 0.2
Span
2 9 H 6 800 0.222 1.6
Span
3 9 H 6 800 0.222 1.6

SUMMARY All figures approximate - see User Guide.

Reinforcement density (kg/m²) 1 Total rebar per rib, excluding mesh( kg) 2

55

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:55 17/07/2006 17:04:51

 RCC32R Rigorous Ribbed Slabs.xls
This spreadsheet analyses, designs and estimates deflections in ensure this sheet is completed correctly for the case in hand. It
up to six spans of continuous ribbed slab. Design is to BS 8110 may prove prudent to write down expected values of bending
Parts 1 and 2 and is analysed using continuous beam analysis,. moments at each support before progressing to ACTIONS!
There is user input on each of the first four sheets and choice of
reinforcement for each span is implicit. Combo-boxes to the right under Operating Instructions define
minimum bar sizes to be used (e.g. at supports between ribs) and
The spreadsheet is based on RCC32 and similarly to RCC31R has whether the user wants to use links or not. If links are required
an initial sheet JOBDATA! to allow input of all the variables and these may be either designed or nominal links; the centres of
performance criteria required. The calculation of deflection is nominal links can be changed.
not carried out automatically. The user is required to press the
‘Calculate deflections’ button in column N of SPANS! when every Towards the bottom of the sheet a simplistic loading diagram is
other aspect of the design is complete. Deflections are given as a given to aid data checking. At the bottom of the sheet, support
range in a chart at the bottom of ACTIONS! They are shown as a reactions are given.
range due to potential pattern loading. In SPANS! the worst case
is compared with the specified serviceability criteria.
ACTIONS!
It should be noted that the number of assumptions and
uncertainties in the material and design criteria and construction This sheet shows bending moment and shear force diagrams
process mean that deflection calculations carried out in from the analysis undertaken in Analysis! The user is required to
this manner can be notoriously inaccurate (and usually over input desired amount of redistribution to the initial moments in
conservative) compared to actual measured deflections. For line 21. Cell L14 allows three types of distribution according to
instance, a slab’s deflection is very dependent upon whether the the user’s preferences. See ‘Redistribution’ under ‘Assumptions
slab has cracked in bending during construction or not. made’ in Table 1.

The calculated deflections might be regarded as being akin to The chart at the bottom of the page shows calculated deflections
95% confidence limits. at construction of partitions, and ranges for longer term
deflections due to patterns of permanent and imposed loading.
Deflection calculations involve many iterative calculations, which
JOBDATA! take some time on even the fastest of computers. Calculation of
deflections is therefore controlled by clicking the ‘Calculate
This sheet consists of the main inputs of material, loading, Deflections’ button in column L and elsewhere and should be
construction and serviceability criteria pertaining to the undertaken once all the design is complete. The worst case
calculation of deflection to BS 8110 Part 2. Users are expected to deflection is taken in subsequent checks and this might be viewed
use their knowledge of the project and judgement in completing as being unduly conservative.
this sheet. The default values given in this sheet are not unusual.
For creep reference is made to Eurocode 2 Annex B.
SPANS!
MAIN! In SPANS! the user is required to choose top, bottom and link
reinforcement for each span. The amounts of bending and shear
This single sheet consists of the main inputs which should be reinforcement required and checks are derived from detailed
self-explanatory. The number of spans is altered by entering calculations in Bar! Unwanted cells are ‘greyed-out’.
or deleting data under L (m). Unwanted data cells are ‘greyed-
out’. The use of C, K or F can alter the characteristics of the end The reinforcement diameter specified for a support carries
supports from cantilever to knife-edge to fixed. Extraneous data through both sides of the support, i.e. the diameter specified for
is highlighted in red or by messages in red. Under ‘Operating the right hand support of a span carries over to the left hand
Instructions’ a number of checks are carried out and any problems support of the next span.

are highlighted.
support The to
centrelines data
theunder ‘Solid’
start of define cross-section.
the ribbed the distances from It should be noted that hogging moment is checked both at the
centre of support (solid section) and the solid/ rib intersection
For the purposes of defining load the section under consideration (ribbed section). As the moments at the solid/ rib intersection
is assumed to be 1.00 m wide. It will be seen from Bar! that each side of the support may differ, it may be possible to obtain a
moments per metre are converted to moments per rib, and design giving different numbers of bars each side of the support.
calculations of reinforcement areas required etc., are based Practicality should dictate that the greater number of bars is used
on moments and shear per rib. Great care should be taken to for detailing. Hogging moments at 1/4 span positions within a

56

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:56 17/07/2006 17:04:54

 RCC32R Rigorous Ribbed Slabs.xls

span are checked and are used in the determination of top steel
in spans. For top steel at supports, reinforcement requirements
Graf!
are checked at both the support centreline (solid) and at the start
This sheet comprises data for graphs used on other sheets,
of the ribbed cross-section. Deflection calculations involve many
particularly in ACTIONS! It is not necessarily intended for printing
iterative calculations, and these are controlled by clicking the
out other than for checking purposes.
‘Calculate Deflections’ button in column N. Deflection results will
only appear on the spreadsheet after the ‘Calculate Deflections’ Notes!
button has been
its iterations. Theyused
will and the macro
disappear againbeen allowed
if relevant to (e.g.
data complete
span, This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history as in the Notes!
load) is changed. Should the span fail deflection c riteria, the user sheet in other spreadsheets.
has the option to increase bottom steel at cell M24 etc, and reuse
the ‘Calculate Deflection’ button.

WEIGHT!
WEIGHT! Gives an estimate of the amount of reinforcement
required in one direction of the slab per rib and per square metre.
Simplified curtailment rules, as defined in BS 8110 Part 1, Clause
3.12, are used in the determination of lengths of bars. The figures
should be treated as approximate estimates only as they cannot
deal with the effects of designers’ and detailers’ preferences,
rationalisation, etc. They do not allow for reinforcement in
supporting beams or for mesh.

Uls!
This sheet details the moment distribution analysis carried out
at the ultimate limit state but is not necessarily intended for
printing out other than for checking purposes.

Sls!
This sheet details the analysis carried out at the serviceability
limit state at 1/20th points along each span. The results are used
in Def!. This sheet is not necessarily intended for printing out
other than for checking purposes.

Bar!
This sheet shows design calculations, complete with references
to BS 8110. It is not necessarily intended for printing out other
than for checking purposes. In spans, service stress, fs, may be
reduced to satisfy deflection criteria. In many instances, minima
of 1.0 or 0.0001 have been used to avoid problems with division
by zero.

Def!
This sheet calculates deflections at 1/20th points for each
span and for each load condition. The sheet is large and is not
necessarily intended for printing out other than for checking
purposes.

57

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:57 17/07/2006 17:04:56

 RCC32R Rigorous Ribbed Slabs/ JOBDATA!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M adeby Date Page

Location 3rFdloosrlab frotm
51oa rmw 11-Apr-06 43
58
RIGOROUS RIBBED SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 C hecked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC32R.xls v3.0 on CD © 2005 TCC chg - R68

LOCATION Supportsfromgrid 1 togrid 5a

COVERS (to all steel)
MATERIALS Topcover 20 mm
fcu 35 N/mm² agg
h 20 mm Btm
cover 20 mm
fy 500 N/mm² γs 1.15 steel Sidecover 20 mm
fyv 500 N/mm² γc 1.50 concrete Concretedensity 23.6 kN/m³
steelclass A
SERVICEABILITY CRITERIA Maximum permanent ∆= L/ 250 3.3.3 (Pt 2)
Maximum imposed ∆= L/ 500
Max ∆ af fecting partitions = L / 350 or 20 mm
Maximum precamber = 50% of permanent ∆
Permanent portion of imposed loading = 25%
Design Crack width, W=k 0.3 mm 2.2.3.4.2
CREEP COEFFICIENTS (to EN 1992-1)
RH 50 %relativehumidity f cm= 36 N/mm² Table 3.1
Cement N Type(S,N,RorRS) E cm= 31.37 kN/mm² & Annex A

AMBIENT TEMPERATURES ºC from 0 to 7 days from 7 to 60 days from 60 days on

15 17 20

LOADING SEQUENCE (loads rationalised to kN/m²)

Span1 Span2 Span 3 Span 4 Span5 Span6 At age
kN/m² kN/m² kN/m² kN/m² kN/m² kN/m² Days
Selfweight 3.93 4.19 4.11 4.27 0.00 0.00 7
Partitions 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 28
Otherdeadloads 3.81 3.71 2.50 2.50 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! 60
Permanentimposed 0.79 0.79 0.75 0.75 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! 28
Variableload 2.37 2.36 2.25 2.25 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! ∞
Total 11.89 12.04 10.61 10.77 #DIV/0! #DIV/0!

COMPOSITE E and φ VALUES - Span 1

years
70
At At 70 years days
28
At
Et Et Et
Ø0 Ø0 Ø (t,t0)
kN/mm² kN/mm² kN/mm²
Selfweight 3.60 6.82 3.60 6.82 1.27 13.83
Partitions 2.74 8.40 2.74 8.40 0 31.37
Otherdeadloads 2.32 9.43 2.32 9.43 1.01 15.60
Permanentimposed 2.74 8.40 2.74 8.40 At partition
Variable load 0 31.37 loading
Composite 2.93 7.98 2.35 9.37
Permanent Totalload

58

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:58 17/07/2006 17:04:56

 RCC32R Rigorous Ribbed Slabs.xls

RCC32R Rigorous Ribbed Slabs/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M adeby Date Page
Location 3rd Floor slab, from 1 to 5a rmw Apr-2006 44
59

RIGOROUS RIBBED SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 C hecked Revision JobNo

Originated from R v3.0 on CD © 2005 TCC chg - R 68

RIBS
slab depth, hf 100 mm Centres 900 mm
Rib width 150 mm Side taper of 1 in 10

SPANS Solid (mm) SUPPORTS

L (m) H (mm) Left Right SupporNto Type
SPAN
1 6.500 275 450 1100 1 K
SPAN
2 7.000 275 1100 1100 5 K
SPAN3 7.500 275 1100 1100 (nife), or C(antilever)
SPAN4 6.500 275 1100 1100 LOADING PATTERN
SPAN 5 min max
SPAN6 DEAD 1 1.4
IMPOSED 0 1.6
LOADING UDLs (kN/m²) PLs (kN/m) Position (m)
Self AddDead Imposed Position Self AddDead Imposed Position
Span 1 Weight Load Load fromleft Span 4 Weight Load Load fromleft
UDL 3.93 2.50 4.00 ~~~~ UDL 4.27 2.50 4.00 ~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~ 8.50 1.00 0.450 PL1 ~~~
2PL
~~~~ 2PL ~~~
Span 2 Span 5
UDL 4.19 2.50 4.00 ~~~~ UDL
PL1 ~~~~ 8.50 1.00 1.450 PL1 ~
2~~~~
PL 2 PL ~
3Span 6Span
UDL 4.11 2.50 4.00 ~~~~ UDL ~
1~~~~
PL 1 PL~
2~~~~
PL 2 PL~

LOADING DIAGRAM

1 5a
REACTIONS (kN/m)
SUPPORT 123 45
CharacteristicDead 23.4 57.9 48.6 52.5 16.8 ~ ~
MaxImposed 12.7 31.1 28.4 31.6 11.8 ~ ~
Min
Imposed -1.7 14.0 13.6 14.3 -1.9 ~ ~
MAXULTIMATE 53.6 128.5 116.2 120.7 42.5 ~ ~

59

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:59 17/07/2006 17:05:00

 RCC32R Rigorous Ribbed Slabs/ ACTIONS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Madeby Date Page
Location 3 rdF lo osrla b ,f ro mt1o5 a rm w Ap r-20 06 45 60
RIGOROUSRIBBEDSLABDESIGNtoBS8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC32R.xls v3.0 on CD © 2005 TCC chg - R6 8
BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAMS
(kNm/m) E la s t i c Re d i s t r i b u t e d
100 100
80 80
60 60
40 40
20 20
0 0
-20 -20
-40 -40
-60 -60
-80 -80
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25 30

1 5a 1 5a
S UP PNOoRT 1 2 3 4 5
ElasticM 0.0 80.2 68.1 79.6 0.0 ~ kNm/m
RedistributedM 0.0 72.2 68.1 67.7 0.0 ~ kNm/m
ßb 1.000 0.900 1.000 0.850 1.000 ~ ~
Redistribution 10.0% 0.0% 15.0%

NSoP A N 1 2 3 4
ElasticM 60.47 51.71 53.85 60.16 ~ ~
RedistributedM 58.31 48.59 51.09 56.94 ~ ~
ßb 0.964 0.940 0.949 0.947 #VALUE! #VALUE!

SHEAR FORCE DIAGRAMS(kN/m) E la s t i c Re d i s t r i b u t e d

80 80

60
40 60
40
20 20
0 0
-20 -20
-40 -40
-60 -60
-80 -80
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25 30

1 5a 1 5a
No S P A N 1 2 3
ElasticV 54.4 63.3 68.1 56.2 57.2 60.3
RedistributedV 53.6 62.1 69.0 57.4 58.8 61.0

NSoP A N 4
Elastic
V 63.8 43.7 ~ ~ ~ ~
Redistributed
V 62.0 42.5 ~ ~ ~ ~

DEFLECTIONS(mm) Precamber not included

10

-10

-20

-30

-40

SPAN No
Beforepartitions 11.21234 6.4 9.8 10.7 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! mm
Permanent 24.6 20.8 24.0 24.0 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! mm
Variable 10.0 9.6 11.9 9.7 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! mm

60

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:60 17/07/2006 17:05:02

 RCC32R Rigorous Ribbed Slabs.xls

RCC32R Rigorous Ribbed Slabs/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location 3rd Floor slab, , from 1 to 5a rmw 1 1 -Ap r -06 46
61
RIGOROUS RIBBED SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC32R.xls v3.0 on CD © 2005 TCC
chg - R68

SPAN 1 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS M kNm/m 0.0 58.3 72.2
ßb 1.00 0.96 0.90
DESIGN d mm 243.0 239.0 (x=26.6<hf/0.9) 241.0
As mm² 0 532 653
As' mm² 0 T As 239 As' 0
TOP STEEL 2H 12 /rib 2H 16 /rib H2 16 /rib
H8
5+between H8
5+between
As prov mm² 478 AsTprov 402 Asprov 653
BTM STEEL 2H 16 /rib 2H 20 /rib H2 16 /rib
As' prov mm² 402 Asprov 628 As'prov 402
SHEAR V kN/m 53.61 V 62.10
v N/mm² 0.733 v 1.005
vc N/mm² 0.798 Link
Ø 6 vc 0.801
LINKS . 2H6@1,200 2H6@175fo7r 00
DEFLECTIONS Permanent = 24.65 < 26.00 Imposed= 9.98 < 13.00 Precamber (mm) = 0
mm Affecting partitions = 13.42 < 18.57 ok Increase btm As by 0%
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Bar Ø & cover ok ok ok
Crack width ok 0.00 ok 0.17 ok 0.22
Dist to link ok ok ok

SPAN 2 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS M kNm/m 72.2 48.6 68.1
ßb 0.90 0.94 1.00
DESIGN d mm 241.0 239.0 (x=26.6<hf/0.9) 241.0
As mm² 653 443 616
As' mm² 0 T As 175 As' 0
TOP STEEL 2H 16 /rib 2H 12 /rib H2 16 /rib
H8
5
+ between H10
4
+ between
As prov mm² 653 AsTprov 226 Asprov 716
BTM STEEL 2H 16 /rib 2H 20 /rib H2 16 /rib
As' prov mm² 402 Asprov 628 As'prov 402
SHEAR V kN/m 68.97 V 57.37
v N/mm² 1.158 v 0.899
vc N/mm² 0.801 Link
Ø 6 vc 0.801
LINKS 2 H6 @ 175 for 1050 2 H6 @ 1,200 2 H6 @ 175 for 350
DEFLECTIONS Permanent = 20.84 < 28.00 Imposed= 9.63 < 14.00 Precamber (mm) = 0
mm Affecting partitions = 14.48 < 20.00 ok Increase btm As by 0%
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Bar Ø & cover ok ok ok
Crack width ok 0.22 ok 0.08 ok 0.16
Dist to link ok ok ok

61

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:61 17/07/2006 17:05:05

 RCC32R Rigorous Ribbed Slabs/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location 3rdFloosrlab,fromt1o5a rmw Apr-2006 /47 62
RIGOROUS RIBBED SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC32R.xls v3.0 on CD © 2005 TCC chg - R68

SPAN 3 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS M kNm/m 68.1 @col face 51.1 67.7
ßb 1.00 0.95 0.85
DESIGN d mm 241.0 239.0 (x=26.6<hf/0.9) 241.0
As mm² 616 466 612
As' mm² 0 T As 197 As' 0
TOP STEEL 2H 16 /rib 2H 12 /rib 2H 16 /rib
H10
4+ between H8
5+between
As prov mm² 716 Asprov
T 226 Asprov 653
BTM STEEL 2H 16 /rib 2H 20 /rib H2 16 /rib
As' prov mm² 402 Asprov 628 As'
prov 402
SHEAR V kN/m 58.78 V 60.99
v N/mm² 0.931 v 0.980
vc N/mm² 0.801 Link
Ø 6 vc 0.801
LINKS 2 H6 @ 175 for 350 2 H6 @ 1,200 2 H6 @ 175 for 525
DEFLECTIONS Permanent = 24.01<30.00 Imposed = 11.92 <15.00 Precamber (mm) = 0
mm Affecting partitions = 14.17 < 20.00 ok Increase btm As by 0%
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Bar Ø & cover ok ok ok
Crack width ok 0.16 ok 0.08 ok 0.22
Dist to link ok ok ok

SPAN 4 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS M kNm/m 67.7 56.9 0.0
ßb 0.85 0.95 1.00
DESIGN d mm 241.0 239.0 (x=26.6<hf/0.9) 241.0
As mm² 612 519 0
As' mm² 0 T As 227 As' 0
TOP STEEL 2H 16 /rib 3H 12 /rib 2H 16 /rib
H8
5+between H8
4+between
As prov mm² 653 AsTprov 339 Asprov 603
BTM STEEL 2H 16 /rib 2H 20 /rib H2 16 /rib
As' prov mm² 402 Asprov 628 As'
prov 402
SHEAR V kN/m 62.00 V 42.52
v N/mm² 1.003 v 0.568
vc N/mm² 0.801 Link
Ø 6 vc 0.801
LINKS 2 H6 @ 175 for 525 2 H6 @ 1,200 .
DEFLECTIONS Permanent = 24.03 <26.00 Imposed = 9.72 <13.00 Precamber (mm) = 0
mm Affecting partitions = 13.37 < 18.57 ok Increase btm As by 0%
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Bar Ø & cover ok ok ok
Crack width ok 0.22 ok 0.11 ok 0.00
Dist to link ok ok ok

62

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:62 17/07/2006 17:05:08

 RCC32R Rigorous Ribbed Slabs.xls

RCC32R Rigorous Ribbed Slabs/ WEIGHT!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made

by Date Page
Location 3rdFloorslab,,fromt1o5a rmw Apr-2006 /48 63
RIGOROUS RIBBED SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC32R.xls v3.0 on CD © 2005 TCC
chg - R68
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT of REINFORCEMENT

TOP STEEL No T yp e Dia L en gt h U n iW

tt We i g h t
Support
1 2 H 12 2150 0.888 3.8
5 H 8 2150 0.395 4.2
Span
1 2 H 16 4475 1.578 14.1
Support
2 2 H 16 3375 1.578 10.7
5 H 8 3375 0.395 6.7
Span
2 2 H 12 4425 0.888 7.9
Support
3 2 H 16 3625 1.578 11.4
4 H 10 3625 0.617 8.9
Span
3 2 H 12 4675 0.888 8.3
Support
4 2 H 16 3500 1.578 11.0
5 H 8 3500 0.395 6.9
Span
4 3 H 12 4175 0.888 11.1
Support
5 2 H 16 2800 1.578 8.8
4 H 8 2800 0.395 4.4

BOTTOM STEEL Support

1 2 H 16 1150 1.578 3.6
Span
1 2 H 20 4900 2.466 24.2
Support
2 2 H 16 3475 1.578 11.0
Span
2 2 H 20 4750 2.466 23.4
Support
3 2 H 16 3475 1.578 11.0
Span
3 2 H 20 5250 2.466 25.9
Support
4 2 H 16 3475 1.578 11.0
Span
4 2 H 20 4250 2.466 21.0
Support
5 2 H 16 2375 1.578 7.5

LINKS Span
1 8 H 6 800 0.222 1.4
Span
2 12 H 6 800 0.222 2.1
Span
3 10 H 6 800 0.222 1.8
Span
4 7 H 6 800 0.222 1.2

SUMMARY All figures approximate - see User Guide.

Reinforcement density (kg/m²) 1 Total rebar per rib, excluding mesh( kg) 2

63

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:63 17/07/2006 17:05:11

 RCC33 Flat Slabs (A & D).xls
RCC33.xls analyses and designs bays of simple rectangular flat Load input should define the loads on the slab only. A combo-
slabs to BS 8110: Part 1. The spreadsheet uses sub-frame analysis box is used to switch between the internal and edge bays. If
with pattern loading to calculate a bending moment envelope. EDGE is chosen, cells H14:I14 and E16:G16 become operative
This envelope may be subjected to redistribution. and information about the perimeter load along the edge and
the distance of the edge from the centreline is required as input.
For a complete rectangular flat slab the user is expected to use Perimeter loading is assumed to be dead load.
the spreadsheet at least four times (internal bay(s) x - x, internal
bay(s) y - y, edge bay(s) x - x and edge bay(s) y - y). Punching The spreadsheet also allows lines loads to be input. This facility
shear should be checked using RCC13.xls. might be used with caution to deal with small point loads
being distributed over suitable widths in the two orthogonal
The spreadsheet does not currently allow for holes or drops. If directions.
holes are considered critical then the user is directed towards
using RCC21.xls (sub-frame analysis) and allowing for holes in Cell L51 gives an estimate of reinforcement requirements for
the breadths used. See also Clause 3.7.5. The single load case of the element considered in the direction considered (not both
all spans loaded (Clause 3.5.2.3) is not used. Beyond panel aspect directions).
ratios of 1.5 consideration might be given to the appropriateness
of using other forms of analysis (e.g. grillage or finite element). It will be noted that the example assumes the reinforcement is
in the second layer; therefore warnings concerning cover greater
than 40 mm should not be of too much concern.
MAIN!
The spreadsheet takes automatic measures to ensure deflection
This sheet provides the main inputs to the spreadsheet (although criteria are met. It may be argued that in this instance, with equal
other inputs occur in other sheets). Most inputs are (we hope) spans in the two directions, these measures are unwarranted in
self-explanatory. that deflection criteria will have been met in the orthogonal T1/
B1 layer.
LEGEND! should help with definition of dimensions, e.g. edge
distance C is actually from centreline of column to edge of slab. To the right under Operating instructions a number of checks are
Cover is defined as being to the layer being designed. The layering carried out. Box markers indicate where checks have been carried
is set at T1 - B1 (& T2 - B2) although T1 - B2 might be deemed out and proved satisfactory.
more appropriate (e.g. with prefabricated mats).

The number of spans is altered by entering data in the appropriate ACTIONS!

cells. Unwanted data cells are ‘greyed-out’. The use of C, K, F or P
can alter the characteristics of a support from Cantilever to Knife- This sheet shows bending moment and shear force diagrams
edge to Fixed to Pinned. Extraneous data is highlighted in red or from the analysis undertaken in Analysis! The user is required to
by messages in red. Under Operating Instructions a number of input the desired amount of redistribution to the initial moments
checks are carried out and problems found are highlighted. At in line 26. Cell L14 allows three types of distribution according to
the bottom of the sheet a simplistic loading diagram is given to the user’s preference.
aid data checking. Great care should be taken to ensure that this
sheet is completed correctly for the case in hand. It may prove The sheet also provides output reactions and column moments.
prudent to estimate values for bay width bending moments at Using the value of Veff for punching shear obviates the need to
each support by hand before progressing to ACTIONS! use the 1.15, 1.25 and 1.4 factors in Clause 3.7.6.2 to determine
Veff from Vt .
Cantilevers less than 1.00m should be described as end distances
(rather than cantilevers; otherwise certain logic regarding breadth
of effective moment transfer strip, be (see BS 8110: Part 1, Figure SPANS!
3.13), goes wrong).
SPANS! details the amounts of reinforcement required derived
End distances equivalent to the half width of the column should from detailed calculations in Bar!.
be used to define slabs whose edge is flush with the outside of
the column. On edge columns, be restricts Mt max which in itself
restricts the amount of moment transferred into columns above LEGEND!
and below.
LEGEND! gives an explanation of the dimensions used in MAIN!
and for the analysis and design.

64

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:64 17/07/2006 17:05:14

 RCC33 Flat Slabs (A & D).xls

WEIGHT!
WEIGHT! gives an estimate of the amount of reinforcement
required in one direction of the slab for the internal or end
bays considered. Simplified curtailment rules, as defined in
Clause 3.12, are used to determine lengths of bars. The figures
should be treated as approximate estimates only as they cannot
deal with the effects of designers’ and detailers’ preferences,
‘rationalisation’, the effects of holes etc, etc. They do not allow
for punching shear links or link carrier bars.

Analysis!
This sheet details the moment distribution analysis carried out
but is not necessarily intended for printing out other than for
checking purposes. It is derived from RCC21.xls.

Bar!
This sheet shows design calculations, complete with references
to BS 8110. It is not necessarily intended for printing out other
than for checking purposes.

Hogging moments at 1/4 span positions within a span are

checked and are used in the determination of top steel in spans.

Graf!
This sheet comprises data for graphs used on other sheets,
particularly in ACTIONS!

Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.

65

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:65 17/07/2006 17:05:15

 RCC33 Flat Slabs (A & D)/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M adeby Date Page
Location ECBP Typical Floor from grids A to D rmw 11-Apr-06 49
66

FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 C hecked Revision JobNo

Originated from R v3.1 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

MATERIALS fcu 40 N/mm² hagg 20 mm COVERS mm T OL AY E R

fyl 500 N/mm² γs 1.15 steel Topcover 25 1
fyv 500 N/mm² γc 1.50 concrete Btmcover 25 1
steelclass A
SPANS L (m) GEOMETRY PERIMETER LOADS characteristic
SPAN
1 7.500 Bay
type EDGE 8.85 kN/m outside supports 1 & 4
SPAN2 7.500 Slabdepth,h 250 mm 2.47 10.00 kN/m along bay edge
SPAN 3 7.500 Edge Panel width, b 3750 mm LOADING PATTERN
SPAN 4 Edge distance 300 mm to C/L min max
SPAN 5 End distance 125 from supt 1 DEAD 1.0 1.4
SPAN 6 End distance 125 from supt 4 IMPOSED 1.6

SUPPORTS ABOVE(m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond BELOW(m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond
Support
1 3.750 250 400 F 3.75 250 400 F
Support
2 3.750 400 400 F 3.75 400 400 F
Support
3 3.750 400 400 F 3.75 400 400 F
Support
4 3.750 250 400 F 3.75 250 400 F
Support 5

Support 6
Support 7

LOADING UDLs (kN/m²) PLs (kN/m) Position (m)

Dea d Im p ose d P osit io n Loa ded Dea d Im p ose d P osit io n Loaded
Span 1 Load L oa d fr o ml e ft L e n g t h Span 4 Load L oa d fr o ml e ft L en gt h
UDL 7.50 3.50 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
1 PL ~~~~~ 1 PL ~~~~~
2 PL ~~~~~ 2 PL ~~~~~
Part
UDL Part
UDL
Span 2 Span 5
UDL 7.50 3.50 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
1 PL ~~~~~ 1 PL ~~~~~
2 PL ~~~~~ 2 PL ~~~~~
Part
UDL Part
UDL
Span 3 6Span
UDL 7.50 3.50 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
1 PL ~~~~~ 1 PL ~~~~~
2 PL ~~~~~ 2 PL ~~~~~
Part
UDL Part
UDL

LOADING DIAGRAM

A D

66

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:66 17/07/2006 17:05:16

 RCC33 Flat Slabs (A & D).xls

RCC33 Flat Slabs (A & D)/ ACTIONS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Madeby Date Page

Location E C B PT y p i c a lF l o o r ,f r o mg r i d sAt oD rmw 11-Apr-06 67
50
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC33.xls v3.1 on CD © 2006 TCC c hg - R 68
BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAMS(kNm)

600 500
500 400
400 300
300
200
200
100
100
0
0
-100
-100
-200 -200
-300 -300
-400 -400
0 5 10 15 20 25 0 5 10 15 20 25

E l a s t i cM o m e n t s R e d i st r i b u t e dE n v e l o p e
SUPPORT No 1234
ElasticM 123.7 465.4 465.4 123.7 ~ ~ ~
RedistributedM 1 23.7 372.3 372.3 123.7 ~ ~ ~
ßb 1.000 0.800 0.800 1.000 ~ ~ ~
Redistribution 20 .0% 20.0%
End
support
reinf.
Ø
mm 16 16
* *
SPAN No 123
Elastic
M 2 97.1 205.5 297.1 ~ ~ ~
RedistributedM 3 19.9 184.6 319.9 ~ ~ ~
ßb 1.077 0.898 1.077 ~ ~ ~
SHEARS FORCE DIAGRAMS(kN)

400 400
300 300
200 200
100 100
0 0
-100 -100
-200 -200
-300 -300
-400 -400
0 5 10 15 20 25 0 5 10 15 20 25

E l a s t i cS h e a r s R e d i st r i b u t e dS h e a r s
No S P A N 1 2 3
Elastic
V 258.2 343.6 297.0 297.0 343.6 258.2
RedistributedV 263.9 331.1 297.0 297.0 331.1 263.9

S PNAoN
Elastic
V ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
Redistributed
V ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~

REACTIONS(kN)
S UP P OR T 1 2 3 4
ALLSPANS LOADED 323.0 628.2 628.2 323.0
ODDSPANSLOADED 323.9 481.6 481.6 323.9
EVEN SPANS LOADED 153.4 487.3 487.3 153.4
Veffforpunching 404.9 878.0 878.0 404.9
CharacteristicDead 168.7 326.4 326.4 168.7
CharacteristicI mposed 49.3 114.8 114.8 49.3

COLUMN MOMENTS(kNm) 1234

ALL SPANS Above 54.7 -35.9 35.9 -54.7
LOADED Below 54.7 -35.9 35.9 -54.7
ODD SPANS Above 59.4 -86.2 86.2 -59.4
LOADED Below 59.4 -86.2 86.2 -59.4
EVEN SPANS Above 23.0 32.1 -32.1 -23.0
LOADED Below 23.0 32.1 -32.1 -23.0

67

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:67 17/07/2006 17:05:18

 RCC33 Flat Slabs (A & D)/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made

by Date Page
Location E C B PT ypi calFl o o r,f ro mg ri d sAt oD rm w A p r -2 00 6 51 68
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC33.xls v3.1 on CD © 2006 TCC c hg - R 68

SPAN 1 LE F T C EN T R E R I GHT
ACTIONS ßb 1.000 1.077 0.800
Be 625 2175
Total M kNm 92.8 319.9 328.5
Mt max kNm 176.6 614.5

MIDDLE STRIP Width mm 3425 1875 1875

M kNm 1.8 144.0 82.1
d mm 219.0 215.0 217.0
As mm²/m 6 865 489
As deflection mm²/m 1276 489
P ro v i d e H 12 3 25 T 1 P ro vi d e H 2 0 22 5 B1 P ro v i d e H 1 6 4 00 T 1
As prov mm²/m 348 1396 503
Top steel Provide H12 325 T1
Deflection L/d = 7,500 /215.0 = 34.884 < 26.0 x 1.478 x 1.050 x 0.9 = 36.335 OK
(As increased by 47.5 % for deflection)
COLUMN STRIP Width mm 625 2175 2175
M kNm 92.8 176.0 246.4
d mm 217.0 215.0 217.0
As mm²/m 1743 912 1294
As deflection mm²/m 1408 1294
P ro v id e H 1 6 100 T 1 P ro vi d e H 2 0 200 B 1 P ro v i d e H 1 6 1 00 : 2 0 0 T 1
As prov mm²/m 2011 1571 1508
Top steel Provide H12 325 T1
Deflection L/d = 7,500 /215.0 = 34.884 < 26.0 x 1.485 x 1.050 x 0.9 = 36.489 OK

CHECK % As (As increased by 54.4

o k % for deflection) ok ok
Singly reinforced ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok

SPAN 2 LE F T C EN T R E R I GHT
ACTIONS ßb 0.800 0.898 0.800
Be 2175 2175
Total M kNm 328.5 184.6 328.5
Mt max kNm 614.5 614.5

MIDDLE STRIP Width mm 1875 1875 1875

M kNm 82.1 83.1 82.1
d mm 217.0 215.0 217.0
As mm²/m 489 499 489
As deflection mm²/m 489 654
P ro v i d e H 1 6 @ 4 00 T 1 P ro v i d e H 20 @ 4 50 B1 P ro v i d e H 1 6 @ 4 00 T 1
As prov mm²/m 503 698 503
Top steel Provide H12 @ 325 T1
Deflection L/d = 7,500 /215.0 = 34.884 < 26.0 x 1.500 x 1.050 x 0.9 = 36.863 OK
(As increased by 31.0 % for deflection)
COLUMN STRIP Width mm 2175 2175 2175
M kNm 246.4 101.5 246.4
d mm 217.0 215.0 217.0
As mm²/m 1294 526 1294
As deflection mm²/m 1294 702
Prov id e H 16 @ 1 00: 200 T1 Prov id e H 20 @ 4 00 B1 Prov id e H 16 @ 1 00: 200 T1
As prov mm²/m 1508 785 1508
Top steel Provide H12 @ 325 T1
Deflection L/d = 7,500 /215.0 = 34.884 < 26.0 x 1.548 x 1.050 x 0.9 = 38.038 OK
(As increased by 33.6 % for deflection)
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Singly reinforced ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok

68

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:68 17/07/2006 17:05:21

 RCC33 Flat Slabs (A & D).xls

RCC33 Flat Slabs (A & D)/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made

by Date Page
Location ECBPTypicaFl loor,fromgridsAtoD rmw Apr-2006 52 69
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC33.xls v3.1 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R 68

SPAN 3 LEFT C E N T RE RI G H T
ACTIONS ßb 0.800 1.077 1.000
Be 2175 625
Total M kNm 328.5 319.9 92.8
Mt max kNm 614.5 176.6

MIDDLE STRIP Width mm 1875 1875 3425

M kNm 82.1 144.0 1.8
d mm 217.0 215.0 219.0
As mm²/m 489 865 6
As deflection mm²/m 489 1276
Provide H16 @ 400 T1 Provide H20 @ 225 B1 Provide H12 @ 325 T1
As prov mm²/m 503 1396 348
Top steel Provide H12 325 T1
Deflection L/d = 7,500 /215.0 = 34.884 < 26.0 x 1.478 x 1.050 x 0.9 = 36.335 OK
(As increased by 47.5 % for deflection)
COLUMN STRIP Width mm 2175 2175 625
M kNm 246.4 176.0 92.8
d mm 217.0 215.0 217.0
As mm²/m 1294 912 1743
As deflection mm²/m 1294 1408
Provide H16 100:200 T1 Provide H20 200 B1 Provide H16 100 T1
As prov mm²/m 1508 1571 2011
Top steel Provide H12 325 T1
Deflection L/d = 7,500 /215.0 = 34.884 < 26.0 x 1.485 x 1.050 x 0.9 = 36.489 OK
(As increased by 54.4 % for deflection)
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Singly reinforced ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok

69

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:69 17/07/2006 17:05:24

 RCC33 Flat Slabs (A & D)/ LEGEND!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Madeby Date Page
Location ECBPTypicalFloor,fromgridsAtoD rmw 11-Apr-06 53
70
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC33.xls v3.1 on CD © 2006 TCC c g -

Legend for Input Data

70

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:70 17/07/2006 17:05:26

 RCC33 Flat Slabs (A & D).xls

RCC33 Flat Slabs (A & D)/ WEIGHT!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made

by Date Page
Location ECBPTypicaFl loor,fromgridsAtoD rmw 11-Apr-06 54 71
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo

Originated from RCC33.xls v3.1 on CD © 2006 TCC

chg - R68
No
WEIGHT of REINFORCEMENT M i dS t r i p C o lS t r i p Ty p e D ia Len g t h U n i tw t Weig h t
TOP STEEL Support
1 11 H 12 2350 0.888 22.9
8 H 16 2550 1.578 32.2
Span
1 6 H 12 4950 0.888 26.4
7H 12 4950 0.888 30.8
Support
2 5 H 16 3750 1.578 29.6
17 H 16 3750 1.578 100.6
Span
2 6 H 12 4950 0.888 26.4
7 H 12 4950 0.888 30.8
Support
3 5 H 16 3750 1.578 29.6
17 H 16 3750 1.578 100.6
Span
3 6 H 12 4950 0.888 26.4
7 H 12 4950 0.888 30.8
Support
4 11 H 12 2350 0.888 22.9
8 H 16 2550 1.578 32.2

BTM STEEL Span

1 9 H 20 6875 2.466 152.6
11 H 20 7750 2.466 210.2
Span
2 5 H 20 6825 2.466 84.2
6 H 20 7650 2.466 113.2
Span
3 9 H 20 6875 2.466 152.6
11 H 20 7750 2.466 210.2

SUMMARY Rebar for single direction only. All figures approximate - see User Guide.
TOTAL REINFORCEMENT IN BAY (kg) REINFORCEMENT DENSITY (kg/m3)

71

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:71 17/07/2006 17:05:28

 RCC41 Continuous Beams (A & D).xls
The spreadsheet designs multiple-span rectangular or flanged
beams using sub-frame analysis to derive moments and shears.
SPANS!
The intention is to provide the design and analysis of up to six
spans of continuous beams with columns above and below. Spans This sheet designs reinforcement for bending in spans and
supports and for shear in the spans.
may incorporate cantilevers, fixed ends or knife-edge supports.
There are three main sheets: MAIN!, ACTIONS! and SPANS!
User input is required for the diameters of bending and shear
reinforcement and for the number of legs of links in each span.
MAIN! Some intuition may be required to obtain sensible and rational
arrangements of reinforcement. In order to discourage the use of
second layers of reinforcement, the input cells for diameters of
This sheet contains user input of materials, frame geometry
reinforcement in second layers are nominally protected.
and load data. Input data is blue and underlined. New data may
be input by overwriting default values or by entering values in
Support moments (including cantilever moments) are considered
‘greyed-out’ cells. Guidance on input for the type of section and
at the face of the support. This may lead to unequal amounts of
type of end condition of the support is given under Operating
reinforcement being designed for each side of the support. See
Instructions.
Bar! Usually, the detailer would be expected to detail the larger
amounts of reinforcement; however where different sections
The sheet has been set up with as many ‘carry throughs’ as
occur either side of a support, the detailer should be briefed as to
possible, i.e. input cells are made equal to preceding input cells
to make the inputting of regular beams easier. Inputting C18 the designer’s detailed requirements.
as “= C17” will insert 8.00 in the remaining spans: it will also
Non-existent spans are blanked out.
remove the grey conditional background to the remaining spans,
supports and loads and allow data entry. Deleting C18, indeed
C19, will blank out remaining spans, etc. Generally, values in red Besides the limit of maximum modification factor for deflection
= 2.0, an additional limit of maximum allowable area of steel
or red backgrounds indicate either incorrect or excess data. For
instance, if knife-edge supports are required, entering ‘K’ in cell to comply with deflection criteria, Asdef, = 2 x A sreqd has been
imposed.
C25 will elicit red data to the right, which needs to be cleared
manually. Point loads should be at least 0.001m from a support.

Do not copy and paste input values as this can corrupt formatting
WEIGHT!
(“copy” and “Paste Special values” is OK). This sheet estimates the weight of reinforcement in the beam
when designed according to normal curtailment rules as defined
‘Rebar layering’ refers to whether there are beams and therefore in BS 8110. Workings are shown on the right hand side of the
reinforcement in the other direction. Answering yes drops by one sheet. The estimate may be printed out using File/print or the
bar diameter the steel at the supports. print button on the normal toolbar. It should be recognised
that different engineers’ and detailers’ interpretations of these
With respect to cantilevers, design for bending caters for clauses, and different project circumstances and requirements
moments at the face of support; design for deflection considers will all have a bearing on actual quantities used.
the cantilever from the centre line of support. N.B. root rotation
is not considered. In beam-to-beam situations the width of
support can be input as being very small to avoid under-design Analysis!
in bending.
This sheet shows the moment distributions used in the analysis
of the beam: it is not intended for formal printing. It will be seen
ACTIONS! that the loads are considered initially as 1.0gk over all spans then
as (γgk - 1.0) + γqk qk over alternate spans.
ACTIONS! Includes bending moment and shear force diagrams,
summaries of moments and shears and user input for amounts
of redistribution. Users should ensure that the amounts of
redistribution are always considered as there are no default
Bar!
values. Intended mainly for first time users and young engineers, this
sheet gives further details of the calculations summarised in
SPAN! Support moments are considered at faces of supports;
checks at 1/4 span relate to hogging and any top steel required is
provided in the span.

72

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:72 17/07/2006 17:05:31

 RCC41 Continuous Beams (A & D).xls

Graf!
This sheet provides data for the charts in MAIN! and ACTIONS!:
it is not intended for formal printing.

Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.

73

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:73 17/07/2006 17:05:32

 RCC41 Continuous Beams (A & D)/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M adeby Date SheetNo
Location D&D: Main beam Grids C to H from grid 1 to 3 rmw 11-Apr-06 74 55
CONTINUOUS BEAM (Analysis & Design) to BS 8110:2005 C hecked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC41.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R 68

LOCATION Supportsfromgrid 1 to grid 3

M A T E R IA L S C O V E R(to
S all steel)
fcu 40 N/mm² hagg 20 mm Topcover 25 mm
fyl 500 N/mm² γs 1.15 Btm
cover 40 mm
fyv 500 N/mm² γc 1.50 Side
cover 35 mm
steelclass A
SPANS L (m) H (mm) bw (mm) hf (mm) Type bf(mm) LOADING PATTERN
SPAN1 1.50 500 300 175 R 300 min m ax
SPAN
2 8 .00 500 300 175 R 300 DEAD 1 1.4
SPAN
3 1.50 500 300 175 R 300 IMPOSED 0 1.6
SPAN 4 REBAR LAYERING
SPAN 5 Support steel
SPAN 6 in alt layer ? Y

SUPPORTS ABOVE(m) H (mm) B (mm) En d C o n d B EL OW(m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond

Support1 C
Support
2 3.50 300 300 F 5.00 300 300 P
Support
3 3.50 300 300 F 4.00 300 300 P
Support4 K
Support 5
Support 6
Support 7

LOADING UDLs (kN/m) PLs (kN) Position (m)

Dea d Im p o s e d P o s i t io n Lo a d e d Dea d Im po sed P o s it i o n Lo a d e d
Span 1 Lo a d Lo a d f ro ml e f t Le n g t h Span 4 Lo a d Lo a d f ro ml e f t Le n g t h
UDL 25.8 20.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~
1PL ~~~~~ 1PL ~~~~~
2PL ~~~~~ 2PL ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
2S p a n 5S p a n
UDL 25.8 20.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
1PL ~~~~~ 1PL ~~~~~
2PL ~~~~~ 2PL ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
3S p a n 6S p a n
UDL 25.8 20.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
1PL25.0 1.50 ~~~~~ 1PL ~~~~~
2PL ~~~~~ 2PL ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL

LOADING DIAGRAM

1 3
REACTIONS(kN)
S UPP O RT 1 2 3 4
ALL SPANS LOADED 0.0 362.6 543.9 -122.2 0.0 0.0 0.0
ODD SPANS LOADED 0.0 198.7 252.9 -5.9 0.0 0.0 0.0
EVEN SPANS LOADED 0.0 295.8 515.5 -163.9 0.0 0.0 0.0
Characteristic Dead 0.0 134.1 211.1 -36.4 0.0 0.0 0.0
Max characteristic Imposed 0.0 103.9 163.6 16.9 0.0 0.0 0.0
Min characteristic Imposed 0.0 32.1 11.0 -64.5 0.0 0.0 0.0

74

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:74 17/07/2006 17:05:32

 RCC41 Continuous Beams (A & D).xls

RCC41 Continuous Beams (A & D)/ ACTIONS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Madeby Date Page

Location D & D:M ai nb e amG r i dsCt oH, fr o mg r i d1to3 rmw 1 1 - A p r -0 6 5 6 75
CONTINUOUS BEAM (Analysis & Design) to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC41.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC ch g - R6 8
BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAMS
(kNm)

500 400

400 300

300 200

200 100

100 0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
0 -100
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
-100 -200

-200 -300

-300 -400

1 Elastic Moments 3 1 Redistributed Envelope 3

S UPP ON
RoT 1 2 3 4
Elastic
M 0.0 215.7 390.5 0.0 ~ ~ kNm/m
RedistributedM 0.0 215.7 312.4 0.0 ~ ~ kNm/m
ßb 1.000 1.000 0.800 1.000 ~ ~ ~
Redistribution 20.0%

S PNAoN 1 2 3
Elastic M 0 .00 259.55 0.00 ~ ~ ~
RedistributedM 0.00 295.71 0.00 ~ ~ ~
ßb 1.000 1.139 0.700 ~ ~ ~
SHEARS(kN)

300 300

200 200

100 100

0 0

-100 -100

-200 -200

-300 -300

-400 -400
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 0 2 4 6 8 10 12

1 Elastic Shears 3 1 Redistributed Shears 3

N o S PA N 1 2 3
ElasticV 0.0 102.2 251.8 297.6 264.2 -172.8
RedistributedV 0.0 102.2 260.4 287.8 259.4 -163.9

Elastic
V ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
Redistributed
V ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~

COLUMN MOMENTS
(kNm) 1234
ALL SPANS Above 91.2 -36.9
LOADED Below 47.9 -24.2
ODD SPANS Above 20.5 -11.8
LOADED Below 10.8 -7.7
EVEN SPANS Above 105.3 -39.1
LOADED Below 55.3 -25.7

75

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:75 17/07/2006 17:05:36

 RCC41 Continuous Beams (A & D)/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location D& D:M ainbe amG ri d sCt oH , f r o mg ri d1t o3 r mw 1 1 -A p r -0 6 57 76
CONTINUOUS BEAM (Analysis & Design) to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC41.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC ch g - R6 8

SPAN 1 LEF T C E N T RE R IG H T
ACTIONS M kNm 0.0 62.1
ßb 1.00 1.00 1.00
DESIGN d mm 450.0 444.0 447.0
As mm² 0 336
As' mm²
TOP STEEL Layer 1 3Y1 0 3Y1 2 3Y1 2
Layer 2
As prov mm² 236 As'
prov 339 As
prov 339
BTM STEEL Layer 1 2 Y 10 2 Y 12 2 Y 20
Layer 2
As' prov mm² 157 As
prov 226 As'
prov 628
DEFLECTION L/d 3.356 Allowed 9.388
SHEAR V kN 30.7 Link Ø 61.5
v N/mm² 0.227 10 0.459
vc N/mm² 0.413 Nominal 0.468
LINKS H 1 0@3 2 5f o r650 H 1 0@3 2 5 H 1 0@3 2 5fo r9 75
legs No 2 2 2

CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Deflection ok

SPAN 2 LEF T C E N T RE R IG H T
ACTIONS M kNm 177.5 295.7 270.5
ßb 1.00 1.14 0.80
DESIGN d mm 427.5 434.0 417.0
As mm² 1061 1903 1807
As' mm²
TOP STEEL Layer 1 3Y2 5 2Y1 6 3Y3 2
Layer 2
As prov mm² 1473 As'
prov 402 As
prov 2413
BTM STEEL Layer 1 3Y2 0 3Y3 2 3Y2 0
Layer 2
As' prov mm² 942 As
prov 2413 As'
prov 942
DEFLECTION L/d 18.433 Allowed 25.145
SHEAR V kN 221.1 Link Ø 249.2
v N/mm² 1.724 10 1.992
vc N/mm² 0.614 Nominal 0.920
LINKS H 1 0@2 00f o r1 800 H 1 0@3 2 5 H 1 0@2 00f o r1 8 00
legs No 2 2 2

CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Deflection ok

76

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:76 17/07/2006 17:05:38

 RCC41 Continuous Beams (A & D).xls

RCC41 Continuous Beams (A & D)/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location D & D :M a inb e a mG r id sCt oH , f r o mg r i d1t o3 rm w A p r - 2 0 06 5 8 77
CONTINUOUS BEAM (Analysis & Design) to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo

Originated from RCC41.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC

chg - R6 8

SPAN 3 LE F T C E N T RE RI G H T
ACTIONS M kNm 278.6 0.0 0.0
ßb 0.96 0.70 1.00
DESIGN d mm 417.0 444.0 450.0
As mm² 1876 0 0
As' mm²
TOP STEEL Layer 1 3 Y 32 3 Y 25 3 Y 10
Layer 2
As prov mm² 2413 As'
prov 1473 Asprov 236
BTM STEEL Layer 1 2 Y 10 2 Y 12 2 Y 10
Layer 2
As' prov mm² 157 As
prov 226 As'
prov 157
DEFLECTION 3.378 Allowed 66.003
SHEAR V kN 220.8 Ø
Li n k V 194.6
v N/mm² 1.765 10 v 1.441
vc N/mm² 0.730 No m i n a l vc 0.325
LINKS H 10 2 00f o r1 4 0 0 H10 32 5 H 10 2 0 0f o r4 0 0
legs No 2 2 2

CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Deflection ok

77

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:77 17/07/2006 17:05:41

 RCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams (A & D).xls
The spreadsheet designs multiple-span rectangular or flanged Users may choose to equate cells in their saved version to speed
beams and estimates deflection to BS 8110 Parts 2. It uses sub- input.
frame analysis to derive moments and shears. For each span
and load case it calculates deflections at 1/20th spans. The Do not copy and paste input values as this can corrupt formatting
intention is to provide the design and analysis of up to six spans (copy and ‘paste values only’ is OK).
of continuous beams with columns above and below. Spans may
incorporate cantilevers, fixed ends or knife-edge supports. There ‘Rebar layering’ refers to whether there are beams in the other
are four main sheets: JOBDATA!, MAIN!, ACTIONS! and SPANS! direction. Answering ‘yes’ drops by one bar diameter the steel at
where the user is required to input data. the supports.

The spreadsheet is based on RCC41 but has an initial sheet With respect to cantilevers, design for bending caters for
JOBDATA! to allow input of all the variables and performance moments at the face of support; design for deflection considers
criteria required. The calculation of deflection is not carried the cantilever from the centre line of support. N.B. root rotation
out automatically. The user is required to press the ‘Calculate is not considered.
deflections’ button in column N of SPANS! (or elsewhere) when
every other aspect of the design has been completed. Deflections In beam-to-beam situations the width of support can be input as
are given as a range in a chart at the bottom of ACTIONS! They being very small to avoid under-design in bending.
are shown as a range due to potential pattern loading. In SPANS!
the worst case is compared with the specified serviceability
criteria. ACTIONS!
It should be noted that the number of assumptions and ACTIONS! Includes bending moment and shear force diagrams,
uncertainties in the material and design criteria and construction summaries of moments and shears and user input for amounts
process mean that deflection calculations carried out in of redistribution. Users should ensure that the amounts of
this manner can be notoriously inaccurate (and usually over redistribution in row 22 are always considered - there are no
conservative) compared with actual measured deflections. The default or automated values. Cell L14 determines how the
calculated deflections might be regarded as being akin to 95% redistribution is carried out (see Table 1 of this document).
confidence limits.
The chart at the bottom of the page shows calculated deflections
at construction of partitions, and ranges for longer term
JOBDATA! deflections due to patterns of permanent and imposed loading.
The worst case is taken in subsequent checks and this might be
This sheet consists of the main inputs of material, loading, viewed as being unduly conservative.
construction and serviceability criteria pertaining to the
calculation of deflection to BS 8110 Part 2. Users are expected to
use their knowledge of the project and judgement in completing SPANS!
this sheet. The default values given in this sheet are not unusual.
For creep reference is made to Eurocode 2 Annex B. This sheet designs reinforcement for bending in spans and
supports, and for shear in the spans. User input is required for
reinforcement sizes – some intuition may be required to obtain
MAIN! sensible arrangements of reinforcement. The amounts of bending
and shear reinforcement required and checks are derived from
This sheet contains user input of frame geometry and load data. detailed calculations in Bar! Support moments (including
cantilever moments) are considered at the face of the support.
Input data is blue and underlined. New data may be input by This may lead to unequal amounts of reinforcement being
overwriting default values or by entering values in ‘greyed-out’ designed for each side of the support, see Bar! Non-existent
cells. Guidance on input for the type of section and type of end spans are blanked out.

condition
Generally, ofvalues
the support
in red isorgiven
red under Operating
backgrounds Instructions.
indicate either Deflection calculations are controlled by clicking the ‘Calculate
incorrect or excess data. For instance, if knife-edge supports are Deflections’ button in column N and should be undertaken once
required, entering ‘K’ in cell C18 will elicit red data to the right, all the other design is complete. Deflection results will only appear
which needs to be cleared manually. on this sheet after the ‘Calculate Deflections’ button has been
used and the macro been allowed to complete its iterations.
The sheet has not been set up with many ‘carry throughs’ (making
the value of one cell equal another). They will disappear if relevant data (e.g. span, load) is changed.
Should the span fail deflection criteria, the user has the option to
78

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:78 17/07/2006 17:05:43

 RCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams (A & D).xls

increase bottom steel at cell M21 etc, and reuse the ‘Calculate
Deflection’ button Hogging moments at are checked 1/4 span
Graf!
This sheet provides data for the charts in MAIN! and ACTIONS!:
positions within a span and are used to determine the top steel
it is not intended for formal printing.
in spans.

WEIGHT! Notes!
This sheet estimates the weight of reinforcement in the beam This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
when designed according to normal curtailment rules as defined
in BS 8110. Workings are shown on the right hand side of the
sheet. The estimate may be printed out using File/print or the
print button on the normal toolbar. It should be recognised
that different engineers’ and detailers’ interpretations of these
clauses, and different project circumstances and requirements
will all have a bearing on actual quantities used.

Uls!
This sheet details the moment distribution analysis carried out
at the ultimate limit state but is not necessarily intended for
printing out other than for checking purposes. It will be seen that
the loads are considered initially as 1.0gk over all spans then as
(γgk - 1.0)g k + γgk qk on alternately odd and even spans.

Sls!
This sheet details the analysis carried out at the serviceability
limit state at 1/20th points along each span. The results are used
in Def!. This sheet is not necessarily intended for printing out
other than for checking purposes.

Bar!
Intended mainly for first time users and young engineers, this
sheet gives further details of the calculations summarised in
SPAN! Support moments are considered at faces of supports;
checks at 1/4 span relate to hogging and any top steel required is
provided in the span.

Def!
This sheet calculates deflections at 1/20th points for each span
and for each load condition. For each point and condition it
considers moment, As, As’, d, d’, uncracked neutral axis depth -
x, uncracked inertia - I, cracked neutral axis depth - x, cracked
inertia – I, uncracked moment capacity – Mcr, z, final x, concrete
stresses – fc, moment of resistance – MoR, curvature -1/r, load,
slope and curvature, etc. to calculate deflection. The sheet is
rather large and is not necessarily intended for printing out other
than for checking purposes.

79

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:79 17/07/2006 17:05:44

 RCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams (A & D)/ JOBDATA!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M adeby Date Page
Location D&D: Main Beam from grid C to H rmw 11-Apr-06 55
80

RIGOROUS CONTINUOUS BEAMS to BS 8110:2005

C hecked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC41R.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

LOCATION Supports from grid C to grid H

MATERIALS COVERS (to links)

fcu 35 N/mm² hagg 20 mm Topcover 25 mm
fyl 500 N/mm² γs 1.15 Btmcover 30 mm
fyv 500 N/mm² γc 1.50 Side
cover 30 mm
steel
class A Concrete
density 24 kN/m³
SERVICEABILITY CRITERIA Maximum permanent ∆ = L / 250 3.3.3 (Pt 2)
Maximum imposed ∆ = L / 500
Max ∆ affecting partitions/walls = L / 350 or 20 mm
Maximum precamber = 50% of permanent ∆
Permanent portion of imposed loading = 25%
Design Crack width, W=k 0.3 mm 2.2.3.4.2

CREEP COEFFICIENTS (to EN 1992-1)

RH 50 %relativehumidity f cm= 36 N/mm² Table 3.1

Cement N Type(S,N,RorRS) E cm = 32.937 kN/mm² & Annex A

AMBIENT TEMPERATURES ºC from 0 to 7 days from 7 to 60 days from 60 days on

16 18 18

LOADING SEQUENCE (loads rationalised to kN/m)

Span1 Span2 Span3 Span4 Span 5 Spa n 6 At age
kN/m kN/m kN/m kN/m kN/m kN/m Days
Selfweight 16.80 16.80 16.80 16.80 0.00 0.00 7
Partitions/walls 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 28
Other deadloads 11.20 12.40 17.40 11.20 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! 60
Permanentimposed 3.75 3.75 4.38 3.75 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! 28
Variableload 11.25 11.25 13.13 11.25 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! ∞
Total 48.00 49.20 56.70 48.00 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! 123.00

COMPOSITE E and φ VALUES - Span 1

At 70 years At70years At28days

Ø0 Et Ø0 Et Ø (t,t0) Et
kN/mm² kN/mm² kN/mm²
Selfweight 3.52 7.28 3.52 7.28 1.37 13.91
Partitions/walls 2.68 8.96 2.68 8.96 0 32.94
Otherdeadloads 2.31 9.96 2.31 9.96 1.05 16.04
Permanentimposed 2.68 8.96 2.68 8.96 At partition
Variable load 0 32.94 loading
Composite 2.95 8.34 2.26 10.11
Permanentload Totalload

80

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:80 17/07/2006 17:05:45

 RCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams (A & D).xls

RCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams (A & D)/ MA IN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M adeby Date SheetNo
Location D & DM
: a i nB e a mf, r o mg r i dCt oH r mw 1 1 - J u l - 06 56 81
RIGOROUS CONTINUOUS BEAMS to BS 8110:2005 C hecked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC41R.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC
ch g - R68
Bay width 5000 mm
SPANS L (m) H (mm) bw (mm) hf (mm) Type bf (mm) LOADING PATTERN
SPAN
1 6 .000 375 300 125 T 1140 min ma x
SPAN
2 6.000 375 300 125 T 960 DEAD 1 1.4
SPAN3 6 .000 375 300 125 T 1020 IMPOSED 0 1.6
SPAN4 6 .000 375 300 125 T 1080 REBAR LAYERING
SPAN 5 Support steel
SPAN 6 in alt layer ? N

SUPPORTS ABOVE(m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond BELOW(m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond
Support
1 3.750 250 250 F 3.75 250 250 F
Support
2 3.750 250 250 F 3.750 250 250 F
Support
3 3.750 250 250 F 3.750 250 250 F
Support 4 3.750 250 250 F 3.750 250 250 F
Support
5 3.750 250 250 F 3.750 250 250 F
Support 6
Support 7

LOADING DIAGRAM

C H
LOADING UDLs (kN/m) PLs (kN) Position (m)
D e ad Imp o s ed P o s i ti o n Lo ad e d Dead I mp o se d P o s i ti o n L o a de d
Sp an 1 L o ad L o ad fr o ml eft L e n g th Sp an 4 Lo ad Load fr o ml eft L e n g th
UDL 33.0 15.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL 33.0 15.0 ~~~~~
1PL ~~~~~ 1PL ~~~~~
2PL ~~~~~ 2PL ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Sp a n 2 Sp an 5
UDL 34.2 15.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
1PL ~~~~~ 1PL ~~~~~
2PL ~~~~~ 2PL ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Sp a n 3 Sp an 6
UDL 34.2 15.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
1PL 30.0 15.0 2.50 ~~~~~ 1PL ~~~~~
2PL ~~~~~ 2PL ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL

REACTIONS(kN)
SU P P O RT 1 2 3 4 5
ALLSPANSLOADED 186.7 448.2 472.4 481.3 182.4
ODDSPANSLOADED 188.4 338.1 348.8 381.9 64.5
EVENSPANSLOADED 69.2 350.5 321.4 360.1 184.5
CharacteristicDead 84.7 216.6 219.3 233.3 82.5
CharacteristicImposed 45.0 95.5 97.1 99.1 42.8

81

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:81 17/07/2006 17:05:48

 RCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams (A & D)/ ACTIONS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Madeby Date Page
Location D&DM
: ainBeam,fromgridCtoH rmw 11-Apr-06 57 82
RIGOROUS CONTINUOUS BEAMS to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC41R.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68
BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAMS (kNm)
400 300
300 200
200
100
100
0
0
-100
-100
-200 -200
-300 -300

C Elastic Moments H C Redistributed Envelope H

S U P P ONRoT 1 2 3 4 5
ElasticM 81.8 252.7 240.2 278.1 79.8 ~ kNm/m
RedistributedM 81.8 214.8 240.2 236.4 79.8 ~ kNm/m
ßb 1.000 0.850 1.000 0.850 1.000 ~ ~
Redistribution 15.0% 15.0%

S PNAoN 1 2 3 4
ElasticM 179.26 135.23 194.44 173.40 ~ ~
RedistributedM 176.94 127.14 192.72 169.71 ~ ~
ßb 0.987 0.940 0.991 0.979 ~ ~
SHEARS (kN)
400 400
200 200
0 0
-200 -200
-400 -400

C Elastic Shears H C Redistributed Shears H

N oS P A N 1 2 3
ElasticV 191.4 240.8 219.0 214.1 249.6 249.0
RedistributedV 188.4 234.5 221.7 217.6 254.8 248.4

SNPoA N 4
Elastic
V 245.7 188.5 ~ ~ ~ ~
Redistributed
V 238.8 184.5 ~ ~ ~ ~

COLUMN MOMENTS 1234 5

ALL SPANS Above 35.6 -8.3 6.8 1.3 -33.6 kNm
LOADED Below 35.6 -8.3 6.8 1.3 -33.6 kNm
ODD SPANS Above 40.9 -23.5 24.5 -17.7 -9.6 kNm

kNm
EVENLOADED
Below 40.9 -23.5 24.5 -17.7 -9.6
SPANS Above 11.5 11.5 -14.7 19.6 -39.9 kNm
LOADED Below 11.5 11.5 -14.7 19.6 -39.9 kNm

82

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:82 17/07/2006 17:05:51

 RCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams (A & D).xls

RCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams (A & D)/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location D & DM
: a i nB e a m ,f r o mg r i dCt oH rm w 1 1-Ap r -06 5 8 83
RIGOROUS CONTINUOUS BEAMS to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo

Originated from RCC41R.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC

chg - R 68

SPAN 1 LE F T CE N T RE RI G H T
ACTIONS M kNm 58.8 176.9 186.2
ßb 1.00 0.99 0.85
DESIGN d mm 332.0 322.5 327.5
As mm² 433 1328 1623
As' mm² 0 0 201
TOP STEEL Layer 1 3H1 6 2H1 6 4H2 5
Layer 2 0 0 0
As prov mm² 603 As'
prov 402 As
prov 1963
BTM STEEL Layer 1 3H1 6 4H 25 3H1 6
Layer 2 0 0 0
As' prov mm² 603 As
prov 1963 As'
prov 603
DEFLECTION Permanent= 16.34<24.00 Imposed= 4.88<12.00 Precamber(mm)= 0
mm Affecting partitions = 15.07 < 17.14 ok Increase btm As by 20%
SHEAR V kN 156.3 Link Ø 202.8
v N/mm² 1.570 10 2.064
vc N/mm² 0.497 Nominal 0.743
LINKS H 1 0@2 0 0f o r1 4 0 0 H 1 0@2 2 5 H 1 0@1 5 0f o r1 65 0
legs No 2 2 2

CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S
Links
ookk ok
ok ok
ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Crack width ok 0.163 ok 0.003 ok 0.228

SPAN 2 LE F T CE N T RE RI G H T
ACTIONS M kNm 188.6 127.1 200.0
ßb 0.91 0.94 1.00
DESIGN d mm 327.5 325.0 327.5
As mm² 1694 947 1787
As' mm² 113 0 210
TOP STEEL Layer 1 4 H 25 2 H 16 4 H 25
Layer 2 0 0 0
As prov mm² 1963 As'
prov 402 As
prov 1963
BTM STEEL Layer 1 2 H 16 4 H 20 2 H 16
Layer 2 0 0 0
As' prov mm² 402 As
prov 1257 As'
prov 402
DEFLECTION Permanent= 18.83<24.00 Imposed= 0.00<12.00 Precamber(mm)= 0
mm Affecting partitions = 22.15 > 17.14 FAILS Increase btm As by 0%
SHEAR V kN 189.2 Link Ø 185.1
v N/mm² 1.926 10 1.884
vc N/mm² 0.743 Nominal 0.743
LINKS H 1 0@1 7 5f o r1 4 0 0 H 1 0@2 2 5 H 1 0@1 7 5f o r1 4 0 0
legs No 2 2 2
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Crack width ok 0.235 ok -0.134 ok 0.218

83

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:83 17/07/2006 17:05:54

 RCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams (A & D)/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location D & DM
: a i nB e a m ,f r o mg r i dCt oH rm w Ap r -2 006 5 9 84
RIGOROUS CONTINUOUS BEAMS to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC41R.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

SPAN 3 LE FT C E N T RE RI G HT
ACTIONS M kNm 208.9 192.7 206.6
ßb 1.00 0.99 0.86
DESIGN d mm 327.5 322.5 327.5
As mm² 1860 1447 1799
As' mm² 286 0 357
TOP STEEL Layer 1 4 H 25 2 H 16 4 H 25
Layer 2 0 0 0
As prov mm² 1963 As'
prov 402 As
prov 1963
BTM STEEL Layer 1 3H1 6 3H2 5 3H1 6
Layer 2 0 0 0
As' prov mm² 603 As
prov 1473 As'
prov 603
DEFLECTION Permanent= 13.00<24.00 Imposed= 5.77<12.00 Precamber(mm)= 0
mm Affecting partitions = 15.56 < 17.14 ok Increase btm As by 0%
SHEAR V kN 222.2 ØLi n k V 215.8
v N/mm² 2.262 10 v 2.197
vc N/mm² 0.743 No min al vc 0.743
LINKS H 1 0@1 2 5f o r1 8 7 5 H 1 0@2 2 5 H 1 0@1 5 0f o r1 8 0 0
legs No 2 2 2

CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Crack width ok 0.233 ok 0.300 ok 0.266

SPAN 4 LE FT C E N T RE RI G HT
ACTIONS M kNm 209.9 169.7 57.3
ßb 0.85 0.98 1.00
DESIGN d mm 327.5 325.0 332.0
As mm² 1819 1264 421
As' mm² 403 0 0
TOP STEEL Layer 1 4 H 25 3 H 16 3 H 16
Layer 2 0 0 0 0
As prov mm² 1963 As'
prov 603 As
prov 603
BTM STEEL Layer 1 3H1 6 4H2 0 2H1 6
Layer 2 0 0 99 H 0
As' prov mm² 603 As
prov 1257 As'
prov 402
DEFLECTION Permanent= 18.39<24.00 Imposed= 5.62<12.00 Precamber(mm)= 0
mm Affecting partitions = 16.28 < 17.14 ok Increase btm As by 0%
SHEAR V kN 207.0 Link Ø 152.4
v N/mm² 2.107 10 1.530
vc N/mm² 0.743 Nominal 0.497
LINKS H 1 0@1 5 0f o r1 8 0 0 H 1 0@2 2 5 H 1 0@2 0 0f o r1 4 0 0
legs No 2 2 2

CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok MORE THAN 2 LAYERS ok
max V ok ok
Crack width ok 0.117 ok 0.288 ok 0.301

84

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:84 17/07/2006 17:05:56

 RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D).xls

RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D).xls

This spreadsheet designs post-tensioned slab and beam ■ Commonly 70% to 75% is taken for initial estimates for
elements in accordance with BS 8110: Part 1, 1997. In essence the jacking force/ final force. This quantity is calculated at Details
spreadsheet checks a number of parameters: stresses at transfer, N68:N69 and has to be re-specified in Details! line 68 to be
stresses in service, moments of resistance at ULS, shear, vibration, within 5% of that calculated.
deflection, neutral axis depth, and reinforcement service stress.
These checks are shown in SUMMARY!
■ With respect to allowable flexural tensile stresses in prestressed
beams (and slabs), BS 8110: Part 1, defines three classes (see
The spreadsheet is set out in several sheets.
Clause 4.3.4.3). These classes determine the limits of tensile
■ MAT DATA!Defines load cases, various options and material stress. For example see BS 8110: Part 1, Clause 4.1.3, which also
properties. allows 5.0 N/mm 2 tensile strength for C40 concrete. For Class
■ SUMMARY!Summarises the design, analysis, checks and 3, which is generally used for internal environments, cracking
outputs from the rest of the spreadsheet. is allowed either up to 0.1 mm or, more usually, to 0.2 mm.
■ DETAILS!Shows the workings for the moment distribution
for the various load cases, profiles, prestress losses and checks ■ Slab or Beam varies shear requirements and determines
in some detail. whether nominal top bonded reinforcement is included in
■ DEFLECT!Shows workings for deflection at 1/20 points the spans or not. Nominal top steel is included in mid-span
along each span. of beams. If slabs are specified, the user may choose to use
nominal top steel to overcome hogging moments in the
■ Graf!Provides the data for the graphs, and values generated
spans. Invoking the nominal bonded reinforcement in mid-
are used for checking.
span should overcome most problems with hogging in, say,
dissimilar spans of slabs. Slabs requires a second input; type of
Users are referred to CS TR43 Post-tensioned concrete floors
slab alters parameters used in checking vibration.
– Design Handbook(14), and Post-tensioned concrete floors(16) for
further details of methods and values used.
■ Normal curtailment rules for conventional reinforcement
A maximum of three spans may be considered. Cantilevers are are not necessarily satisfactory for post-tensioned slabs and
not available. Shortening is calculated in the losses section, but is beams. Nonetheless the spreadsheet assumes that curtailment
not used to modify column moments. The effects of restraint to occurs at 0.3 x span.
both columns and prestress in the member must be considered.
The spreadsheet considers one direction at a time only. With regard to concrete, the usual minimum strength used in
prestressing is 40 N/mm 2 . The minimum allowable strength at
The nub of this spreadsheet is page two of SUMMARY! The source transfer (i.e. when the tendons are initially stressed), f ci, is 25 N/
of any failures or missing information (e.g. no tendons or no mm2 .. Ambient temperatures during curing may be taken as 15 oC
tendon height specified) will become apparent in SUMMARY ii. for a UK summer, but otherwise may be dependent upon curing/
It is suggested that users may wish to create a second window of insulation regimes. Typically, long-term Relative Humidity may
this part of the spreadsheet (Window/ New Window/ Arrange). be taken as 45% indoors, or 85% outdoors for the UK. Other
data used in the determination of various concrete factors, e.g.
determination of creep factors, is shown on the right hand side of
MATDATA! the sheet. These factors are case specific and have been derived
from the best available data for the various parameters shown.
The first sheet includes all the general and material input data The formulae for calculating creep factors and free shrinkage
used in the subsequent sheets. Load combinations and load strain are from C&CA paper TDH 2391 (17 ), and use the following
factors are defined. The input under Options should be self- factors.
explanatory. The choices have implications on the design as
shown below. ■ Kb is a factor depending on the composition of the concrete,
■ Kc is an environmental factor,
■ Stressing ends determines where prestressing losses occur
■ Prestressing system – Specifying unbonded or bonded changes ■ Kd is a maturity factor,
prestress loss calculations. Prestress losses tend to be higher ■ Ke is an effective member thickness factor, and
with bonded tendons as wobble factors and coefficients of ■ Kt covers the development of the deferred deformation with
friction are higher but using several strands in a single duct time.
can lead to overall economy, especially in more heavily loaded
beams. Bonded systems tend to require less conventional Factors used in the derivation of material data are given to the
reinforcement. right hand side of the sheet.

85

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:85 17/07/2006 17:05:59

 Details of strand used in the UK are given at the bottom of the should be assessed from the ψ 2 factor in EC2, which is usually
sheet. Users should ensure that their chosen strand is readily 20% of imposed load for dwellings, 30% for offices and stores,
available. Post-tensioned concrete floors(16) gives typical values and 60% for parking. (One never takes 100%, as y2 adjusts for
for µ (coefficient of friction), K (wobble factors), Rel% (relaxation) the very different f (creep) values. Hence 30% is appropriate for
and draw-in (mm) in Tables 2.6 and 7.1. a more or less permanently loaded structures: the high value for
parking is to compensate for long-term dynamic effects.)
It is usually assumed that working loads are applied at a concrete
age of 60 days (user input). The quasi-permanent imposed load
Factors used in the derivation of material data

Assume Final prestress + dead +

BS 8110 Table 4.2

30 3.8 0 4.9736
40 5 0 0
50 5.8 5.8 0
1.271 1.267 1.258 1.249 1.245 1.235 1.225 1.210 1.195 1.185 1.170 1.160 1.145 1.110
Maturity Curve 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
0 0. 8 1 1. 5 2 2 .5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 13
0.8 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3
30 0 2.6 4.5 7.9 10.3 12.2 13.7 16.2 18 19.5 20.6 21.7 22.6 23.2 25.2
40 0 5.2 7.8 12.2 15.5 18.1 20.1 23.2 25.5 27.3 29 30.4 31.3 32.2 34.5
50 0 11.4 12.7 18.1 22.2 25.1 27.3 31.1 33.7 35.8 37.8 39.2 40.3 41.3 43.9
60 0 13.7 15.2 21.7 26.6 30.1 32.8 37.3 40.4 43 45.4 47 48.4 49.6 52.7
60 0 13.7 15.2 21.7 26.6 30.1 32.8 37.3 40.4 43 45.4 47 48.4 49.6 52.7
60 0 13.7 15.2 21.7 26.6 30.1 32.8 37.3 40.4 43 45.4 47 48.4 49.6 52.7
60 0 13.7 15.2 21.7 26.6 30.1 32.8 37.3 40.4 43 45.4 47 48.4 49.6 52.7

L o n gt er m f cu inf E t inf
67.2 3 4.30

E A RL YS T RE N G T H L AT E
S T RE NG T H
1 4 0.8 5.8 40 60 0 100
60 37.3 40.4 3.1 39.78 60 64.8 67.2 2.4 64.80

Kc = Relative Humidity factor

30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100
3.2 3.13 3.05 2.95 2.85 2.77 2.65 2.5 2.3 2.13 1.9 1.7 1.5 1.25 1
50 55 2.85 2.77 0.08 0 2.850

Kd = Ambient factor
30 90 210 420 840 2700 5400 10800
60 120 210 420 1860 2700 5400
1.8 1.6 1.4 1.2 1 0.75 0.65 0.5
120 120 1.6 1.4 0.2 30 1.550
1500 1860 1 0.75 0.25 660 0. 911 1.0 00

Kb = Cement Content & W/C Ratio factor

0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8
200 0.5 0.8 1.02 1.28
300 0.7 0.9 1.17 1.48 1.82
400 0.83 1.17 1.63 2.1 2.55
500 0.97 1.45 2 2.55 3.1 0.5
300 0.7 0.9 1.17 1.48 1.82 0.981
400 0.83 1.17 1.63 2.1 2.55 1.308
0.739 0.981 1.308 1.666 2.039 0.327 1.145

Ke = Effective Thickness facto 406.5 406.5 #DIV/0!

0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
10 1.2 1 0.94 0.85 0.795 0.75 0.733 0.72 0.709 0.7
Span 1 400 450 0.72 0.709 0.011 6.5 0.719
Span 2 400 450 0.72 0.709 0.011 6.5 0.719
Span 3 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0!

c = Free Shrinkage Strain

40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100
420 405 380 360 330 305 275 243 205 162 115 58.5 0
50 55 380 360 20 0 380

Ke factor for Shrinkage

0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
10 1.3 1.05 0.907 0.8 0.71 0.65 0.587 0.55 0.513 0.5
Span 1 400 450 0.55 0.513 0.037 6.5 0.548
Span 2 400 450 0.55 0.513 0.037 6.5 0.548
Span 3 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0!

Ultimate Shrinkage Strain - Bending Kt

0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0 .6 0 .7 0 .8 0 .9 1 0.93143
% 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26
Kp 0.9418 0.9418 0.9418 0.9418 0.9418 0.9418 0.9418 0.9418 0.9418 0.9418 0.9418
εcs 208.9 208.9 208.9 208.9 208.9 208.9 208.9 208.9 208.9 208.9 208.9 microstrain
m 20.3909 Ec
28 32 Ø 2.3462 Ec 9.56309 Ks
= 23.75

Ultimate Shrinkage Strain - Prestress

Span1 Span2 Span3
% 0.3 0.3 0.3
Kp 0.9335 0.9335 0.9335
εcs 207.1 207.1 #DIV/0!

86

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:86 17/07/2006 17:06:01

 RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D).xls

Loads are characteristic and are for the whole bay width (not
SUMMARY! expressed as kN/m2 – unless a 1 m bay width is being analysed).
The self-weight is a user input. The construction load is intended
The first page (top part of the sheet entitled SUMMARY!) shows
to be that required to be applied during transfer (usually 1.5
input for the sub-frame analysis, i.e. dimensions and loads.
kN/m2 ). However, designers should consider the load history of
the slab to ensure worst cases are checked, e.g. temporary loads
Input should be fairly self explanatory. It should be noted that H
while casting floors above. Bay widths in the normal direction
is in the plane of the screen and b, bw etc. at right angles to the
plane of the screen. Several warnings are given under Operating do not affect
introduce the loading
a suitable unless,(in
relationship of the
course,
loadsthe user chooses to
input).
Instructions and with conditional formatting should data be
incorrect.
The current configuration being designed is shown in a chart.
This gives a scale representation of the spans, supports, loads
Supports can be made to be knife-edge by inputting K in column
and an idealised cross section of each member. Charts also show
D: remote ends of columns can be either F for fixed, or P for
representations of the tendon profiles and equivalent loads used
pinned. The line can be left blank. A support width (h below) can
in the analysis. For the tendons, a reversed parabolic profile is
be used in conjunction with a ‘K’ support so that design moments
used but minimum lengths of straight tendon are used at the
are used at the support face.
supports as recommended by Khan(16) . Service equivalent loads
are shown: those at transfer may be viewed at DETAILS!B361:
Data under ‘Normal Direction’ is used for the vibration checks.
N372.
The number of bays affects possible modes of vibration, which is
checked in accordance with CS TR43(14) . The vibration response
The next page (SUMMARY! B67:M79) is the nub of the
factors calculated are accordance with Steel Construction
spreadsheet: it has a number of key inputs and out-puts. These
Institute(18) and Concrete Society guidelines. Vibration should
include inputs of PI / Pj (initial force/ jacking force), Pf / Pj (final
not be a problem in post-tensioned slabs and beams. Normally,
force/ jacking force), number and height of tendons, and amounts
vibration response factors of 12 are used for very busy offices, 8 for of conventional reinforcement (some of the inputs are necessary
normal offices, or 4 for high specification offices or laboratories
to avoid circular arguments).
where vibration is critical.
With regard to Tendons the spreadsheet automatically calculates
Designers should be aware that the 2005 version of CS TR43- the number of tendons for each span using an algorithm. The
Appendix G gives revised recommendations on vibration.
algorithm uses either the maximum of the median stress levels,

Extract from SUMMARY!

SUMMARY ii: Tendons & bonded reinforcement

(a) TENDONS Pj= 130kN Pf/Pi= 90.0% Pf/Pj= 80.0% kN
No of STRANDS Su p t1 Sp an1 Su p t2 Sp an2 Su p t3 Sp a n3 Su p t4
Recommended 24 24 24 26 26 26 0 0 0
U se 4 4 4 4 4 4 0 0 0
Recommend'dheight 295 40 485 40 295 0
Height mm 300 40 480 480 40 300 300 0
Length Straight mm 150 150 150 0 0 0
x to max Sag mm 5311 7006 0
Pi kN 2769 2763 2760 2760 2763 2769 0 0 0
Balance Load kN 278.4 371.8 354.7 261.5 0.0 0.0
Pf kN 2521 2515 2513 2513 2515 2521 0 0 0
Balance Load kN 253.4 338.5 322.9 238.1 0.0 0.0

CHECKS 'EFFICIENCY' 52%

Tendons (a) OK 47%
Stresses at transfer (b) OK
59%
Stresses in service (c) OK
ULS MOR (d) OK 53%
Shear (e) OK 81%
Vibration (f) OK 94%
Deflection (g) OK 36%
Neutral axis depth OK
8%
Rebar stress OK
28%
GLOBAL STATU VALID DESIGN

87

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:87 17/07/2006 17:06:03

 or the maximum permitted. The spreadsheet calculates the
minimum number of strands required so that permissible concrete
DETAILS!
tensions are not exceeded at either the initial or final stage. Thus
Over nine pages, DETAILS! shows detailed calculations regarding
the numbers of tendons are then shown as recommended values,
section properties, distribution factors, moment distribution
and the user can override them if required. Once the number of
used for the sub-frame analysis, profiling constants, pre-stressing
tendons for each span has been fixed, the program attempts to
losses, balanced loads, ULS moment and shear checks, and finally
find an optimum single level of initial prestress for all strands (this
vibration.
often
force appears
requiredtogenerates
be the maximum permissible).
excessive compressive If the minimum
stresses, the
section is deemed to have failed.
DEFLECT!
Tendons are assumed to be level through supports and follow a
The deflection sheet gives details of calculations dealing with
parabolic profile between. The points of inflection are taken to be
defections.
at 1/10 of the clear span points.

Besides number of tendons, the main user control is to adjust the

value of Pf / Pj. This adjusts the number of tendons. One would
TYPICALC!
rarely need to adjust tendon heights.
This sheet is intended to illustrate typical calculations for a
particular point in a span in order to show how all the criteria
The checks carried out are listed below.
are satisfied. The sheet illustrates the transfer and service stress
checks and the calculation of Moment of Resistance carried out
■ Tendons (a) in tabular form in Graf! The point chosen is at 1/4 span and is
■ Stresses at transfer (b) highlighted in Graf!
■ Stresses in service (c)
■ ULS MOR (d) Graf!
■ Shear (e)
■ Vibration (f) Graf! provides the data for the charts of the configuration and
loads, tendon profile, equivalent loads, ULS moments and
■ Deflection (g)
■ Neutral axis depth capacities, shear envelopes, deflections, stresses at transfer
and stresses in service within SUMMARY! Each chart is plotted
■ Rebar stress at 1/20 points along each span. Many values within Graf! are
used and checked for being minima or maxima for the various
In the spreadsheet, those that are unsatisfactory are highlighted criteria. For instance it may be here that problems with hogging
and directions are given for further information. moments are found.

There are also two charts. The ‘efficiency’ chart gives the user
an idea of how hard the section is working or how far it is out. Notes!
The second chart, ultimate limit state moment envelope and
moments of resistance (capacity), should be used in conjunction This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
with choosing amounts of bonded reinforcement.

The third page (SUMMARY! B125:M171) shows stresses at transfer

and in service in both tabular and chart form. It should be noted
that, in keeping with current practice, moments are considered
at the face of columns. Thus peak moments are not necessarily
at column centrelines and moments might be different each side
of an internal column.

The convention used in the stress charts is:

■ Red squares – tension, blue circles – compression

■ Solid markers – bottom, hollow markers – top
■ Dotted lines – permissible stresses

The fourth page (SUMMARY iv) gives details of shear envelopes,

vibration and deflection together with support reactions and
column moments.

88

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:88 17/07/2006 17:06:07

 RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D).xls

RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ MATDATA!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location L e v e2-Bl e a mo nG r i d7 RMW 1 1 - A p r - 2 006 70 89
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo

Originated from R v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC

c hg - R6 8
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 - GENERAL DATA
L OCAODMB I N A T I O N S N OT E S
SLS 1 Initialpr estress + OW + construction load on all spans INPUT IS UNDERLINED.
INITIAL SLS 2 Initial prestress + OW + construction load on odd spans FRAMES ARE ASSUMED TO
SLS 3 Initial prestress + OW + construction load on even spans BE BRACED
SLS 4 Final prestress + dead + imposed load on all spans
FINAL SLS 5 Final prestress + dead + imposed load on odd spans
SLS 6 Final prestress + dead + imposed load on even spans
ULS 1 Final prestress + factored dead and imposed load on all spans
ULTIMATE ULS 2 Final prestress + factored dead + factored imposed load on odd spans
ULS 3 Final prestress + factored dead + factored imposed load on even spans
DEFLECTION SLS 7 Final prestress + dead + 30% imposed load on odd spans

LOAD FACTORS min ma x VIBRATION

DEAD 1 1.4 Limitingreponsefactor= 8
IMPOSED 0 1.6

OPTIONS Stressing Ends B (L, R,B) Prestress system U (U,B) Assume 20% max redistribution
Jacking F/strength 0.7 BS8110Class 3 (Clause4.1.3) .
Slabor beam B (B or S) Limiting crack width 0.2 mm .
In slabs, nominal top bonded reinforcement in s pan? Y (Y or N; u se Y for dissimilar spans)
Slab type S (S)olid, (R)ibbed or (W)affle, supported by beam Damping, ζ (2% to 8%) 5%

MATERIALS CONCRETE fcu=6 0 Ec28=3 2 σc = 19.80 σt = 5.80 unmodified

Atdays 4.80 fci=3 9.78 Eci=2 5.53 σic = 15.91 σit = 4.97 unmodified
Cementcontent3 30 W/Cratio0 .55 OPCorRHPC?O PC .
Ave ambient during curing = 15ºC Longterm R/H% 50 γm = 1.50

STRAND fpu = 1860 Ap, mm² = 100 µ= 0.140 K= 0.0010

Ep=1 95 Rel%=2 Drawin=6 Depthtostrandcentre=4 0

REBAR fy = 500 COVERS Top Bottom Sides

γm = 1.15 links
to 25 25 25

LOADING SEQUENCE Permanent loads for Ø assessment 30% of Imposed is permanent

L oa d @Age f c ut Et Ø Ec
kN/m² days N/mm² kN/mm² Creep kN/mm²
Own weight 13.81 4.80 39.78 25.53 3.64 5.51
Applied dead 42.00 60 64.80 33.54 2.14 10.69
Quasi-Permanent Imposed 9.60 -=-
COMBINED 65.41 - - 30.80 2.45 8.92

NOTES on MATERIALS

BRITISH
Type LOW RELAXAT
Dia ION
AreaSTRAND
Breaking Weight RELAXATION at 0.7fpu
Standard 15.2 139 1670 1.090 Ambient ºC 20 40 60 80 100
12.5 93 1770 0.730 Relaxation 1.8 3.5 5.1 7.5 10.7
Super 15.7 150 1770 1.180
12.9 100 1860 0.785
Compact 15.2 165 1820 1.295
12.7 112 1860 0.890

89

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:89 17/07/2006 17:06:08

 RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ SUMMARY! i

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location L e v e2-Bl e a mo nG r i d7 RM W 11-A p r-2 006 71 90
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job
No
Originated from RCC42.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC
c hg - R6 8
SUMMARY I : Dimensions and Loads
NORMAL DIRECTION
SPANS Lm H mm bw mm hf mm Section bf mm No Bays BAY WIDTH m
SPAN
1 12.000 525 1800 200 T 3000 5 6.000
SPAN
2 12.500 525 1800 200 T 3000 5 6.000
SPAN 3

SUPPORTS ABOVE m H mm B mm End Cond BELOW m H mm B mm End Cond

SUPPORT
1 4.000 300 600 F
SUPPORT 2 4.000 300 600 F
SUPPORT3 K
SUPPORT 4

CONFIGURATION BEAM supporting Solid Slab to BS8110 Class 3 (0.2 mm crack wi dth), fcu = 60, Stressed from Both Ends

LOADING UDLs~kN/m A(char), PLs~kN (char), Position~m

p p l i e d I m p o s e d Po s i t i o n L o a de d A p p l i e d I m p o se d Po s i t i o n L o a de d
SPAN1 OW Dea d Lo ad fr o mlef t Len g t h SPA N3 OW Dea d Lo ad fr o mlef t Len g t h
UDL 13.81 42.00 32.00 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Construction ~~~~~ ~~~~~ 18.00 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ C'strction ~~~~ ~~~~ ~~~~~ ~~~~~
SPAN 2
UDL 13.81 42.00 32.00 ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ GLOBAL STATUS
Part UDL VALID DESIGN
Construction ~~~~~ ~~~~~ 18.00 ~~~~~ ~~~~~

TENDON PROFILE (heights to strand centre: see heights specified under TENDONS below)

480

300 300

40 43

E Q U I VA E N O A D in service
400 322 kN/m 294 kN/m
241 kN/m
300 190 kN/m
200
100 0 kN/m
-62 kN/m -56 kN/m
0
-100
-200

90

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:90 17/07/2006 17:06:11

 RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D).xls

RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ SUMMARY! ii

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location L e v e2-Bl e a mo nG r i d7 RM W 1 1- A p r - 2 0 06 72 91
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC42.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC
chg - R68
SUMMARY ii: Tendons & bonded reinforcement
(a) TENDONS Pj= 130kN Pf/Pi= 90.0% Pf/Pj= 80.0% kN
No of STRANDS Su p t1 Spa n1 Su p t2 Sp an2 Su pt3 Spa n3 Su pt4
Recommended 24 24 24 26 26 26 0 0 0
U se 4 4 4 4 4 4 0 0 0
Recommend'dheight 295 40 485 40 295 0
Height mm 300 40 480 480 40 300 300 0
Length Straight mm 150 150 150 0 0 0
x to max Sag mm 5311 7006 0
Pi kN 2769 2763 2760 2760 2763 2769 0 0 0
Balance Load kN 278.4 371.8 354.7 261.5 0.0 0.0
Pf kN 2521 2515 2513 2513 2515 2521 0 0 0
Balance Load kN 253.4 338.5 322.9 238.1 0.0 0.0

CHECKS 'EFFICIENCY' 52%

Tendons (a) OK 47%
Stresses at transfer (b) OK
59%
Stresses in service (c) OK
ULS MOR (d) OK 53%
Shear (e) OK 81%
Vibration (f) OK 94%
Deflection (g) OK 36%
Neutral axis depth OK
8%
Rebar stress OK
28%
GLOBAL STATUS VALID DESIGN

REINFORCEMENT Input bonded rebar arrangement (Support bars cutailed at 0.3L)

Su p t1 Spa n1 Su p t2 Sp an2 Su pt3 Spa n3 Su pt4
Main
Øbar16 20 20 12 2020 16
No 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
% 0.426% 0.665% 0.665% 0.239% 0.665% 0.000% 0.000%
LinkØ= 10
legs
ofNo8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8

(d) With bonded reinforcement

Su p t1 Spa n1 Su p t2 Sp an2 Su pt3 Spa n3 Su pt4
Mu 42.2 1523.2 1529.6 1500.1 1766.0 11.5 0.0 0.0 0.0
MOR 1477.2 2611.6 2440.3 2440.3 1883.9 1843.1 0.0 0.0 0.0

ULS MOMENT ENVELOPE/MOR

3000

2000

1000

-1000

-2000

-3000

91

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:91 17/07/2006 17:06:14

 RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ SUMMARY! iii

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location LeveB-2leamoGnri7d RM W 11-Apr-2006 73 92
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job
No
Originated from RCC42.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC
chg - R68
SUMMARY iii STRESSES
(b) STRESSES at TRANSFER

S u p t1 S p a n1 S u p t2 S p a n2 S up t3 S p a n3 S u p t4
Tendonheight 286.8 41.8 462.3 462.4 41.9 285.2 0.0 0.0 0.0
Pi 2768.6 2762.8 2760.3 2760.3 2762.9 2768.6 0.0 0.0 0.0
MaxCompression 3.14 7.50 6.28 6.09 7.52 2.92 0.00 0.00 0.00
MaxTension 0.00 -1.69 -2.76 -2.51 -1.70 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

STRESSES AT TRANSFER
25

20

15

10

0
Com-Top Com-Btm Ten-Btmx4 Ten-Topx4 ComLimit TenLimitx4 Colcentres

(c) STRESSES in SERVICE

S u p t1 S p a n1 S u p t2 S p a n2 S up t3 S p a n3 S u p t4
Tendonh eight 286.8 40.5 462.3 462.4 40.7 285.2 0.0 0.0 0.0
Pf 2520.6 2515.5 2512.8 2512.8 2515.7 2520.6 0.0 0.0 0.0
Max
C ompression 3.55 5.54 10.44 10.56 6.79 4.07 0.00 0.00 0.00
MaxTension 0.00 -2.28 -4.35 -4.44 -3.88 -0.38 0.00 0.00 0.00

STRESSES IN SERVICE
30

25

20

15

10
5

0
Com-Top Com-Btm Ten-Btmx4 Ten-Topx4 ComLimit TenLimitx4 Colcentres

92

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:92 17/07/2006 17:06:17

 RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D).xls

RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ SUMMARY! iv

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location L e v e2-Bl e a mo nG r i d7 RMW 1 1 - A p r - 2 00 6 7 4 93
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job
No
Originated from RCC42.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68
SUMMARY iv
(e) HEAR Link Ø = 10
Sp1a n Sp2a n Sp3a n
Left Right Left Right Left Right
V 636.2 881.9 919.1 678.1 0.0 0.0
cracked?N Y Y N N N
Vc 1629.0 733.0 753.3 1629.0 0.0 0.0
legsof No 8 8 8 8 8 8
Link spacing 37 5 375 37 5 375 0 0

ULS SHEAR ENVELOPE

1500
1000 938.5
650.6
500
0 0.0
-500
-678.1
-1000 -901.3

-1500

(f) IB RA IO N Sp a1n Spa2n Sp a3n

Responsefactor 0.60 0.61 0.00
OK OK OK

(g) DEFLECTION

MAX DEFLECTIONS
15
10
5 7.97
6.88
0
-5 0.00
0.0
-10
-8.4
-15
-13.7
-20 Transfer Final Colcentres Zeroaxis

Span1=8.6mm <48 OK Span2=14mm< 50 OK

- -

SUPPORT REACTIONS Su p1 t Su p2t Su p3t Su p4t

ULS 4 650.6 1839.8 678.1 0.0 kN
ULS
5 655.6 1361.7 232.2 0.0 kN
ULS
6 199.2 1409.0 678.1 0.0 kN
DEAD 274.6 803.5 289.2 0.0 kN
IMPOSED 147.0 484.4 152.6 0.0 kN

COLUMN MOMENTS Su p1 t Su p2t Su p3t Su p4t

ULS 4 Above 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 kNm
Below 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 kNm
ULS 5 Above 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 kNm
Below 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 kNm
ULS 6 Above 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 kNm
Below 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 kNm

93

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:93 17/07/2006 17:06:19

 RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ TYPICALC!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Madeby Date Page
Location Level 2 - Beam on Grid 7 RM W 1 1 -A p r - 0 6 75
94
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC42.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC c hg - R 68
TYPICAL CALCULATION BS 8110
for Span 1 at 3.60 m from C/L of LH suppor Reference
Class 3 Tee section, h = 525 mm, bw = 1800 mm hf = 200 mm, bf =3000 mm.
Ac = 1185000mm2, Z top = 120.0E6 mm³, and Z bottom = 93.3E6 mm³
Tendons are unbonded, Ap = 100mm2, fpu = 1,860 N/mm2 and 75.9 mm from soffite
There are 24 tendons, jacked to 1,302 N/mm² or 70.0% fpu
Prestress losses at this section are -2,504.4 kN at transfer and -2,256.6 kN longterm

(b) Stresses at transfer 4.3.5

M = 395.0 kNm hogging, and prestressing force = 2,764.8 k
Max compression (bottom) = M/Z + P/A = 395.0E3 / 93.3 + 2,764.8 / 1185 = 6.57 N/mm²
< 15.91 N/mm² allowed

Max tension (bottom) = M/Z - P/A = -159.0E3 / 93.3 - 2,764.8 / 1185 = 0.96 N/mm²
< 4.66 N/mm² allowed
(c) Stresses in service 4.3.4
M = 397.1 kNm sagging, and prestressing force = 2,517.0 kN
Max compression (top) = 397.12E6 / 120.0E6 + 2,517.0E3 / 1185E3 = 5.43 N/mm
< 20.00 N/mm² allowed

Max tension (bottom) = 397.12 / 93.3 - 2,517.0 / 1185 = 2.13 N/mm²

< 5.49 N/mm² allowed
(d) MOR at ultimate limit state 4.3.7
M = 1,383.7 kNm sagging, and prestressing force = 2,517.0 kN
fpe = 1000 x 2,517.0 / 24 / 100 = 1,048.8 N/mm²
Reinforcement d = 480 mm
Rp = 1860 x 100 x 24 / 60 / 3000 / (525 - 75.86) = 0.055
fpe/fpu = 1,048.8 / 1860 x 1.15 = 0.648
Lte = 12,250 mm
fpb (unbonded)
= 1,048.8 + 7000 x (525 - 75.86) / 12,250 (1 - 1.7 x 0.055) = 1,281.3 N/mm² Eq 52
Tendon force = 1,281.3 x 24 x 100 / 1000 = 3,075.2 kN
Rebar force = 500 / 1.15 x 6,283 / 1000 = 2,731.8 kN

Total tensile force = 3,075.2 + 2,731.8 = 5,807.0 kN

Compression block depth, dn = 1000 / 5,807.0 / 0.45 / 60 / 3000 = 71.69 mm
MOR = (3,075.2 ( 525 - 75.9 - 71.69 / 2) + 2,731.8 x (480 - 71.69 / 2)) / 1000 Eq 51
= 2,484.3 kNm > 1,383.7 ok

94

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:94 17/07/2006 17:06:22

 RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D).xls

RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ DETAILS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location L e vB-e2el a m
oGnr i7d RMW 11 - A p r - 2 0 0 6 95
76
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC42.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC c hg - R68

DETAILED CALCULATIONS
SECTION PROPERTIES
S u p1t S p a1n S u p2t S p a2n S u p3t 0 0
Flange area, Af 240000 240000 0
Web area, Aw 945000 945000 0
Total area, Ac 1E+06 1E+06 0
Flange
Yf 100 100 0
Web Yw 262.5 262.5 0
Σ = Ac.Yt 3E+08 3E+08 0
Yt 229.59 229.59 0.00
Yb 295.41 295.41 0.00
If 5E+09 5E+09 0
Iw 2E+10 2E+10 0
Σ = Ixx 3E+10 3E+10 0
Zt 1E+08 1E+08 0
Zb 9E+07 9E+07 0
em 4.59 255.41 184.59 184.59 255.41 4.59 300.00 0.00 #VALUE!
St 1.045 -1.521 2.822 2.822 -1.521 1.045 0.000 0.000 0.000
Sb 0.942 4.244 -1.345 -1.345 4.244 0.942 0.000 0.000 0.000

DISTRIBUTION FACTORS
S1U P T S2U P T S3U P T S4
U PT
U pc o l Lcoo l R L U pc o l Lcoo l R L U pc o l Lcoo l R L U pc o l Lcoo l
I 0 1.4E+09 2.8E+10 2.8E+10 0 1.4E+09 2.8E+10 2.8E+10 0 0 0 0 0 0
Stiffness 0 3.4E+08 2.3E+09 2.3E+09 0 3.4E+08 2.2E+09 2.2E+09 0 0 0 0 0 0
Sum 2.6E+09 4.8E+09 2.2E+09 0
Factor 0. 00 0 0 0 .1 2 8 1 0. 8 7 1 9 0 .4 7 4 6 0. 0 00 0 0. 0 69 7 0 .4 5 5 6 1 . 0 00 0 0. 0 00 0 0. 0 00 0 0 .0 00 0 1 .0 00 0 0 .0 0 00 0 .0 0 00

Partial UDL factors

1 2 3
a 0 0 0
b 0 0 0

FIXED END MOMENTS

OWN S P A N1 S P A N2 S P A N3 A PPL I ED E A D S P A N1 S P A N2 SPAN 3
WEIGHT
Cant 994.0 1078.6 0.0 Cant 3024.0 3281.3 0.0
UDL 165.7 165.7 179.8 179.8 0.0 0.0 UDL 504.0 504.0 546.9 546.9 0.0 0.0
PL1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! PL1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
PL2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! PL2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
partUDL 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 partUDL 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
FEM 1 6 5 .7 165 .7 179 .8 179 .8 0. 0 0. 0 FEM 5 0 4 . 0 50 4 .0 54 6.9 54 6.9 0 .0 0 .0
I MPO S ED C O N ST R UC T IO N
Cant 2304.02 500.0 0.0 Cant 1296.0 1406.3 0.0
UDL 384.0 384.0 416.7 416.7 0.0 0.0 UDL 216.0 216.0 234.4 234.4 0.0 0.0
PL1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! FEM 216.0 216.0 234.4 234.4 0.0 0.0
PL2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
partUDL 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
FEM 384 .0 384 .0 4 16.7 4 16.7 0. 0 0. 0

MOMENT DISTRIBUTION
HiCol SUPT 1 Lo C ol H iC o l SUPT 2 Lo C o l H iC o l SUPT 3 LoC o l H iC o l SUPT 4 LoCol
OWN -165.7 165.7 0.0 0.0
WEIGHT 0.0 144.4 21.2 0.0 -78.6 -75.5 -11.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
ODD -39.3 72.2 0.0 -37.7 0.0 0.0
SPANS 0.0 34.3 5.0 0.0 -34.3 -32.9 -5.0 0.0 37.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-17.1 17.1 18.9 -16.5 0.0 0.0

0.0 14.9
-8.5 2.2 0.0 -17.1
7.5 -16.4
8.2 -2.5 0.0 16.5
-8.2 0.0
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 0.0
0.0 7.5 1.1 0.0 -7.5 -7.2 -1.1 0.0 8.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-3.7 3.7 4.1 -3.6 0.0 0.0
0.0 3.2 0.5 0.0 -3.7 -3.6 -0.5 0.0 3.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-1.9 1.6 1.8 -1.8 0.0 0.0
0.0 1.6 0.2 0.0 -1.6 -1.6 -0.2 0.0 1.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-0.8 0.8 0.9 -0.8 0.0 0.0
0.0 0.7 0.1 0.0 -0.8 -0.8 -0.1 0.0 0.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0. 0 - 3 0. 4 30 .4 0. 0 12 5.1 - 104 .0 - 21.1 0. 0 0. 0 0. 0 0. 0 0 .0 0 .0 0 .0

95

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:95 17/07/2006 17:06:24

 RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ DETAILS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location Le vB-e2el a m
oGnri7d RMW 11 - A p r-2 0 0 6 77
96
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job
No
Originated from RCC42.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC ch g - R68
DETAILED CALCULATIONS ii
HiCol SUPT 1 Lo C o l Hi C o l SUPT 2 Lo C o l Hi C o l SUPT 3 Lo C o l Hi C o l SUPT 4 LoCol
OWN -179.8 179.8
WEIGHT 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 85.3 81.9 12.5 0.0 -179.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
EVEN 42.7 0.0 -89.9 41.0 0.0 0.0
SPANS 0.0 -37.2 -5.5 0.0 42.7 41.0 6.3 0.0 -41.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
21.3 -18.6 -20.5 20.5 0.0 0.0
0.0 -18.6 -2.7 0.0 18.5 17.8 2.7 0.0 -20.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
9.3 -9.3 -10.2 8.9 0.0 0.0
0.0 -8.1 -1.2 0.0 9.3 8.9 1.4 0.0 -8.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
4.6 -4.0 -4.5 4.5 0.0 0.0
0.0 -4.0 -0.6 0.0 4.0 3.9 0.6 0.0 -4.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
2.0 -2.0 -2.2 1.9 0.0 0.0
0.0 -1.8 -0.3 0.0 2.0 1.9 0.3 0.0 -1.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
1.0 -0.9 -1.0 1.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 -0.9 -0.1 0.0 0.9 0.8 0.1 0.0 -1.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0. 0 1 0. 4 - 1 0. 4 0 .0 1 2 7 .9 - 1 51 .8 2 3 .9 0.0 0 .0 0. 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 .0
IMPOSED -384.0 384.0 0.0 0.0
ODD 0.0 334.8 49.2 0.0 -182.3 -175.0 -26.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SPANS -91.1 167.4 0.0 -87.5 0.0 0.0
0.0 79.5 11.7 0.0 -79.5 -76.3 -11.7 0.0 87.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-39.7 39.7 43.7 -38.1 0.0 0.0
0.0 34.6 5.1 0.0 -39.6 -38.0 -5.8 0.0 38.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-19.8 17.3 19.1 -19.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 17.3 2.5 0.0 -17.3 -16.6 -2.5 0.0 19.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-8.6 8.6 9.5 -8.3 0.0 0.0

0.0 7.5
-4.3 1.1 0.0 -8.6
3.8 -8.3
4.1 -1.3 0.0 8.3
-4.1 0.0
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 0.0
0.0 3.8 0.6 0.0 -3.8 -3.6 -0.6 0.0 4.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-1.9 1.9 2.1 -1.8 0.0 0.0
0.0 1.6 0.2 0.0 -1.9 -1.8 -0.3 0.0 1.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0. 0 - 7 0. 4 7 0 .4 0 .0 2 8 9 .9 - 24 1.0 -48.9 0.0 0 .0 0. 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 .0
IMPOSED -416.7 416.7 0.0
EVEN 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 197.8 189.8 29.1 0.0 -416.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SPANS 98.9 0.0 -208.3 94.9 0.0 0.0
0.0 -86.2 -12.7 0.0 98.9 94.9 14.5 0.0 -94.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
49.4 -43.1 -47.5 47.5 0.0 0.0
0.0 -43.1 -6.3 0.0 43.0 41.3 6.3 0.0 -47.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
21.5 -21.6 -23.7 20.6 0.0 0.0
0.0 -18.7 -2.8 0.0 21.5 20.6 3.2 0.0 -20.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
10.7 -9.4 -10.3 10.3 0.0 0.0
0.0 -9.4 -1.4 0.0 9.3 9.0 1.4 0.0 -10.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
4.7 -4.7 -5.2 4.5 0.0 0.0
0.0 -4.1 -0.6 0.0 4.7 4.5 0.7 0.0 -4.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
2.3 -2.0 -2.2 2.2 0.0 0.0
0.0 -2.0 -0.3 0.0 2.0 1.9 0.3 0.0 -2.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0. 0 24 . 0 - 2 4 .0 0 .0 2 9 6. 4 - 3 5 1 .8 55 .4 0.0 0 .0 0. 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 .0
APPLID -504.0 504.0 0.0 0.0
DEAD 0.0 439.4 64.6 0.0 -239.2 -229.6 -35.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
ODD -119.6 219.7 0.0 -114.8 0.0 0.0
SPANS 0.0 104.3 15.3 0.0 -104.3 -100.1 -15.3 0.0 114.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-52.1 52.1 57.4 -50.1 0.0 0.0
0.0 45.5 6.7 0.0 -52.0 -49.9 -7.6 0.0 50.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-26.0 22.7 25.0 -25.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 22.7 3.3 0.0 -22.7 -21.8 -3.3 0.0 25.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-11.3 11.3 12.5 -10.9 0.0 0.0
0.0 9.9 1.5 0.0 -11.3 -10.8 -1.7 0.0 10.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-5.7 4.9 5.4 -5.4 0.0 0.0
0.0 4.9 0.7 0.0 -4.9 -4.7 -0.7 0.0 5.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-2.5 2.5 2.7 -2.4 0.0 0.0
0.0 2.1 0.3 0.0 -2.5 -2.4 -0.4 0.0 2.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0. 0 -92.4 9 2. 4 0 .0 3 8 0 .5 - 3 16. 3 - 64 . 2 0.0 0 .0 0. 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 .0

96

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:96 17/07/2006 17:06:27

 RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D).xls

RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ DETAILS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location Le vB-e2el a m
oGnr i7d R MW 11- A p r - 2 0 0 6 97
78
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC42.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC c hg - R68
DETAILED CALCULATIONS iii
HiCol SUPT 1 LoC ol HiC o l SUPT 2 LoC o l HiC o l SUPT 3 LoC o l HiC o l SUPT 4 LoCol
APPLID -546.9 546.9 0.0
DEAD 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 259.6 249.2 38.1 0.0 -546.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
EVEN 129.8 0.0 -273.4 124.6 0.0 0.0
SPANS 0.0 -113.2 -16.6 0.0 129.8 124.6 19.1 0.0 -124.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
64.9 -56.6 -62.3 62.3 0.0 0.0
0.0 -56.6 -8.3 0.0 56.4 54.2 8.3 0.0 -62.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
28.2 -28.3 -31.1 27.1 0.0 0.0
0.0 -24.6 -3.6 0.0 28.2 27.1 4.1 0.0 -27.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
14.1 -12.3 -13.5 13.5 0.0 0.0
0.0 -12.3 -1.8 0.0 12.3 11.8 1.8 0.0 -13.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
6.1 -6.1 -6.8 5.9 0.0 0.0
0.0 -5.3 -0.8 0.0 6.1 5.9 0.9 0.0 -5.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
3.1 -2.7 -2.9 2.9 0.0 0.0
0.0 -2.7 -0.4 0.0 2.7 2.6 0.4 0.0 -2.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 3 1 .5 -3 1 .5 0.0 3 89 .0 -4 61 . 8 7 2.7 0.0 0 .0 0.0 0 .0 0.0 0 .0 0. 0
S -216.0 216.0 0.0 0.0
N
A
P 0.0 188.3 27.7 0.0 -102.5 -98.4 -15.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
S
D -51.3 94.2 0.0 -49.2 0.0 0.0
D
O 0.0 44.7 6.6 0.0 -44.7 -42.9 -6.6 0.0 49.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
N
IO -22.3 22.3 24.6 -21.5 0.0 0.0
T
C 0.0 19.5 2.9 0.0 -22.3 -21.4 -3.3 0.0 21.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
U
R
T -11.1 9.7 10.7 -10.7 0.0 0.0
S
N 0.0 9.7 1.4 0.0 -9.7 -9.3 -1.4 0.0 10.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
O
C
-4.9 4.9 5.3 -4.7 0.0 0.0
0.0 4.2 0.6 0.0 -4.8 -4.6 -0.7 0.0 4.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-2.4 2.1 2.3 -2.3 0.0 0.0
0.0 2.1 0.3 0.0 -2.1 -2.0 -0.3 0.0 2.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

0.0 -1.1
0.9 0.1 0.0 1.1
-1.1 1.2
-1.0 -0.2 0.0 -1.0
1.0 0.0
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 0.0
0.0 -3 9. 6 3 9 .6 0.0 163 . 1 -1 3 5 .6 - 2 7.5 0.0 0 .0 0.0 0 .0 0.0 0 .0 0. 0
S -234.4 234.4
N
A
P 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 111.2 106.8 16.3 0.0 -234.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
S
N 55.6 0.0 -117.2 53.4 0.0 0.0
E
V
E 0.0 -48.5 -7.1 0.0 55.6 53.4 8.2 0.0 -53.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
:
N 27.8 -24.2 -26.7 26.7 0.0 0.0
O
I
T 0.0 -24.2 -3.6 0.0 24.2 23.2 3.6 0.0 -26.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
C
U
R 12.1 -12.1 -13.3 11.6 0.0 0.0
T
S 0.0 -10.5 -1.5 0.0 12.1 11.6 1.8 0.0 -11.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
N
O
C 6.0 -5.3 -5.8 5.8 0.0 0.0
0.0 -5.3 -0.8 0.0 5.3 5.0 0.8 0.0 -5.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
2.6 -2.6 -2.9 2.5 0.0 0.0
0.0 -2.3 -0.3 0.0 2.6 2.5 0.4 0.0 -2.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
1.3 -1.1 -1.3 1.3 0.0 0.0
0.0 -1.1 -0.2 0.0 1.1 1.1 0.2 0.0 -1.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 1 3 .5 -1 3 .5 0.0 1 66.7 - 1 9 7.9 3 1 .2 0.0 0 .0 0.0 0 .0 0.0 0 .0 0. 0

ELASTIC SUPPORT MOMENTS

BEFOREE QUIVALENTLO ADING (3.2.1.2.2)
S U P T1 S U P T2 S U P T3 S U P T4
LEFT RIG H T LEFT RIG H T
SLS1 46.1 582.8 589.2 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS2 59.6 416.0 391.3 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS3 6.5 419.7 453.7 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS4 127.2 1608.8 1626.7 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS5 151.3 1312.4 1274.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS6 56.8 1318.9 1385.7 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS
7 102.0 1109.4 1139.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 102 1109

ULS1 187.4 2369.6 2395.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 Minload 1 x dead

ULS2 242.6 1688.5 1587.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 Maxload 0 xdead+ 1 x imposed(Table 2.1)
ULS3 25.7 1703.5 1842.2 0.0 0.0 0.0

REDISTRIBUTION 20% (3.2.2.1)

ßb-8 0% ßb+1 10%
Max
M 194.1 1916.7 0.0 0.0
ULS1 194.1 1916.7 1916.7 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS2 194.1 1857.4 1746.3 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS3 28.2 1873.9 1916.7 0.0 0.0 0.0

97

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:97 17/07/2006 17:06:30

 RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ DETAILS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location Le vB-e2el a m
oGnr i7d RM W 1 1 - A p r - 2 0 06 79
98
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC42.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68
DETAILED CALCULATIONS iv
TOTAL LOADS
Sp1a n Sp2a n 0
UDL P L1 P L2 p a r tU D UDL P L1 P L2 p a r tU D UDL P L1 P L2 p a r tU D
SLS1 381.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 397.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS2 381.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 172.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS3 165.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 397.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS4 1053.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 1097.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS5 1053.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 697.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS6 669.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 1097.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS7 784.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 817.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS1 1551.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 1616.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS2 1551.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 697.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS3 669.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 1616.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

SUPPORT SHEARS BEFORE EQUIVALENT LOADING

Sp1a n Sp2a n S p3a n
SLS
1 146.1 235.6 245.9 151.6 0.0 0.0
SLS
2 161.1 220.5 117.6 55.0 0.0 0.0
SLS
3 48.4 117.3 235.1 162.5 0.0 0.0
SLS
4 403.4 650.3 678.9 418.7 0.0 0.0
SLS
5 430.1 623.6 450.8 246.8 0.0 0.0
SLS
6 229.7 440.0 659.6 437.9 0.0 0.0
SLS
7 308.5 476.4 499.9 317.6 0.0 0.0
ULS
1 632.4 919.5 961.6 655.0 0.0 0.0

ULS
2 637.4 914.6 488.5 209.1 0.0 0.0
ULS
3 181.0 488.6 961.6 655.0 0.0 0.0

SLS SPAN MOMENTBEFORE EQUIVALENT LOADING

SPAN 1 Le f t <> P L1 <> P L2 <> Rig h t Lo ad i n g s 0 0
Elastic V SLS3 48.4 0 48.4 0 48.4 100 117.3 13.81 0.00 0.00 0.00
SLS5 430.1 0 430.1 0 430.1 100 623.6 87.81 0.00 0.00 0.00
X bar SLS3 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 3.506 1
SLS5 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 4.898 MAX
Span M SLS3 6.5 -6.5 -6.5 -6.5 -6.5 78.4 419.7 78.4
SLS5 151.3 -151.3 -151.3 -151.3 -151.3 902.0 1312.4 902.0 at 4.898
SPAN 2 0 0
Elastic V SLS2 117.6 0 117.6 0 117.6 100 55.0 13.81 0.00 0.00 0.00
SLS6 659.6 0 659.6 0 659.6 100 437.9 87.81 0.00 0.00 0.00
X bar SLS
2 0.000 0 0.000 0 8.518 1
SLS
6 0.000 0 0.000 0 7.512 MAX
Span M SLS2 391.3 -391.3 -391.3 -391.3 -391.3 109.5 0.0 109.5
SLS6 1385.7 -1385.7 -1385.7 -1385.7 -1385.7 1092.1 0.0 1092.1 at 7.512
SPAN 3 0 0
Elastic V SLS3 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
SLS5 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
X bar SLS
3 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0
SLS
5 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 MAX
Span M SLS 3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 at 0.000

ENDONS (a)SuBreaking
p1t
load = 186.0
Sp a1n Su p2t
Assume 104.2
Sp a2n
kN max per strand
Su p3t 0 0
Pfmin 0 1181.3 1980.2 2217.7 1750.2 -6164.2 0.0 0.0 0 2217.7 min 0
Pfmax 16289.9 4209.4 7334.2 7244.9 4293.3 16234.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 4209.4 max
MIN 1980.2 2217.7 0.0
MAX 4209.4O 4293.3 O 0.0 O 104.2 Pf per strand
Recomm'ed Number 24 26 1 0.225
Actual Number 24 24 0 Max(MIN):Min(MAX)
= 0
Recomm'ed
heights 40 40 0 Margin
OK

98

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:98 17/07/2006 17:06:33

 RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D).xls

RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ DETAILS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location Le vB-e2el a m
oGnr i7d R MW 11 - A p r - 2 0 0 6 99
80
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC42.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68
DETAILED CALCULATIONS v
PROFILING S p 1a n S p 2a n 0
a 1050 1100 0
X -0.692 0.4091 0
Y -1.758 -1.846 0
Z 0.9103 0.8988 0
b 5161 6856 0
c 1050 1250 0
net
L 11700 12350 0
y1 260 440 0
y3 440 260 0
A1 -5E-05 -6E-05 0
A2 1E-05 1E-05 0
A3 -6E-05 -4E-05 0
ya 207.1 369.4 0.0
yc 369.4 200.8 0.0 STRESSING LENGTHS
Stressed from BOTH ends
PRESTRESS LOSSES Pj=1 30kN Ap=1 00 Ltmax=2 4650 SPAN No Length AVGE
S up1t S p a1n S up2t S p a2n S up3t 0 0 24 24650
FRICTION & WOBBLE 1 0 24650 24650
Angle θ 0.101 0.135 0.128 0.095 0.000 0.000 0 12300
x left 0 5161 11700 11700 18556 24050 24050 24050 24050 24 24650
0 6856 12350 12350 12350 12350 2 0 12650 24650
0 0 0 0 12650
x right 24050 18889 12350 12350 5494 0 0 0 0 0 24650
24050 18889 12350 12350 5494 0 3 0 12650 0
11700 6539 0 0 0
um θ left 0 0.202 0.471 0.471 0.727 0.917 0.917 0.917 0.917

0.000 0.257 0.446 0.446 0.446 0.446

0.000 0.000 0.000
m θ right 0.917 0.715 0.446 0.446 0.189 0.000 0.000 0.000 0
0.917 0.715 0.446 0.446 0.189 0
0.471 0.269 0
from left 0.0 102.6 233.3 233.3 354.4 441.7 441.7 441.7 441.7
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Sum 0.0 102.6 233.3 233.3 354.4 441.7 441.7 441.7 441.7
from right 441.7 350.6 225.2 225.2 98.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Sum 441.7 350.6 225.2 225.2 98.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Deanna Troi's Table
Loss 220.8 226.6 229.2 229.2 226.4 220.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 for Bonded Tendons
DRAW-IN ß Z Pi
x left 300 5461 12000 12300 19156 24650 24650 24650 24650 0.0008 12227 111.1 1Left
300 7156 12650 12650 12650 12650 0.0000 0 0.0 2 Left
0 0 0 0.0000 0 0.0 3Left
x right24350 19189 12650 12350 5494 0 0 0 0 0.0000 0 0.0 Right
1
24350 19189 12650 12350 5494 0 0.0007 12522 111.5 2 Right
12000 6839 300 0.0000 0 0.0 3Right
Px left (B) 2671.1 2768.0 2890.9 2665.5 2665.5 2665.5 2665.5 2665.5 2665.5
x right (B) 2676.3 2676.3 2676.3 2897.5 2774.7 2676.3 0.0 0.0 0.0
Loss 113.9 113.9 113.9 113.9 113.9 113.9 0.0 0.0 0.0
ELASTIC LOSS
Loss 21.4 21.4 21.4 21.4 21.4 21.4 0.0 0.0 0.0
Σ losses 356.2 361.9 364.5 364.5 361.7 356.2 0.0 0.0 0.0
Ini t i aFl o rc e 2 76 9 276 3 2 76 0 2 76 0 2 76 3 2 76 9 0 0 0
RELAXATION
Loss 55.4 55.3 55.2 55.2 55.3 55.4 0.0 0.0 0.0
SHRINKAGE
Loss 96.9 96.9 96.9 96.9 96.9 96.9 0.0 0.0 0.0
CREEP
Loss 95.7 95.5 95.4 95.4 95.5 95.7 0.0 0.0 0.0
Σ losses 248.0 247.7 247.5 247.5 247.7 248.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
F i naFl o r ce 2 5 2 1 2 5 15 2 5 13 2 51 3 2 51 5 2 52 1 0 0 0

99

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:99 17/07/2006 17:06:36

 RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ DETAILS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Madeby D ate Page
Location Le vB
e-2el a m
oGnri7
d RMW 11 - A p r- 2 0 06 100
81
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC42.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC c hg - R68
DETAILED CALCULATIONS vi

BALANCE LOADS
S u1p t S p 1a n S u2p t Sp2
an S u3pt 0 0
Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right
y1 260 260 440 440 440 440 260 260 0 0 0 0
a 1050 1050 1050 1050 1100 1100 1250 1250 0 0 0 0
b 5161 5161 6539 6 539 6 856 6 856 5 494 5494 0 0 0 0
INITIAL PRESTRESS
V1=-We 278.41 371.80 354.66 261.52 0.00 0.00
UDL 265.1 -67.7 -67.7 354.1 322.4 -61.6 61.6 209.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
FINAL PRESTRESS
V1=-We 253.45 338.47 322.87 238.07 0.00 0.00
UDL 241.4 -61.7 -61.7 322.4 293.5 -56.1 56.1 190.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

BALANCE LOAD FE S1p a n S2p a n 0

Left Right Left Right Left Right
CENTRE a/L 0.343 0.460 0.000
LEFT b/L 0.271 0.330 0.100
factor 0.132 0 .055 0.130 0 .073 0.081 0.009
FEMi - 442.5 -185.2 -577.7 -324.5 0.0 0.0
FEMf -402.9 -168.6 -525.9 -295.5 0.0 0.0
CENTRE a/L 0.457 0.340 0.800
RIGHT b/L 0.671 0.730 0.500
factor 0.073 0.130 0.055 0.132 0.098 0.098
FEMi - 324.7 -582.0 -179.7 -432.8 0.0 0.0
FEMf -295.6 -529.8 -163.6 -394.0 0.0 0.0
LEFT a/L 0.088 0.088 #DIV/0!
END b/L 0.056 0.056 #DIV/0!
factor 0.049 0.004 0.049 0.003 #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
FEMi 163.5 11.7 216.0 1 5.5 0.0 0.0
FEMf 148.8 1 0.7 196.6 1 4.1 0.0 0.0
RIGHT a/L 0.088 0.100 #DIV/0!
END b/L 0.944 0.950 #DIV/0!
factor 0.004 0.049 0.003 0.044 #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
FEMi 1 5.7 2 18.3 10.1 142.5 0.0 0.0
FEMf 1 4.3 1 98.7 9.2 129.7 0.0 0.0
TOTALS FE Mi - 5 88 . 1 - 537 .2 - 53 1.3 - 59 9 . 4 0 .0 0. 0
FE Mf - 535. 4 - 48 9 .0 - 48 3.7 - 54 5.7 0 .0 0. 0

BALANCE LOAD MOMENT DISTRIBUTION

HiCol SUPT 1 Lo Co l H iC o l SUPT 2 Lo C o l H iC o l SUPT 3 Lo C o l Hi C o l SUPT 4 LoCol
INITIAL 588.1 -537.2 531.3 -599.4 0.0 0.0
0.0 -512.7 - 75.3 0.0 2.8 2.7 0.4 0.0 599.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
1.4 -256.4 299.7 1.3 0.0 0.0
0.0 -1.2 -0.2 0.0 -20.6 -19.7 -3.0 0.0 -1.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-10.3 -0.6 -0.7 -9.9 0.0 0.0
0.0 9.0 1.3 0.0 0.6 0.6 0.1 0.0 9.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.3 4.5 4.9 0.3 0.0 0.0
0.0 -0.3 0.0 0.0 -4.5 -4.3 -0.7 0.0 -0.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-2.2 -0.1 -0.1 -2.1 0.0 0.0
0.0 1.9 0.3 0.0 0.1 0.1 0.0 0.0 2.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.1 1.0 1.1 0.1 0.0 0.0
0.0 -0.1 0.0 0.0 -1.0 -0.9 -0.1 0.0 -0.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-0.5 0.0 0.0 -0.5 0.0 0.0
0.0 0.4 0.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0 .0 7 3.9 - 7 3.9 0. 0 - 8 11. 3 8 14 .6 - 3. 3 0 .0 0. 0 0 .0 0 .0 0. 0 0 .0 0. 0
2nd'y M 0.0 61.2 -61.2 0.0 -301.3 3 04.6 0.0 0.0 12.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 #VALUE! 0.0
FINAL 535.4 -489.0 483.7 -545.7 0.0 0.0
0.0 -466.8 -68.6 0.0 2.5 2.4 0.4 0.0 545.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
1.3 -233.4 272.8 1.2 0.0 0.0
0.0 -1.1 -0.2 0.0 -18.7 -18.0 -2.8 0.0 -1.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-9.4 -0.6 -0.6 -9.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 8.2 1.2 0.0 0.6 0.5 0.1 0.0 9.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.3 4.1 4.5 0.3 0.0 0.0
0.0 -0.2 0.0 0.0 -4.1 -3.9 -0.6 0.0 -0.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-2.0 -0.1 -0.1 -2.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 1.8 0.3 0.0 0.1 0.1 0.0 0.0 2.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.1 0.9 1.0 0.1 0.0 0.0
0.0 -0.1 0.0 0.0 -0.9 -0.8 -0.1 0.0 -0.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-0.4 0.0 0.0 -0.4 0.0 0.0
0.0 0.4 0.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0 .0 67.3 - 67.3 0. 0 - 73 8. 6 74 1 . 6 - 3. 0 0 .0 0. 0 0 .0 0 .0 0. 0 0 .0 0. 0
2nd'ryM 0.0 55.7 -55.7 0.0 -274.3 277.3 0.0 0.0 11.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

100

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:100 17/07/2006 17:06:40

 RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D).xls

RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ DETAILS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location L e vB-e2ela m
oGnr i7d RM W 11- A p r - 2 00 6 101
82
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job
No
Originated from RCC42.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC c hg - R68
DETAILED CALCULATIONS vii
SUPPORT MOMENTSWITH EQUIVALENT LOADING
S U P T1 S U P T2 S U PT3 S U P T4
LE F T R IG H T LE F T RI G H T
SLS1 -27.8 -228.6 -225.4 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS2 -14.3 -395.3 -423.3 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS3 -67.4 -391.6 -360.9 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS4 60.0 870.2 885.1 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS5 84.0 573.8 533.2 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS6 -10.4 580.3 644.1 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS7 34.7 370.9 397.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS1 126.8 1178.1 1175.1 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS2 126.8 1118.8 1004.7 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS3 -39.1 1135.3 1175.1 0.0 0.0 0.0
DEAD 25.1 748.2 756.6 11.5 0.0 0.0
IMPOSED 46.4 586.3 592.8 0.0 0.0 0.0

SUPPORT SHEARS WITH EQUIVALENT LOADING

S p1 a n S p2a n 0 .0
SLS1 166.1 -20.0 215.6 220.5 25.4 177.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS2 181.1 -20.0 200.5 92.2 25.4 80.4 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS3 68.4 -20.0 97.3 209.7 25.4 187.9 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS4 421.6 -18.2 632.1 655.8 23.1 441.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS5 448.3 -18.2 605.4 427.7 23.1 269.9 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS6 247.9 -18.2 421.8 636.5 23.1 461.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS7 326.7 -18.2 458.2 476.8 23.1 340.7 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS1 650.6 -18.2 901.3 938.5 23.1 678.1 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS2 655.6 -18.2 896.4 465.4 23.1 232.2 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS3 199.2 -18.2 470.4 938.5 23.1 678.1 0.0 0.0 0.0
DEAD 274.6 395.1 408.4 289.2 0.0 0.0
IMPOSED 147.0 237.0 247.4 152.6 0.0 0.0
ELASTIC
ULS1 612.3 -18.2 939.6 976.9 23.1 639.7 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS2 673.7 -18.2 878.2 452.7 23.1 244.9 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS3 213.2 -18.2 456.4 932.6 23.1 684.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

ADJUSTED SPAN MOMENTS Loadings 0 0

Sp an1 L e ft <> PL 1 <> PL 2 <> R ig h t U DL PL 1 P L2 p U DL
V SLS1 166.1 0 166.1 0 166.1 100 215.6 31.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS2 181.1 0 181.1 0 181.1 100 200.5 31.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS
3 68.4 0 68.4 0 68.4 100 97.3 13.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS4 421.6 0 421.6 0 421.6 100 632.1 87.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS5 448.3 0 448.3 0 448.3 100 605.4 87.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS6 247.9 0 247.9 0 247.9 100 421.8 55.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
7 SLS 65.40 .0 0.0 0.0
ULS1 650.6 0 650.6 0 650.6 100 901.3 129.3 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS2 655.6 0 655.6 0 655.6 100 896.4 129.3 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS3 199.2 0 199.2 0 199.2 100 470.4 55.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
Xbar SLS1 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 5.223
SLS2 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 5.695
SLS3 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 4.955
SLS4 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 4.801
SLS5 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 5.105
SLS6 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 4.442
ULS1 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 5.031
ULS2 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 5.069
ULS3 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 3.570
M SLS1 -15.1 15.1 15.1 15.1 15.1 449.0 281.4 M Xb a r Th e ig h t
SLS2 -1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 517.4 114.7 517.4 max @ 5.695 41.8
SLS3 -54.7 54.7 54.7 54.7 54.7 224.2 118.4 224.2 min @4 .955 41.5
SLS4 71.5 -71.5 -71.5 -71.5 -71.5 940.6 1334.5
SLS5 95.5 -95.5 -95.5 -95.5 -95.5 1048.8 1038.1 1048.8 max @5 .105 40.5
SLS6 1.1 -1.1 -1.1 -1.1 -1.1 549.4 1044.6 549.4 min @4 .442 49.3
ULS1 138.4 -138.4 -138.4 -138.4 -138.4 1498.3 1642.4
ULS2 138.4 -138.4 -138.4 -138.4 -138.4 1523.2 1583.1 1523.2 max @ 5.069 40.7
ULS3 -27.52 27.52 27.52 27.52 27.52 383.21 1599.55 383.2 min @3 .570 77.1

101

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:101 17/07/2006 17:06:43

 RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ DETAILS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location Le vB-e2el a m
oGnr i7d RM W 1 1 - A p r - 2 006 83
102
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC42.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC ch g - R68
DETAILED CALCULATIONS viii Loadings 0 0
Span 2 Lef t <> P L1 <> P L2 <> Rig h t UDL P L1 P L2 p UD L
V SLS1 220.5 0 220.5 0 220.5 100 177.0 31.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS2 92.2 0 92.2 0 92.2 100 80.4 13.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS3 209.7 0 209.7 0 209.7 100 187.9 31.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS4 655.8 0 655.8 0 655.8 100 441.8 87.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS5 427.7 0 427.7 0 427.7 100 269.9 55.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS6 636.5 0 636.5 0 636.5 100 461.0 87.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
7SLS 65.40 .0 0.0 0.0
ULS1 938.5 0 938.5 0 938.5 100 678.1 129.3 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS2 465.4 0 465.4 0 465.4 100 232.2 55.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS3 938.5 0 938.5 0 938.5 100 678.1 129.3 0.0 0.0 0.0
Xbar SLS1 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 6.934
SLS2 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 6.679
SLS3 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 6.593
SLS4 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 7.469
SLS5 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 7.663
SLS6 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 7.249
ULS1 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 7.257
ULS2 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 8.339
ULS3 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 7.257
M SLS1 285 -285 -285 -285 -285 480 13 M Xb a r Th e i g h t
SLS2 87 -87 -87 -87 -87 221 13 542.2 max @ 6.593 41.9
SLS3 149 -149 -149 -149 -149 542 13 221.2 min @ 6.679 41.2
SLS4 1349 -1349 -1349 -1349 -1349 1100 12
SLS5 998 -998 -998 -998 -998 641 12 1198.8 max @ 7.249 40.7
SLS6 1108 -1108 -1108 -1108 -1108 1199 12 641.2 min @ 7.663 44.8
ULS1 1639 -1639 -1639 -1639 -1639 1766 12
ULS2 1469 -1469 -1469 -1469 -1469 471 12 1766.0 max @7 .257 40.7
ULS3 1639 -1639 -1639 -1639 -1639 1766 12 471.5 min @ 8.339 59.8
Loadings 0 0
0 Lef t <> P L1 <> P L2 <> Rig h t UDL P L1 P L2 p UD L
V SLS1 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 2 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 3 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 4 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 5 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 6 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
7 SLS 0.00 .00 .00 .0
ULS1 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 2 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 3 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Xbar SLS1 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SLS2 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SLS3 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SLS4 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SLS5 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SLS6 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
ULS1 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
ULS2 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
ULS3 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
M SLS
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 #VALUE! M Xb a r Th e i g h t
SLS 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 #VALUE! 0.0 max @ 0.000 0.0
SLS 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 #VALUE! 0.0 min @ 0.000 0.0
4SLS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SLS
5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 max @ 0.000 0.0
SLS
6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 min @ 0.000 0.0
1 ULS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ULS
2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 max @ 0.000 0.0
ULS
3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 min @ 0.000 0.0

102

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:102 17/07/2006 17:06:45

 RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D).xls

RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ DETAILS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location L e vB-e2el a m
oGnri7d R MW 11 -A p r-2 0 0 6 103
84
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN TO BS 8110 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC42.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC ch g Da t e R68
DETAILED CALCULATIONS ix
(d) ULS1 MOMENT C S up t Su2p t S u3p t 0
Span 1 2 Sp an 0
Right Left Right Left Right Left
DESIGN MOMENT 42.2 1523.2 1529.61 500.1 1766.0 11.5 0.0 0.0 0.0
TENDON HEIGHT 300.0 40.7 480.0 480.0 40.7 300.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
fpe 1050 1048 10471 047 1048 1050 0 0 0
Hinges 2 2 0
Lt 24.50 24.50 0.00
Lte 12250 12250 0
dt 300.0 484.3 480.0 480.0 484.3 300.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
dr 482.0 480.0 480.0 480.0 484.0 480.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Rp 0.138 0.051 0.086 0.086 0.051 0.138 0.000 0.000 0.000
fpe/fpu 0.649 0.648 0.647 0.647 0.648 0.649 0.000 0.000 0.000
TABLE4.4 1a 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
1b 1 1.00 1 1 1.00 1 0 0.00 0
2a 0.99 1.00 1 1 1.00 0.99 0 0.00 0
2b 0.99 1.00 1 1 1.00 0.99 0 0.00 0
fpb bonded 1605 1617 1617 1617 1617 1605 0 0 0
fpb unbonded 1182 1301 12811 281 1301 1182 0 0 0
TENDON FORCE 2836 3122 3075 3075 3122 2836 0 0 0
As 4021 6283 6283 2262 6283 0 0
REBARFORCE 1748.4 2731.8 2731.8 2731.8 983.5 2731.8 2731.8 0.0 0.0
TOTALTENSION 4584 5854 58075 807 4105 5568 2732 0 0
dn 94.3 72.3 119.5 119.5 50.7 114.6 0.0 0.0 0.0
Steel stress 435 435 435 435 435 4350 0 0
Zt 252.8 448.2 420.3 420.3 459.0 242.7 0.0 0.0 0.0
Zr 434.8 443.9 420.3 420.3 458.7 422.7 0.0 0.0 0.0
MOR 1477.2 2611.6 2440.32 440.3 1883.9 1843.1 0.0 0.0 0.0
(e) SHEAR S1p a n S2p a n 0 ft = 1.859
Left Right Left Right Left Right
V 636.2 881.9 919.1 678.1 0.0 0.0
Mu 42.2 1529.6 1500.1 11.5 0.0 0.0
M0 213.5 574.7 574.7 213.5 0.0 0.0
Cracked
? N Y Y N N N
UNCRACKED fcp 2.127 2.120 2.120 2.127 0.000 0.000
Vco 1629.0 1627.8 1627.8 1629.0 0.0 0.0
CRACKED Aps 2400 2400 2600 2600 0 0
As 6421 8683 8883 8883 0 0
d 414.0 480.0 480.0 210.0 0.0 0.0
As% 0.862 1.005 1.028 2.350 0.000 0.000
fpe/fpu 0.448 0.380 0.392 0.394 0.000 0.000
vc 0.558 0.588 0.592 0.916 0.000 0.000
Vcr 3531.2 733.0 753.3 12815.2 0.0 0.0
Vc 1629.0 733.0 753.3 1629.0 0.0 0.0 Linksrequired
Asv/Sv 1.656 1.656 1.656 1.656 0.000 0.000
Sv 375 375 375 375 0 0

) VIBRATION nx = 2
S p a1 n S p a2n 0
lyny
: 5 6.000 5 6.000 0 0.000 Khan/Williams
Ref
Ix
Iy: 3E+10 2E+09 3E+10 2E+09 0 0 (ConcreteSocietyMethod)
λx : λ y 1.934 5.170 2.015 4.963 0.000 0.000 (9.8)
kx
ky
: 1.267 1.037 1.246 1.041 0.000 0.000 (9.9, 9.10)
ω 65.41 54.51 65.41 54.51 0.00 0.00
δx : δy 8.56 13.69 13.99 13.69 0.00 0.00
f'y
f'x
: 6.11 6.32 6.01 4.96 0.00 0.00 (9.11)
fbx
fby
: 6.11 6.32 6.01 4.96 0.00 0.00 (9.12, 9.13)
fyfx: 6.11 6.32 6.01 4.96 0.00 0.00 (9.14)
NxNy
: 1.388 2.036 1.404 1.995 1.000 1.000 (9.17, 9.18)
Cx
Cy : 246.7 243.4 248.3 275.3 0.0 0.0 (9.19)
Ry
Rx: 0.36 0.25 0.35 0.26 0.00 0.00 (9.20)
R 0.60 0.61 0.00 (9.21)

103

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:103 17/07/2006 17:06:48

 RCC43 Wide Beams (A & D).xls

RCC43 Wide Beams (A & D).xls

This spreadsheet designs multiple-span rectangular or flanged
beams using sub-frame analysis to derive moments and shears.
ACTIONS!
The intention is to provide the design and analysis of up to six
spans of continuous wide beams with columns above and below. ACTIONS! includes bending moment and shear force diagrams,
summaries of moments and shears and user input for amounts
Spans may incorporate cantilevers, fixed ends or knife-edge
of redistribution. Users should ensure that the amounts of
supports. There are three main sheets: MAIN!, ACTIONS! and
redistribution in row 26 are always considered - there are no
SPANS!
default or automated values. Cell L14 determines how the
redistribution is carried out (see also Table 1 of this document).
This spreadsheet is very similar to RCC41.xls except that it caters
for wide beams (beams wider than they are deep) by allowing
two sizes of bar in one layer and by allowing top steel in the span
to be augmented to help satisfy span:depth criteria.
SPANS!
This sheet designs reinforcement for bending in spans and
The selection of size and number of top and bottom bars is supports and for shear in the spans. User input is required for
automated. link sizes (e.g. at cell I22) and the amount by which span top
steel should be increased (e.g. at cell N21) in order to help meet
The number of bars determined by either: deflection criteria. Non-existent spans are blanked out. Support
■ Area of steel required/ area of maximum sized bar (e.g. moments (including cantilever moments) are considered at
32mm diameter) the face of the support. This may lead to unequal amounts of
■ Spacing rules reinforcement being designed for each side of the support. See
Bar!
■ Number of legs of links required in shear.
Besides the limit of maximum modification factor for deflection
Where the latter two may govern, two diameters of bending = 2.0, an additional limit of maximum allowable area of steel has
steel are allowed in the same layer to avoid excessive over-
specification of reinforcement. Input to the right of SPANS! been
i.e. animposed toincrease
allowable comply with deflection
of 100% bottom criteria, Asdef, = 2 x Asreq’d ,
span steel.
allows top steel to be inc reased to satisfy span:depth criteria. The
designer and detailer are expected to rationalise this output (but
always remembering that bar spacings should not be increased). WEIGHT!
The size of link to be used remains as manual input. This sheet estimates the weight of reinforcement in the beam
when designed according to normal curtailment rules as defined
in BS 8110. Workings are shown on the right hand side of the
MAIN! sheet. The estimate may be printed out using ‘File/print’ or the
print button on the normal toolbar. It should be recognised
This sheet contains user input of materials, frame geometry and that different engineers’ and detailers’ interpretations of these
load data, as explained earlier.
clauses, and different project circumstances and requirements
will all have a bearing on actual quantities used.
‘Rebar layering’ refers to whether there are beams in the other
direction. Answering ‘yes’ drops by one bar diameter the steel at
the supports. For instance when using splice bars at the support
bars in the other direction has to be avoided - and allowed for in
Analysis!
the design.
This sheet shows the moment distributions used in the analysis
of the beam: it is not intended for formal printing. It will be seen
With respect to cantilevers, design for bending caters for
that the loads are considered initially as 1.0 gk over all spans then
moments at the face of support; design for deflection considers
as (gfg - 1.0)gk + gfqqk over alternate spans.
the cantilever from the centre line of support. In beam-to-beam
situations (where the beam soffits are the same depth), the width
of support can be input as being very small to avoid under-design
in bending.
Bar!
Intended mainly for first time users and young engineers, this
sheet gives further details of the calculations summarised in
SPAN! Support moments are considered at faces of supports;

107

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:107 17/07/2006 17:07:00

 checks at 1/4 span relate to hogging and any top steel required at
either of these points is provided throughout the span.

Graf!
This sheet
it is not provides
intended fordata for printing.
formal the charts in MAIN! and ACTIONS!:

Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.

108

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:108 17/07/2006 17:07:01

 RCC43 Wide Beams (A & D).xls

RCC43 Wide Beams (A & D)/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M adeby Date SheetNo
Location D&D: Main beam Grids C to H from grid 1 to 3 rmw 11-Apr-06 10955
WIDE BEAM (Analysis & Design) to BS 8110:2005 C hecked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC43 v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC ch g - R 68
LOCATION Supportsfromgrid 1 togrid 3

M A T E RI A L S C(to
O Vall
E Rsteel)
S
fcu 40 N/mm² hagg 20 mm Topcover 25 mm
fyl 500 N/mm² γs 1.15 Btm
cover 40 mm
fyv 250 N/mm² γc 1.50 Side
cover 35 mm
steelclass A
SPANS L (m) H (mm) bw (mm) hf (mm) Type bf(mm) LOADING PATTERN
SPAN1 5.50 375 1200 125 T 1900 min m ax
SPAN
2 8 .00 375 1200 125 T 2100 DEAD 1 1.4
SPAN
3 8.50 375 1200 125 T 2200 IMPOSED 0 1.6
SPAN
4 4.00 375 1200 125 T 1650 REBAR LAYERING
SPAN 5 Support steel
SPAN 6 in alt layer ? N

SUPPORTS ABOVE(m) H (mm) B (mm) En d Co n d BE LO W(m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond

Support
1 3.75 300 300 F 3.75 300 300 F
Support
2 3.75 300 300 F 3.75 300 300 F
Support
3 3.75 300 300 F 3.75 300 300 F
Support
4 3.75 300 300 F 3.75 300 300 F
Support
5 3.75 300 300 F 3.75 300 300 F
Support 6
Support 7

LOADING
UDLsD e(kN/m)
ad PLs
Im(kN)
p ose d Position
Pos(m)
i t io n Lo a d ed D ea d Im p os ed Po s it i o n Lo a d ed
Span 1 Lo a d Lo a d f r oml e f t Le n g t h Span 4 Lo a d Lo a d f r o ml ef t Le n g t h
UDL 62.2 30.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL 62.2 30.0 ~~~~~
1PL ~~~~~ 1PL ~~~~~
2PL ~~~~~ 2PL ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
2S p an 5S p a n
UDL 62.2 30.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
1 25.0
PL 25.0 4.00 ~~~~~ 1
PL ~~~~~
2PL ~~~~~ 2PL ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
3S p an 6S p a n
UDL 62.2 30.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
1PL ~~~~~ 1PL ~~~~~
2PL ~~~~~ 2PL ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL

LOADING DIAGRAM

1 3
REACTIONS(kN)
S U PPO RT 1 2 3 4 5
ALLSPANSLOADED 271.5 1037.5 1178.6 965.4 134.2
ODDSPANSLOADED 323.2 637.7 889.8 830.3 -19
EVENSPANSLOADED 74.4 831.0 907.4 539.8 214.1
CharacteristicDead 126.1 464.7 551.6 438.4 61.4 0.0 0.0
MaxServiceImposed 71.1 236.7 273.4 210.0 63.0 0.0 0.0
Min Service Imposed -16.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 -32.9 0.0 0.0

109

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:109 17/07/2006 17:07:02

 RCC43 Wide Beams (A & D)/ ACTIONS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Madeby Date Page
Location D & D :M a i nb e a mG r i d sCt oH , f r o mg r i d1t o3 rm w 1 1- Ap r -0 6 5 110
6
WIDE BEAM (Analysis & Design) to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo

Originated from RCC43 v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC

ch g - R 68
BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAMS
(kNm)

1200 1000
1000
800
800
600
600
400 400

200 200
0 0
-200 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25 30
-200
-400
-400
-600
-800 -600

1 Elastic Moments 3 1 Redistributed Envelope 3

SUPPONRoT 1 2 3 4 5
ElasticM 95.0 661.2 888.9 661.3 33.6 ~ kNm/m
RedistributedM 95.0 661.2 755.6 661.3 33.6 ~ kNm/m
ßb 1.000 1.000 0.850 1.000 1.000 ~ ~
Redistribution 15.0%

SPNAo N 1 2 3 4
ElasticM 291.64 561.87 542.57 136.11 ~ ~

RedistributedM
ßb 291.64
1.000 533.32
0.949 528.36
0.974 136.11
1.000 ~
~ ~
~
SHEARS(kN)

800 800
600 600
400 400
200 200
0 0
-200 -200
-400 -400
-600 -600
-800 -800
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25 30

1 Elastic Shears 3 1 Redistributed Shears 3

No S P A N 1 2 3
ElasticV 323.2 471.5 570.4 605.1 604.6 570.3
RedistributedV 323.2 471.5 566.0 592.4 589.0 563.0

NSoPA N 4
Elastic
V 406.1 214.1 ~ ~ ~ ~
Redistributed
V 406.1 214.1 ~ ~ ~ ~

COLUMN MOMENTS
(kNm) 1234 5
ALL SPANS Above 29.7 25.9 4.7 -42.8 0.2
LOADED Below 29.7 25.9 4.7 -42.8 0.2
ODD SPANS Above 47.5 -20.6 57.2 -61.9 17.1
LOADED Below 47.5 -20.6 57.2 -61.9 17.1
EVEN SPANS Above -3.8 57.5 -49.2 -0.8 -16.8
LOADED Below -3.8 57.5 -49.2 -0.8 -16.8

110

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:110 17/07/2006 17:07:05

 RCC43 Wide Beams (A & D).xls

RCC43 Wide Beams (A & D)/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location D & D :M a i nb e a mG r i dsCt oH , f r o mg r i d1t o3 rm w 11- Ap r - 06 5 7111
WIDE BEAM (Analysis & Design) to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo

Originated from RCC43 v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC

chg - R 68

SPAN 1 LEFT C E N T RE RI G HT
ACTIONS M kNm 48.0 291.6 540.1
ßb 1.00 1.00 1.00
DESIGN d mm 332.0 315.0 324.0
As mm² 350 2241 4449
As' mm² 0 0 0
TOP STEEL Layer 1 2H16 + 7H12 2H20 + 5H16 1H32 + 8H25
. . .
As prov mm² 1194 As'
prov 1634 Asprov 4731
BTM STEEL Layer 1 4H12 + 3H10 4H20 + 5H16 4H12 + 3H10
. . .
As' prov mm² 688 As
prov 2262 As'
prov 688
DEFLECTION L/d 17.460 Allowed 27.490
SHEAR V kN 258.1 Link Ø 407.5
v N/mm² 0.648 10 1.048
vc N/mm² 0.518 Nominal 0.832
LINKS R 1 0@2 2 5f o r6 7 5 R 1 0@2 2 5 R 1 0@2 2 5f o r67 5
legs No 7 7 7

CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S
Links ookk ok
ok ok
ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Deflection ok

SPAN 2 LEFT C E N T RE RI G HT
ACTIONS M kNm 577.9 533.3 668.6
ßb 1.00 0.95 0.86
DESIGN d mm 324.0 309.0 324.0
As mm² 4825 4179 5787
As' mm² 0 0 0
TOP STEEL Layer 1 2H32 + 7H25 1H20 + 6H16 3H32 + 7H25
. . .
As prov mm² 5045 As'
prov 1521 Asprov 5849
BTM STEEL Layer 1 1 H 2 0+6H 1 6 3 H 3 2+6H 2 5 1H20 + 6H16
. . .
As' prov mm² 1521 Asprov 5358 As'
prov 1521
DEFLECTION L/d 25.890 Allowed 26.212 Asauto-increasedby 28.2%
SHEAR V kN 502.0 Link Ø 528.4
v N/mm² 1.291 10 1.359
vc N/mm² 0.675 Nominal 0.893
LINKS R 1 0@1 5 0f o r1 0 5 0 R 1 0@2 2 5 R 1 0@2 0 0f o r8 0 0
legs No 7 7 7

CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Deflection ok

111

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:111 17/07/2006 17:07:08

 RCC43 Wide Beams (A & D)/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location D & D :M a i nb e a mG r i d sCt oH , f r o mg r i d1t o3 rm w Ap r- 2 00 6 58112
WIDE BEAM (Analysis & Design) to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo

Originated from RCC43 v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC

chg - R 68

SPAN 3 L E FT C E N T RE RI G HT
ACTIONS M kNm 669.3 528.4 578.4
ßb 0.85 0.97 1.00
DESIGN d mm 324.0 309.0 324.0
As mm² 5794 4140 4831
As' mm² 0 0 0
TOP STEEL Layer 1 3 H 3 2+7 H 2 5 4 H 1 6+4 H 1 2 2H32 + 7H25
. . .
As prov mm² 5849 As'prov 1257 Asprov 5045
BTM STEEL Layer 1 1 H 2 0+6H 1 6 5H 3 2+4 H 2 5 1 H 2 0+6H 1 6
. . .
As' prov mm² 1521 Asprov 5985 As'prov 1521
DEFLECTION 27.508 Allowed 28.312 Asauto-increasedby38.3%
SHEAR V kN 524.9 Ø
L in k V 499.0
v N/mm² 1.350 10 v 1.283
vc N/mm² 0.709 No m i na l vc 0.850
LINKS R 1 0@1 50f o r1 0 50 R1 0@2 2 5 R 1 0@2 2 5f o r9 0 0
legs No 7 7 7

CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
ok ok ok
max S
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Deflection ok

SPAN 4 L E FT C E N T RE RI G HT
ACTIONS M kNm 498.1 136.1 3.0
ßb 1.00 1.00 1.00
DESIGN d mm 327.5 317.0 332.0
As mm² 3986 1039 22
As' mm² 0 0 0
TOP STEEL Layer 1 7H25 + 2H20 1H25 + 6H20 2H16 + 7H12
. . .
As prov mm² 4064 As'prov 2376 Asprov 1194
BTM STEEL Layer 1 7H8 1H16 + 8H12 7H8
. . .
As' prov mm² 352 As
prov 1106 As'
prov 352
DEFLECTION 12.618 Allowed 37.733
SHEAR V kN 341.6 Link Ø 149.0
v N/mm² 0.869 10 0.374
vc N/mm² 0.624 Nominal 0.518
LINKS R 1 0@2 2 5f o r4 5 0 R1 0@2 2 5 R 1 0@2 2 5f o r4 5 0
legs No 7 7 7

CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Deflection ok

112

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:112 17/07/2006 17:07:10

 RCC51 Column Load Take-down & Design.xls

RCC51 Column Load Take-down & Design.xls

Conventional column load take downs by hand can be time- Please note when inputting a location for numbered gridlines
consuming. This spreadsheet emulates conventional column to start with an apostrophe, i.e. use ’2 - 3 (otherwise 2 - 3 will
design to BS 8110 (2) by providing on separate sheets: load take give the result of -1!). Cantilevers may be dealt with by inputting
down from inputs of location, dimensions, levels and loads to give no beam on the appropriate axis but inputting additional loads
design axial loads and moments per floor. RCC51.xls is intended and moments (under ‘At column position, other applied loads
as a stand-alone column design spreadsheet for use when a sub- (e.g. loads from cantilevers)’). Note that, so far as the column
frame analysis is not available or is unwarranted. As in COLUMN! is concerned, cantilever moments will relieve (or even exceed
within RCC11.xls, this spreadsheet determines the area of steel fixed end) beam moments and should be specified as negative
required (As). moments.

The spreadsheet is set up in such a way that one column size As explained under Operator Instructions deleting a level will
(input in CDES!) is used throughout the height of the column ‘grey-out’ subsequent columns and set spans to 0.0 m. Enter
location and that the critical section for design occurs where axial data (and delete any subsequent hatches, #####) or equate
load is at its maximum. cells to previous cells (avoid copying cells across) to get up to
10 levels of load take down. Deleting or setting a value of 0 in
The example is based on Designed and detailed (15) but differs in columns G to P will ‘grey-out’ values to the right, which will be
several respects: set at 0.0. Generally, input values are carried through to the right.
Red figures or red backgrounds mean inconsistent or incorrect
■ Seven storeys used in the example rather than three (in order data entries. Overwrite if incorrect.
to demonstrate automatic input adequately)
Slab spans may be parallel to x or y, or two-way spanning.
■ No special account taken of roof loadings (in order to Troughed slabs may be modelled by using the topping thickness
demonstrate automatic input adequately) for the slab and adding widths of ribs within a bay to the width
■ All columns are taken as 4.00 m long (again, in order to of the beam.
demonstrate automatic input adequately)
■ Load distribution according to BS 8110: Part 1, Clause 3.8.2.3, Some input (highlighted in magenta) defaults to values from
i.e. reaction factors of 0.5 are used for loads from adjacent other sheets. For instance column dimensions are input in CDES!
spans rather than results of analysis or using shear force The user may immediately see whether the design is viable or not
factors from BS 8110: Part 1 Tables 3.5 and/or 3.12. and change dimensions accordingly. These cells are not protected
so can be overwritten: beware. For troughed slabs use topping
■ No double counting of floor slabs due to allowances for floor
thickness and aggregate width of ribs with width of beam.
slabs in design of, therefore reactions from, edge beams
spanning parallel to floor slab span.
Reduction factors for live load to according to BS 6399: Part 1(19)
Clause 5.2 are automatically applied to axial load unless specified
As a default the level with maximum axial load with concurrent
otherwise.
maximum moment, i.e. the bottom level, is chosen for
consideration in DESMMNTS! (derivation of design moments)
and CDES! (design). The user may investigate other levels by
choosing the appropriate level in the combo-box on the right
DESMMNTS!
hand side of CDES!.
The basic design procedure is covered in BS 8110: Part 1 Clause
3.8. In order to determine design moments several inputs are
Unbraced columns may be designed, but the spreadsheet
required:
demands some input of applied moment in LOADTD! in the
appropriate axis. If the column is unbraced then it must be part of ■ Values of ß for braced and unbraced columns are required
a stability frame – if only nominally – with moments that should at G15:H15, see Clause 3.8.1.6 and ables
T 3.19 and 3.20 as
be input as applied moments in LOADTD! shown overleaf.
■ Whether the column is braced or un-braced – see BS 8110:
Part 1, Clause 3.8.1.5.
LOADTD! ■ In order to evaluate Nuz and thus K accurately, an initial
assessment of the area of reinforcement, As, is required
Input is self explanatory but, in order to facilitate use of this at cell N22. An indication of the probable percentage of
spreadsheet, some degree of automation has been introduced. reinforcement is given at Q23 (automation of this figure
It is vital that input data is hand checked to ensure the loads would cause a circular reference error in the spreadsheet). If
are described properly. It is also advised that a clean version of As is set at 0% then effectively K = 1, which is conservative
the spreadsheet should be used for each column analysed and (see BS 8110: Part 1, equation 33 and definitions under
designed (i.e. reload the base spreadsheet each time). Clause 3.8.1.1).
113

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:113 17/07/2006 17:07:13

 Table 2
Valu es of ß fo r br aced c ol um ns Val ue s o f ß f or u nb ra ce d co lu mn s
Values of ß for braced and
unbraced columns
E n d co n ditio n at to p E n d c o n d it i o n a t b o t t o m E n d c o n d i t i o n at b o t t o m

123123

1 0.75 0.80 0.90 1.20 1.30 1.50

2 0.80 0.85 0.95 1.30 1.50 1.80

3 0.90 0.95 1.00 1.60 1.80 -

4 - - - 2.20 - -

Condition 1 - column monolithically connected to beam at least as deep as the column in the plane
considered (or foundation specifically designed for moment)
Condition 2 - column monolithically connected to beams or slabs shallower than the column in the plane
considered
Condition 3- column connected to members which will provide some nominal restraint
Condition 4- column unrestrained
NOTE: Taken from BS 8110 Tables 3.19 and 3.20

CDES! Ltdcalcs!
As in COLUMN! within RCC11.xls, this sheet designs symmetrical This sheet shows workings for the load take-down and is not
rectangular columns where both axial load, N, and design necessarily intended for printing out other than for checking
moment, Mx or My (see BS 8110: Part 1, Clause 3.8.2, 3 and 4) purposes. Load distribution works according to BS 8110: Part 1,
have been calculated from previous sheets. CDES! iterates x/h to Clause 3.8.2.3 – “…axial force in a column may be calculated on
determine where the neutral axis lies. The sheet includes stress the assumption that beams and slabs transmitting force into it
and strain diagrams to aid comprehension of the final design are simply supported”.
(please refer to notes regarding COLUMN! in
RCC11.xls).
Stiffs!
The spreadsheet is set up in such a way that one column size
(input in CDES!) is used throughout the height of the column This sheet shows workings for beam and column stiffnesses
location and that the critical section for design occurs where axial and is not necessarily intended for printing out other than for
load is at its maximum. checking purposes.

Other levels can be investigated by choosing the appropriate In the determination of section properties, beams are considered
level from the combo-box located under Operating Instructions. full height – beam widths are deducted from slab widths. Moment
Always ensure that the size of column designed is correct for the distribution works according to BS 8110: Part 1, Clause 3.2.1.2.5
level under consideration. – “… beams possess half their actual stiffness”.

For simplicity, where three or more bars are required in the

top and bottom of the section, a (rotationally) symmetrical Notes!
arrangement of reinforcement is proffered, i.e. top and bottom
reinforcement with additional side bars. The argument goes that This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
using the critical axis method of BS 8110 to determine areas
of steel in bi-axially bent columns implies that the bars are in
the corners of the element. Therefore ‘additional’ side bars help
ensure this is so. Counter-arguments suggest these additional
bars are unnecessary. Bresaler’s load contour check [(Mx / Mu x ) a
+ (My / Muy )a < 1.0, where a = 2/3 + 5N/3N uz], used in CP 110(20)
is not adopted in this spreadsheet but may be investigated using
RCC53.xls.

Some input (highlighted in magenta) defaults to values from

other sheets. These cells are not protected so can be overwritten:
beware.

114

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:114 17/07/2006 17:07:15

 RCC51 Column Load Take-down & Design.xls

RCC51 Column Load Take-down & Design/ LOADTD!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Madeby Date Page
Location Edge Column B1 (akin to D&D) rmw 11-Ap r-06 115
85
COLUMN LOAD TAKE DOWN & DESIGN FOR SYMMETRICALLY REINFORCED RECT. COLUMNS BENT ABOUT TWO AXES TO BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision JobN o
Originated from RCC51.xls v3.0 © 2006 TCC ch g - R68

INPUT
Location Edge Column B1 (akin to D&D) y concrete density, kN/m 3
24.0
fgk 1.40
Orientation x x H fqk 1.60

Level
Dimensions
CltoCl A-B m 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00
B-C m 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00
1-2 m 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50
n/a m 0.00

thickness(solid) mm 175 175 175 175 175 175 175

span
direction,(II
to)
or
ybx, x x x x x x x

width A-B mm 300 300 300 300 300 300 300

deptho/a A-B mm 350 350 350 350 350 350 350
width B-C mm 300 300 300 300 300 300 300
deptho/a B-C mm 350 350 350 350 350 350 350
width 1-2 mm 300 300 300 300 300 300 300
deptho/a 1-2 mm 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
width n/a mm 0
deptho/a n/a mm 0

(col above)
H
(ll
to
yy) mm 300 300 300 300 300 300 300
B
(ll
to
xx) mm 300 300 300 300 300 300 300
Height(fl.tofloor.) m 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00

Level 7
Loads (characteristic uno)
(incswt.) gk kN/m2 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00
qk kN/m2 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00

(swt.) gk kN/m included included included included included included included included included included
line loads (-extra over slab loads and beam self weight)
A-B gk kN/m 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
qk kN/m 0.0
B-C gk kN/m 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
qk kN/m 0.0
1-2 gk kN/m 0.0
qk kN/m 0.0
n/a gk kN/m 0.0
qk kN/m 0.0

(eg loads from cantilevers)

Gk kN(char) 0.0
Qk kN(char) 0.0
Mxx kNm(ult) 0.0
Myy kNm(ult) 0.0

Floor Gk kN 133.8 133.8 133.8 133.8 133.8 133.8 133.8

Floor Qk kN 75.0 75.0 75.0 75.0 75.0 75.0 75.0
Column
below Gk kN 8.6 8.6 8.6 8.6 8.6 8.6 8.6

OUTPUT Column level 7

Gk kN 142.5 284.9 427.4 569.9 712.3 854.8 997.3

Redn Qk kN 75.0 150.0 225.0 300.0 375.0 450.0 525.0
factors Qkredn factor 1.0 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.6 0.6
OK*? Qkred* kN 75.0 135.0 180.0 210.0 225.0 270.0 315.0
N kN 3

about x-x Mxx top kNm 112.6 91.7 91.7 91.7 91.7 91.7 91.7
about y-y Myy top kNm 1.6 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3
Mxx bottom kNm 91.7 91.7 91.7 91.7 91.7 91.7
Myy bottom kNm 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3

115

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:115 17/07/2006 17:07:16

 RCC51 Column Load Take-down & Design/ DESMMNTS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Madeby Date Page
Location Edge Column B1 (akin to D&D) rmw 1 1 - A p r -06 116
86
COLUMN LOAD TAKE DOWN & DESIGN FOR SYMMETRICALLY REINFORCED RECT. COLUMNS BENT ABOUT TWO AXES TO BS
8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC51.xls v3.0 © 2006 TCC chg - R68

INPUT Location
Level considered: Orientation
y
Dimensions about x-x about y-y
yy)
to
(llh mm 300 - A x x B H
(ll
btoxx) mm - 300
lo,
clear
height mm 3500 3650 y
ß value 0.90 0.90 n
Height (fl. to floor.) 4.00 m
Column properties
Braced
Unbraced?B
or Uor B B fcu 35
fy 500
Loads cover to link mm 30
Axial N kN 1900 - Maxsized
mainbar mm 32
Moments top kNm 91.7 1.3 ProbablepercentageAs % 2.00%
bottom kNm 0.0 0.0 link
diameter mm 8
OUTPUT
N kNm 1
M kN 9
about X
PROOF
about x-x about y-y
le mm 3150 3285 Designmomentsforunbracedcolumns
Slenderness 10.50 10.95 M2+100%Madd kNm n/a n/a
Limit
forshort
column 15.0 15.0 eminN kNm n/a n/a
Designcolumnas Short Maximum kNm n/a n/a
Columnis Short Short
aboutx-x abouty-y D
kNm 9
about x-x about y-y
Min
eccentricity,
0.05
h kNm 28.5 Short
Braced Braced
Madd n/a - short column
d mm 246 246
Nuz kN 2200.1 2200.1
Nbal kN 645.8 645.8 Biaxial bending
K 0.193 0.193 Mx/h' 0.373
or,
b'slender,
if b'
h?
- mm 246 246 My/b 0.005
ßa 0.082 0.089 Critical
direction X-X
au mm 4.7 5.2
Madd kNm 0.0 0.0 N/bhfcu 0.60
Eqns
32-35
use?
took ok ß 0.30
Bracedcolumns M1 kNm 0.0 0.0
Mi kNm 55.0 0.8 Maximum design moment
Mi,(Mi=0ifLe/h>20) kNm 55.0 0.8 = 91.7+0.30*246/246*1.3
Mi,(Mi=0ifb/h>3) 55.0 0.8
kNm 9
Design moments for braced columns
M2 kNm 91.7 1.3
Mi+Madd kNm 55.0 0.8
M1+Madd/2 kNm 0.0 0.0
eminN kNm 28.5 n/a
Maximum kNm 91.7 1.3

116

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:116 17/07/2006 17:07:19

 RCC51 Column Load Take-down & Design.xls

RCC51 Column Load Take-down & Design/ CDES!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Madeby Date Page
Location EdgeColumnB1 (akintoD&D) rm w 11-Apr-06 87
117
COLUMN LOAD TAKE DOWN & DESIGN FOR SYMMETRICALLY REINFORCED RECT. COLUMNS
BENT ABOUT TWO AXES TO BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC51.xls v3.0 © 2006 TCC c g - R68

INPUT Level designed: B

Axial load, N 1900 kN fcu 35 N/mm²
Moment, M 92.1 kNm fy 500 N/mm²
about X-X axis fyv 500 N/mm²
Height, h (ll to yy, L'r to xx) 300 mm γm 1.15 steel
Breadth, b (ll to xx) 300 mm γm 1.5 concrete
Max bar diameter 32 mm LinkØ 8 mm
cover (to link) 30 mm steelclass A
CALCULATIONS
from M As = {M - 0.67fcu.b.dc(h/2 - dc/2)}/[(h/2-d').(fsc+fst).m]
from N As = (N - 0.67fcu.b.dc/m) / (fsc - fst) As = Ast = Asc: dc=min(h,0.9x)
=d' 54 mm .67fcu/m= 15.6 N/mm²
=d 246 mm fy/m= 434.8 N/mm²
critical about X-X axis:…... h= 300 mm
b= 300 mm

from iteration, neutral axis depth, x, =dc 266.3 mm

239.7 mm
0.67.fcu.b.dc/m 1124.0 kN
Steel comp strain 0.00279
Steel tens strain -0.00027
Steel stress in comp. face, fsc 435 N/mm2 (Comp. stress in reinf.)
Steel stress in tensile face, fst -53 N/mm2 (Tensile stress in reinf.)
from M, As = 1590 mm2
from N, As = 1590 mm2 OK

As req'd = 1590mm² T&B:- PROVIDE 4H32

(ie 2H32 T&B - 1609mm²T&B) - 3.57% o/a - @192 cc.)
Links : - PROVIDE H8 @ 300
.

Strain diagram Stress diagram

15.6 N/mm²
0.00350
435
0.00279
about X-X axis

0.00027
53 Notes

-0.00044 Stresses in N/mm2

Compression +ve

117

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:117 17/07/2006 17:07:22

 RCC52 Column Chart generation.xls
This spreadsheet generates axial load:design moment interaction The chart shows lines for 0.1fcuAc and Mmin. The user should be
charts for symmetrically reinforced rectangular columns. It aware that all load cases should be within the boundaries of
checks the capacity of the columns with various arrangements of these lines.
reinforcement against input load cases of axial load and uniaxial
bending.
Calcs!
Within RCC11.xls, COLUMN! allows the user to determine the
area of steel required from inputs of axial load and moment about Calcs! Shows the derivation of the charts where moment capacity
the x - x axis. Another approach, adopted in BS 5400 (21) and CP is calculated at intervals of neutral axis depth from n.a. depth for
110(20) and more suited to the grouping of columns on particular N = 0 to n.a. depth for N = N bal, then at intervals from n.a. depth
projects and adopted here by RCC52.xls, is to give an interaction for N = N bal to n.a. depth for N = Nuz.
chart. This shows axial load against moment for symmetrical
sections of specified size, strength and reinforcement. It works on
the premise of calculating the moment and axial load capacities Cases!
of a section with assumed amounts of reinforcement and
assumed neutral axis depth. Iterations of neutral axis depth give Cases! identifies the smallest bar diameter that satisfies each of
data for the Axial load:Moment interaction chart for the specified the load cases.
section. The spreadsheet also checks the reinforcement required
for input load cases. The user may try different arrangements of
reinforcement. Notes!
RCC52.xls assumes that the moments input in the load cases This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
have already been adjusted, if necessary, for bi-axial bending. For
many side and all corner columns, there is no choice but to design
for bi-axial bending, and the method given in Clause 3.8.4.5 must
be adhered to, i.e. RCC53.xls should be used.

MAIN!
Main! contains all input and output data, Bending is assumed to
be about the x - x, i.e. horizontal axis, and the input moment
is assumed to be the maximum design moment as defined in BS
8110 i.e. including M add etc and in the correct orientation.

Where more than two bars are required per face, the user may
choose to specify a similar arrangement of bars on the side
faces in order to avoid confusion in detailing and fixing. In this
respect, there is also a question regarding design. To an extent
all columns are bi-axially bent and BS 8110 directs that bi-axially
bent columns are effectively designed about one axis only (by
adding moment in the critical direction to account for moment
in the non-critical direction). By implication the second axis is
not designed specifically.

One reason for adding side bars (when three, four or more bars
are required T & B) in square(ish) sections, is to ensure that the

second axisbeis found

axis should catered
andfor. Ideally with
calculations BS accordingly.
done 8110, the resultant
But this
presumes that the arrangement of bars is known to start with.
With BS 5400 and CP 110 checks are carried out on a chosen
section about both axes. Bi-axially bent columns are dealt with
in RCC53.xls

118

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:118 17/07/2006 17:07:26

 RCC52 Column Chart generation.xls

RCC52 Column Chart generation/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Madeby Date Page
Location ColumnaAsA
t1e,2tc RMW 11-Apr-06 94
119
CO LUMN CHAR T FO R SYM ME TR IC AL LY REI NFO RCED RE CT AN GULA R COLUM NS
Checked Revision JobNo
BENTOriginated
ABOUTfromTHE'RX-X AXIS
' v3.0TO BS 8110:2005
on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

MATERIALS
fcu 30 N/mm² γm 1.15 steel Cover 30 mm
fy 500 N/mm² γm 1.5 concrete hagg 20 mm
steelclass A
SECTION
h 400 mm
b 400 mm X X SINGLE AXIS
with 3 barsp erface BENDING
All bars in 400 wide faces

BAR ARRANGEMENTS
Type Bar Ø Asc % L ink Ø Bar c/c Nbal (kN) Nuz (kN) Checks
H 32 3.02 8 146.0 1113.7 4177.4 ok
H 25 1.84 8 149.5 1104.4 3385.1 ok
H 20 1.18 6 154.0 1106.9 2938.3 ok
H 16 0.75 6 156.0 1105.8 2652.3 ok
H 12 0.42 6 158.0 1106.2 2429.9 ok
H 10 0.00 6 159.0 0.0 0.0 < 0.4% - ignored

N:M INTERACTION CHART for 400 x 400

400 column,
mm facesgrade C30, 30 mm cover and 3 bars on

4500
M min KEY
4000
6H32
3500
N
k
, 6H25
N 3000 3000
,
N
O
I 2500 6H20
S
S
E
R
P 2000 6H16
M 1850
O
C
L 1500 1500 6H12
IA
X
A
1000 1000 1000

500 500 0.1fcuAc

0
0 100 200
MOMENT Mx300 400 500
kNm

LOADCASES Load case N (kN) Mx' (kNm) Load case N (kN) Mx' (kNm)
A1top 500 200 6 H20 4 1500 150 6 H16
A1bot 1850 100 6 H16 5 1000 150 6 H12
A2bot 3000 50 6 H25 6 1000 50 6 H12

119

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:119 17/07/2006 17:07:27

 RCC53 Column Design.xls
RCC53.xls generates column design charts for symmetrically ‘K’ in C40:C49 refers to the reduction factor as per equation 33
reinforced rectangular columns bent about two axes and checks in BS8110.
input load cases. For circular columns RCC54.xls may be used.

RCC53.xls also gives interaction charts, showing axial load against CHARTS!
moment for the critical axis for symmetrical rectangular sections
of specified size, strength and reinforcement arrangement. The CHARTS! shows two charts, one chart for when Mxx is critical and
user may try different arrangements of reinforcement. It also one for when Myy is criti cal. These Axial load:Moment interaction
provides designs for input load cases, which are plotted on the charts for the specified section also show relevant input load
relevant x- or y- axis chart. cases. The charts show lines for 0.1 fcuAc and Mmin (i.e. emin N). The
user should be aware that all load cases should be within the
RCC53.xls takes account of any side-bars. boundaries of these lines. Due to a quirk in Excel, load cases can
only be identified by axial load, N, on the charts.

Philosophy of design for bi-axially

bent columns Xcal! and Ycal!
These sheets show the derivation of the charts where moment
When preparing this spreadsheet, there was some discussion
and axial load capacity is calculated at intervals of neutral axis
about the interpretation of BS 8110 with respect to bi-axially depth (in intervals from n.a. depth for N = 0 to n.a. depth for N =
bent columns and the provision of side bars. Nbal, then in intervals from n.a. depth for N = N bal to n.a. depth
for N = N uz. .).
For simplicity, where three or more bars are required in the top
and bottom of the section, it appears to be common practice,
in small- to medium-sized columns at least, to provide a Cases!
(rotationally) symmetrical
provide additional arrangement
side bars. of reinforcement,
The argument i.e.the
goes that using to
Cases! identifies the smallest bar diameter that satisfies each
critical axis method of BS 8110 to determine areas of steel in of the load cases. Clause 3.8.3.2 is included for both directions
bi-axially bent columns implies that the bars are in the corners (columns K & L) and the spreadsheet decides which axis is
of the element. Therefore ‘additional’ side bars help ensure that dominant.
this is so.

There is a counter argument to suggest that the design procedure

for bi-axially bent columns in BS 8110 makes the precaution of
Notes!
adding additional side bars unnecessary. This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
Rafiq(22) argues that the Bresaler’s load contour check, as used in
CP 110( 20) should be adopted to ensure a safe design for bi-axially
bent columns otherwise designed to BS 8110, as shown below.

(Mx /Mux)a + (My /Muy)a < 1.0, where a = 2/3 + 5N/3Nuz

MAIN!
MAIN! contains all input data and gives designs for the input load
cases.

Guidance for the input is given within the spreadsheet but users
should be familiar with BS 8110: Part 1, Clause 3.8 which deals
with column design. The input moments under LOADCASES are
the initial end moments due to ultimate design loads is defined
in BS 8110 about the appropriate axes for slender columns. The
spreadsheet calculates the additional design ultimate moment
induced by deflection of column (Madd), the critical direction for
bi-axial bending and the design moment.

120

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:120 17/07/2006 17:07:31

 RCC53 Column Design.xls

RCC53 Column Design/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Madeby Date Page
Location Ground floor columns at B1, B2 etc RM W 11 - A p r - 0 6 96
121
SYMME TRICALLYREINFORCE D RECTANGULAR COLUMN DESIG N, BENT ABOUT TWO
AXES TO BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from R v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

MATERIALS
fcu 35 N/mm² γm, steel 1.15 Covertolink 30 mm
fy 500 N/mm² γm, conc 1.5 aggh 20 mm
steel class A
SECTION
h 400 mm
b 300 mm
with 3 #N/A X X
and 3 #N/A
#N/A

RESTRAINTS Top Btm

Lo (mm) Co n dit io n Co n dit io n B r a c e d? ß Le (mm) Sl e n d e r n e s s St a t u s
X-AXIS 3 600 2 2 Y 0.85 3060 Lex/h= 7.65 Column is
Y-AXIS 3600 2 2 Y 0.85 3060 Ley/b= 10.20 SHORT

LOADCASES AXIAL TOP MOMENTS(kNm) BTM MOMENTS(kNm)

N (kN) iM
x iM
y iM
x iM
y
B1 3500 90.0 25.0 90.0 25.0
B2 3000 80.0 60.0 80.0 60.0
Loadcase
3 1000 100.0 35.0 100.0 35.0
Loadcase
4 1200 50.0 150.0 50.0 150.0
Loadcase
5 500 220.0 90.0 220.0 90.0
Loadcase
6 2500 35.0 25.0 35.0 25.0

BAR ARRANGEMENTS BAR CENTRES(mm)

Bar Ø Asc % Lin k Ø 30 0 F a c e 4 00 F a c e Nuz (kN) Checks
H 40 8.38 10 90 140 0 Asc > 6 % (3.12.6.2)
H 32 5.36 8 96 146 4573 ok
H 25 3.27 8 100 150 3522 ok
H 20 2.09 6 104 154 2929 ok
H 16 1.34 6 106 156 2550 ok
H 12 0.75 6 108 158 2255 ok

DESIGN MOMENTS (kNm) X AXIS Y AXIS COMBINED

K M
ad d Mx M
ad d My A x is M' REB A R max V *
B1 0.000 0.0 90.0 0.0 25.0 X 100.5 8 H32 99.6
B2 0.000 0.0 80.0 0.0 60.0 Y 77.1 8 H32 102.3
8 H12
Loadcase
Loadcase3
4 0.000
0.000 0.0
0.0 100.0
50.0 0.0
0.0 35.0
150.0 X
Y 135.1
173.8 8 H25 52.0
86.5
Loadcase5 0.000 0.0 220.0 0.0 90.0 X 329.0 No Fit 97.3
Loadcase6 0.000 0.0 35.0 0.0 37.5 Y 45.1 8 H25 88.1

SEE CHARTS ON NEXT SHEET

121

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:121 17/07/2006 17:07:32

 RCC53 Column Design/ CHARTS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M adeby Date Page

Location G r o u n df l o o rc o l u m n s a tB 1 ,B 2e t c RM W 11-Apr-06 122
97
SYMMETRIC ALLY REINFORCED REC TAN GULAR COLUMN DESIGN , BENT ABOUT
TWO AXES TO BS 8110:2005 C hecked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC53.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R6 8

N:M interaction chart: Mx' critical

400 x 300 column (h x b), grade C35, 30 mm cover
5000
Mx min
4500 KEY
4000

3500 3500
8H32
3000

2500 8H25

2000 8H20
1500
8H16
1000 1000
8H12
500 500 0.1fcuAc

0 0
0 100 200 300 400 500
Mx' kNm

N:M interaction chart: My' critical

400 x 300 column (h x b), moment about yy axis), Grade C35, 30 Cover
5000

My min
4500 KEY

4000

3500
8H32
N
k
3000 3000
D
A 8H25
O 2500 2500
L
L
IA
X 2000 8H20
A

1500
8H16
1200
1000
8H12
500 0.1fcuAc

0 0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300
My' kNm

122

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:122 17/07/2006 17:07:36

 RCC54 Circular column charting .xls

RCC54 Circular column charting .xls

This spreadsheet generates design charts for circular reinforced
concrete columns. It shows the interaction between axial load
and applied moment. Designs for input design load cases are
given.

MAIN!
MAIN! contains all input data. It charts the relevant interaction
diagram and gives designs for the input load cases.

Some guidance for the input is given within the spreadsheet but
users should be familiar with BS 8110 Part 1, Clause 3.8 Columns.
The input moments should be the maximum design moments as
defined in BS 8110.

Calcs!
For each bar diameter size Calcs! works out the co-ordinates for
the N-M interaction diagram. Calcs! first works out the geometry
for columns with up to 16 bars, specifically the neutral axis depth
associated with no axial load, i.e. for N=0. Then for increments
of neutral axis depth, moment and axial load capacities are
calculated. The size of the increment is increased when neutral
axis depth exceeds 2/3d, i.e. as axial load predominates and less
accuracy is necessary.

Circle!
Circle! provides geometrical data for truncated circular sections
as look-up data for other sheets, notably for Calcs!

Cases!
For each load case, Cases! determines the smallest bar diameter
that satisfies the axial load and moment requirements. The input
load is used to look up the appropriate capacities from Calcs!.
These capacities are then used to determine the maximum
moment allowable with the specified axial load.

Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.

123

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:123 17/07/2006 17:07:38

 RCC53 Column Design/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Madeby Date Page
Location ColumnA
asA
t1e,2tc RMW 12-Apr-06 94
124
COLUMN CHART FOR CIRCULAR COLUMNS TO BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from 'R ' v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC
chg - R68
MATERIALS
fcu 35 N/mm² γm 1.15 steel Cover 30 mm
fy 500 N/mm² γm 1.5 concrete hagg 20 mm
steelclass A
SECTION h 475 mm with 8 bars

BAR ARRANGEMENTS
Type Bar Ø Asc % Link Ø B ar c/ c Nbal (kN) Nuz (kN) Checks
H 40 5.67 10 139.4 719 6984 ok
H 32 3.63 8 144.1 948 5467 ok
H 25 2.22 8 146.9 1028 4416 ok
H 20 1.42 6 150.4 1142 3824 ok
H 16 0.91 6 152.0 1152 3445 ok
H 12 0.51 6 153.5 1293 3150 ok

N:M INTERACTION CHART for 475 diameter column,

grade C35, 30 mm cover and 8 bars
8000
KEY
7000 M min

kN 6000 8H40
,
N
, 5000 8H32
N
O
I
S
S
E 4000 4100 8H25
R
P 3600
M
O 8H20
C 3000 3000
L
A
I 2500
X 8H16
A 2000
1500
1000 8H12
650 0.1fcuAc

0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600
MOMENT M, kNm

LOADCASES Load case N (kN) M (kNm) Load case N (kN) M (kNm)

1 650 210 8 H20 4 1500 160 8 H12
2 4100 320 8 H40 5 2500 210 8 H25
3 3000 60 8 H16 6 3600 175 8 H32

124

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:124 17/07/2006 17:07:39

 RCC61 Basement Wall.xls

RCC61 Basement Wall.xls

This spreadsheet designs simple retaining basement walls and is ■ The spreadsheet is not intended for walls over 3.5 m high
intended for walls up to 3.5 m high. It is based on complying with STABILITY! details other assumptions, i.e:
BS 8002: 1994 (4) and BS 8004: 1986 (23) . It may also be used to
design walls to comply with CECP 2 (6) and BS 8007 (5). ■ The wall idealised as a propped cantilever (i.e. pinned at top
and fixed at base)
The spreadsheet has been developed with both the BS 8002 ■ The wall is braced
and the conventional (CECP 2) methods in mind. On balance, ■ Maximum slenderness of wall is limited to 15, i.e. [ 0.9 x (H e
the spreadsheet provides reasonable flexibility and in doing so, - Tb/2)/Tw < 15 ]
encourages the designer to employ his/ her own engineering ■ Maximum ultimate axial load on wall is limited to 0.1fcu
judgement and interpretation of the codes. times the wall cross-sectional area
■ Design span = Effective wall height = H e - (Tb/2)
The spreadsheet is intended to cover only short walls and to
help ‘general’ engineers who, from time to time, design retaining ■ -ve moment is hogging (i.e. tension at external face of wall)
walls as part of a wider interest in structures, rather than the ■ +ve moment is sagging (i.e. tension at internal face of wall)
specialists. The 3.5 m wall height is an arbitrary limit set for a ■ ‘ Wall MT ‘ is maximum +ve moment on the wall
short wall which is intended to cover over 90% of the cases
encountered in ‘general’ structural designs. Although many of the ■ Estimated lateral deflections are used for checking the P∆
design principles still apply to higher walls, criteria such as wall effects.
movements and the validity of the assumptions made (e.g. no
wall friction) require further consideration and investigation. Factors for γf can be set at 1.4 or 1.6 in accordance with BS 8110
or may be set to 1. The designer has, and should have, the final
The effects of compaction pressures can be generated using decision and responsibility to select the load factors he or she
idealised imposed/ surcharged loads. Residual lateral pressure feels are suitable to the design conditions. Under Operating
calculations were considered to be too complicated to be covered Instructions a number of checks are carried out and problems
in the spreadsheet. highlighted.

Many cells are referred to in formulae by names; for example, An estimate of reinforcement per metre length of wall and base
DATA!C24 is given the name H which is used in formulae at M50: is given. Further details about DATA! can be seen under the
N50, Diagrams!D146:D150, etc. A list of names and where they description for RCC62.xls.
are defined can be seen by referring to Insert\ Name\ Define in
Excel, having unprotected the current sheet. Input is required on
three sheets.
STABILITY!
The spreadsheet is laid out in a very similar manner to RCC62. STABILITY! calculates the overturning and restoring moments,
sliding and resisting forces on a section together with ground
xls. Correct display of the diagrams requires that the Tekton and
Marker fonts have been installed. See FAQ. bearing pressures and factors of safety. Failures are highlighted.
Factors of safety against overturning and sliding are required as
input. As noted in the sheet, wall and/ or surcharge loads may
DATA! have stabilising effects.

This single sheet consists of the main inputs. Most inputs, which By using the buttons at L37:L40, the user should toggle between
are in blue and underlined, should be self-explanatory. The top maximum and minimum values to ascertain worst case(s)
diagram defines most input parameters. Please note that unless (perhaps this will be automated some time).
the Marker and Tekton fonts are loaded into the Windows font
folder the diagram will not display correctly. A simplistic chart In the case of sliding, where sliding resistance of the base alone is
shows the geometry of a section of the wall and base. insufficient, the user may choose, outside of the spreadsheet, to
rely on a propping force through the basement slab.
The spreadsheet is based on a number of assumptions, which
should be assessed as being true or erring on the safe side in each
case. DESIGN!
These assumptions are: The first page of this sheet tabulates moments and shears.
Input of eccentricity of vertical load, reinforcement diameters
■ Wall friction is zero
and centres is required for main bending steel on both internal
■ Minimum active earth pressure = 0.25qH and external faces and for transverse reinforcement. The
■ Granular backfill is used spreadsheet works on the principle of checking a proposed

125

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:125 17/07/2006 17:07:42

 section and reinforcement arrangement rather than proposing
an arrangement of reinforcement.

The second page details the design of both outer and inner parts
of the base. Again, the spreadsheet works on the principle of
checking a proposed section, and input of both reinforcement
diameter and centres is required for both main bending and
transverse reinforcement.

WEIGHT!
This sheet shows the build up to the estimate of reinforcement
weight given. The figures should be treated as approximate
estimates only as they cannot deal with the effects of designers’
and detailers’ preferences, rationalisation, etc.

Diagrams!
Diagrams! shows data for the charts used in other sheets but is
not necessarily intended for printing out other than for checking
purposes.

Crack width!
This sheet shows calculations to determine crack widths in the
wall. It is not necessarily intended for printing out, other than for

checking purposes.

Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.

126

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:126 17/07/2006 17:07:44

 RCC61 Basement Wall.xls

RCC61 Basement Wall/ DATA!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 etc The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M ade
by Date Page
Location G rli2dn e rc 1 2-A p r -2 00 6 9 5 127
Basement wall design to BS8110:2005 C hecked Revision JobNo

Originated from 'RCC61 Basement Wall. v3.0

' © 2006 TCC
chg - R 68
I D E A L I SE DST R U C T U R Ea n dF OR C ED I A G R A M S D E S I G NS T A T U S: VAL ID

DIMENSIONS(mm)
H= 3000 B
= 3500 Tw
= 225
Hw
= 0 =
BI 150 Tb
= 350
He= 2500

MATERIAL PROPERTIES steelclass A

fcu = 35 N/mm 2 γm= 1.50 concrete
fy= 500 N/mm 2 γm= 1.15 steel
Cover t o tension reinforcement (co) = 40 mm
Max. allowable design surface crack width (W) = 0.3 mm (0.2 or 0.3 mm
only)
Concrete density = 24.0 kN/m3 Wall Geometry
SOIL PROPERTIES
Design angle of int'l friction of retained mat'l (Ø) = 30 degree
Design cohesion of retained mat'l (C ) = 0 kN/m2 (Only granular backfill considered, ie "C" = 0)
Density of retained mat'l (q ) = 20 kN/m3
Submerged Density of retained mat'l (qs ) = 13.33 kN/m3 (default=2/3 of q), only apply when Hw >0
Designangleofint'lfrictionofbasemat'l(Øb)= 20 degree = 20.00
Design cohesion of base mat'l (Cb ) = 0 kN/m2 ASSUMPTIONS
Density of base mat'l (qb ) = 10 kN/m3 a) Wall friction is zero
Allowable gross ground bearing pressure (GBP) = 150 kN/m2 b) Minimum active earth pressure = 0.25qH
LOADINGS (unfactored) c) Granular backfill
Surcharge load -- live (SQK) = 10 kN/m2 h) Design not intended for walls over 3.5 m high
Surcharge load -- dead (SGK) = 10 kN/m2 i)Does n include check for temp or shrinkage ef
Line load - - l ive (LQK) = 15 kN/m
Line load - - d ead (LGK) = 20 kN/m
Distance of line load from wall (X) = 250 mm
Wall load - - l ive (WQK) = 50 kN/m
Wall load - - D ead (WGK) = 50 kN/m

LATERAL FORCES Ko = 0.50 default Ko = (1-SIN Ø) 0.50

Kac = 1.41 =2Ko 0.5

F o r c e(k N ) L e v e ra r m ( m ) Ultimate Force (kN)

PE = 31.25 LE= 0 .833 1.40 43.75
PS(GK) = 12.50 LS= 1.25 1.40 17.50
PS(QK) = 12.50 LS= 1.25 1.60 20.00
PL(GK) = 10.00 LL= 2.29 1.40 14.00
PL(QK) = 7.50 LL= 2.29 1.60 12.00
PW= 0.00 LW= 0.00 1.40 0.00
Total 73.75 107.25

127

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:127 17/07/2006 17:07:45

 RCC61 Basement Wall/ STABILITY!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 etc The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M ade
by Date Page
Location G rliidn2e rc 12 - A p r - 2 0 0 6 9 6 128
Basement wall design to BS8110:2005 C hecked Revision JobNo

Originated from 'RCC61 Basement Wall.xls' v3.0 © 2006 TCC

chg - R68
EXTERNA L STABIL ITY STA B ILI TY CH ECK : OK

ANALYSIS - Assumptions & Notes

1) Wall idealised as a propped cantilever ( i.e. pinned at top and fixed at base )
2) Wall is braced.
3) Maximum slenderness of wall is limited to 15, i.e [ 0.9*(He-Tb/2)/Tw < 15 ]
4) Maximum Ultimate axial load on wall is limited to 0.1fcu times the wa ll cross-sectional area
5) Design Span (Effective wall height) = He - (Tb/2)
6) -ve mome nt is hogging ( i .e. ten sion at ex ternal f ace of wall )
+ve moment is sagging ( i.e. tension at internal face of wall )
7) " Wall MT. " is maximum +ve moment on the wall.
8) Estimated lateral deflecti ons are used for checking the P effect .

UNFACTORED LOADS AND FORCES

F orc e L e v e r a r m B a s e M T . W a l l M T . R e a c t io n a t R e a c t io n a t E s t im a t e d E l a s t ic
La tera l F o rc e (kN ) t o b a s e (m ) (k N m) (k N m ) B a s e (k N ) T o p (k N ) Deflection (mm)
PE= 26.98 0.78 -10.11 4.14 23.15 3.82 0.2
PS(GK) = 11.62 1.16 -4.68 2.54 8.50 3.13 0.2
PS(QK) = 11.62 1.16 -4.68 2.54 8.50 3.13 0.1
PL(GK) = 10.00 2.12 -3.32 4.48 3.69 6.31 0.1
PL(QK) = 7.50 2.12 -2.49 3.36 2.77 4.73 0.0
PW= 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.0
Total 67.73 -25.28 17.06 46.61 21.12 0.6

GROUND BEARIN G FAILURE

LOAD CASE: Wall Load M 1
Taking moments about centre of base (anticlockwise "+") Surcharge M 0

Ve rt ic al FO RC ES (kN ) Le ve r ar m (m Mo me nt (k Nm )
Wallload= 100 1.49 148.75
Wall (sw) = 14.31 1.49 21.29 0
Base = 29.40 0.00 0.00
Earth = 6.45 1.68 10.80 50
Water = 0.00 1.68 0.00
Surcharge = 1.50 1.68 2.51 100

Line load = 20.00 0.00 0.00

150
V 171.66 Mv 183.35
200
MOMENT due to LATERAL FORCES, Mo = -18.11 kNm

RESULTANT MOMENT, M = Mv + Mo= 165.24 kNm

ECCENTRICITY FROM BASE CENTRE, M / V= 0.96 m

MAXIMUM GROSS BEARING PRESSURE = 145.34 kN/m 2 <15 0 OK

SLIDING AT BASE (using overall factor of safety instead of partial safety fa F.O.S = 1.50

SUM of LATERAL FORCES, P = 46.61 kN

BASE FRICTION, F = - ( V TANØb + B.Cb ) = -62.48 kN

Factor of Safety, bF/ P= 1.3 4 < 1.5 0 F A I L . .b u t

therefor e, LATERAL RE SISTANCE to be p rovided by BAS EMENT SLAB = 7.43 kN

128

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:128 17/07/2006 17:07:49

 RCC61 Basement Wall.xls

RCC61 Basement Wall/ DESIGN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 etc The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M ade
by Date Page
Location G rli d2
ne rc 1 2 - A p r - 20 0 6 9 7 129
Basement wall design to BS8110:2005 C hecked Revision JobNo

Originated from 'RCC61 Basement Wall.xls' v3.0 © 2006 TCC

c hg - R68
STRUCTURAL DESIGNS (ultimate) D E SIG N CH E C K S : OK
BS8110
WALL ( per metre le ngth ) reference
AXIAL LOAD CAPACITY ( Limited to 0.1fcu ) = 787.50 kN >1 50 OK 3.4.4.1

Force f Ult ima te Ult . Mo men Ult . She ar Ult . Sh ear

L ater a l F o r c e (k N ) F o r c e (k N ) t ba s e (k N m a t b a s e (k N )a t to p (k N )
PE= 26.98 1.40 37.77 -14.15 32.41 5.35
PS(GK)= 11.62 1.40 16.27 -6.55 11.90 4.38
PS(QK) = 11.62 1.60 18.60 -7.49 13.60 5.00
PL(GK)= 10.00 1.40 14.00 -4.65 5.17 8.83
PL(QK)= 7.50 1.60 12.00 -3.99 4.43 7.57
PW= 0.00 1.40 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Total 67.73 98.64 -36.83 67.50 31.14

Design Bending Moments

-50 0 50
0.00
On INTERNAL face due to lateral forces, M int= 21.83 kNm
On EXTERNAL face due to lateral forces, M ext = -36.83 kNm
0.57
Eccentricity of Axial Loads = 125 mm
LATERAL DEFLECTION " " = 0.6 mm
1.13
Due to eccentricity of axial loads, M ecc= 18.8 kNm

Due to effect, Mp= 0.08 kNm 1.70

Total Mmt on INTERNAL face (M int+0.5M ecc+Mp) = 31.3 kNm

2.26
Total Mmt on EXTERNAL face (M ext+0.5M ecc) = -46.2 kNm
2.83

E XT E RN AL F ACE IN T E RN A L F A CE
2
WALL REINFORCEMENT : Min.As
= 293 293 mm Table 3.25
φ= 16 12 mm
centres = 200 < 399 200 < 549 mm OK 3.12.11.2.7(b)
As= 1005 > 293 565 > 293 mm 2 OK
MOMENT of RESISTANCE : = d 177 179 mm
z =1 63 170 mm 3.4.4.4
A = s' 0 0 mm 2 3.4.4.4
Mres = 71.3 > 46.21 41.8 > 31.29 kNm OK

B AS E o f W A LL T OP o f W ALL
2
SHEAR RESISTANCE: As= 1005 φ= 10 @200mm393 mm /m
100As/bd= 0.57% = 0.22%
2
=
vc 0.72 0.52 N/mm Table 3.8
Vres = 12 7 .1 > 67 . 5 0 93 .3 > 3 1 . 1 4 kN OK 3.5.5.2

ACK WIDTH to BS8100/800 X= 59.61 mm εm = 0.00055 BS8007

Temp & shrinkage effects not Acr= 102.92 mm W 0.1 0 < 0 .3 0 m m OK App. B.2
included

REINFORCEMENT SUMMARY for WALL

Type c entres As M in .A s
mm mm mm 2 mm 2
INTERNALFACE H 12 200 565 293 OK
EXTERNALFACE H 16 200 1005 293 OK
TRANSVERSE H 10 225 349 293 OK

129

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:129 17/07/2006 17:07:52

 RCC61 Basement Wall/ DESIGN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 etc The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M ade
by Date Page
Location G rli d2
ne rc 1 2 - A p r - 2 00 6 9 8 130
Basement wall design to BS8110:2005 C hecked Revision JobNo

Originated from 'RCC61 Basement Wall.xls' v3.0 © 2006 TCC

ch g - R 68
OUTER BASE ( per metre length ) BS8110
1.50 (ASSUMED) reference
Ult. Shear = 10.35 kN (AT d from FACE of WALL)
Ult.MT.= 1.67 kNm TENSION -BOTTOMFACE

BOTTOM REINFORCEMENT : Min.As = 455 mm2 Table 3.25

φ= 12 mm
centres= 225 mm <7 62 OK
As= 503 mm2 >4 5 5 OK

MOMENT of RESISTANCE : d= 304 mm

Z= 289 mm 3.4.4.4
2
A s'= 0 mm
Mres = 63.12 kNm >1 .67 OK

SHEAR RESISTANCE: 100As/bd = 0.28%

2
vc= 0.42 N/mm Table 3.8
Vres = 126.35 kN >10.3 5 OK 3.5.5.2

CHECK CRACK WIDTH IN ACCORDANCE WITH BS8100/8007 :Temp & shrinkage effects not included
X= 60.69 mm εm = -0.0017 BS8007
Acr
= 115.54 mm W -0.38 mm <0. 30 OK App. B.2
NO CRACKING

INNER BASE ( per metre length )

Ult. Shear = -67.05 kN (AT d from FACE of WALL)
Ult. MT. = 39.60 kNm TENSION - BOTTOM FACE

BOTTOM REINFORCEMENT : Min.As = 455 mm2 Table 3.25

φ= 12 mm
centres= 225 mm <7 62 OK
As= 503 mm2 >4 5 5 OK

MOMENT of RESISTANCE : d= 304 mm

Z= 289 mm
A s'= 0 mm2
Mres = 63.12 kNm >3 9 . 6 0 OK 3.4.4.4

SHEAR RESISTANCE: 100As/bd = 0.17%

vc= 0.42 N/mm2 Table 3.8
Vres = 126.35 kN >67 .05 OK 3.5.5.2

CHECK CRACK WIDTH IN ACCORDANCE WITH BS8100/8007 :Temp & shrinkage effects not included
X= 60.69 mm εm = -0.0006 BS8007
Acr
= 115.54 mm W -0.14 mm <0. 30 OK App. B.2
NO CRACKING

REINFORCEMENT SUMMARY for BASE

Type c e n t r es As Mi n .A s
mm mm mm2 mm2
TOP H 12 225 503 455 OK
BOTTOM T 12 225 503 455 OK
TRANSVERSE T 12 225 503 455 OK

130

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:130 17/07/2006 17:07:55

 RCC61 Basement Wall.xls

RCC61 Basement Wall/ WEIGHT!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 etc The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M ade
by Date Page
Location Grli2nde rc 12-Apr-2006 99 131

Basement wall design to BS8110:2005

Originated from 'RCC61 Basement Wall.xls' v3.0 © 2006 TCC
C hecked
chg
Revision
-
JobNo
R68

APPROXIMATE WEIGHT OF R EINFORCEMENT per metre length of wall

No. Type Dia Length UnitWt Weight

WALL VERTICAL-Internalface 6 H 12 2746 0.888 14.63

VERTICAL-Externalface 6 H 16 2778 1.578 26.31
TRANSVERSE(Ext.+Int.) 24 H 10 1000 0.617 14.80

BASE TOP
(MAIN) 5 H 12 3596 0.888 15.96
BOTTOM(MAIN) 5 H 12 3596 0.888 15.96
TRANSVERSE(T&B) 32 H 12 1000 0.888 28.41
WALLSTARTERS(Int.) 6 H 12 1001 0.888 5.33
WALLSTARTERS(Ext.) 6 H 16 1193 1.578 11.30

SUMMARY Totalreinforcementpermetrelengthofwall(kg) 133

131

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:131 17/07/2006 17:07:59

 RCC62 Retaining Wall.xls
RCC62.xls designs simple retaining walls with stems up to 3.0 m peak strength reduced by a mobilisation factor or (b) the critical
high. The spreadsheet has been developed with both the BS 8002 state strength.
and the conventional (CECP 2) methods in mind. On balance,
the spreadsheet provides reasonable flexibility and, in doing As default values, the earth pressure coefficients are calculated
so, encourages the designer to employ their own engineering using the simplified Rankine’s formula for smooth vertical walls
judgement and interpretation of the codes. It is based on based on values of the design soil parameters. Alternatively,
complying with BS 8002: 1994 (4) and BS 8004: 1986 (23). It may the engineer can enter his or her own coefficients to suit the
also be used to design retaining walls to comply with CECP 2 (6) conditions of the design by overwriting the default values.
and BS 8007 (5).
Maximum earth pressure occurs during service and not at
The spreadsheet is intended to cover only short walls and to ultimate limit state, as at ultimate limit state the actual earth
help ‘general’ engineers who, from time to time, design retaining pressure will be less. BS 8002(4) also uses a mobilisation factor
walls as part of a wider interests in structures rather than the on soil parameters, increasing load on the active side of the wall
specialists. The 3.0 m wall height is an arbitrary limit set for and reducing soil resistance on the passive side. In so doing,
short wall which is intended to cover over 90% of the cases the code recommends that no further partial load factors are
encountered in general structural designs. Although many of the necessary in design of the structure. The above are not entirely
design principles still apply to higher walls, criteria such as wall compatible with BS 8110: Part 1, Table 2.1, nor to our knowledge
movements and the validity of the assumptions made (e.g. no have they been fully accepted by the general practising engineer.
wall friction) require further consideration and investigation. For Many designers do seem to use the BS 8002 mobilisation factor
instance, with reference to pressures, the engineer is expected as well as the traditional safety factors. Therefore the built-in
to judge between using the default of k a (active coefficient) or partial load factors may be changed. Factors can be set at 1.4 or
inputting a larger figure relating to ko (at rest coefficient). 1.6 in accordance with BS 8110 or may be set to 1.0. The designer
has, and should have the final decision and responsibility to
The effects of compaction pressures can be generated using select the load factors he or she feels are suitable to the design
idealised imposed/ surcharged loads. Residual lateral pressure conditions.
calculations were considered to be too complicated to be covered
in the spreadsheet. BS 8002 suggests that no additional factors of safety are required
in checking of external stability (i.e. over-turning and sliding)
Stability analysis is done about the toe of the base. (Stability provided that the structure is in equilibrium and the ‘worst
analysis taken about toe of nib is ignored; the nib is a section credible loads’ are used in the design.
sticking down from general level of the base, and stability analysis
about its toe gives strange answers). Global slope stability checks For the calculation of bearing pressures, all partial load factors are
are not undertaken in the spreadsheet and should be addressed switched to unity and the design checks are based on allowable
using other means. Input is required on three sheets. ground bearing pressure, i.e. the permissible stress approach.
The bearing pressure is then factored up with the partial load
Many cells are referred to in formulae by names; for instance factors adopted from above for the design of concrete base.
DATA!C23 is given the name H which is used in formulae at C56: Bearing pressure is calculated using the concept of ‘no tension’
D60, Diagrams!D88:D137, etc. A list of names and where they equilibrium, i.e. triangular stress blocks are used when eccentricity
are defined can be seen by referring to Insert\Name\Define in is outside the middle third.
Excel having unprotected the current sheet. The spreadsheet is
laid out in a very similar manner to RCC61.xls. Correct display BS 8002 has minimum surcharge and minimum unplanned
of the diagrams requires that the Tekton and Marker fonts have excavation depth requirements. However in the spreadsheet, the
been installed. See FAQ. surcharge loads are set as input data. The minimum 10 kN/m2
limit in BS 8002 has not been used with the understanding that
the BS 8002 committee is considering reducing the 10 kN/m 2 to
DATA! 6 kN/m2 for 3 m high walls.

This single sheet consists of the main inputs. Most inputs, which The spreadsheet is based on a number of assumptions which
are in blue and underlined, should be self-explanatory. The top should be assessed as being true or erring on the safe side in each
diagram defines most input parameters. Please note that unless case. These are:
the Marker and Tekton fonts are loaded into the Windows font
folder the diagram will not display correctly. ■ Wall friction is zero
The designer should determine the ‘Design Soil Parameters’ ■ Minimum active earth pressure = 0.25qH. A minimum active
based on the combinations in BS 8002 which will give the worst pressure of 0.25H (made to be a function of soil property rather
credible loads i.e. the design values should be the lower of (a) the than an arbitrary value equivalent to approx. 5 kN/m3 per m

132

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:132 17/07/2006 17:08:01

 RCC62 Retaining Wall.xls

height to cover conditions regarding tension cracks. However,

this does not comply with BS 8002, which recommends that
full hydrostatic pressure is used. As the majority of small
retaining walls have granular backfills, the cohesion value of
retaining soil has been ‘locked’ to zero.
● Granular backfill is used. Even a small value of effective
cohesion, c´, can significantly reduce active pressures.
However, to acknowledge the fact that many retaining
walls are built with granular backfill for drainage and to
err on the side of caution, the spreadsheet assumes only
cohesionless materials.
■ The spreadsheet does not include checks on rotational slide/
slope failure.
■ The spreadsheet does not include checks on the effects of
seepage of ground water beneath the wall.
■ The spreadsheet does not include checks on deflection of the
wall due to lateral earth pressures.
■ The spreadsheet is not intended for walls over 3.0 m high.
■ The spreadsheet includes for concrete self-weight.

Many engineers have reservations about including the effect of

passive pressure in front of the wall and a warning message has
been used to help ensure that passive pressure is considered only
if it can be guaranteed that there will be no future excavation in
front of the wall.

Under Operating Instructions a number of checks are carried out

and problems are highlighted.

Kp is calculated using base material properties. Lever arm of

passive reaction is measured from bottom base level downward.
In the calculation of passive force, cohesion of the base material
is also taken into consideration.

133

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:133 17/07/2006 17:08:03

 RCC62 Retaining Wall/ DATA!

Project
Spreadsheets to BS 8110etc The ConcreteCentre
Client
Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location
G rli 1dne rc 12-Ap r-2006 1 0 1 134
RETAINING WALL design to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from 'R ' v3.0 © 2006 TCC c hg - R 68
I D E AL I S E DS T R U C T U R Ea n dF O R C ED I AG R A M S D E S I G NS T A T U S : V

Passive pressure should

only be considered if it
can be guaranteed that
there will be no future
excavation in front of
the wall.

DIMENSIONS(mm)
=
H 3250 =
B 4000 Tw
= 300
Hw
= 1500 BI
= 1200 Tb
= 300
Hp = 300 =BN 0 =TN 0
Hn
= 0
MATERIAL PROPERTIES steelclass A
fcu= 35 N/mm² γm= 1.5 concrete
fy= 500 N/mm² γm= 1.15 steel
cover to tension steel = 50 mm
Max allowable design surface crack width (W) = 0.3 mm (0.2
mmor 0.3
only)
Concrete density = 24 kN/m³
S OPILR O P E R T I E S W aGlel o m e tr y
Design angle of int'l friction of retained mat'l (Ø) = 30 degree
Design cohesion of retained mat'l (C ) = 0 kN/m² (Only granular backfil considered, "C" = zero)
Density of retained mat'l (q ) = 20 kN/m³
Submerged Density of retained mat'l (qs ) = 5.00 kN/m³ [default=2/3*q (only apply when H 13.33
Design angle of int'l friction of base mat'l (Øb) = 20 degree ASSUMPTIONS
Design cohesion of base material (Cb ) = 10 kN/m² a) Wall friction is zero
Density of base material (qb ) = 10 kN/m³ b) Minimum active earth pressure = 0.25qH
Allowable gross ground bearing pressure (GBP) = 200 kN/m² c) Granular backfill
d)Does n include check of rotational slide/slope f
LOADINGS Surcharge load -- live (SQK) = 10 kN/m² e)Does n include effect of seepage of ground
Surcharge load -- dead (SGK) = 10 water beneath the wall.
Line load -- live (LQK) = 10.3 kN/m f)Does n include deflection check of wall due to
Line load -- dead (LGK) = 43 kN/m lateral earth pressures
Distance of line load from wall (X) = 0 mm h) Design not intended for walls over 3.0 m high
i) Does n include check for temp. or shrinkage eff
LATERAL FORCES (unfactored) Ka = 0.33 [ default ka = ( 1-SIN Ø)/(1+SIN Ø) ]0.3 3
Kp = 2.04 [ default kp = (1+SIN Øb)/(1-SIN Øb 2.04
Kpc = 2.86 [ default kpc = 2kp 0.5 ] = 2.86
Kac= 1.15 [2ka 0.5 ]

F or c e Le v e ra r m M o m en ta b o u tT O E Fult Mult
( kN) (m) (kNm) (kN) (kNm)

PE=
PS(GK)= 29.58
10.83 LE
LS== 1.194
1.63 35.33
17.60 1.40
1.40 41.42
15.17 49.46
24.65
PS(QK)= 10.83 LS= 1.63 17.60 1.60 17.33 28.17
PL(GK)= 0.00 LL= 3.25 0.00 1.40 0.00 0.00
PL(QK)= 0.00 LL= 3.25 0.00 1.60 0.00 0.00
PW= 11.25 LW= 0.50 5.63 1.40 15.75 7.88
62 .50 76 .16 89 . 67 1 10 .1 5
PP= -9.49 (LP-HN)= 0.15 -1.38 1.00 -9.49 -1.38

134

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:134 17/07/2006 17:08:04

 RCC62 Retaining Wall.xls

RCC62 Retaining Wall/ STABILITY!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110etc The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location G rliidn1 e rc 1 2 - A p r - 2 00 6 1 02135
RETAINING WALL design to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo

Originated from 'RCC62.xls' v3.0 © 2006 TCC

ch g - R 68
R N A LS A I L I STABILITY CHECKS : OK

OVERTURNING about TOE F.O.S = 1

(using overall factor of safety instead of partial safety factor)
Overturning L a t e r a l F O R C E (k N ) L e v e r a r m (m ) Mo m e n t ( k N m ) (select critical load combination)
Moments PE =29.58 LE=1.08 32.05 EARTH
PS(GK) =10.83 LS
=1.63 17.60 W
PS(GK)

PS(QK)= 10.83 LS= 1.63 17.60 PS(QK)

PL(GK)= 0.00 LL= 3.25 0.00 PL(GK)

PL(QK)= 0.00 LL= 3.25 0.00 PL(QK)

PW= 11.25 LW= 0.50 5.63 PW

62.50
Pp= -9.49 (LP-HN)= 0.15 -1.38
71.50

Restoring Ve r t i c a l F O R C E ( k N ) L e v e r a r m (m ) Mo m e n t ( k N m )
Moments Wall = 17.64 1.35 23.81
Base = 16.80 2.00 33.60 W
Nib = 0.00 0.00 0.00
Earth = 102.50 2.75 281.88 ALLOW BUOYANCY OF BASE
Water = 30.00 2.75 82.50
Surcharge = 50.00 2.75 137.50
Line load = 53.30 1.50 79.95
270.24 639.24

Fa cto r o f Safe ty , M r / M o = 8. 9 4 > 1 . 50 OK

SLIDING (using overall factor of safety instead of partial safety factor) F.O.S = 1

Sum of LATERAL FORCES, P = 62.50 kN

PASSIVE FORCE, Pp x Reduction factor (1) = -9.49 kN Red'n factor for passive force =
BASE FRICTION ( TANØb + B Cb ) = -138.36 kN
Sum of FORCES RESISTING SLIDING, P = -147.85 kN

F a c t o r o f Sa f e t y , P r / P = 2. 37 > 1 . 50 OK

GROUND BEARING FAIL

Taking moments about centre of base (anticlockwise "+") :

Vertical FORCES (kN) Lever arm (m Moment (kNm)

4 .0 0 0 .0 0
Wall = 21.24 0.65 13.81 0
Base = 28.80 0.00 0.00
Nib = 0.00 2.00 0.00
Earth = 102.50 -0.75 -76.88
Water = 30.00 -0.75 -22.50
50
Surcharge= 50.00 -0.75 -37.50
Line load = 53.30 0.50 26.65
285.84 -96.42

Moment due to LATERAL FORCES, M = 71.50 kNm 100

Resultant Moment, M = M + M = -24.91 kNm

Eccentricity from base centre, M / V = -0.09 m

Therefore, MAXIMUM Gross Bearing Pressure ( G ) = 77 kN/m² <200 OK

135

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:135 17/07/2006 17:08:08

 RCC62 Retaining Wall/ DESIGN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110etc The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location Grlid1ne rc 12-Apr-2006 10 3 136
RETAINING WALL design to BS 8110:2005
Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from 'RCC62.xls' v3.0 © 2006 TCC chg - R68

u timate DESIGN CHECKS : O

WALL ( per metre length )

Force Lever arm Moment V ult M ult

(kN) (m) (kNm) (kN) (kNm)
EARTH 25.41 1.07 27.08 1.4 35.57 37.92
SURCHARGE(GK) 9.83 1.48 14.50 1.4 13.77 20.31
SURCHARGE(QK) 9.83 1.48 14.50 1.6 15.73 23.21
LINE LOAD(GK) 0.00 2.95 0.00 1.4 0.00 0.00
LINE LOAD(QK) 0.00 2.95 0.00 1.6 0.00 0.00
WATER 7.20 0.40 2.88 1.4 10.08 4.03
Total 52.27 58.97 75.15 85.46
BS8110
reference

MAIN REINFORCEMENT :
0 50 100 Min.As= 390 mm Table 3.25
0.00 φ= mm
centres= 1 mm <364 OK 3.12.11.2.7(b)

0.59 Asprov= 2094 mm >390 OK

MOMENT of RESISTANCE :
1.18
d= 240 mm
z= 210.88 mm 3.4.4.4
1.77 As'
= 0 mm
Mres = 192.03 kNm >85.46 OK
2.36
SHEAR RESISTANCE:
100 As/bd = 0.87%
2.95 vc= 0.77 N/mm Table 3.8
Vres = 184.24 kN >75.15 OK 3.5.5.2
Ultimate Bending Moment Diagram

CHECK CRACK WIDTH TO BS8110/BS8007 : X= 95.47 mm

emperature and shrinkage effects not included) Acr = 86.05 mm
εm = 0.0006 BS8007
W= 0.12 mm <0.30 OK App. B.2

REINFORCEMENT SUMMARY for WALL

Type φ Centres As MinA

.s
mm mm mm2 mm2
VERTICALEXT.FACE H 1 754 390 OK
VERTICALINT.FACE H 20 150 2094 390 OK
TRANSVERSE H 1 754 390 OK

136

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:136 17/07/2006 17:08:12

 RCC62 Retaining Wall.xls

RCC62 Retaining Wall/ DESIGN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110etc The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location G rliidn1 e rc 12- A pr - 2006 1 04137
RETAINING WALL design to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo

Originated from 'RCC62.xls' v3.0 © 2006 TCC

chg - R68
- uno a e si e ( per metre length ) BS8110
γ (default = ult mt / non-factored mt 1.45 reference
Vult= 85.74 kN
M ult = 67.33 kNm ( '+' TENSION AT BOTTOM FACE)

BOTTOM REINFORCEMENT : Min. As = 390 mm

2
Table 3.25
φ= mm
centres= 1 mm <5 5 8 OK 3.12.11.2.7(b)
Asprov = 1340 mm
2
>39 0 OK

MOMENT of RESISTANCE : d= 242 mm

z = 223.36 mm 3.4.4.4
As'
= 0 mm 2
Mres = 130.17 kNm >6 7 . 3 3 OK

SHEAR RESISTANCE: 100 As/bd = 0.55%

vc= 0.66 N/mm2 Table 3.8
Vres = 159.32 kN >85 . 7 4 OK 3.5.5.2

CHECK CRACK WIDTH TO BS8110/BS8007 : (Temperature and shrinkage effects not included)
X= 80.69 mm εm = 0.00054 BS8007
Acr= 86.81 mm W
= 0.11 mm <0 . 3 0 OK App. B.2

BA E - loaded side ( per metre length )

Vult= 81.52 kN
Mult = 18.13 kNm (TENSION -TOP FACE)

TOP REINFORCEMENT : Min. As = 390 mm2 Table 3.25

φ= 1 mm
centres= 1 mm <5 5 8 OK 3.12.11.2.7(b)
Asprov = 1340 mm2 >39 0 OK

MOMENT RESISTANCE : d= 242 mm

z = 223.36 mm 3.4.4.4
As'
= 0 mm 2
Mres = 130.17 kNm >1 8. 1 3 OK

SHEAR RESISTANCE: 100 As/bd = 0.55%

vc= 0.66 N/mm2 Table 3.8
Vres = 159.32 kN >81. 5 2 OK 3.5.5.2

CHECK CRACK WIDTH to BS8100/ BS8007 : (Temperature and shrinkage effects not included)
X= 80.69 mm εm = -0.0003 BS8007
Acr= 86.81 mm W
= -0.05 mm <0 . 3 0 OK App. B.2

REINFORCEMENT SUMMARY for BASE

Type φ C ent er s As Mi n .A s
mm mm mm2 mm2
TOP(DESIGN) H 16 150 1340 390 OK
BOTTOM(DESIGN) H 16 150 1340 390 OK
TRANSVERSE H 1 565 390 OK

137

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:137 17/07/2006 17:08:15

 RCC62 Retaining Wall/ WEIGHT!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110etc The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location Grlidn1 e rc 12-Apr-2006 105 138
RETAINING WALL design to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from 'RCC62.xls' v3.0 © 2006 TCC chg - R68

APPROXIMATE WEIGHT OF REINFORCEMENT

No. Type Dia Length UnitWt Weight

WALL VERTICAL-Externalface 7 H 12 3046 0.888 18.93

VERTICAL-Internalface 7 H 20 3110 2.466 53.69
TRANSVERSE(Ext.&Int.) 40 H 12 1000 0.888 35.51

BASE TOP
(MAIN) 7 H 16 4128 1.578 45.61
BOTTOM(MAIN) 7 H 16 4128 1.578 45.61
TRANSVERSE(T&B) 42 H 12 1000 0.888 37.29
WALLSTARTERS(Ext.) 7 H 12 1155 0.888 7.18
WALLSTARTERS(Int.) 7 H 20 1475 2.466 25.46

NIB (assume same reinforcement as wall)

INTERNALFACE(MAIN) 7 H 12 96 0.888 0.60
EXTERNALFACE(MAIN) 7 H 20 160 2.466 2.76

TRANSVERSE(EXT.+INT.) 2 H 12 1000 0.888 1.78

S UMMARY Approxtotalreinforcementpermetrelengthofwall(kg)

138

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:138 17/07/2006 17:08:18

 RCC71 Stair Flight & Landing - Single.xls

RCC71 Stair Flight & Landing - Single.xls

RCC71.xls designs simply supported flights and landings to BS
8110. Input is required on two sheets.
Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
FLIGHT!
This single sheet consists of the input and main output. Inputs
are in blue and underlined and most should be self-explanatory.

Only simply supported spans are catered for. If flights are

continuous with floors, the user should specify continuity steel
over supports as appropriate. Calculations are done per metre
width of flight. Input loads are assumed to be characteristic and
acting vertically. They should account for any undercuts. Self-
weight, moments and reactions are calculated automatically.
The area of steel required, A sreq , may be automatically increased
to increase modification factors and satisfy deflection criteria.
Where the stair flight occupies more than 60% of the span an
increase in allowable span to depth ratios of 15% is included in
accordance with Clause 3.10.2.2. Nominal top reinforcement
may be specified in order to help overcome deflection problems.
Dimensions are not checked for compliance with Building
Regulations.

Ultimate, characteristic dead and characteristic imposed

reactions are given below the indicative diagram.

LANDING!
Again, this single sheet consists of the input and main output.
Input defaults in magenta have been derived from FLIGHT! but
may be overwritten. Calculations are done per metre width of
landing.

Inputs are underlined and most should be self-explanatory.

As defaults, which can be overwritten, the material data and
characteristic flight reactions carry over from FLIGHT! Self-
weight, moments and reactions are calculated automatically.
The maximum width of landing over which flight loads can be
dispersed has been restricted to 1.8 m in the spirit of Clause
3.10.1.3. Reactions are ultimate, both total and per metre run.

The area of steel required, As, can be automatically increased to

satisfy deflection criteria.

Dias!
Dias! calculates the reinforcement sizes and reinforcement
percentages for deflection modification factors used in FLIGHT!
and LANDING!

139

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:139 17/07/2006 17:08:20

 RCC71 Stair Flight & Landing - Single/ FLIGHT!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M ade
by Date Page
Location South Staircase FLIGHT rmw 1 2 - A p r - 06 1 06
140
STAIR FLIGHTS AND LANDINGS to BS 8110:2005 C hecked Revision JobNo
Originated from R ' v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC
chg - R68
MATERIALS
fcu 35 N/mm² γm 1.5 concrete Min bar Ø = 10
fy 500 N/mm² γm 1.15 steel Max bar Ø = 16
hagg 20 mm steel class A
Cover 25 mm Density 23.6 kN/m³ Nominal top steel ? Y
(Normal weight concrete)
D I M E N SI ON S S e c t io n aEll e v a t i o n

a= 600 mm landing A h = 175

b= 2500 mm flight waist = 200
c= 1200 mm landing B h = 200
d= -600 mm
e= -100 mm
Going = 250 mm L= 4
Rise = 1900 mm total 10 treads
Rise = 173 mm each step Rake = 34.64 º

LOADING
Imposed 4.00 kN/m² 47.08 kN/mult 37.81 kN/mult
Flight finishes 1.60 kN/m² (20.87+11.16) (16.91+8.84)
Landing fin ishes 1.30 kN/m²

DESIGN
LANDING A, gk = 4.13 + 1.30 = 5.43 kN/m² n = 1.4 x 5.43 + 1.6 x 4.0 = 14.00 kN/m²
FLIGHT, gk = 7.78 + 1.60 = 9.38 kN/m² n = 1.4 x 9.38 + 1.6 x 4.0 = 19.53 kN/m²
LANDING C, gk = 4.72 + 1.30 = 6.02 kN/m² n = 1.4 x 6.02 + 1.6 x 4.0 = 14.83 kN/m²

Zero shear is at 0.6 + (47.08 - 16.80) /19.53 = 2.151 m from left

M = 47.08 x 2.151 - 16.80 x 2.151 - 19.53 x 1.551²/2 = 41.64 kNm/m
d=2 00-25-8=167mm K=0 .0427 As= 604mm²/m
PROVIDE H16 @ 280 B = 718 mm²/m
Enhanced by 17.9 % for deflection H10 @ 300 T in span
L/d = 4,300 /167 = 25.749 < 20.0 x 1.235 x 1.050 = 25.930 allowed OK

140

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:140 17/07/2006 17:08:21

 RCC71 Stair Flight & Landing - Single.xls

RCC71 Stair Flight & Landing - Single/ LANDING!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M ade
by Date Page
Location South Staircase LANDING rm w 12- A p r -06 141
1 07
STAIR FLIGHTS AND LANDINGS to BS 8110:2005 C hecked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC71.xls' v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg R6 8

MATERIALS
fcu 35 N/mm² γm 1.5 concrete Min bar Ø = 10
fy 500 N/mm² γm 1.15 steel Max bar Ø = 16
hagg 20 mm Density 23.6 kN/m³
Cover 25 mm (Normal weight concrete) Nominal top steel ? Y

DIMENSIONS
a = 1200 mm depth, h = 175 mm
b = 1200 mm width, w = 1200 mm
c= 250 mm
d= 175 mm L= 3 mm

LOADING
LANDING Imposed 4.00 kN/m² 79.3 kNult 74.0 kNult
Finishes 1.50 kN/m² 66.1k N/mult 61.6k N/mult
Slab 4.13 kN/m² n = 1.4 x 5.63 + 1.6 x 4.0 = 14.28 kN/m²
gk qk
Flight a r eaction 20.87 11.16 kN/m n1 = (1.4 x 20.87 + 1.6 x 11.16)/1.20 = 39.23 kN/m²
Flight b reaction 16.91 8.84 kN/m n2 = (1.4 x 16.91 + 1.6 x 8.84)/1.20 = 31.51 kN/m²

DESIGN
Zero shear is at (66.11 - 2.50) /(14.28 + 39.23) + 0.175 = 1.364 m from left
M = 66.11 x 1.364 - 14.28 x 1.364²/2 - 39.23 x 1.189²/2 = 49.15 kNm/m
d=1 75-25-8=142mm K=0 .0696 As= 870mm²/m
PROVIDE H16 @ 200 B = 1005 mm²/m
Enhanced by 12.7 % for deflection H10 @ 325 T in span
L/d = 3,000 /142 = 21.127 < 20.0 x 1.021 = 21.516 allowed OK

141

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:141 17/07/2006 17:08:25

 RCC72 Stairs & Landings - Multiple.xls
This spreadsheet designs the flights and landings of a staircase in
a stair core to BS 8110. It is assumed that flights are supported
on the landings and that the landings are simply supported on
bearings at each end.

STAIRCORE!
This single sheet consists of the input and main output. Inputs
are in blue and underlined and most should be self-explanatory.

Dimensions are not checked for compliance with Building

Regulations. Simple supports are assumed. Calculations are done
per metre width of flight and landing. Input loads are assumed
to be characteristic and acting vertically. They should account
for any undercuts. All stairs are assumed to start from flight 1.
Superfluous flights and landings are blanked out. Self-weight,
moments and reactions are calculated automatically. Where the
stair flight occupies more than 60% of the span an increase in
allowable span to depth ratios of 15% is included in accordance
with Clause 3.10.2.2 and, as with other spreadsheets, the area
of steel required may be automatically increased to satisfy
deflection criteria. Ultimate reactions per metre are given.

Dias!
Dias! calculates the reinforcement sizes and reinforcement
percentages for deflection modification factors used in
STAIRCORE!

Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.

142

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:142 17/07/2006 17:08:29

 RCC72 Stairs & Landings - Multiple.xls

RCC72 Stairs & Landings - Multiple/ STAIRCORE!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M ade
by Date Page
Location NorSthtaircase RMW 12-Apr-06 109143
REINFORCED CONCRETE STAIRCASES to BS 8110:2005 C hecked Revision JobNo
Originated from R v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R 68

MATERIALS Plans
fcu 35 N/mm² γm 1.5 concrete
fy 500 N/mm² γm 1.15 steel
hagg 20 mm steel class A
Cover 20 mm Density 23.6 kN/m³
(Normal weight concrete)
DIMENSIONS No of Flights = 6
A = 1200 mm B= 150 mm bearing
C= 250 mm Going = 250 mm

L1 = 1200 mm F1 = 2500 mm 10treads

L2 = 1200 mm F2 = 2500 mm 10treads
L3 = 1200 mm F3 = 2500 mm 10treads
L4 = 1200 mm F4 = 2500 mm 10treads
L5 = 1200 mm F5 = 2500 mm 10treads
L6= 750 mm F6 = 2500 mm 10treads

S T O R EY HE I G HT RI S E RS RISE R A KE
Lower 3500 mm 22 159.1 mm 32.5 º
Typical 3500 mm 22 159.1 mm 32.5 º
Upper 3500 mm 22 159.1 mm 32.5 º

LOADING Imposed 4.00 kN/m²

Flight finishes 0.50 kN/m²
Landing finishes 1.30 kN/m²

FLIGHT 1
Waist = 150 mm a = 2.350 m
b = 0.600 m
Waist 4.20 L= 2.950 m
Steps 1.88
Finishes 0.50
6.57 kN/m²
n1=1 .4x6.57+1.6x4.00 14.60k N/m 22.06k N/m
= 15.60 kN/m²
M= 22.06x1.414/2=15.60kNm/m d=1 25mm K= 0.0285
As = 363 mm² PROVIDE 5 H10 @ 270 B = 393 mm² L/d = 23.600 < 25.863 allowed

FLIGHT 2
Waist = 150 mm a = 2.500 m b = 0.600 m c = 0.600 m
L = 3.700 m
Waist 4.20

Steps
Finishes 1.88
0.50
6.57 kN/m² n2 = 15.60 kN/m² 19.50k N/m 19.50 kN/m

M=1 9.50x(1.850-0.625)=23.89kNm/m d=1 24mm K=0 .0444

As = 561 mm² PROVIDE 9 H12 @ 130 B = 1018 mm² L/d = 29.839 < 30.921 allowed
As increased by 67.0 % for deflection

143

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:143 17/07/2006 17:08:29

 RCC72 Stairs & Landings - Multiple/ STAIRCORE!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M ade
by Date Page
Location N o r tSht a i r c a s e RM W 12 - A p r - 0 6 144
1 10
REINFORCED CONCRETE STAIRCASES to BS 8110:2005 C hecked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC72.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC
chg - R 68
L AN DI N G +1.7 50 m
h= 150 mm L = 2.800 m

Selfwt 3.54 n1=1 4.60/1.20= 12.17 kN/m²

Finishes 1.30 n2= 19.50/1.20= 16.25 kN/m²
4.84 kN/m² na = 1.4x4.84+1.6x4.0 = 13.18 kN/m² 34.23 kN/m 36.77 kN/m

M=3 6.77x1.310-11.31-12.39=24.48kNm/m d=1 24mm K=0 .0455

As = 576 mm² PROVIDE 6 H12 @ 220 =B679 mm² L/d = 22.581 < 23.995 allowed
As increased by 9.7 % for deflection
FLIGHT 3
Waist = 150 mm a = 2.500 m b = 0.600 m c = 0.600 m
L = 3.700 m
Waist 4.20
Steps 1.88
Finishes 0.50
6.57 kN/m² n3 = 15.60 kN/m² 19.50 19.50

M=1 9.50x(1.850-0.625)=23.89kNm/m d=1 24mm K=0 .0444

As = 561 mm² PROVIDE 9 H12 @ 130 =B1018 mm² L/d = 29.839 < 30.921 allowed
As increased by 67.0 % for deflection

LA ND INhG= 2 +3
150.5 00 mm
m L = 2.800 m

Selfwt 3.54 n3= 16.25 kN/m²

Finishes 1.30 n2= 16.25 kN/m²
4.84 kN/m² nb = 13.18 kN/m² 37.95 37.95

M=3 7.95x1.400-12.91-14.14=26.08kNm/m d=1 24mm K=0 .0485

As = 616 mm² PROVIDE 7 H12 @ 180 =B 792 mm² L/d = 22.581 < 24.984 allowed
As increased by 12.4 % for deflection
FLIGHT 4
Waist = 150 mm a = 2.500 m b = 0.600 m c = 0.600 m
L = 3.700 m
Waist 4.20
Steps 1.88
Finishes 0.50
6.57 kN/m² n4 = 15.60 kN/m² 19.50 19.50

M=1 9.50x(1.850-0.625)=23.89kNm/m d=1 24mm K=0 .0444

As = 561 mm² PROVIDE 9 H12 @ 130 =B1018 mm² L/d = 29.839 < 30.921 allowed
As increased by 67.0 % for deflection
LA ND IN G 3 +5 .2 50 m
h= 150 mm L = 2.800 m

Selfwt 3.54 n3= 16.25 kN/m²

Finishes 1.30 n4= 16.25 kN/m²
4.84 kN/m² nc = 13.18 kN/m² 37.95 37.95

M=3 7.95x1.400-12.91-14.14=26.08kNm/m d=1 24mm K=0 .0485

As = 616 mm² PROVIDE 7 H12 @ 180 =B 792 mm² L/d = 22.581 < 24.984 allowed
As increased by 12.4 % for deflection

144

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:144 17/07/2006 17:08:33

 RCC72 Stairs & Landings - Multiple.xls

RCC72 Stairs & Landings - Multiple/ STAIRCORE!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M ade
by Date Page
Location N o r tSht a i r c a se RM W 12 - A p r - 0 6 145
11 1
REINFORCED CONCRETE STAIRCASES to BS 8110:2005 C hecked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC72.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68
FLIGHT 5
Waist = 150 mm a = 2.500 m b = 0.600 m c = 0.600 m
L = 3.700 m
Waist 4.20
Steps 1.88
Finishes 0.50
6.57 kN/m² n5 = 15.60 kN/m² 19.50 19.50

M=1 9.50x(1.850-0.625)=23.89kNm/m d=1 24mm K=0 .0444

As = 561 mm² PROVIDE 9 H12 @ 130 =B1018 mm² L/d = 29.839 < 30.921 allowed
As increased by 67.0 % for deflection
LA ND IN G 4 +7 .0 00 m
h= 150 mm L = 2.800 m

Selfwt 3.54 n5= 16.25 kN/m²

Finishes 1.30 n4= 16.25 kN/m²
4.84 kN/m² nd = 13.18 kN/m² 37.95 37.95

M=3 7.95x1.400-12.91-14.14=26.08kNm/m d=1 24mm K=0 .0485

As = 616 mm² PROVIDE 7 H12 @ 180 =B792 mm² L/d = 22.581 < 24.984 allowed
As increased by 12.4 % for deflection

FLIWaist
GHT 6= 150 mm a = 2.500 m b = 0.600 m c= 0.375 m
L = 3.475 m
Waist 4.20
Steps 1.88
Finishes 0.50
6.57 kN/m² n6 = 15.60 kN/m² 18.24 20.77

M=1 8.24x(1.769-0.585)=21.61kNm/m d=1 24mm K=0 .0401

As = 506 mm² PROVIDE 7 H12 @ 180 =B792 mm² L/d = 28.024 < 30.077 allowed
As increased by 38.0 % for deflection
LA ND IN G 5 +8.7 50 m
h= 150 mm L = 2.800 m

Selfwt 3.54 n5= 16.25 kN/m²

Finishes 1.30 n6= 15.20 kN/m²
4.84 kN/m² ne = 13.18 kN/m² 37.65 36.99

M= 37.65x1.377-12.49-13.69=25.65kNm/m d= 124mm K=0 .0477

As = 605 mm² PROVIDE 6 H12 @ 220 =B679 mm² L/d = 22.581 < 22.669 allowed
As increased by 11.7 % for deflection
LAN DIN G 6 +10.50 0 m
h= 150 mm L = 2.800 m

Selfwt 3.54 n6= 27.69 kN/m²

Finishes 1.30
4.84 kN/m² nf = 13.18 kN/m² 26.46 43.66

M=4 3.66x1.119-8.25-15.10=25.52kNm/m d=1 25mm K=0 .0467

As = 596 mm² PROVIDE 6 H10 @ 130 =B471 mm² L/d = 22.400 < 25.042 allowed
As increased by 9.7 % for deflection

145

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:145 17/07/2006 17:08:36

 RCC81 Foundation Pads.xls
This spreadsheet designs simple pad foundations from input of the base a warning message is given; the general status message
material properties, dimensions and characteristic loads and is updated as well.
moments. Single column bases and combined, double bases are
catered for on separate sheets. Factors of safety against overturning are checked (minimum 1.5).
Warnings are also given at the onset of an uplift situation.
A diagram is provided to illustrate the dimensions: a chart
showing scale plan views is provided to help ensure gross errors
are avoided. The ‘efficiency’ diagrams are provided so that the user DOUBLE!
may gauge how hard the base is working in respect to allowable
increase in ground bearing pressure, bending and shear in the two In addition to graphs showing plan layout and ‘efficiency’, this
axes together with a measure on punching shear capacity. If the sheet gives moment diagrams for the two principal axes. Design
design is invalid, this chart should help identify the problem. moments are taken at the edge of both column sections.

The spreadsheet does not allow for punching shear links – Suggestions are made, under the Operating Instructions column
bending reinforcement is increased to ensure allowable shear, vc, at L31:L35, for the optimum plan size of the base and eccentricities
is adequate. The user should note that punching shear perimeters given the column offsets from one another.
can jump from being rectangular to being two- or three-sided,
leading to unexpectedly large increases in reinforcement for The user’s attention is drawn to the fact that the analysis is done
increases in base thickness. Information from BS 8110: Part 1, in two orthogonal directions. When column eccentricities are
Clause 3.7.7.8 and Figure 3.19 has yet to be fully incorporated in large in both directions the analysis may not account adequately
this spreadsheet. for local effects (e.g. bottom cantilever moments on two sides of
each column – loads in opposite corners gives bottom moments of
Warnings are given if columns encroach within 100 mm of an 0 kNm). In such cases, it may be better to change the orientation
edge. of the base in such a way that eccentricity in one direction is
minimal. Warnings about double eccentricities are given when
the distances between column centrelines exceed 15% of the
SINGLE! relevant base dimension in each orthogonal direction.

Suggestions are made, under the Operating Instructions column Comparison with FE analysis suggests this is reasonable so long
at L12, for the optimum plan size of the base. as the base is thick and rigid.

Where two centres are given, e.g. 14 T16 @ 200 & 325 B2, the
reinforcement is subject to BS 8110: Part 1, Clause 3.11.3.2 and Det2!
different centres are required, bars need to be grouped closer in
the central part of the base. This sheet shows workings and is not necessarily intended for
printing out other than for checking purposes.

Det1! The notes for Det! above also apply.

This sheet shows workings and is not necessarily intended for

printing out other than for checking purposes.
Legends!
This sheet shows dimensions, axes, corners and notation used.
Allowable bearing pressure is taken as an allowable increase in
bearing pressure and density of concrete –density of excavated
material (i.e. soil) is used in the calculations. The program Graf!
assumes that pads are embedded to depth H in the soil. A 25%
over-stress is allowed where load cases include wind loads. This sheet comprises data for graphs for both SINGLE! and

Design moments are generally those at the face of the column. DOUBLE!
Both sides of the column are checked for moment in each
direction to ensure maxima are identified. Shear enhancement is Notes!
allowed for both beam and punching shear.
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
Neither crack widths, factors of safety against sliding, nor water
tables are catered for. Where resultant eccentricities are outside

146

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:146 17/07/2006 17:08:39

 RCC81 Foundation Pads.xls

RCC81 Foundation Pads/ SINGLE!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The ConcreteCentre

Client Advisory Group M adeby Date Page
Location LeBv-aB1esl1e RM W 12-Apr-06 113
147
PAD FOUNDATION DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Single column base C hecked Revision JobNo
Originated from R v3.2 on CD © 2006 TCC
c hg - R6 8

MATERIALS fcu 35 N/mm² hagg 20 mm γc 1.5 concrete

fy 500 N/mm² cover 50 mm γs 1.15 steel
Densities - Concrete 24 kN/m³ Soil 21 kN/m³ steelclass A
Bearing pressure 185 kN/m² (net allowable increase)

DIMENSIONS mm
BASE COLUMN
L= 3000 h= 500
B= 3000 b= 500
depth H = 500
ex
=0 ey
=0

COLUMN REACTIONS kN, kNm characteristic Plot (to scale) Key

D EA D I M P O SE D WIN D
Axial (kN) 1480.0 128.0 STATUS VALID DESIGN
Mx (kNm) -20.0
Grnd Brg Pressure 100%
My (kNm)
Hx (kN) Bending fsx 55%
Hy (kN)
(As/Asprov) fsy 52%

Overturning FOS = Large Shear v xx 44%

Uplift FOS = infinite
v yy 45%

BEARING PRESSURES kN/m² characteristic punching 98%

CORNER 1234
0% 25% 50% 75% 100% 125%
nowind 184.6 175.7 184.6 175.7
withwind 184.6 175.7 184.6 175.7 Efficiency

REINFORCEMENT Detailto3.11.3.2 Detailto3.11.3.2

Mxx = 603.4 kNm Myy = 592.9 kNm
b= 3000 mm b = 3000 mm
d= 437.5 mm d = 412.5 mm
As = 3339 mm² As = 3480 mm²
PROVIDE 13 H25 @ 200 & 250 B1 PROVIDE 13 H25 @ 200 & 275 B2
As prov = 6381 mm² As prov = 6381 mm²
Asx increased 80% for shear Asyincreased 70% for shear
BEAM SHEAR . .
Vxx = 625.8 kN at d from col face Vyy = 629.9 kN at d from col face
v = 0.477 N/mm² v = 0.509 N/mm²
or Vxx = 286.9 kN at 2d from col face or Vyy = 311.2 kN at 2d from col face
v = 0.219 N/mm² v = 0.251 N/mm²
vc = 0.544 N/mm² vc = 0.563 N/mm²

PUNCHING SHEAR . .
d ave = 425 mm u crit = 7100 mm
As prov = 0.501 % v max = 2.782 N/mm² at col face
v= 0.541 N/mm² vc = 0.553 N/mm²

147

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:147 17/07/2006 17:08:41

 RCC81 Foundation Pads/ DOUBLE!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M adeby Date Page
Location B3a /s eB4 RM W 12-Apr-06 148
114
PAD FOUNDATION DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Combined base Checked Revision JobNo

Originated from RCC81.xls v3.2 on CD © 2006 TCC

c hg - R6 8
MATERIALS fcu 35 N/mm² hagg 20 mm γc 1.5 concrete
fy 500 N/mm² cover 50 mm γs 1.15 steel
Densities - Concrete 24 kN/m³ Soil 21 kN/m³
Bearing pressure 185 kN/m² (net allowable)
STATUS VALID DESI GN
COLUMN REACTIONS kN, kNm characteristic
Column 1(rhs) DEA D IMP OSE D W IN D Column 2(lhs) DE A D I MPO SE D W IN D
Axial 1369.5 1369.5 Axial 1369.5 1369.5
Mx Mx
My My
Hx Hx
Hy Hy

DIMENSIONS mm
BASE COLUMN 1(rhs) COLUMN 2(lhs)
L= 6000 h1= 450 h2= 450
B= 5000 b1= 450 b2= 450
depth H = 800
Σex = 3000 ex1=1 500 ex2=1 500
Σey = 0 ey1
= 0 ey2
= 0

Overturning FOS = Large Uplift FOS = infinite PLOT (to scale)

BEARING PRESSURES kN/m² characteristic
Grnd Brg Pressure 100%
C OR N E R 1 2 3 4
nowind 185.0 185.0 185.0 185.0 Bending fsx 98%
withwind 185.0 185.0 185.0 185.0 (As/Asprov) fsy 83%

Shear v xx 31%
REINFORCEMENT
Mxx - 1113.1 kNm Myy - 4252.8 v yy 75%
b= 5000 mm b= 6000 punching 91%
d= 740 mm d = 717.5
As = 3642 mm² As = 14350 0% 50% 100% 150%

PROVIDE 17 H20 @ 275 & 325 B1 & 30 H25 @ 225 B2 Efficiency'

As prov = 5341 mm² Asprov= 14726
Detail to clause 3.11.3.2 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5
Mxx + 0.0 kNm Myy+ 0.0 200
0
d= 740 mm d= 720 -200
As= 0 mm² As= 0 -400
-600
PROVIDE 17 H20 @ 275 & 325 T1 & 20 H20 @ 325 T2 -800
As prov = 5341 mm² Asprov= 6283 -1000
-1200
. . Moment Columns Zeroaxis

BEAM SHEAR . . Mx Diagram(1.4Gk + 1.6Qk)

Vxx = 732.7 kN at d Vyy = 2559.6 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
v = 0.198 N/mm² v = 0.595 0
or Vxx = 0.0 kN at 2d or Vyy = 1380.5 -1000
v = 0.000 N/mm² v = 0.321 -2000
vc = 0.318 N/mm² vc = 0.427 -3000
-4000
PUNCHING SHEAR . .
-5000
d ave = 729 mm u crit = 16545 mm

148

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:148 17/07/2006 17:08:44

 RCC82 Pilecap Design.xls

RCC82 Pilecap Design.xls

This spreadsheet designs pilecaps with between two and six piles, Page numbers for printing do not follow on from previous sheets,
and then prepares a sketch drawing of each type of cap together so must be entered by the user. This allows for intermediate
with a bar schedule. Bending theory is employed throughout to calculation pages (perhaps for loading) to be inserted.
design the caps. Depending upon the pilecap’s dimensions, the
alternative truss method of design may be possible, but is not
covered by this spreadsheet. SCHEDULE!
There are seven main sheets: DOUBLE!, 3CAP!, 4CAP!, 5CAP!, This sheet is a bar schedule complying with BS 8666, for the
6CAP!, SCHEDULE! and DRAWING! Each of the first five sheets pilecap drawing on the DRAWING! sheet.
contains two pages that may be printed out. The first (or upper)
page contains input data and a summary of results, while the Beneath the operating instructions, the number of each type
second (or lower) page shows more detailed calculations. of cap must be entered. These numbers are then used on the
schedule and the drawing.
The selection of size and number of top and bottom bars is
automated. The number of bars determined by either:
DRAWING!
■ Area of steel required/ area of maximum sized bar (40mm
diameter) This sheet draws approximately to scale plans and elevations
with reinforcement and bar marks for each of the cap types. It
■ Spacing rules or is intended for printout to an A3 sheet. If the user wishes to add
■ Number of legs of links required in shear. additional notes, these may be added in cell U27.

The size of link to be used has also been automated.

Graf!
The designer and detailer may wish to rationalise the output
given on the DRAWING! sheet. But doing so will obviously affect This sheet provides data for the charts in all sheets. It is not
the bar data on SCHEDULE! intended for formal printing.

DOUBLE! Notes!
The DOUBLE! sheet is where all material properties are entered, This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
together with covers, pile diameter and pile tolerance. All
subsequent sheets use these same properties. Pile tolerance is the
amount by which a pile may deviate from its intended position.
This value is used in calculation to increase bending moments to
allow for this possible deviation. Pile reactions are not similarly
increased.

Dimensional data for a double pile cap and the supported column
are then entered, followed by characteristic column axial loads,
moments and horizontal shears for dead load, imposed load
and wind load. The results of calculations for all BS 8110 loading
combinations are then displayed below (on page X), together
with the required arrangement of reinforcement. More detailed
calculations may be found by scrolling down to page X.

3CAP!, 4CAP!, 5CAP! and 6CAP!

These sheets are identical in function to DOUBLE!, but deal with
caps having 3, 4, 5 and 6 piles respectively.

However, material properties, pile diameter and tolerance are

picked up from DOUBLE!

149

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:149 17/07/2006 17:08:48

 RCC82 Pilecap Design/ DOUBLE!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The ConcreteCentre

Client BigBucks PLC M adeby Date Page
Location Pilecap G14 Ro d 12 -A p r-06 1 01
150
Double Pilecap
PILECAPDESIGNtoBS8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from R v 3.1 on CD © 2006 TCC
- - P 2 000

MATERIALS fcu 35 N/mm² hagg 20 mm γc 1.5 concrete

fy 500 N/mm² T&S cover 50 mm γs 1.15 steel
Pile capacity 200 kN Btmcover 75 mm steelclass A
DIMENSIONSmm Conc density 23.6 kN/m³
COLUMN PILECAP
→ = 350 A
= 400
↑ = 350 B= 1500
C = 400
PileØ=3 75 E=7 50
Tolerance = 150 depth H = 400

COLUMN ACTIONSkN, kNm characteristic

DEAD IMPOSED WIND
Axial (kN) 218 104.2 27.5 PLOT (to scale) KEY
M (kNm) 23.2 10.4 2.7
H (kN) 0 0 0 STATUS VALID DESIGN

REINFORCEMENT PILE REACTIONSkN

BOTTOM M = 196.9 kNm PILE1 PILE2
d=309.0mm, As=1,611mm² Gk+Qk 147.4 192.2
9 H16 B = 1,810mm² Gk+Qk+Wk 159.3 207.7
TOP M = 0.0 kNm
d = 337.0 mm, As min = 416 mm²
6 H10 T = 471 mm² 6 H10 02 T
LINKS
V = 279.7 kN, v = 1.131 N/mm²
vc = 0.68 N/mm² 9 H16 01 B
(v - vc)b = 361.4 N/mm Links 10 H8 03.225 + 2x10 H8 04.225
4 Legs H8 @ 225 LINKS = 388.5 N/mm ELEVATION

150

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:150 17/07/2006 17:08:49

 RCC82 Pilecap Design.xls

RCC82 Pilecap Design/ DESIGN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client BigBucks PLC M adeby Date Page
Location Pilecap G14 - Detailed Calculations Rod 12-Apr-06 102
151
PILECAPDESIGNtoBS8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC82.xls v 3.1 on CD © 2006 TCC - - P 2 00 0

Cap load (kN) = 17.4 Piles @ (m) 1.500 PILE REACTIONSkN

or (kN/m) = 7.55 PILE1 PILE2
Gk+Qk 147.4 192.2 .
OVERTURNING MOMENTS
- kNm characteristic Gk+Qk+Wk 159.3 207.7 .
DEAD IMPOSED WIND 1.4Gk + 1.6Qk 215.4 280.9
23.2 10.4 2.7 Gk+1.4Wk 118.9 154.9 .
1.2(Gk+Qk+Wk) 191.2 249.3
BENDING MOMENTS
- kNm
1.4Gk + 1.6Qk Gk + 1.4Wk 1.2(Gk+Qk+Wk)
M  of col 149.5 81.5 132.9 arm (m) 0.725
M  of col 196.9 107.5 175.0 arm (m) 0.725
(including tolerance)
B O T T OM
S TEEL T OSPT E E L
BottomM
= 196.9 16 Top
M
= 0.0 10 K'
= 0.1558
=d 309.0 =d 337.0 min
As
=0.13%
=K 0.0737 =0
K .0000
= z 281.2 = z 320.2
=As 1611 =As 0
Provide 1611 Provide 416
= No
9 = No
6
As prov= 1810 Asprov= 471

Maxclear=S=fs297158.4 Max=clear
fs 0S= 252.8
MinclearS= 25.0 MinclearS= 25.0
Clear S = 67.5 9 H16 B Clear S = 124.8 6 H10 T

SHEAR Critsectionis 112.5 frompilecentres 0.732 %

PILE 1 1.4Gk + 1.6Qk Gk + 1.4Wk 1.2(Gk+Qk+Wk)
V 214.2 118.1 190.2
Av=6 37.5 v=0 .8664 vc=0 .6797
PILE 2
V 279.7 154.1 248.3
Av= 637.5 v= 1.1314 vc= 0.6797

Max(vvc)b
- = 361.4 8 links
Nooflegs=4 Linkspacing=2 25 4 Legs H8 225 LINKS

151

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:151 17/07/2006 17:08:53

 RCC82 Pilecap Design/ 3CAP!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client BigBucks PLC M adeby Date Page
Location Pilecap F13 Rod 12-A pr-06 14
152
Triple Pilecap
PILECAPDESIGNtoBS8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC82.xls v 3.1 on CD © 2006 TCC - - P2000
DIMENSIONSmm
COLUMN PILECAP
→ = 300 A
= 350
↑ = 300 B= 1300
C = 1126
PileØ=3 75 E=3 75.33
Min spacing = 1300 depth H = 400
Tolerance = 150

COLUMN ACTIONS
kN, kNm characteristic PLOT (to scale) KEY
DEAD IMPOSED WIND
Axial (kN) 355.5 118.2 10.0 STATUS VALID DESIGN
Mx (kNm) 10.0 5.0 2.0
My (kNm) 20.0 10.0 5.0 PILE REACTIONSkN characteristic
Hx (kN) PILE1 PILE2 PILE3
Hy (kN) Gk+Qk 140.4 168.9 191.9
Gk+Qk+Wk 139.3 172.9 199.0
REINFORCEMENT
EW (2-3) M = 222.6 kNm, b = 1,050 mm
d = 307.0 mm, As = 1,808 mm² 4 H12 06 T1
6 H20 B = 1,885 mm²

V = 278.3 kN, bv = 1,050 mm 6 H20 05 B1

v = 0.863 N/mm², (v-vc)b = 420 N/mm Links 8 H8 07 200 + 2x8 H8 08 200
4 Legs H8 @ 200 LINKS = 437 N/mm ELEVATION

NS (1-2/3) M = 196.2 kNm, b = 1,798 mm

d = 284.5 mm, As = 1,669 mm² 4 H12 10 T2
4 H25 B = 1,963 mm²

V = 202.7 kN, bv = 1,234 mm 4 H25 09 B2

v = 0.577 N/mm², (v-vc)b = 494 N/mm Links 7 H8 11 175 + 2x7 H8 12 175
4 Legs H8 @ 175 LINKS = 500 N/mm ELEVATION

152

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:152 17/07/2006 17:08:56

 RCC82 Pilecap Design.xls

RCC82 Pilecap Design/ 3CAP!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client BigBucks PLC M adeby Date Page
Location Pilecap F13 Rod 12-Apr-06 15
153

PILECAPDESIGNtoBS8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo

Originated from RCC82.xls v 3.1 on CD © 2006 TCC - - P20 00

Capload= 27.6 kN Groupcentre@ 751 mfrompile1

PILE REACTION kN
PILE1 PILE2 PILE3 OVERTURNING MOMENTS
- kNm characteristic
Gk+Qk 140.4 168.9 191.9 . DEAD IMPOSED WIND
Gk
Qk
++Wk 139.3 172.9 199.0 . Mx 10.0 5.0 2.0
1.4Gk+
1.6Qk 2 02.7 244.4 278.3 My 20.0 10.0 5.0
Gk+1.4Wk 108.4 134.5 154.2 .
1.2(Gk+Qk+Wk) 167.2 207.5 238.8

BENDING MOMENTS
- kNm
1.4Gk + 1.6Qk Gk + 1.4Wk 1.2(Gk+Qk+Wk)
My v of col 152.2 81.4 125.5
My ^ of col 196.2 108.4 167.5 (including tolerance)
Mx 222.6 123.4 191.1

E -W
ST E E L N -SST E E L
M
= 222.6 Ø20 M
= 196.2 Ø25 K'
= 0.1558
=b 1050 =b 1798 min
As
=
0.13%
= d 307.0 = d 284.5
=0
K .0643 =0
K .0385
= z 283.2 = z 270.3
As
= 1808 As
= 1669
Provide 1808 Provide 1669
= No6 = No
4
Asprov= 1885 Asprov= 1963
=fs 320 =fs 283
MaxclearS= 251.4 MaxclearS= 275.0
MinclearS= 25.0 MinclearS= 25.0
Clear S = 92.8 6 H20 B Clear S = 161.3 4 H25 B

SHEAR Crit section is 112.5 from pile centres

PILES 2 & 3 Ø8 links
V= 278.3 b= 1050 As%= 0.585 .
av= 537.5 v= 0.8632 vc= 0.7216
(v-vc)b= 420.0 Nooflegs= 4 Spacing=2 00 4 Legs H8 200 LINKS
PILE 1 Ø8 links
V= 202.7 b= 1234 As%= 0.559 .
av= 638.2 v= 0.5775 vc= 0.6224
(v-vc)b= 493.6 Nooflegs= 4 Spacing=1 75 4 Legs H8 175 LINKS

PUNCHIN ColumnFace AtFig3.23criticalsection

=Vv =1.935
686.8 µ = 4163
=v 0.558 =dave
av =2 95.75
494.0
v max = 4.733 ok vc 2d/av = 0.717 ok

153

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:153 17/07/2006 17:08:59

 RCC82 Pilecap Design/ 4CAP!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client BigBucks PLC M adeby Date Page
Location Pilecap E12 Ro d 12-A pr-06 28
154
4 Pile Cap
PILECAPDESIGNtoBS8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC82.xls v 3.1 on CD © 2006 TCC - - P2000

DIMENSIONS mm PILECAP
COLUMN A = 350
→ = 300 B= 1300
↑ = 400 C= 1300
D = 650
PileØ=3 75 E= 650
Tolerance = 150 depth H = 450

COLUMN ACTIONS
kN, kNm characteristic PLOT (to scale) KEY
DEAD IMPOSED WIND
Axial (kN) 475.0 157.0 13.6 STATUS VALID DESIGN
Mx (kNm) 10.0 5.0 2.0
My (kNm) 20.0 10.0 5.0 PILE REACTIONSkN
Hx (kN) 1.0 0.5 0.2 PILE1 PILE2 PILE3 PILE4
Hy (kN) 2.0 1.0 0.5 Gk+Qk 150.5 162.6 174.6 186.7
Gk+Qk+Wk 151.1 164.8 179.3 192.9
REINFORCEMENT
EW(1/3-2/4) M = 328.6 kNm, b = 2,000 mm
d = 367.0 mm, As = 2,168 mm² 11 H10 14 T1
11 H16 B1 = 2,212 mm²

V = 505.5 kN, bv = 2,000 mm 11 H16 13 B1

v = 0.689 N/mm², (v-vc)b = 800 N/mm 11 Link Legs
11 Legs H8 @ 300 LINKS = 801 N/mm ELEVATION

NS(1/2-3/4) M = 313.9 kNm, b = 2,000 mm

d = 351.0 mm, As = 2,165 mm² 11 H10 16 T2
11 H16 B2 = 2,212 mm²

V = 523.2 kN, bv = 2,000 mm 11 H16 15 B2

v = 0.745 N/mm², (v-vc)b = 800 N/mm Links 11x7 H8 17 300
11 Legs H8 @ 300 LINKS = 801 N/mm ELEVATION

Note: 5CAP! AND 6CAP! similar

154

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:154 17/07/2006 17:09:04

 RCC82 Pilecap Design.xls

RCC82 Pilecap Design/ 4CAP!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client BigBucks PLC M adeby Date Page
Location Pilecap E12 Rod 12-Apr-06 155
29
PILECAPDESIGNtoBS8110:2005 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC82.xls v 3.1 on CD © 2006 TCC - - P2 000

Capload= 42.5 kN OVERTURNING MOMENTS

- kNm characteristic
DEAD IMPOSED WIND
PILE REACTIONSkN Mx 10.5 5.2 2.1
PILE1 PILE2 PILE3 PILE4 My 20.9 10.5 5.2
Gk+Qk 150.5 162.6 174.6 186.7 .
Gk+Qk+Wk 151.1 164.8 179.3 192.9 .
1.4Gk+1.6Qk 217.4 235.1 252.8 270.4
Gk+1.4Wk 118.1 128.4 139.8 150.1 .
1.2(Gk+Qk+Wk) 181.3 197.7 215.1 231.5

BENDING MOMENTS- kNm

1.4Gk + 1.6Qk Gk + 1.4Wk 1.2(Gk+Qk+Wk)
My v of col 271.5 147.9 227.5
My ^ of col 313.9 174.0 268.0 (including tolerance)
My < of col 305.6 167.7 257.7
My > of col 328.6 181.1 279.0

E-W STEEL BOTTOM TOP N-S STEEL BOTTOM TOP

16 10 Ø16 Ø10
=M 328.6 0.0 =M 313.9 0.0 =K' 0.1558
=b 2000 2000 =b 2000 2000 min
As
=0.13%
=d 367.0 395.0 =d 351.0 385.0
K= 0.0349 0.0000 K= 0.0364 0.0000
=z 348.7 375.3 =z 333.5 365.8
As
= 2168 0 As
= 2165 0
Provide 2168 0 Provide 2165 0
=No 11 11 =No 11 11
As prov= 2212 864 Asprov= 2212 864
fs = 327 11 H10 T1 fs = 326 11 H10 T2
MaxclearS= 284.0 MaxclearS= 284.0
MinclearS= 25.0 MinclearS= 25.0
ClearS= 170.8 Clear
S= 170.8
H1B161 H1B162

BEAM SHEAR Critical section is 112.5 mm from pile centres

EW (NS plane) 8 links
V= 505.5 v= 0.6887 As%= 0.301 .
av = 537.5 vc2d/av= 0.6614 (v -vc)b= 800.0
Nooflegs= 11 Spacing= 300 11 Legs H8 300 LINKS
NS (EW plane)
V= 523.2 v 0.7453
= As%= 0.315 .
av = 537.5 vc2d/av= 0.6420 (v -vc)b= 800.0
Nooflegs= 11 Spacing= 300 11 Legs H8 300 LINKS

PUNCHING ColumnFace AtFig3.23criticalsection

V = 916.2 µ = 4300 dave=3 59
=v 1.823 =v 0.594 av
= 537.5
v max = 4.733 ok vc 2d/av = 0.655 ok

Note: 5CAP! AND 6CAP! similar

155

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:155 17/07/2006 17:09:08

 RCC82 Pilecap Design.xls

RCC82 Pilecap Design/ SCHEDULE!

The Concrete Centre Bar schedule ref : 202 01 Rev: -

Site
ref
: Spreadsheets to BS 8110 Date
prepared
: 12-Apr-06

Job no : P2000 Prepared by : Rod Checked by : -

No. of
Length of A* B* C* D* E/R *
Type and No. bars Shape
Member Bar mark Total No. each bar †
size of mbrs in code
mm mm mm mm mm mm
each
Double 01 H 16 4 9 36 2675 21 270 2175
Pilecaps 02 H 10 4 6 24 2175 00
03 H 8 4 10 40 2075 51 270 695 115
04 H 8 4 20 80 500 31 115 50 270 115
3-Pile Caps 05 H 20 3 6 18 2300 21 255 1890
06 H 12 3 4 12 1875 00
07 H 8 3 8 24 1975 51 270 650 115
08 H 8 3 16 48 500 31 115 50 270 115
09 H 25 3 4 12 2125 21 270 1715
10 H 12 3 4 12 1700 00
11 H 8 3 7 21 1800 51 235 600 115
12 H 8 3 14 42 475 31 115 50 235 115
4-Pile Caps 13 H 16 5 11 55 2100 21 130 1890
14 H 10 5 11 55 1875 00
15 H 16 5 11 55 2100 21 130 1890
16 H 10 5 11 55 1875 00
17 H 8 5 77 385 525 31 115 50 290 115
5-Pile Caps 18 H 16 2 12 24 2625 21 130 2410
19 H 12 2 12 24 2400 00
21 H 16 2 12 24 2650 21 150 2410
22 H 10 2 12 24 2400 00
20 H 8 2 120 240 675 31 115 50 440 115
6-Pile Caps 23 H 16 1 14 14 2100 21 130 1890
24 H 12 1 14 14 1875 00
26 H 16 1 12 12 3425 21 145 3175
27 H 10 1 12 12 3175 00
28 H 10 1 84 84 750 31 120 60 490 120
ThisschedulecomplieswithBS8666. 1,641 kg on this schedule PILECAPDESIGNtoBS8110:2005
*Specifiedinmultiplesof5mm. † Specified in multiples of 25mm. ©2003-2005ReinforcedConcreteCouncil

156

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:156 17/07/2006 17:09:13

 RCC82 Pilecap Design.xls

RCC82 Pilecap Design/ DRAWING!

. . CL P s kc u Bgi B 202 - -
. s c
i
s r n t s
e oi a m
di fos m a
. sn e t neil C o N g wD noi si v e R dek ceh C
.
5 m s g e ra b
3 o & in
mi g &
t p w d ai
C t o d s
ra
o b
011 8 S B ot st ee hs daer pS 0002P 60-r p A- 21 do R
e b t d s
d dn i la
a
r m m a g s
g m An n
i g .
m
e 5 0 G
o t
io w in
t n
w
tcej or P o N b oJ et a D y b e da M
t a o
S
E e
r
7
r
5
r
t at d
r c
e h
c r n n s
T n e
v ve e
f e is n t
O e ir
ert ne C et er c no C ehT
o o o h o o
N C C C R o T C n
o N 5 - pa C eli P 4

1 2
B B
31 51
16 6
1
H H
11 11
) 0
12
E N
0
3 N
p s
g IO 17 O
I
a e T T
ce L A 8 A
il k V H
(P
ni E
L x7 EV
L E 11 L
N 11 E
A s
k
L in
P L
1 2
T T
4
1 61
01 01
H H
11 11

o N 3 - pa C eli P 3 o N1 - pa C eli P 6

1 2 1 2
B B B B
5 6 3
0 0
9 2
6 2
0 0 5 1 16
2 2 2 5 H H
H H 7
1
6 8 4 12 41
0 12 0
) 8 8 ) 5
3 H 10 3
F1 N H
8 7 N C s N 5
p x I
2
x
2 IO p g IO 2
ca a e
eil + A + A ce L
A 10
0 5 V il k
in V H
(P 2
0 71 E (P L E 6x
N 7
11 E N 14 E 14
A 1 0 2 8 A s
L T T H L k
P 6 8 P n i
0 H 10 7 L
12
8 2
1 ks 1 2
T
H ks H in T 4
L 7
4 in 4 2 2
L 2
10 1
H H
12 14

o N 4 - pa C eli P 2 o N 2 - pa C eli P 5

B 2 1
1 B B
0 5 1
2 81 2
6
1 .2 6
H 4 61 1
0 H
9 H
) 8
12
0 12
4 H 1)1 2
5
1 10 N N D N N
G x O 0 s
p 2 I IO p 2 IO g IO
T ca T e
ca + A T 8 A L T
leiP 5 E
V V
A leiP H EV ink V
A
(
2 L E ( 10 L L E
2. E L x E L
E
N 3 E N 12 12
A 0 A
L L s
k
P 8 P in 1
T H 2 L T
2 0 T
0 1 2
19 2
10 ks 21 01
H in H H
6 L
12 12

157

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:157 17/07/2006 17:09:19

 RCC91 One-way Solid Slabs (Tables).xls
Design is often undertaken using the moment and shear factors moments. The factors from Table 3.12 give rise to a single load
taken from BS 8110: Part 1, Tables 3.5 and/ or 3.12. This series of case that has been subject to 20% redistribution: a bending
spreadsheets uses factors for moment and shear based on these moment envelope is inappropriate and the diagram is therefore
tables. indicative only. The factors used are given in the table below.

RCC91.xls designs simple one-way solid slabs to BS 8110. For The factors used are based on continuous end supports. The
three or more spans they use moment and shear factors from two-span factors were derived by modelling the appropriate
Table 3.12. The use of these factors is governed by Clause 3.7.2.7 number of spans with a single loadcase of 4 kN/m dead and 5
(single load case and the conditions of Clause 3.5.2.3 are met kN/m imposed and allowing any one span to be 15% less than
{bays > 30 m 2 , qk >/ 1.25 gk, qk >/ 5.0 kN/m 2 } and at least three the input length (strictly according to BS 8110 this is applicable
bays of approximately equal span (the corresponding factors for to beams only).
beams also restrict use of the factors to where spans differ by
no more than 15% of the maximum span)). Where the relevant The area of steel required, As, may be automatically increased
conditions are not met, users are directed towards RCC31. to reduce service stress, fs, and to increase modification factors
xls where continuous beam analysis overcomes many of these to satisfy deflection criteria. The option in line 42 to have top
caveats. steel in spans influences modification factors used in deflection
calculations.
The design of single- and two-span slabs is also possible. The
factors used for two-span slabs should be considered subject to As most contractors prefer prefabricated reinforcement mats
the same conditions as for using the factors from Table 3.12 of might be considered.
BS 8110.
To the right of the sheet are calculations. An approximate
reinforcement density is given.
MAIN!
This single sheet consists of the input and main output. In itself
it should prove adequate for the design of the simplest one-way Weight!
solid slab designs. A nominal 1 m wide strip of slab is considered. Weight! gives an estimate of the amount of reinforcement
required in a slab. Simplified curtailment rules, as defined in
Inputs are underlined and most should be self-explanatory. End Clause 3.12 are used to determine lengths of bars. The figures
support condition determines the factors applied for bending. should be treated as approximate estimates only as they cannot
Simple charts show the spans, loads and indicative bending deal with the effects of designers’ and detailers’ preferences,

Table 3
C o ef fi c i en t End End First int Interior Interior
Bending moment and shear
supports spans supports spans supports
force coefficients
Bending

Simple 1 Span 0.00 0.125 ~ ~ ~

support 2 Span 0.00 0.086 0.100 ~ ~
3 Span etc 0.00 0.075 0.086 0.063 (0.063)

1 Span 0.040 0.105 ~ ~ ~

2 Span 0.040 0.066 0.100 ~ ~
3 Span etc 0.040 0.075 0.086 0.063 (0.063)

Shear

1 Span 0.50 ~ ~
2 Span 0.46 0.60 ~
3 Span etc 0.46 0.60 0.50

158

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:158 17/07/2006 17:09:23

 RCC91 One-way Solid Slabs (Tables).xls

rationalisation, the effects of holes etc, etc. It excludes supporting

beams, trimming to holes etc. To the right of the sheet are
calculations of length, etc.

Graf!
This sheet comprises
necessarily dataprinting
intended for for graphs used inthan
out other MAIN! It is not
for checking
purposes.

Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.

159

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:159 17/07/2006 17:09:26

 RCC91 One-way Solid Slabs (Tables)/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 & EC2 The ConcreteCentre

Client Advisory Group M ade
by Date Page
Location 8Fr ldosolra b r mw 1 2 - A p r - 2 006 1 1 6160
1-WAY SOLID CONCRETE SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Table 3.12 C hecked Revision Job
No
Originated from R v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

LOCATION Supports from grid A togrid F STATUS

End support condition is C (C)ontinuous or (S)imple VALID DESIGN
D I M E NS I O NS M A T E R I A LS
Nº of spans Nº 3 fy N/mm² 500 γs = 1.15 steelclass A
Max Span m 7.200 fcu N/mm² 35 γc = 1.50
Thickness, h mm 200 Density kN/m³ 23.6
cover mm 20 (Normalweightconcrete) 100
50
LOADING 0
Self Weight kN/m² 4.72 -50
Additional Dead kN/m² 1.00 -100
Total Dead, gk kN/m² 5.72
Imposed Load, qk kN/m² 2.50 A F A F
Design load, n = kN/m² 12.01 G e o m e t r y a n d Lo a d i n g I n di c a t i v e B e n di n g M o m e n t D i a g r a m

MAIN STEEL END END F I R SITN T IN T E R IOR I N T E R N AL BS 8110

SUPPORTS (A & F) SP A N S SU P P O R T S SP A N S SU P P O R T S Reference
Factor 0.040 0.075 0.086 0.063 0.000 Table 3.12
M kNm/m 24.9 46.7 53.5 39.2 0.0
d mm 175 172 174 172
K 0.023 0.045 0.051 0.038 M/bd²fcu
z 166.3 162.9 163.6 163.4 Clause 3.4.4.4
As mm²/m 344 659 753 552
Rebar H H H H
Ø mm 16 1
@ mm c/c 225 150 150 200
As prov mm²/m 349 1340 754 1005
= % 0.199 0.779 0.433 0.584
Max
S 535 532 534 532 Clause
subclause (a) (a) (a) (a) 3.12.11.2.7

DEFLECTION
fs N/mm² 329 164 333 183 Eqn 8
Top steel provided % bd 0 0
Comp
Mod
factor 1.000 1.000 Table 3.11
Tens
Mod
factor 1.603 1.651 Eqn 7
PermL/d 41.7 Asauto-increased 43 Asauto-increased Table 3.9
Actual
L/d 41.8 by
100
% 41.8 by
70
%

DISTRIBUTION STEEL As
= 0.13% = 260 mm²/m Table 3.25
Provide H 1 at 300 = 262 mm²/m

SHEAR E N DSU P P OR T F I R STI NTSU P T I N T E R N A LSU P T S

V kN/m 39.8 51.9 Table 3.12
As prov % 0.390 0.433
v N/mm² 0.231 0.298 equation 3
vc N/mm² 0.638 0.659 Table 3.8

OUTPUT/SUMMARY
END END F I R SITN T IN T E R IOR I N T E R N AL
SU P P O R T S SP A N S SU P P O R T S SP A N S SU P P O R T S D I ST R I B U T I O N
PROVIDE H 10@2 2 5T 1 H 1 6@15 0B 1 H12@15 0T 1 H1 6@2 0 0B 1 H1 0@3 0 0

CHECKS BAR
Ø SINGLY BAR SHEAR
NO GLOBAL
<COVER REINFORCED SPACING DEFLECTION LINKS STATUS
OK OK OK OK OK V ADLEISDI G N

160

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:160 17/07/2006 17:09:27

 RCC92 Ribbed Slabs (Tables).xls

RCC92 Ribbed Slabs (Tables).xls

This spreadsheet designs simple single-, two-span and multiple- or no links is a matter of choice for the designer. Most contractors
span ribbed slabs to BS 8110: Part 1 using the moment and shear prefer to prefabricate reinforcement for ribbed slabs on the
factors in, or in the case of single and two spans, consistent with ground or off-site: this means at least nominal links and nominal
Table 3.12 of BS 8110. top steel are usually required.

The use of factors from Table 3.12 is governed by Clause 3.7.2.7 ■ Designed links are taken to be those provided where (vc + 0.4)
as follows < v < 0.8 f cu 0.5;
■ Minimal links are taken to be those that are required to
■ A single load case is assumed provide shear resistance for vc < v < (vc+ 0.4)
■ Conditions of 3.5.2.3 are met ■ Nominal links are those used if required for temporary
● bays > 30 m 2 , support only in areas where v < vc
● k >/ 1.25gk,
Under Bending, the Width of solid from CL in line 28 refers to
● k >/ 5.0 kN/m 2 and at least three bays are of the distance between centre line of support and the rib/ solid
approximately equal span intersection. It determines where shear and, at internal supports,
hogging moment in ribs are checked. The user inputs preferred
■ The corresponding factors for beams also restrict use of the diameters of reinforcement in the rib. At supports, these bars
factors to where spans differ by no more than 15% of the usually need to be supplemented by intermediate bars to comply
maximum span. with either spacing rules or with hogging moments in the solid
section of slab.
The factors used for two-span slabs should be considered subject
to these same conditions. They were derived by modelling the In spans, the area of steel required, As, may be automatically
appropriate number of spans with a single load case of 4 kN/ increased to reduce service stress, fs, and to increase modification
m2 dead and 5 kN/m2 imposed, and allowing any one span to factors to satisfy deflection criteria.
be 15% less than the input length (strictly according to BS 8110
this is applicable to beams only). The factors used are based on An approximate reinforcement density is given. It excludes mesh,
continuous end supports. supporting beams, trimming to holes etc.

Where the relevant conditions are not met, users are directed Please note that the bending moment diagrams are indicative
towards RCC32.xls where continuous beam type analysis only. The factors from Table 3.12 give rise to a single load case
overcomes many of these caveats. that has been subject to 20% redistribution: a bending moment
envelope is inappropriate. The factors used are given in the table
below.
MAIN!
The factors used are based on continuous end supports. The two-
This single sheet consists of the input and main output. In itself span factors were derived by modelling the appropriate number
it should prove adequate for the simplest ribbed slab designs. of spans with a single load case of 4 kN/m dead and 5 kN/m
Inputs are underlined and most should be self-explanatory. imposed and allowing any one span to be 15% less than the input
length (strictly according to BS 8110 this is applicable to beams
The option to have top steel in spans or not has bearings on only).
whether shear links can be accommodated and on deflection
calculations. The option to have links, minimal (or nominal) links

Table 4
Bending moment and shear C o ef fi c i en t End
supports End
spans First int
supports Interior
spans Interior
supports
force coefficients used in
RCC 92 Ben d i n g 1S pa n 0.040 0.105 ~ ~ ~
2 Span 0.040 0.066 0.100 ~ ~
3 Span etc 0.040 0.075 0.086 0.063 (0.063)

S h ea r 1S pa n 0.50 ~ ~
2 Span 0.46 0.60 ~
3 Span etc 0.46 0.60 0.50

161

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:161 17/07/2006 17:09:37

 DETAILS!
DETAILS! gives two pages of detailed calculations and references
to BS 8110 justifying the output in MAIN! This sheet is intended
as an explanation for the less experienced engineers and may
prove useful for checking purposes.

Maximum spacing, s max , at supports is based on rib centres: usually

two large bars are required in the top of the rib for moment at
the rib/ solid intersection and one, two or even three smaller bars
(minimum T10) are required between to overcome spacing rules.
Concentrating reinforcement with larger bars in the top of the rib
raises the percentage steel in the rib at the rib/ solid interface,
thereby maximising vc and reducing shear requirements.

In terms of curtailment, 50% of reinforcement for maximum

sagging is taken as being A s req’d for bending, i.e. excluding any extra
for deflection, etc. (Figure 3.25 refers to ‘reinforcement for max.
moment’.) Ribbed slabs are taken as being “slabs” so the 40%
rule is applied and 40% of A s req’d is assumed at end supports.

It is usually assumed that ‘ribs’ become ‘beams’ when they are

at centres > 1.5 m Tapered links are assumed. Where required for
shear resistance, links should be at maximum 0.75d centres.

WEIGHT!
Weight! gives an estimate of the amount of reinforcement
required in a slab. Simplified curtailment rules, as defined in
Clause 3.12 are used to determine lengths of bars. The figures
should be treated as approximate estimates only as they cannot
deal with the effects of designers’ and detailers’ preferences,
rationalisation, the effects of holes etc, etc. To the right of the
sheet are calculations of length etc.

Graf!
This sheet comprises data for graphs used in MAIN!

Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.

162

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:162 17/07/2006 17:09:39

 RCC92 Ribbed Slabs (Tables).xls

RCC92 Ribbed Slabs (Tables)/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The ConcreteCentre

Client Advisory Group M ade
by Date Page
Location 2nd Floor slab rmw 12-Apr-2006 163119
RIBBED SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 using table 3.12 coefficients C hecked Revision Job
No
Originated from R v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg p r e li m R 68

LOCATION Support s from grid A to grid F STATUS

VALID DESIGN
D I ME N SIO N S M AT E R I AL S steelc lass A
Nº of spans Nº 5 rib
width mm 150 fcu N/mm² 35 γc = 1.50
Max Span m 7.200 ribcentres mm 750 fy N/mm² 500 γs = 1.15
depth o/a, h mm 300 Sideslope 1 in 10 fyv N/mm² 500 Density kN/m³ 24.0
topping depth, hf mm 100 agg h mm 20 (Normalweight concrete)
Top steel in spans ? Y Top cover (to links) mm 35
Min No of bars per rib 2 B/Scover(tolinks) mm 25
UseLinks? Y (Y )es, (N)o or ( )inimal

LOADING
Self Wt kN/m² 4.00
+ Dead kN/m² 1.50
Total Dead, gk kN/m² 5.50
Imposed qk kN/m² 5.00 A F A F
Design load, n = kN/m² 15.70 G e o m e t r ya n d Lo a d i n g I n d i c a t i v eB e n d i n g M o m e n t D i a g r a m

BENDING EN D END F I R S TI N T IN T ERIO R INT ERNAL BS8110

SUPPORTS (A & F) SPA N S SU P P O R T S SP A N S SU P P O R T S Reference
Width solid from CL --- 5 --- 500
M kNm/m 32.6 61.1 70.0 51.3 51.3 Table 3.12
d mm 254 259 249 259 249
As mm² 233 428 511 360 374 Fig 3.3
As' mm² 00000 Fig 3.3

DEFLECTION
Max
L/d 37.869 44.162 3.4.6.3
Actual
L/d 27.799 OK 27.799 OK 3.4.5.1
As auto increased by 28.1% As auto increased by 23.4%
TENSION REINFORCEMENT
Ø mm
No 3Top+3H10 2Btm 2Top+2H10 2Btm 2Top+2H10
As prov mm² 471 628 785 628 785
= % 0.247 1.427 0.421 1.427 0.421
COMPRESSION ZONE REINFORCEMENT
Ø 2 mm
No Btm
2 Top
2 Btm
2 Top
2 Btm
2
As' prov mm² 628 101 226 101 157
= % 1.455 0.228 0.534 0.228 0.371

RIB SHEAR O U T E R SU P T F I R ST I N T S U P T IN TSUPT

V kN/rib 37.2 45.0 36.5 Table 3.12
v N/mm² 0.863 1.063 0.863 Eqn 3
vc N/mm² 0.897 0.908 0.908 NOMINAL Table 3.8
Ø Link 6 6 6 6
@ mm 175 175 175 175
REACTIONS
Dead kN/m 18.23 43.59 39.63 solidweightincluded
Imposed kN/m 16.56 39.60 36.00
Ultimate kN/m 52.01 124.38 113.08 Table 3.12

OUTPUT/SUMMARY
EN D END F I R S TI N T IN T ERIO R INT ERNAL
PROVIDE SUPPO RT S SPA N S SU P P O R T S SP A N S SU P P O R T S
MAIN STEEL 3 H 10/ r i b 2 H 8T 2 H 2 0/ r i b 2 H8T 2 H 2 0/ r i b
3 HT+1 0 2 HT+10 2 HT+1 0
N o m i n aBl 2 H 2 0B N o m i n aBl 2 H2 0B N o m i n aBl
LINKS 2H6 @ 175 2H6 @ 175 2H6 @ 175 2H6 @ 175 2H6 @ 175
from edge of solid for 875 for 175

CHECKS BAR
Ø SINGLE BAR SHEAR GLOBAL
I I I

163

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:163 17/07/2006 17:09:41

 RCC92 Ribbed Slabs (Tables)/ DETAILS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M ade
by Date Page
Location 2nd Floor slab from grids A to F rmw 12-Apr-2006 164 120
RIBBED SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 using table 3.12 coefficients C hecked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC92.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg p r e li m R6 8

DETAILED CALCULATIONS
ave bw mm 170.0 self
wt kN/m² 3.49
rib area m² 0.1090 E/Osolid kN/m² 0.52
Total SW kN/m² 4.00

Gk=3 9.63 Qk=3 6.00 F=1 13.08 N=1 5.705 kN/m width

MAIN STEEL END END F IRSITN T I NT E R I O R I NT E R N A L BS 8110

S U PP O R T S SPANS SUPPO RTS SP A N S S U P PO RT S Reference
Factor 0.04 0.075 0.086 0.063 0.063 Table 3.12
M/m kNm/m 32.6 61.1 70.0 51.3 51.3 -=-
M/rib kNm 24.42 45.80 52.51 38.47 38.47 -=-
d mm 254 259 249 259 249
bf mm 750 750 750 750 750
K' 0.1320 0.1558 0.1320 0.1558 0.1320 3.4.4.4
Web MOR kNm 50.7 62.2 48.7 62.2 48.7 Fig 3.3
Flange MOR kNm 223.5 245.1 214.8 245.1 214.8 -=-
K 0.0144 0.0260 0.0323 0.0218 0.0236 3.4.4.4
z mm 241.3 246.1 236.6 246.1 236.6 -=-
x mm 28.2 28.8 27.7 28.8 27.7 -=-
d' mm 41.0 45.0 37.0 45.0 36.0
net fsc N/mm² 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Fig 3.3
Excess M kNm 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
As' req mm² 00000
max fst N/mm² 434.8 434.8 434.8 434.8 434.8 Fig 3.3
fst deflection N/mm² --- 308.8 --- 341.5 ---
As req mm² 233 428 511 360 374
bw/b --- 0.2267 --- 0.2267 ---
Min
% 0.13% 0.18% 0.13% 0.18% 0.13% Table 3.25
Min As mm² 293 92 293 92 293
At EDGE of SOLID
M/m kNm/m 24.9 residualsteel 38.1 residualsteel 25.0 Table 3.13
M/rib kNm 18.7 0.26% 28.5 0.26% min% 0.26% 18.7 -=-
bf mm 150 57 150 0 resid
As 0 150
K 0.0552 10 0.0877 10 extra
Ø 10 0.0576
z mm 237.3 3 221.8 2 No 2 231.9
x mm 37.1 236 60.5 157 As
prov 157 38.0
net fsc N/mm² 0.0 256.5 36.9 Fig 3.3
Excess M kNm 0.0 0.0 0.0
As' req mm² 0 0 0
fst N/mm² 434.8 434.8 434.8
As req mm² 181 296 186
TENSION STEEL
Required mm² 181 428 296 360 186
Ø in rib ok 10 ok 20 ok 20 ok 20 ok 20
No 3 2 2 2 2
As prov mm² 236 628 628 628 628
Clear dist mm 54.4 54.2 97.8 54.2 97.8 between bars
Min S ok 25.0 ok 25.0 ok 25.0 ok 25.0 ok 25.0 3.12.11.1
Max S ok 183.3 ok 207.0 ok 299.3 ok 246.4 ok 300.0 3.12.11.2.4
COMPRESSION STEEL
Required 171 0 128 0 108 Table 3.25
Ø ok 20 ok 8 ok 12 ok 8 ok 10
No 2 2 2 2 2
As' prov mm² 628 101 226 101 157
=% ok 1.455 ok 0.228 ok 0.534 ok 0.228 ok 0.371
Clear dist mm 55.6 123.0 70.8 123.0 74.6 between bars
Min S ok 25.0 ok 25.0 ok 25.0 ok 25.0 ok 25.0 3.12.11.1

164

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:164 17/07/2006 17:09:49

 RCC92 Ribbed Slabs (Tables).xls

RCC92 Ribbed Slabs (Tables)/ DETAILS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M ade
by Date Page
Location 2nd Floor slab from grids A to F rmw 12-Apr-2006 165 121
RIBBED SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 using t able 3.12 coefficients C hecked Revision JobNo

Originated from RCC92.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC

chg p r el i m R 68
EN D E ND F IRSITNT I N T E RI O R I NT E R NA L BS 8110
DEFLECTION S UP P O R T S S P ANS SUP PO RTS S PA NS SUPP O RTS Reference
fs N/mm² 256.5 227.1 157.1 190.8 98.6 Eqn 8
Base
ratio 20.80 20.80 3.4.6.3/4
Tens
Mod 1.700 1.983 Table 3.10
Comp
Mod 1.071 1.071 Table 3.11
Perm
L/d 37.869 44.162 3.4.6.3
ActualL/d 27.799 ok 27.799 ok 3.4.5.1
As
req
increased by 28.1% 23.4%

RIB SHEAR
EN D F I RS TI NT I NT E R NA L
S UP P O R T S S U P P O RT S SUPP O RTS
Factor 0.46 0.6 0.5 Table 3.12
V max kN/m 52.01 67.85 56.54 -=-
V rib kN/m 37.24 44.99 36.51
v N/mm² 0.8625 1.0630 0.8626 Eqn 3
vc N/mm² 0.8975 0.9080 0.9080 NOMINAL Table 3.8
(v-vc)bv N/mm 68.0 68.0 68.0 68.0 Table 3.7
Link Ø ok 6 ok 6 ok 6 ok 6 3.12.7.1
@ mm 191 187 187 194 Spacing
adjust to mm 175 175 175 175 Spacing
for mm 0 795 75 --- from solid

adjust to mm 0 875 175 --- from solid

As Dist ok 64.4 ok 0 ok 0 ok 0 3.4.5.5

As' Dist ok 0 ok 0 ok 0 ok 0 3.12.7.2

165

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:165 17/07/2006 17:09:54

 RCC93 Flat Slabs (Tables).xls
This spreadsheet designs simple rectangular flat slabs to BS 8110:
Part 1 using moment and shear factors from Table 3.12. The use of
DETAILS!
these factors is also governed by Clause 3.7.2.7 as shown below.
DETAILS! gives detailed calculations and references to BS
8110 justifying the output in MAIN! This sheet is intended as
■ A single load case is assumed explanation for the less experienced engineers and may prove
■ The conditions of 3.5.2.3 are met useful for checking purposes.
● bays > 30m 2 ,
Column transfer moments are limited to M t max see Clause 3.7.4.2
● qk >/ 1.25gk, and equation 24 A basic deflection ratio of 26 x 0.9 (see Clauses
● qk >/ 5.0 kN/m 2 and at least three bays of approximately 3.4.6.1 and 3.7.8) is used in line 189 etc. Some engineers like to
equal span use a lower basic deflection ratio (rather than 26 in the code) to
offset any potential problems with deflection of partitions and
■ The corresponding factors for beams also restrict use of the especially of cladding.
factors to where spans differ by no more than 15% of the
maximum span. Traditional shear links can be very time consuming on site, so in
order to minimise the number of links the centres are maximised
at 0.75d (see line 226 et seq). Additional bars may be necessary
Where the relevant conditions are not met, users are directed
to act as carriers to these links if top and bottom bars cannot be
towards RCC33.xls where sub-frame analysis overcomes many
arranged at the preferred spacings. Consideration should also be
of the caveats made in the code restricting the use of bending
given to using proprietary systems.
moment and shear factors from Table 3.12.

The spreadsheet does not currently allow for holes or drops. If

holes are considered critical then the user is directed towards
WEIGHT!
using RCC21.xls (sub-frame analysis) and allowing for holes
in breadths used. Note should also be made of Clause 3.7.5., Weight!
required gives an estimate
in a slab. Simplifiedofcurtailment
the amount of reinforcement
rules, as defined in
Openings in panels. Punching shear can be checked using RCC13.
Clause 3.12 are used to determine lengths of bars. The figures
xls.
should be treated as approximate estimates only as they cannot
deal with the effects of designers’ and detailers preferences’,
It does not cater for single or two-span cases.
rationalisation, the effects of holes etc, etc. Additional link carrier
bars are not included.
MAIN!
This single sheet consists of the input and main output. In itself it
Xdia! And Ydia!
should prove adequate for the simplest flat slab designs.
In these sheets each bending moment is designed using a
different size bar (with different effective depths, d). The largest
Most inputs should be self-explanatory. A location plan helps
bar (i.e. minimum number of bars) consistent with maximum
with definition of dimensions. The number of spans is altered by
specified diameter and maximum spacing rules is identified and
changing the number of grid line inputs: deleting the end grid
used in DETAILS! Thus a least bars solution is given. The Xdia! and
line name will decrease the number of spans. A combo-box is
Ydia! pages find the maximum diameter that can be used while
used to switch between the continuous and simply supported
complying with spacing rules. The sheet finds which of Clause
end support/ slab connection factors. Note the effect on column
3.12.11.2.7 (a) or (b) applies. This has quite a dramatic effect
transfer moments. Edge distance, C, is actually from centreline of
on rationality of the bars and spacings. A detailer can always
column to edge of slab.
reduce bar diameters and/ or close-up spacing if he or she wishes
provided that overall areas of steel are at least maintained.
‘Double penult’ means penultimate in both directions, i.e. internal
column of corner bay.
Please note that the bending moment diagrams are indicative
Notes!
only. The factors from Table 3.12 give rise to a single load case
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
that has been subject to 20% redistribution: a bending moment
envelope is therefore inappropriate.

166

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:166 17/07/2006 17:10:00

 RCC93 Flat Slabs (Tables).xls

RCC93 Flat Slabs (Tables)/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The ConcreteCentre

Client Advisory Group M ade
by Date Page
Location EC B PT y p icafl l o o rt oB S 8 110 rm w 1 2 - A p r - 2 00 6 12167
3
SIMPLIFIED FLAT SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Cl 3.7.2.7 (Table 3.12) C hecked Revision JobNo
Originated from R v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R6 8

STATUS VALID DESIGN

LOCATION NS
Grids
on
lines 1 2 3 4 5
EWGridson
lines A B C D
COLUMNS I n te r n a l Ed ge Co r ne r
DIMENSIONS X Y H mm 400 400 400
Nº of spans Nº 4 3 slabdepth,h mm 250 B mm 400 250 250
Span, L m 7.500 7.500 Topcover mm 25
Edge dist, C mm 125 125 Btmcover mm 25 1 <-- X direction --> 5
from C/L column
Edge supports are CONTINUOUS
MATERIALS B D
H B
fcu N/mm² 37 agg
h 20 mm H
y
fy N/mm² 500 γm 1.15 steel Legend L

H >
max bar Ø mm 20 γm 1.5 concrete --
n
fyv N/mm² 500 Density 23.6 kN/m³ B io
t
y e c
steelclass A (Normalweight concrete) L ri
C Lx Lx Lx d
LOADING Y
--
Self Wt kN/m² 5.90 PerimL oad 8.85 kN/m <
+ Dead kN/m² 1.50 y
L
Total Dead, gk kN/m² 7.40 DEFLECTION CONTROL 3 or more
approximately e qual spans
Imposed qk kN/m² 2.50 Min%topsteelincolstrips 0.13 % A
Design load, n kN/m² 14.36 Sameintopofmiddlestrips? N C

Indicative Bending Moments - X Direction

(kNm per bay) Indicative Bending Moments - Y Direction
(kNm per bay)

600 600
400 400
200 200
0 0
-200 -200
-400 -400
-600 -600

1 5 A D

MAIN STEEL I NT E R NA LC O L UM NS T R I PS M I D D L E S T R I PS PE R I M E T E R C O L UM NS T R I PS
X DI R E C T I ON b R EB AR b RE BAR b R EBA R
END SUPPORTS 0.575 7H20 @ 75 T1 6.925 12H16 @ 575 T1 0.413 4H20 @ 100 T1
END SPANS 3.750 13H20 @ 275 B1 3.750 11H20 @ 325 B1 2.000 14H20 @ 125 B1
PENULTIMATE SUPPORTS 3.750 13H20 @ 200 : 400 T1 3.750 7H16 @ 525 T1 2.000 10H20 @ 150 : 300 T1
INTERIOR SPANS 3.750 10H20 @ 375 B1 3.750 8H20 @ 450 B1 2.000 10H20 @ 200 B1
INTERIOR SUPPORTS 3.750 9H20 @ 300 : 600 T1 3.750 7H16 @ 525 T1 2.000 7H20 @ 200 : 400 T1
Y DIRECTION
END SUPPORTS 0.575 6H20 @ 75 T2 6.925 12H16 @ 575 T2 0.450 4H20 @ 100 T2
END SPANS 3.750 21H20 @ 175 B2 3.750 17H20 @ 200 B2 2.000 15H20 @ 125 B2
PENULTIMATE SUPPORTS 3.750 15H20 @ 175 : 350 T2 3.750 8H16 @ 450 T2 2.000 10H20 @ 200 : 400 T2
INTERIOR SPANS 3.750 15H20 @ 250 B2 3.750 12H20 @ 300 B2 2.000 11H20 @ 175 B2

SHEAR (ultimate) G r id Vt LINKS Link Zone

Ref kN Arrangement Width H x Breadth B

INTERNAL None CHECKS

PENULTIMATE None
PENULTIMATE 3B etc 888.5 H8 @ 150 EW 1788 1788 BAR Ø > COVER OK
DOUBLE PENULTIMATE B2 etc 969.3 H10 @ 150 EW 1826 1826 SINGLY REINFORCED OK
SIDE INTERNAL A3 etc 478.0 H8 @ 150 EW 1670 885 BAR SPACING OK
SIDE INTERNAL None DEFLECTION OK
PENULTIMATE SIDE A2 etc 525.7 H10 @ 150 EW 1782 941 SHEAR LINKS OK
PENULTIMATE SIDE B1 etc 525.7 H8 @ 150 EW 1704 902
CORNER A1 etc 341.1 H8 @ 150 EW 997 922 GLOBAL STATUS VALID DESIGN

167

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:167 17/07/2006 17:10:02

 RCC93 Flat Slabs (Tables)/ DETAIL!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M ade
by Date Page

Location E C B PT y p i c afl lo ort oB S8 1 1 0 r mw 1 2 - Ap r - 2 0 0 6 1 2168

4
SIMPLIFIED FLAT SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Cl 3.7.2.7 (Table 3.12) C hecked Revision JobNo

Originated from RCC93.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R6 8

DETAILED CALCULATIONS BS 8110

Reference

GENERAL internal hc 0.451 m edge hc 0.357 m corner hc 0.357 m 3.7.1.4

Lx 7.500 m Ly 7.500 m MinAs 325 mm²/m 3.7.1.1

MAIN STEEL - X DIRECTION

END END P E N U LT I M A T E IN T E R IOR IN T E R IOR
SU PP OR T S SPA N S SUPP O RT S SPA N S SUP PO RT S
F 807.8 807.8 807.8
0.15Fhc 43.23 54.69 54.69
Total Mu kNm 147.5 454.4 466.3 381.7 327.0 3.7.2.7

INTERNAL COLUMN STRIPS

b m 0.575 3.750 3.750 3.750 3.750 figs 3.12&3.13

Mu kNm 147.5 249.9 349.7 209.9 245.2 3.7.2.10

d mm 215 215 215 215 215

K' 0.156 0.156 0.156 0.156 0.156 3.4.4.4

K 0.150 0.039 0.055 0.033 0.038 3.4.4.4

z mm 169.6 204.3 201.1 204.3 204.3 3.4.4.4

As mm² 2001 2814 4001 2364 2761 3.4.4.4

As shear mm² 365 1767 0

Def
enhancement 1.405 1.282
As min mm² 2001 3954 4001 3031 2761 table 3.25

Ø mm 20 20 20 20 20
No bars No 7 13 13 10 9
@ mm 75 275 200 375 300
&@ mm ~ ~ 400 ~ 600 3.7.3.1

As prov mm² 2199 4084 4084 3142 2827

= mm²/m 3825 1089 1089 838 754
= % 1.779 0.507 0.507 0.390 0.351
fs N/mm² 303.3 229.7 408.1 250.8 406.9 Eqn 8

Max S mm 140 401 226 645 327 3.12.11.2.7

subclause (b) (b) (b) (a) (b) 3.12.11.2.7

MIDDLE STRIPS
b m 6.925 3.750 3.750 3.750 3.750 figs 3.12&3.13

Mu kNm 36.9 204.5 116.6 171.7 81.7 3.7.2.10

d mm 217 215 217 215 217

K' 0.156 0.156 0.156 0.156 0.156 3.4.4.4

K 0.003 0.032 0.018 0.027 0.013 3.4.4.4

z mm 206.2 204.3 206.2 204.3 206.2 3.4.4.4

As mm² 411 2302 1301 1934 912 3.4.4.4

Def
enhancement 1.405 1.282
As min mm² 2251 3235 1301 2480 1219 table 3.25

Ø mm 16 20 16 20 16
No bars No 12 11 7 8 7
@ mm 575 325 525 450 525
As prov mm² 2413 3456 1407 2513 1407
= mm²/m 348 922 375 670 375
= % 0.161 0.429 0.173 0.312 0.173
fs N/mm² 56.8 222.1 385.1 256.5 270.0 Eqn 8

Max S mm 651 645 651 645 651 3.12.11.2.7

subclause (a) (a) (a) (a) (a) 3.12.11.2.7

168

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:168 17/07/2006 17:10:11

 RCC93 Flat Slabs (Tables).xls

RCC93 Flat Slabs (Tables)/ DETAIL!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M ade
by Date Page
Location E C B PTy p i cafll o o rt oB S8 1 1 0 rmw 12-A p r-2006 1 2 5169
SIMPLIFIED FLAT SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Cl 3.7.2.7 (Table 3.12) C hecked Revision JobNo

Originated from RCC93.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC

chg - R 68

MAIN STEEL - X DIRECTION, continued

EN D EN D P EN U LT I M A T E IN T E R I OR I N T ER I O R BS 8110
S UP P OR T S SPANS S UP P O R T S SPANS S UP P OR T S Reference

PERIMETER COLUMN STRIPS

F 510.3 510.3 510.3
0.15Fhc 27.31 27.31 27.31
Mu kNm 93.2 184.8 243.5 155.2 172.9 3.7.2.10
b m 0.413 2.000 2.000 2.000 2.000 figs 3.12&3.13
d mm 215 215 215 215 215
K' 0.156 0.156 0.156 0.156 0.156 3.4.4.4
K 0.132 0.054 0.071 0.045 0.051 3.4.4.4
z mm 176.6 201.2 196.4 203.5 202.2 3.4.4.4
As mm² 1214 2112 2852 1754 1967 3.4.4.4
As shear mm² 336 2290 1448
Def
enhancement 1.956 1.662
As min mm² 1214 4132 2852 2914 1967 table 3.25
Ø mm 20 20 20 20 20
No bars No 4 14 10 10 7
@ mm 100 125 150 200 200
& @ mm ~ ~ 300 ~ 400 3.7.3.1
As prov mm² 1257 4398 3142 3142 2199
= mm²/m 3046 2199 1571 1571 1100
= % 1.417 1.023 0.731 0.731 0.511
fs N/mm² 322.0 160.1 378.3 186.1 372.7 Eqn 8
Max S mm 140 285 169 343 245 3.12.11.2.7
subclause (b) (b) (b) (b) (b) 3.12.11.2.7

MAIN STEEL - Y DIRECTION

EN D EN D P EN U LT I M A T E IN T E R I OR I N T ER I O R
S UP P OR T S SPANS S UP P O R T S SPANS S UP P OR T S
Total Mu kNm 121.3 454.4 466.3 381.7 327.0
INTERNAL COLUMN STRIPS
b m 0.575 3.750 3.750 3.750 3.750 figs 3.12&3.13
Mu kNm 121.3 249.9 349.7 209.9 245.2 3.7.2.10
d mm 195 195 195 195 195
K' 0.156 0.156 0.156 0.156 0.156 3.4.4.4
K 0.150 0.047 0.066 0.040 0.046 3.4.4.4
z mm 153.8 184.1 179.4 185.3 184.3 3.4.4.4
As mm² 1815 3121 4484 2606 3060 3.4.4.4
As shear mm² 380 1797 1130
Def
enhancement 2.044 1.708
As min mm² 1815 6379 4484 4450 3060 table 3.25
Ø mm 20 20 20 20 20
No bars No 6 21 15 15 10
@ mm 75 175 175 250 275
& @ mm ~ ~ 350 ~ 550 3.7.3.1
As prov mm² 1885 6597 4712 4712 3142
= mm²/m 3278 1759 1257 1257 838
= % 1.681 0.902 0.644 0.644 0.430
fs N/mm² 320.9 157.7 396.5 184.4 405.8 Eqn 8
Max S mm 140 328 183 393 268 3.12.11.2.7

subclause (b) (b) (b) (b) (b) 3.12.11.2.7

169

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:169 17/07/2006 17:10:14

 RCC93 Flat Slabs (Tables)/ DETAIL!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M ade
by Date Page
Location E C B PT y p i c afl l o o rt oB S 8 1 1 0 rm w 12 - Ap r -2 0 06 12 6
170
SIMPLIFIED FLAT SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Cl 3.7.2.7 (Table 3.12) C hecked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC93.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC
chg - R6 8

MAIN STEEL - Y DIRECTION, continued

EN D EN D P EN U L T I M A T E I N T ER I OR I N T ER I O R BS 8110
S UP P O R T S SPANS S UP P OR T S S PANS S UP P O R T S Reference
MIDDLE STRIPS
b m 6.925 3.750 3.750 3.750 3.750 figs 3.12&3.13
Mu kNm 30.3 204.5 116.6 171.7 81.7 3.7.2.10
d mm 197 195 197 195 197
K' 0.156 0.156 0.156 0.156 0.156 3.4.4.4
K 0.003 0.039 0.022 0.033 0.015 3.4.4.4
z mm 187.2 185.3 187.2 185.3 187.2 3.4.4.4
As mm² 373 2539 1433 2132 1005 3.4.4.4
Def
enhancement 2.044 1.708
As min mm² 2251 5188 1433 3641 1219 table 3.25
Ø mm 16 20 16 20 16
No bars No 12 17 8 12 7
@ mm 575 200 450 300 525
As prov mm² 2413 5341 1608 3770 1407
= mm²/m 348 1424 429 1005 375
= % 0.177 0.730 0.218 0.516 0.191
fs N/mm² 51.5 158.4 371.1 188.5 297.4 Eqn 8
Max S mm 591 403 591 585 591 3.12.11.2.7
subclause (a) (b) (a) (a) (a) 3.12.11.2.7

PERIMETER COLUMN STRIPS

F 510.3 510.3 510.3
0.15Fhc 27.31 27.31 27.31
Mu kNm 93.2 184.8 243.5 155.2 172.9 3.7.2.10
b m 0.450 2.000 2.000 2.000 2.000 figs 3.12&3.13
d mm 215 215 215 215 215
K' 0.156 0.156 0.156 0.156 0.156 3.4.4.4
K 0.121 0.054 0.071 0.045 0.051 3.4.4.4
z mm 180.6 201.2 196.4 203.5 202.2 3.4.4.4
As mm² 1187 2112 2852 1754 1967 3.4.4.4
As shear mm² 359 1811 0
Def
enhancement 2.170 1.801
As min mm² 1187 4584 2852 3159 1967 table 3.25
Ø mm 20 20 20 20 20
No bars No 4 15 10 11 7
@ mm 100 125 200 175 275
& @ mm ~ ~ 400 ~ 550 3.7.3.1
As prov mm² 1257 4712 3142 3456 2199
= mm²/m 2793 2356 1571 1728 1100
= % 1.299 1.096 0.731 0.804 0.511
fs N/mm² 314.9 149.4 378.3 169.2 372.7 Eqn 8

Max S mm 140 285 169 343 245 3.12.11.2.7

subclause (b) (b) (b) (b) (b) 3.12.11.2.7

170

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:170 17/07/2006 17:10:17

 RCC93 Flat Slabs (Tables).xls

RCC93 Flat Slabs (Tables)/ DETAIL!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M ade
by Date Page
Location EC BPT y pi c afllo o rtoBS8 1 1 0 r mw 1 2 - A p r - 2 00 6 1 2171
7
SIMPLIFIED FLAT SLAB DESIGN to BS 8 110:2005 Cl 3.7.2.7 (Table 3.12) C hecked Revision JobNo

Originated from RCC93.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC

chg - R6 8
DEFLECTION - X DIRECTION
P E RI M E T E R I NT E R NA L P ER I ME T ER I N T E RN A L BS 8110
E N D SP A N S E N D SP A N S I N T ER I O R S P AN S I N T E R I O R SP A N S Reference
As req mm² 3264 5116 2721 4298
As prov mm² 6126 7540 4398 5655
fs N/mm² 177.6 226.2 206.2 253.3 Eqn 8
ave
K 0.043 0.035 0.036 0.030
As' prov mm² 670 1257 670 1257
100As'/bd % 0.080 0.078 0.080 0.078
CompMod 1.026 1.025 1.026 1.025 Eqn 9
Tens
Mod 1.547 1.495 1.555 1.482 Eqn 7
Perm
L/d 37.15 35.88 37.33 35.55 3.4.6.1+3.7.8
ActualL/d 34.88 34.88 34.88 34.88
As
enhanced 95.6% 40.5% 66.2% 28.2%

DEFLECTION - Y DIRECTION
P E RI M E T E R I NT E R NA L P ER I ME T ER I N T E RN A L
E N D SP A N S E N D SP A N S I N T ER I O R S P AN S I N T E R I O R SP A N S
As req mm² 3382 5660 2820 4739
As prov mm² 7383 11938 5341 8482
fs N/mm² 152.7 158.0 176.0 186.2 Eqn 8
ave
K 0.047 0.043 0.039 0.036
As' prov mm² 670 1257 670 1257
100As'/bd % 0.080 0.086 0.080 0.086
CompMod 1.026 1.028 1.026 1.028 Eqn 9
Tens
Mod 1.579 1.616 1.618 1.633 Eqn 7
Perm
L/d 37.92 38.87 38.84 39.27 3.4.6.1+3.7.8
Actual
L/d 34.88 38.46 34.88 38.46
As
enhanced 117.0% 104.4% 80.1% 70.8%

PUNCHING SHEAR D O U B LE SI D E SI D E
I NT E R NA L P E N ULT P E NU LT I N T E RN A L I N T ER N A L
No n e N o n e3eBt c Be2t c Ae3t c No ne
Vt kN 0.0 888.5 969.3 478.0 0.0
Veff/Vt kN 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.40 1.40 table 3.13
ave d mm 205.0 205.0 205.0 205.0 215.0 3.7.6.3
ave As % 0.390 0.468 0.575 1.096 1.145
at 1.5d from column face
H mm 1015 1015 1015 633 648
B mm 1015 1015 1015 865 895 3.7.7.6
u 0 mm 1600 1600 1600 900 900 3.7.7.6
v max N/mm² 0.000 3.107 3.390 3.616 0.000 Eqn 27
V kN 0.0 1004.8 1097.7 643.1 0.0
u mm 4060 4060 4060 2130 2190 3.7.7.6
v N/mm² 0.000 1.207 1.319 1.473 0.000
vc N/mm² 0.622 0.661 0.708 0.878 0.880 Eqn 28
Links
? No Yes Yes Yes No table 3.9
L i n ksa t0 . 5d&1 .2 5 d
Sv mm EW 0 150 150 150 0 3.7.7.6
Asv req mm² 0 1762 2059 770 0 3.7.7.5

Total u mm 0 6070 6070 3235 0

Ø mm 0 8 10 8 0
Number 0 41 41 22 0
Asv prov mm² 0 2061 3220 1106 0
solve for H&B crit ( v = vc ) 3.7.7.6
H crit mm 0 1788 1825 1670 0
B crit mm 0 1788 1825 885 0
Additional
0.75d
perimeters 0 2 2 1 0

171

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:171 17/07/2006 17:10:19

 RCC93 Flat Slabs (Tables)/ DETAIL!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M ade
by Date Page
Location EC BPTy p ic afllo o rt oBS81 1 0 rm w 1 2 - A p r -2 00 6 1 2 8172
SIMPLIFIED FLAT SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Cl 3.7.2.7 (Table 3.12) C hecked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC93.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC ch g - R 68

PUNCHING SHEAR, continued SIDE SIDE BS 8110

C OR N ER P EN U LT P E N UL T Reference
Ae1t c Ae2t c Be1t c
Vt kN 341.1 525.7 525.7
Veff/Vt kN 1.25 1.40 1.40 table 3.13
ave d mm 215.0 205.0 215.0 3.7.6.3
ave As % 1.358 1.206 1.255
at 1.5d from column
H mm 648 633 648
B mm 573 865 895 3.7.7.6
u 0 mm 575 900 900 3.7.7.6
v max N/mm² 3.435 3.979 3.793
V kN 400.8 710.0 708.9
u mm 1220 2130 2190 3.7.7.6
v N/mm² 1.528 1.626 1.506
vc N/mm² 0.931 0.906 0.907 Eqn 28
Links
? Yes Yes Yes table 3.9
Links at 0.5d & 1.25d
Sv mm EW 150 150 150 3.7.7.6
Asv req mm² 417 1166 794 3.7.7.5
Total u mm 1902.5 3235 3305

Ø mm 8 10 8
Number 13 22 23
Asv prov mm² 653 1728 1156
solve for H&B crit ( v = vc ) 3.7.7.6
H crit mm 996 1782 1704
B crit mm 921 941 902
Additional
0.75d
perimeter 2 2 1

172

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:172 17/07/2006 17:10:23

 RCC94 Two-way Slabs (Tables).xls

RCC94 Two-way Slabs (Tables).xls

This spreadsheet designs restrained two-way solid slabs in
accordance with BS 8110: Part 1 using moment and shear factors
Notes!
from equations 14 to 20 (i.e. Tables 3.14 and 3.15). Input is
required on the first two sheets. This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.

MAIN!
This single sheet consists of the input and main output. In itself it
should prove adequate for the design of restrained two-way slabs.
Inputs are underlined and most should be self-explanatory.

Self-weight, moment and shear factors are calculated

automatically. The use of the factors is also governed by Clause
3.5.3.5 (similar loads on adjacent spans, similar spans adjacent).
Where the relevant conditions are not met, users are directed
towards Clause 3.5.3.6 or alternative methods of analysis (e.g.
sub-frame analysis). Whilst ultimate reactions to beams are
given, shear per se is not checked as it is very rarely critical.

The dimension ly must be greater than lx : bays where lx> ly

are invalid. It is recognised that B1 can be parallel to l y and
the user should specify in which layers the top and bottom
reinforcement are located (see D33 and H33). In line 32 the user
is asked to specify the diameter of reinforcement to be used.
This reinforcement should be provided at the required centres
in accordance with Clause 3.5.3.5 (1) to (7) (middle strips and
column strips, torsion reinforcement at corners where an edge
or edges is/ are discontinuous). The spreadsheet highlights
whether additional reinforcement for torsion is required or not.
As noted under Deflection, the area of steel required, A sreq , may
be automatically increased in order to reduce service stress, fs ,
and increase modification factors to satisfy deflection criteria.

An approximate reinforcement density is given. This is

approximate only and excludes supporting beams, trimming to
holes, etc.

WEIGHT!
Weight! gives an estimate of the amount of reinforcement
required in a slab. Simplified curtailment rules, as defined in
Clause 3.12, are used to determine lengths of bars. The figures
should be treated as approximate estimates only as they cannot
deal with the effects of designers’ and detailers’ preferences,
rationalisation, the effects of holes, etc, etc. To the right of the

sheet are calculations of length, etc.

Support widths are required as input as they affect curtailments
and lengths.

173

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:173 17/07/2006 17:10:26

 RCC94 Two-way Slabs (Tables)/ MAIN!

174

174

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:174 17/07/2006 17:10:27

 RCC95 Continuous Beams (Tables).xls

RCC95 Continuous Beams (Tables).xls

The spreadsheet designs multiple-span rectangular or flanged
beams. It uses design ultimate bending moment and shear force
Graf!
factors from Table 3.5 of BS 8110: Part 1. As such its use should be
limited, as defined by Clause 3.4.3, to where: This sheet provides data for the charts in MAIN! and is not
intended for formal printing.

■ Qk > Gk Notes!
■ Substantially uniform loads over three or more spans
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
■ Variations in span < 15% lmax.

The intention is to provide the design of a simple continuous

beam on one sheet of A4.

MAIN!
The input requirements are self-explanatory. Answering “Y”
to Support in alt layer will incur additional cover to top bars
at supports (of the same size as those being designed at that
location) to allow for beams in the other direction. Users should
ensure effective depths, d, are correct (see DETAIL!D15, etc.).

The choice between rectangular, L or T beam is made via a combo-

box to the right hand side. When considering span reinforcement,
the spreadsheet will, where necessary, automatically increase
reinforcement in order to lower service stresses and enhance
allowable span to depth ratios. The diagrams for loading and
for bending moment are indicative only (the moment factors in
Table 3.5 do not give rise to a moment envelope).

DETAIL!
For first time users and young engineers, further detail of the
calculations undertaken is given on the sheet named DETAIL!,
pages 2 and 3 of the print-out.

Weight!
This sheet estimates the weight of reinforcement in the beam
when designed according to normal curtailment rules as defined
in BS 8110. The estimate is repeated at the bottom of MAIN! at
O62. Workings are shown on the right hand side of the sheet. The
estimate may be printed out using File/print or the print button
on the normal toolbar.

It should be recognised
interpretations that different
of these clauses, engineers’
different and detailers’
project circumstances
and requirements will all have a bearing on actual quantities of
reinforcement used.

175

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:175 17/07/2006 17:10:30

 RCC95 Continuous Beams (Tables)/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The ConcreteCentre

Client Advisory Group M ade
by Date Page
Location D & DE: dg eb e amGr i d1 f ro mAt oJ rmw 1 2 - A p r - 2 00 6 13 2 176
CONTINUOUS CONCRETE BEAM DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Table 3.5 C hecked Revision Job
No
Originated from R v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC c hg - R68

LOCATION Supports: from grid A to grid J STATUS

VALID DESIGN
D I M E N SI ON S M A T E R IA L S γm = 1.50
Nº of spans Nº 5 Shape
BEAM
L fcu N/mm² 40 γm = 1.15
Max Span m 5.00 Topcover mm 40 fyl N/mm² 500 steelclass A
depth, h mm 350 Bottomcover mm 40 fyv N/mm² 500 Density kN/m³ 23.6
bw mm 300 Side
cover mm 40 agg
h mm 20 (Normal weight concrete)
hf mm 175 Supportsteelinaltlayer ? Y
bf mm 650 100
50
LOADING 0
Self Wt kN/m 1.2 -50
+ Dead kN/m 10.9
-100
Total Dead, gk kN/m 12.1
Imposed qk kN/m 5.0 AJ A J
Design load, n = kN/m 25.0 Geometry and Loading Indicative Bending Moment Diagram

BENDING END END FI R SITN T IN T ER I O R INT ERNAL BS8110

SUPPORTS (A & J) SPAN S S UP P O R T S SPA NS S UP P O R T S Reference
M kNm 0.0 56.2 68.7 43.7 50.0 Table 3.5
d mm 276 290 270 294 270
bf mm 300 650 300 650 300 3.4.1.5
As mm² 0 470 648 360 457 3.4.4.4
As' mm² 00000 3.4.4.4
Deflection
Max
L/d 36.46 37.98 3.4.6.3
Actual
L/d 17.24 OK 17.01 OK 3.4.6.1

Tension reinforcement
Ø 16 20 20 12 20
No 2 Top 2 Btm 3 Top 4 Btm 2 Top
As prov mm² 402 628 942 452 628
= % 0.49 0.72 1.16 0.51 0.78
Compression reinforcement
Ø 16 12 12 12 12
No 2 Btm 2 Top 2 Btm 2 Top 2 Btm
As' prov mm² 402 226 226 226 226
= % 0.49 0.26 0.28 0.26 0.28

SHEAR O UT E RS UP T FIR S TI N TS UP T IN TS UP T NO MI NAL

V kN/m 56.2 75.0 68.7 ~ Table 3.5
v N/mm² 0.646 0.926 0.849 ~ Eqn 3
vc N/mm² 0.570 0.858 0.749 ~ Table 3.8
Link Ø mm 10 10 10 10
Legs No 2222
@ mm 200 200 200 200

OUTPUT/SUMMARY
END END FI R SITN T INT ERNA L INT ERNAL
S UP P O R T S SPAN S S UP P O R T S SPA NS S UP P O R T S
PROVIDE 2 H16 T 2 H12 T 3 H20 T 2 H12 T 2 H20 T
Main reinforcement N o m i n aBl 2H2 0B N o mi n aBl 4H 1 2B N o mi n aBl

Links 2 H10 @ 200 2 H10 @ 200 2 H10 @ 200 2 H10 @ 200 2 H10 @ 200
from CL of support for 800 for 600 for 600

CHECKS ØBAR SINGLE BAR SHEAR GLOBAL

COVER
< LAYERS SPACING DEFLECTION LINKS STATUS
OK OK OK OK OK VADLEISDIG N

176

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:176 17/07/2006 17:10:31

 RCC95 Continuous Beams (Tables).xls

RCC95 Continuous Beams (Tables)/ DETAILS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M ade
by Date Page
Location D & D :E d g eb e a mG r i d1f r o mAt oJ rm w 1 2- A p r- 2 0 0 6 1 3 3177
CONTINUOUS CONCRETE BEAM DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Table 3.5 C hecked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC95.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC
c hg - R6 8
DETAILED CALCULATIONS Gk=6 0.70 Qk=2 5.00 F=1 24.98 kN

MAIN STEEL
E ND E ND F IRSTIN T I N T E RI O R IN T E R N A L BS 8110
SUP P O RT S S P AN S SUP P O RT S SP A N S SUP P OR T S Reference
Factor 0.00 0.09 0.11 0.07 0.08 Table 3.5
M kNm 0.0 56.2 68.7 43.7 50.0 -=-
d mm 276 290 270 294 270
bf mm 300 650 300 650 300 3.4.1.5
K' 0.1558 0.1558 0.1558 0.1558 0.1558 Fig 3.3
Web Mres kNm 142.4 157.2 136.3 161.6 136.3 -=-
Flange Mres kNm --- 411.5 --- 419.7 --- -=-
K 0.0000 0.0257 0.0786 0.0195 0.0571 3.4.4.4
z mm 262.2 275.5 243.9 279.3 251.6 -=-
x mm 30.7 32.2 58.0 32.7 40.9 -=-
d' mm 78 56 76 56 68
net fsc N/mm² 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Fig 3.3
Excess M kNm 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
As' req mm² 00000
fst N/mm² 434.8 434.8 434.8 434.8 434.8 Fig 3.3
As req mm² 0 470 648 360 457
bw/b --- 0.4615 --- 0.4615 ---
Min% 0.20% 0.13% 0.20% 0.13% 0.20% Table 3.25
As
Min 210 137 210 137 210

DEFLECTION
fs N/mm² 0.0 249.1 229.3 265.4 242.4 Eqn 8
Base
ratio 22.00 22.00 3.4.6.3/4
Tens
Mod 1.535 1.600 Table 3.10
Comp
Mod 1.080 1.079 Table 3.11
Perm
L/d 36.455 37.982 3.4.6.3
Actual
L/d 17.241 ok 17.007 ok 3.4.6.1

TENSION STEEL
As mm² 210 470 648 360 457
Ø mm 16 ok 20 ok 20 ok 12 ok 20
No2 2 3 4 2
As prov mm² 402 628 942 452 628
Clear dist mm 168.0 160.0 70.0 50.7 160.0 betweenbars
Min S ok 25.0 ok 25.0 ok 25.0 ok 25.0 ok 25.0 3.12.11.1
Max S ok 300.0 ok 188.7 ok 205.0 ok 177.1 ok 193.9 Table 3.28
3.12.11.2.4
COMPRESSION STEEL
Required mm² 314 188 188 188 136 Table 3.25

Ø ok 16 ok 12 ok 12 ok 12 ok 12
No2 2 2 2 2
As' prov mm² 402 226 226 226 226
=% ok 0.486 ok 0.260 ok 0.279 ok 0.256 ok 0.279

177

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:177 17/07/2006 17:10:35

 RCC95 Continuous Beams (Tables)/ DETAILS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M ade
by Date Page
Location D&DE: dgebeamGrid1fromAtoJ rmw 12-Apr-2006 1 34 178
CONTINUOUS CONCRETE BEAM DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Table 3.5 C hecked Revision JobNo
Originated from RCC95.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC
chg - R 68
SHEAR
OU T E R FI RSTIN T I N T E RN A L N OM I N A L
S U P P ORT S U P P O RT S U P P O RT
Factor 0.45 0.60 0.55 ~ Table 3.5
V kN 56.2 75.0 68.7 ~ -=-

v N/mm² 0.646 0.926 0.849 ~ Eqn 3

vc N/mm² 0.570 0.858 0.749 ~ Table 3.8

(v-vc)bv N/mm 120.0 120.0 120.0 120.0 Table 3.7
Link Ø ok 10 ok 10 ok 10 ok 10 3.12.7.1
Legs ok 2 ok 2 ok 2 ok 2
@ mm 218 203 203 218 3.12.7.1
Adjust to mm 200 200 200 200
for mm 0 0 0 --- supt
from
ofcl
Adjust to mm 800 600 600 ---
As Dist ok 0.0 ok 90.0 ok 0.0 ok 0.0 3.4.5.5
As' Dist ok 0.0 ok 0.0 ok 0.0 ok 0.0 3.12.7.2

178

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:178 17/07/2006 17:10:39

 Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2

Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2

179

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:179 17/07/2006 17:10:42

 180

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:180 17/07/2006 17:10:43

 General notes to Eurocode 2 versions

General notes to Eurocode 2 versions

should be available in 2006. It should be noted that EN 1992
The Spreadsheets and Eurocode 2 – 1 –1 was calibrated using the contemporary BS standards
for loading, which might therefore be used satisfactorily in
The layout and workings of the spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 are conjunction with EN 1992 –1 –1 pending the final publication
in line with those to BS 8110 outlined in the previous section,
of BS EN 1991 series of standards.
Spreadsheets to BS 8110. The Introduction and General notes
are common to the use of all spreadsheets in this publication. ■ BS EN197, cement and EN 206, concrete and its BS derivative
Descriptions of the spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 are given in the BS8500. These standards have been in use for some time in
following pages. the UK.
■ BS EN10080 (steel for the reinforcement of concrete), BS
The spreadsheets are in accordance with Parts 1-1 and 1-2 of 4449 (BS 4449: 2005, reinforcement), BS4482 (BS 4482:
Eurocode 2 and their respective UK National Annexes (NAs). 2005, fabric), BS 4483 (BS 4483: 2005, fabric), and BS 8666
(BS 8666: 2005, scheduling). These standards were published
Parts 1-1 and 1-2 of Eurocode 2 (Eurocode 2: Design of concrete in late 2005 and came into effect on 1 January 2006.
structures, Part 1-1 General rules and rules for buildings, BS EN
1992-1-1 and Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures, Part One of the fundamental assumptions in EC2 is that the
1-2 General rules – Structural fire design BS EN 1992-1-2) were requirements of ENV 13670 for execution and workmanship
published in December 2004. are complied with. This raises a difficulty in the UK, as EN 13670
(Execution of concrete structures) is some way off. However
Each Eurocode has a National Annex. These specifiy the values for the UK, the provisions of the National Structural Concrete
of Nationally Determined Parameters (NDPs : factors relating to Specification (NSCS) [ref 32] are considered equivalent to those
safety and UK conditions, requirements for durability, etc. e.g. in ENV 13670 for tolerance class 1.
values of cover, γm, αcc, k etc.) to be used within the Eurocodes in
each country. The values of the NPDs used are documented on Other standards are in various states of readiness and in areas
a separate sheet within each spreadsheet and allow for different not specifically mentioned above, the designers might consider

values to be used,offor
The equivalents instance
these when
values the project
are hidden awayis in
outside theand
BS 8110 UK. using
shouldcurrent
satisfy UK practice that
themselves or current British
they are Standards
compatible butBSthey
with EN
indeed in the BS 8110 spreadsheets. 1992 and that the resulting reliability would be acceptable. For
instance the spreadsheets for pad foundations, TCC 81 uses
The UK National Annexes (NAs) that confirm or change Nationally current UK practice for sizing (allowable under EN 1997) rather
Determined Parameters within Eurocode 2 were published in than the full limit state approach.
December 2005
In the UK, the process of converting from BS8110 to Eurocode
Eurocode 2 will ultimately supersede all UK codes dealing with might be perceived as being a large barrier. As with any change,
the design of concrete structures. All conflicting British Standards there will be opportunities and threats. Eurocode 2 will be adopted
are due to be withdrawn in 2010. only where there is commercial advantage in doing so but from
calibration studies it would appear that there are significant gains
The spreadsheets have called for some interpretation of both to be made by adopting it in the design of building structures. The
Eurocodes and their NAs. authors are confident that in the long run Eurocode 2 will be seen
as being a very good standard allowing consistent safety across
materials and opportunity for greater economy and even greater
Implementation of Eurocode 2 flair in concrete design and construction.

BS EN 1992-1-1 and BS EN 1992-1-2 were published by BSI in

December 2004. Their National Annexes were published in Notes regarding Eurocode2
December 2005. BS EN 1992 is expected to be used generally
in conjunction with other Eurocodes (and their UK National
In his comparison of design requirements in Eurocode 2 and BS
Annexes) for loading etc and other European Standards (ENs)
8110, Narayanan (24) gave the following outline description of
for materials and execution. During the early stages of the Eurocode 2.
implementation of BS EN 1992, all the related codes, standards
and their UK National Annexes may not be available in their final
form. Nonetheless, as PD6687[31] points out, EN 1992 –1 – 1 General layout
can still be used to design structures using:
BS EN 1992-1-1(1) and BS EN 1992-1-2 are broadly comparable
■ BS EN 1990 Basis of structural design &. UK National Annex to BS 8110: Parts 1 and 2. Eurocode 2 comprises principles
and rules of application. Principles are general statements,
■ BS EN 1991 series, Actions. Almost all UK National Annexes
181

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:181 17/07/2006 17:10:44

 definitions, other requirements, and analytical models for which Reinforcement
no alternative is permitted. The rules of application are generally Eurocode 2 is applicable for ribbed reinforcement with
recognised rules that follow the principles and satisfy their characteristic yield strengths of 400 to 600 MPa. Plain bar and
requirements. Eurocode 2 is generally laid out to give advice on mild steel reinforcement are, strictly, outside the Code. The
the basis of phenomena (e.g. bending, shear etc) rather than by characteristic yield strength of reinforcing steel to BS 4449:2005
member types as in BS 8110 (e.g. beams, slabs, columns etc). will be 500 MPa. According to the UK National Annex, the partial
The Code does not provide derived formulae (e.g. for bending), factor for steel reinforcement is 1.15
only the details
traditional of the
European stress block are expressed). This is the
approach.
Cover
The UK Nationally Determined Parameters (NDPs) that are used
in the spreadsheets are taken from the relevant National Annex Minimum concrete cover, cmin, is related to bond strength,
(NA) and are shown in a separate sheet within the spreadsheets. durability and fire resistance. In addition to the minimum cover
an allowance for deviations due to variations in execution
Units for stress are mega Pascals, MPa (1 MPa = 1 N/mm 2 ) (construction) should be allowed for in design. Eurocode 2
recommends that, for concrete cast against formwork, this
Terminology employed will be generally familiar to UK engineers, allowance,- ∆cdev, is taken as 10 mm, unless the construction is
although there are some new words. Thus ‘ loads’ are referred subject to a quality assurance system in which case it could be
to as ‘actions’; ‘ bending moments’ and ‘shear forces ’ are called reduced to 5 mm or even 0 mm where non-conforming members
‘internal forces and moments’; ‘ superimposed loads’ are ‘ variable are rejected (e.g. in a precast yard). cmin + ∆cdev = nominal cover
actions’; and ‘self-weight’ and ‘dead loads’ are referred to as
‘permanent actions’. It is recommended that the nominal cover is clearly stated on
the drawings.
Concrete strength Cover for durability is governed by BS 8500. Guidance on the use
of BS8500 is given in How to use BS8500 with BS 8110 - copy
Concrete strength in Eurocode 2 refers to the cylinder strength available from www.concretecentre.com.
(fck) and cube strength (f cu). This fck/fcu notation is used throughout
Eurocode 2. However, design is based on characteristic cylinder
strengths not cube strengths and the spreadsheets refer to f ck Fire resistance
only. The relationship between cylinder and cube strengths
is shown below in Table 5 along with approximate moduli of Eurocode 2, Part 1–2: Structural fire design [13], gives guidance on
elasticity from Eurocode 2. design for fire resistance of concrete structures. Although much
of the Code is devoted to fire engineering methods, the design
Eurocode 2 and the spreadsheets permit much higher strengths of for fire resistance may still be carried out by referring to tables
concrete to be used than currently. The maximum characteristic for minimum axis distances and dimensions for various elements.
cylinder strength fck permitted is 90N/mm 2. Because the The axis distance is measured from the surface to the centre of the
characteristics of higher strength concrete are different, some bar and is treated as a mean to be obtained during execution.
expressions in the Code are adjusted for classes above C50/60.
Supplies of these high strength concretes should be assured Axis distances and dimensions are given in section 5 of Part 1–2.
before using them in design. Further advice on using the tabular methods is given in How to
design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Getting started [34].
The spreadsheets are unsuitable for the design of lightweight
concrete.

Table 5
P ro p e r t y St r en gt hcl as s
Relationship between
cylinder and cube stregths C 20/25 C 2 5/ 3 0 C 30 / 37 C 3 5/ 4 0 C 4 0 /50 C 4 5/ 5 0 C 50 / 6 0

fck (cylinder) 20 25 30 35 40 45 50

fck (cube) 25 30 37 40 50 50 60

Ecm 29 30.5 32 33.5 35 36 37

‡ Based on the outline description of Eurocode 2 in Comparison of design requirements in Eurocode 2 and
BS 8110, Narayanan ( 24)

182

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:182 17/07/2006 17:10:46

 General notes to Eurocode 2 versions

Load combinations Actions

BS EN1990 allows the designer (of UK structures) to use either The most notable difference between UK Standards and
Expression (6.10) or the less favourable of Exp (6.10a) or Exp (6.10b). Eurocode 1 is the bulk density of reinforced concrete, which has
For members supporting one variable action the combination been increased to 25 kN/m3.
1.25Gk + 1.5Qk may be used. This combination is derived from
Exp (6.10b) and can be used provided that the permanent actions
(Gk) are not greater than 4.5 times the variable actions (Qk) and
the structure is not used for storage.
Analysis
Eurocode 2 dictates that the type of analysis should be appropriate
Less economically designers may choose to use 1.35 Gk + 1.5 Qk to the problem being considered. The following are commonly
(derived from Exp (6.10)). used: linear elastic analysis, linear elastic analysis with limited
redistribution and plastic analysis.
EN 1990 requires that actions should be checked using both γG.sup
(=1.25 or 1.35) and γG.inf (= 1.0). γG.sup (i.e. 1.25 or 1.35) will always Linear analysis may be carried out assuming cross sections are
be the more onerous when designing for peak moments, but uncracked and remain plane (i.e. may be based on concrete gross
greater hogging moments in spans often occur when γG.inf is used. sections) and linear stress-strain relationships and the use of
For this reason, a macro is employed in a number of spreadsheets mean values of elastic modulus. Linear analysis is the basis of the
to change γG to its lower value (1.0), record the results, then set analyses used in the spreadsheets.
it back to the higher value again. The larger value of the tensile
force in the reinforcement, Ftd, from both sets of results is then In the rigorous spreadsheets the spans are checked at 1/20th
used for the design of top steel in spans. points to see whether the section theoretically cracks under load;
if so that section remains cracked and cracked section properties
For the serviceability limit states of deflection and cracking, the are applied and used in the serviceability calculations. (Cracked
quasi-permanent load case is used. Generally a quasi-permanent section properties are used only for the deflection calculations
load of Gk + Ψ2Qk is used where Ψ2 is a factor dependant on the and not for the analysis as the process would become iterative,
use of the structure (see BS EN 1990 A1.2.2 and UK National non-linear and would take a long time to run.)
Annex).
For ULS, the moments derived from elastic analysis may

Load cases be redistributed to a maximum of 30% where Class B or C

reinforcement is used or 20% if Class A reinforcement is used.
According to BS8666:2000 reinforcement called up as may be
For building structures, the UK NA to Eurocode 2, Part 1–1 allows 500 grade Class A, B or C.
either of the following sets of load arrangements to be used:

1. Alternate or adjacent spans loaded Section analysis – Design assumptions

2. All or alternate spans loaded
The simplified rectangular concrete stress block as shown in
The spreadsheets use the all-or-alternate-spans-loaded case by Figure 3.5 of BS EN 1992-1-1 has been used throughout the
default. Users may switch to 1, the alternate-or-adjacent-spans- spreadsheets, in conjunction with option B (the horizontal line)
loaded by changing the setting in Notes! on the reinforcement stress/ strain curve (Figure 3.8 of BS EN
1992-1-1). In the case of columns and other members with
axial force, these strain distributions have been modified by the
Simplified arrangements for slabs imposition of the “hinge point” as shown in Figure 6.1. (of BS EN
1991-1-1).
According to the UK NA, the load arrangements can be simplified
for slabs where only the all spans loaded needs to be checked (see The rectangular stress block option has been chosen because of
Figure 3), provided the following conditions are met: its’ relative simplicity, thereby making it more straightforward for
a) In a one-way spanning slab the area of each bay exceeds 30 users to follow the logic used in calculations. The choice of stress
m2 (a bay means a strip across the full width of a structure block normally makes little difference in the design of slabs and
bounded on the other sides by lines of support) beams, but in column design, slightly higher axial loads may be
resisted by employing the recto-parabolic stress block as shown
b) The ratio of the variable action (Qk) to the permanent action in Figure 3.3 and option (A) in Figure 3.8.
(Gk) does not exceed 1.25
c) The magnitude of the variable action excluding partitions
These options may be adopted for future versions of TCC12 and
does not exceed 5 kN/m2.
TCC51 to TCC54.

Lever arm, z is restricted to a maximum of 0.95 x effective depth.

This limit is derived from BS 8110 and avoids dangers associated
with theoretically over-shallow neutral axis depths.

183

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:183 17/07/2006 17:10:48

 rounded at the corners. The formulae are slightly different than
Analysis & design spreadsheets those for beam shear. For instance where shear reinforcement is
– Top steel checks in spans required, the contribution of the concrete resistance in punching
shear is recognised (compared to beam shear where it is not).
Within the spreadsheets for continuous elements, it has been
assumed that at least 50% of support reinforcement in beams
and slabs will normally extend to a point 0.3L from the centrelines αcc and shear
of support. The other 50% is assumed to be curtailed at a point αcc is a coefficient applied to the compression block that takes
0.2L from the centrelines of support. However, the element
is checked at 0.25L and 0.75L to determine the whether any into account long-term effects on the compressive strength
top steel is required to resist hogging moment. If so the larger and unfavourable effects resulting from the way in which load
amount of top steel required is assumed to be necessary in the is applied. According to EN 1992-1-1, αcc = 1.0. However, the UK
span between these two points. National Annex to BS EN 1992-1-1 makes αcc = 0.85 for flexure
and axial load and 1.0 for other phenomena. Generally, the
The adoption of a shear truss model in Eurocode 2 causes the spreadsheets adopt αcc = 1.0 for shear.
force in tension reinforcement to be increased above MEd/z. This
can be accommodated by using the shift rule to curtail bars at
a distance al from where they are no longer required to resist
Deformation
bending moment. The spreadsheets take a slightly different
Generally, serviceability checks for deformation may be carried
approach by actually `calculating tensile force to be resisted, Ftd,
out using ‘deemed to satisfy’ span to effective depth rules that
at 0.25L and 0.75L, where
are similar to those in BS 8110. However, if a more detailed
check is required, Eurocode 2 gives guidance which varies from
Ftd = MEd/Z + ∆Ftd
the rules in BS 8110 Part 2.
where
∆Ftd = 0.5VEd( cot θ – cot α)
More rigorous approaches may be used if required and are
where
covered in the ‘R’ (for Rigorous) series of spreadsheets. The
θ = the angle of the compression strut
methods employed are described in more detail in Deflections in
cot α = 0 for vertical reinforcement
concrete slabs and beam [30].

ED
The spreadsheets determine the then
valuesselect
of Mthose VEd at 1/20th
andproducing
points for all load combinations, the
highest value of Ftd. If either MEd or VEd is reversed for a particular
Detailing
combination, the additional tensile force is taken by bottom
The rules for determining the anchorage and lap lengths are more
reinforcement, so the value of ∆Ftd is set to zero.
complex than the simple tables in BS 8110. Eurocode 2 considers
the effects of, amongst other things, the position of bars during
Shear concreting, the shape of the bar and cover. Designers and detailers
are directed to more specialised references for further guidance
eg IStructE/Con Soc Detailing Manual [28 ].
The ‘variable strut inclination’ method is used in Eurocode 2 for
the assessment of the shear capacity of a section. The assumed
angle of the concrete compression strut can be altered to give
the most economic design. In most cases the angle of the strut
may be assumed to be 21.8º (ie where cot θ = 2.5). Angles above
21.8º may prove to be economic where shear loads are high.
Further advice can be found in the guide ‘How to design concrete
structures using Eurocode 2: Beams [12] in the ‘How to’ series.

Applied shear force (VEd) is compared with three values for the
resistance (VRd):-

VRdc = shear capacity of the concrete alone;

VRd.max = shear resistance determined by the capacity of the
notional concrete struts
VRds = capacity of a section with shear reinforcement.

The formula for VRds can be rewritten to give the area of shear
reinforcement required per unit length. Asw/s

With respect to punching shear, checks are carried at 2d from the

face of the column and for a rectangular column, the perimeter is

184

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:184 17/07/2006 17:10:50

 TCC11 Element Design.xls

TCC11 Element Design.xls

TCC11.xls includes sheets for designing affecting long-term deflection. This sheet will, where necessary,
■ Solid slabs automatically increase reinforcement in order to lower service
stresses and enhance allowable span to depth ratios. Again, input
■ Rectangular beams and of the relationship between dead and imposed loading is required
■ T beams (and ribbed slabs) for bending in cells D12 and D13.
■ Beam shear
ψ2 is the quasi-permanent load factor applied to imposed loads
■ Columns with axial load and bending about one axis. in calculations of deflection. The factors are 0.2 for dwellings, 0.3
for offices, 0.6 for parking areas and 0.0 for snow and wind.
TCC11.xls designs elements to Eurocode 2: Part 1: 1992(3). It is
assumed that loads, moments, shears, etc, are available for input
from hand calculations or from analysis from elsewhere. Span-
to-depth ratios and other ‘NDP’ values are taken from the UK
TEE~BEAM!
National Annex (part of reference 3). TEE~BEAM! designs T beams and L beams in single simply-
supported span, end span, internal span or cantilever locations.
Again, these choices have a bearing on deflection limitations
SLAB! and the user should choose the appropriate location from the
combo-box to the right hand side.
This sheet designs a section of solid slab in a single simply
supported span, in a continuous end or internal span, at supports With respect to the effective width of the flange, the user may
or as a cantilever. Workings and references to clause numbers are also choose that the section is considered as a tee- or an inverted
given to the right hand side of the sheet. L beam. Again usage and whether brittle partitions are present
must also be selected.
Input should be self-explanatory. Terminology may differ from
the BS 8110 version: for instance the term δ is the redistribution A default value for the width of the flange bf must be input. Tips
factor (i.e. 1 – redistribution percentage/100). Concrete cylinder for values of b ,max are given in cells J18 and:J19.
f
strength, fck, is changed using the combo-box to the right hand
side. In the determination of compression steel, where the neutral axis
lies below flange, the concrete in web, bw, below the flange has
In spans, the location of the section being designed has a bearing been ignored.
on deflection limitations, and the appropriate location should
be chosen from the combo-box to the right hand side. Similarly, In order to calculate the appropriate deflection factor for
the user should choose from the list of usage (dwelling, office/ compression reinforcement, there is a facility to specify the
store, parking etc.), which governs the proportion of imposed diameter of compression reinforcement. When considering
load affecting long-term deflection. Eurocode 2 requires the deflection, the spreadsheet will, where necessary, automatically
input of the relationship between dead and imposed loading. increase span reinforcement in order to lower service stresses and
This is done at cells G9 and G10. When appropriate the sheet enhance allowable span-to-depth ratios.
will automatically increase amounts of reinforcement in order
to lower service stresses and enhance allowable span-to-depth
ratios. SHEAR!
The ‘cover’ specified at D12 should be the normal cover including This sheet designs beams for shear. Input is (we hope) self-
the allowance in design for deviation ∆cdev. This allowance is explanatory. Providing the applied load is fundamentally a UDL, or
spccified in cell D13 and is used in the checking of allowable where the principal load is located further than 2d from the face
maximum bar size. of the support, Eurocode 2 allows shear to be checked at d from
the face of support (as does BS 8110).The value of shear force,
VEd, input at G11 can, provided there is diagonal compression
RECT~BEAM! and continuity of tension reinforcement for at least 2.5 d from

This sheet designs a rectangular beam in a single simply the

(seeface of support,
Clause 6.2.2(6)).beCell
evaluated at d from
H11, requires thethe face ofultimate
relevant support
supported span, in a continuous end or internal span, at supports uniformly distributed load to be specified.
or as a cantilever. These choices have a bearing on deflection
limitations and the user should choose the appropriate location The sheet designs the links required at the section considered. If
from the combo-box to the right hand side. The user should the beam loading is considered to be uniformly distributed, the
similarly choose from the list of usage (dwelling, office/ store, ultimate UDL, n, can be entered to give the distance for which
parking, etc.), which governs the proportion of imposed load this arrangement is required before reverting to nominal link
arrangement.
185

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:185 17/07/2006 17:10:52

 Kϕ = 1 + βϕef
COLUMN!
where
This spreadsheet designs symmetrically reinforced rectangular
β = 0.35 + (fck/200) – ( λ/150)
columns bent about one axis where both axial load, NEd , and
where
maximum design moment, M Ed , are known. It is based on
λ = slenderness ratio l0/i
Eurocode 2 Figure 6.1 and 3.5. The spreadsheet iterates x/h to
where
determine where the neutral axis lies. Assuming a value of x
allows strains and therefore stresses to be determined using the i
= radius= of gyration of the uncracked concrete
section h/3.46 for rectangular sections,
principles shown in Figure 6.1. From these stresses the area of
where h is the depth in the direction under
steel required for the design moment M Ed and design axial load
consideration and i = d/4 for circular sections
can be determined seperately. The neutral axis depth x is adjusted
where d is the diameter.
until the areas of steel considering MEd and NEd match. The sheet
ϕef = effective creep coefficient as defined in 5.6.1.
includes stress and strain diagrams to aid comprehension of the
lo = effective length of column
final design. Workings and references are shown to the right hand
side of the sheet.
In columns in an unbraced structures MEd = M02 + M2
Please note that for ‘stocky’ columns i.e. when λ ≤λ lim
M02
MEd = M02 = M + e iNEd e iNEd M02
M
where
M = numerically higher moment from first order analysis
ei = lo/400 ≤ (h/30) ≤ 20mm for columns in braced
systems
NEd = design axial action at ULS.
M0e + M2 M0e + M2
M2 = NEd e 2
When λ > λllim, i.e when ‘slender’, the design bending moment M02
in a column in a braced structure is: + =
MEd= Maximum of {M0Ed + M2 ; M02 ; M01 + 0.5 M2} (see figure)
where
M0Ed = equivalent first order moment including the effect of
imperfections (at about mid height) and may be taken
as = M0e
M01 0.5M 2 M01 + 0.5 M2
where
M0e = (0.6M02 + 0.4M01) ≥ 0.4 M 02 First order Additional Total
moments for second order moment
Note: M 01
and M02 should have the same sign ‘stocky’ diagram
moments
if they give tension on the same side. Attention columns for ‘slender for ‘slender
should be paid to the sign of the bending
moments. columns’ columns ’
M2 = nominal second order moment inslender columns = NEd e2
Moments in slender columns
where
NEd = design axial action at ULS
e2 = deflection = (1/r)l02/10
where For simplicity, where three or more bars are required in the top
1/r = curvature = K rKϕ (fyd /(Es0.45d)) and bottom of the section, it is assumed that a symmetrical
where arrangement will be required for the side faces (see the argument
Kr = (nu – n)/(nu – nbal) ≤ 1.0 included within the commentary for the BS 8110 version).
where
nu = 1 + ω COLUMN! assumes that the moment entered has already been
where adjusted, if necessary, for bi-axial bending.
ω = mechanical reinforcement ratio =
(As/Ac)(fyd/fcd) as in 5.6.1 above For many side and all corner columns, there is no other choice
than to design for bi-axial bending, and the method given in
Ed c cd
nn == N /A of
value f as defined in 5.6.1
n corresponding to above;
the Clause 5.8.9 must be adhered to, i.e.,TCC53.xls or sheets 2 and 3
bal
maximum moment of resistance and may be of TCC51.xls should be used.
taken as 0.4
Note: Kr may be derived fom column charts.
Theoretical shortfalls in area of up to 2% are considerer to be
acceptable. In theory, negative amounts of reinforcement required
can be obtained but these are superseded by requirements for
minimum amounts of reinforcement in columns. No adjustment

186

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:186 17/07/2006 17:10:54

 TCC11 Element Design.xls

is made in the area of concrete occupied by reinforcement.

Maximum link centres are given in Clause 9.5.2 [4]. Column shear
should be checked separately, in the event that this is likely to
be critical.

INDIRECT!
This spreadsheet considers indirect supports, e.g. where one
beam is supported by another, to calculate additional legs of links
required in the supporting beam.

Refs!
This sheet comprises the values for Nationally Determined
Parameters that have been used in the spreadsheet. These data
reflect the values given in draft UK National Annexes for BS EN
1990, BS EN 1992 -1-1 and BS EN 1992-1-2 Designers should
ensure that these data are current when the spreadsheet is used.

When using TCC11 for permanent design, designers are

strongly advised to include a copy of this sheet with any design
calculations.

Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.

187

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:187 17/07/2006 17:10:57

 TCC11 Element Design/ SLAB!

188

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:188 17/07/2006 17:10:58

 TCC11 Element Design.xls

TCC11 Element Design/ RECT~BEAM

Section design to Eurocode 2 (BS EN 1992-1)

RECTANGULAR BEAMS
Originated from TCC11.xls, v 1.3 on CD © 2003-2005 TCC

INPUT Location 1st Floor, Span 1 Beam type END SPAN

M kNm fck 30 N/mm² c = 1.50
 0.85 fyk 500 N/mm² s = 1.15
span mm 8000 Steel class A c,dev 10
h mm 500 REBAR Ø COVER to main bars
b mm 300 Tension 32 42
gk kN/m 25.80 Comp'n 20 35
qk kN/m 20.00 Side -- 42
2 = 0.6 Shopping brittlep artitions? YES

O UTPUT 1st Floor, Span 1 .

Effective depth, d = 500 - 42 - 32/2 = 442.0 mm
Neutral axis, x = [442- (442² -2E6x370x1.5/0.85/300/30)]/0.8 = 272.2 mm
(x/d) limit = 0.450 x/d actual = 0.616 > 0.450, x = 198.9 mm
Lever arm, z = 442 - 0.4 x 198.9 = 362.4 mm
d2 = 35 + 20/2 = 45 mm

Gross
Net fscfsc = 434.8
= 434.8 N/mm²
- 0.85 x 30from
/1.5 strain
= 417.8diagram
N/mm²
Excess M = 370 - 294.1 = 75.9 kNm
Compession steel, As2 = 75.9E6 /417.8 /(442 - 45) = 457 mm²
PROVIDE 2H20 COMPRESSION STEEL = 628 mm²
Steel stress, fyd = 434.8 N/mm² from strain diagram ρ = 280 N/mm²
Tension steel, As = 294.1E6/362.4/434.8 + 457.5 x 417.8/434.8 = 2306 mm²
9.2.1.1 (1) As min = 1.3 x 300 x 500 = 200 mm²
7.3.2 (1) As crack = 400 x 0.86 x 2.896 x 68.1/500 = 136 mm² .
7.4.2 As def = 2341 mm²
PROVIDE 3H32 TENSION STEEL = 2413 mm²
DEFLECTION QP M =370 x 37.8 /64.8 = 253.8 kNm s = 280 N/mm²
7.4.2 (2) Modification factor = 310 /280.0 = 1.107
Permissible L/d = 1.107 x 0.875 x 18.967 = 18.37
Actual L/d = 8000 /442 = 18.10 ok .

189

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:189 17/07/2006 17:11:04

 TCC11 Element Design/ TEE~BEAM!

Section design to Eurocode 2 (BS EN 1992-1)

SIMPLE TEE & L BEAMS
Originated from TCC11.xls, v 1.3 on CD © 2003-2005 TCC

INPUT Location 1st Floor, Span 3 to 4

M kNm Beam type END SPAN
 1.00 fck 30 N/mm² c = 1.50
span mm 9000 fyk 500 N/mm² s = 1.15
h mm 500 eel class A c,dev 10
bw mm 300 REBAR Ø COVER
bf mm 840 Tension 25 35
hf mm 150 Comp'n 12 30
gk kN/m 25.80 Side -- 35
qk kN/m 20.00 2 = 0.6 Shopping
brittle partitions? YES
O UTPUT 1st Floor, Span 3 to 4
Effective depth, d = 500 - 35 - 25/2 = 452.5 mm
Neutral axis, x = [452.5-(452.5² -2E6x275x1.5/0.85/300/30)]/0.8 = 56.0 mm
(x/d) limit = 0.414 x/d actual = 0.124 ok
Lever arm, z = 452.5 - 0.4 x 56.0 = 430.1 > 0.95d = 429.9 mm
Tension steel, As = 275.0E6 /429.9 /434.8 = 1471 mm²
9.1.1.1 (1) As min = 1.3 x 300 x 452.5 = 204 mm²
7.3.2 (1) As crack = 400.0 x 0.86 x 2.896 x 87.6 /500 = 175 mm²
for deflection, As def = 1893 mm²

.
Service stress, QP M =275 x 45.8 /64.83 = 160.3 kNm s = 202 N/mm²
7.4.2 (2) Modification factor = 310 /201.7 = 1.537
Permissible L/d = 1.537 x 0.638 x 21.005 = 20.59
Actual L/d = 9000 /452.5 = 19.89 ok .
.
.
. s = 202 N/mm²
.
.
. .

190

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:190 17/07/2006 17:11:10

 TCC11 Element Design.xls

TCC11 Element Design/ SHEAR!

Section design to Eurocode 2 (BS EN 1992-1)

BEAM SHEAR
Originated from TCC11.xls, v 1.3 on CD © 2003-2005 TCC

INPUT Location 1st Floor, Span 2 at 2E

fck N/mm² 30 c = 1.50 d bw
fywk N/mm² 500 s = 1.15 440 300

Main Steel LinkØ Legs Sidecover V Ed n

Ø 25 10 2 30 258.0 64.8
No 2 mm No mm kN at face kN/m

O UTPUT 1st Floor, Span 2 at 2E

6.2.2 (1) AsL
= 982mm² =
0.744% f cd = 20.0 N/mm²
equation (6.6) ν = 0.6(1 - 30/250) = 0.528 . cot = 2.50
equation (6.9) VRd,max = 1 x 300 x 396.0 x 0.528 x 20.0 /2.90 /1000 = 432.6 kN ok
6.2.1 (8) VEd @ d = 258 - 64.8 x 0.44 = 229.5 kN
6.2.2 (1) k = 1 + (200 /440) = 1.674 .
equation (6.2) VRd,c = 0.12 x 1.674 cube root(0.744 x 30) = 74.7 kN .

9.2.2 (5) Asw/s (min)= 0.08 x 300 /500 x 30 = 0.263 mm

equation (6.9) Asw/s (max)= 0.5 x 300 /500 x 1.15 x 0.528 x 20.0 = 3.643 mm ok
equation (6.7) Asw/s = 229.5E3 /(396.0 x 434.8 x 2.50) = 0.533 > 0.263
9.2.2 (6) smax,L= 330mm smax,T = 330 mm 9.2.2 (8) ok
PROVIDE 2 legs T10 @ 275
Provide for distance of 825 mm from support face
then nominal links = 2 legs T10 @ 325

191

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:191 17/07/2006 17:11:14

 TCC11 Element Design/ COLUMN!

Section design to Eurocode 2 (BS EN 1992-1)

SYMMETRICAL RECTANGULAR COLUMN DESIGN
COLUMN DESIGN MOMENTS ABOUT X AXIS ONLY

Originated from TCC11.xls, v 1.3 on CD © 2003-2005 TCC

INPUT Location Column 2E fck 35 N/mm²

Axial load, N Ed 2507 kN fyk 500 N/mm²
Moment, MEd 27.0 kNm Main bar Ø 20 mm
height, h 300 mm Link Ø 8 mm
breadth, b 325 mm c = 1.50 concrete
cover (to link ) 25 mm s = 1.15 steel
CALCULATIONS
from MED As = [M - αηfck.b.dc(h/2 - dc/2)] / [(h/2-d2).(σsc+σst).γc]
from NEd As = (N - αηfck.b.dc) / [(σsc - σst).γc] Asc = A st = A s d c = min(h, λx)
d2 = 43 mm αηfck /γc= 19.8 N/mm²
=d 257 mm fyk /γs = 434.8 N/mm²

from iteration, neutral axis depth, x = 374.7 mm dc = 299.7 mm

αηfcu.b.dc/γc= 1932.1kN
Steel comp strain = 0.00258
Steel tens strain = -0.00092

σsc= 434.8N/mm² (Comp. stress in reinf.) 415 net

σst= -183.3N/mm² (Tensile stress in reinf.) -163 net
fromM, As= 994 mm² from N, A s = 994 mm²
OUTPUT OK
Column 2E
Requires 994mm² T&B:- PROVIDE 12T20
(ie 4T20 T&B - 1257mm² T&B - 3.87% o/a, @80 c/c.)
Links : - PROVIDE T8 @ 300 see clause 9.5.2 (4)

Strain diagram Stress diagram

0.00292 19.8 N/mm² 435

0.00258

Notes
0.00092
Stresses in N/mm2
183
0.00058 Compression +ve
- - - Neutral axis

192

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:192 17/07/2006 17:11:20

 TCC11 Element Design.xls

TCC11 Element Design/ COLUMN!

Section design to Eurocode 2 (BS EN 1992-1)

Indirect Supports
Originated from TCC11.xls, v 1.3 on CD © 2003-2005 TCC

INPUT Location 1st Floor, Beam 7D-E

fywk 500 N/mm² s = 1.15
h1 300 mm
h2 450 mm
bw1 225 mm Link Ø = 10
bw2 300 mm
VEd 127.0 kN from secondary

OUTPUT 1st Floor, Beam 7D-E

a = Min(300/2 + 300/3, 300/2) = 150 mm
d = Min(450/3 + 225/2, 450/2) = 225 mm
fyd = 500 /1.15 = 434.78 N/mm²
Extra Asw = 1000 x 127 /434.78 = 292 mm²
PROVIDE 4 additional T10 legs within 2a (and within d,if needed)
Asw,prov = 314 mm²

193

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:193 17/07/2006 17:11:26

 TCC12 Bending and Axial Force.xls
This spreadsheet gives an interaction chart for moment
against axial load for rectangular sections with asymmetrical
reinforcement arrangements. Primarily intended for beams
with axial load, it is also applicable to asymmetrically reinforced
columns.

MAIN!
Moments are considered to be about the x-x axis. All applied
loads and moments should be ultimate, with compressive axial
loads positive and with positive moments inducing tension in the
bottom reinforcement.

With asymmetrical arrangements of reinforcement the diagram

indicates that negative moments are theoretically possible. After
much consideration, the diagram is considered to be correct
but strictly is valid only for load cases where M is greater than
Mmin as shown on the graph. A reciprocal diagram is generated
automatically when top and bottom steels are reversed in the
input.

Calcs!
Calcs! shows the derivation of the chart where moment capacity
is calculated at intervals of neutral axis depth from n.a. depth for
N = 0 to n.a. depth for N = Nbal, then in intervals from n.a. depth
for N = Nbal to n.a. depth for N = N uz. This sheet shows workings
and is not necessarily intended for printing out other than for
checking purposes.

REFS!
This sheet comprises the values for Nationally Determined
Parameters that have been used in the spreadsheet. These data
reflect the values given in draft UK National Annexes for BS EN
1992-1-1. Designers should ensure that these data are current
when the spreadsheet is used. When using TCC12 for permanent
design, designers are strongly advised to include a copy of this
sheet with any design calculations.

Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.

194

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:194 17/07/2006 17:11:31

 TCC12 Bending and Axial Force.xls

TCC12 Bending and Axial Force/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M adeby Date Page
Location Beam
C1-2,
Level
3 RMW 30-Jun-06 195
205
BENDING AND AXIAL FORCE to EN 1992-1 : 2003 C hecked Revision Job No
Originated from v 3.0 on CD © 2002-2005 TCC chg - FB625

MATERIALS
fck 35 N/mm² γs 1.15
fyk 500 N/mm² γc 1.50

S EC T IO N C O V E(to
R S main steel)
h 450 mm TOP 35 mm
b 300 mm BOTTOM 35 mm
SIDES 35 mm
REINFORCEMENT
B a rØ No Area % S pa c e
TOP 25 2 982 0.727 180.0 .
BOTTOM 32 3 2413 1.787 67.0 .

M:N interaction chart for 450 x 300 section, Grade 35 concrete

5000

4000
Mmin

3100
N 3000
k
d
E
N
,
N 2000
O
I
S
S 1600
E
R
P 1200
M 1000
O
C
L 0.1Acfck
IA
X
A 0

-600
-1000

-2000

-500 -400 -300 -200 -100 0 100 200 300 400 500
MOMENT, MEdxx kNm

LOADCASES (ULS) CASE NEd M Ed CASE NEd M Ed

1 3100 -210 2 -600 180
3 1600 280 4 1200 -240

195

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:195 17/07/2006 17:11:32

 TCC13 Slab Punching.xls
This spreadsheet designs punching shear links. Essentially it is The shear at 2.0d and at the column face are shown under ‘Results’,
intended to be used with simple rectangular flat slabs to BS EN together with the perimeter (u out) at which shear reinforcement is
1992-1-1, i.e. with TCC33.xls. Equally it can be used to check wide no longer required. The given solution then indicates the number
beams in, say, troughed slabs. of link spurs required, with the number, spacing and diameter of
the links in each spur.
The spreadsheet is presented as four pairs of sheets dealing
with internal, edge, (external) corner and re-entrant corners. It Detailed design calculations are shown to the right of each sheet
should be remembered that in slabs, traditional links are time- (off screen). These sheets derive three alternative radial link
consuming to fix on site – proprietary systems are generally configurations then check the validity of each before selecting
much quicker to fix on site and this far outweighs first cost. This the optimum solution.
spreadsheet may be used for some proprietary systems as well as
for traditional links. The amounts of reinforcement per perimeter may be converted
to a traditional arrangement of links.

INTERNAL! (Similarly EDGE!, Deductions for holes in the calculation of shear perimeters
are calculated by finding the angle defined by the extremities
CORNER and REENTRANT!) of the hole. The projection of this angle is deducted from the
appropriate perimeter.
These sheets constitute the input and main output. Input is
fairly self-evident but, as ever, care must be exercised in ensuring
correct values are used. The top diagram acts as a legend and the GEOMETRY!
chart at the bottom of the sheet shows the column, any holes
and link perimeters, and should act both as a check for input and This sheet shows the geometrical arrangements of link spurs
help explain output. The x-x axis is across the page. assumed in the design calculations, which should also be used
for detailing purposes.
To the right is a combo-box that allows either:

■ Input of both VEd (design shear transferred to column) and Gra!

ß VEd (design effective shear including allowance for moment
transfer) is required. These figures should be available from sub- This sheet contains charting data
frame analysis e.g. output from TCC33.xls under Reactions. A
value of ß VEd, computed from VEd and the factor according
to location of the column (BS EN 1992-1-1, Clause 6.4.3) is Refs!
suggested under Operating Instructions: in general this figure
may be regarded as a maximum: calculating effective shear This sheet contains values for nationally determined parameters
from moment transfer generally results in lower figures. used in the spreadsheets.

or
Notes!
■ Input of Vt alone. Veff defaults to the values given in BS EN
1992-1-1, Clause 6.4.3 This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.

or

■ Input of VEd alone. ß V Ed defaults to the values given in BS EN

1992-1-1, Clause 6.4.3

The spreadsheet asks for the areas of steel in the two directions.
These should be averages in each direction, i.e., ensure that it
reflects the actual reinforcement in the sides of the perimeter; an
average of column strips and middle strips may be appropriate.

Holes more than 6d from the column face are ignored as in BS EN

1992-1-1, Clause 6.4.2 (3). Multiple holes should be aggregated
pro-rata as if they were one hole at one location.

196

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:196 17/07/2006 17:11:38

 TCC13 Slab Punching.xls

TCC13 Slab Punching/ INTERNAL!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M adeby Date Page
Location ECBPTypicalFloorColumnB3 rmw 30-Jun-2006 207 197
PUNCHING SHEAR to BS EN 1992-1: 2004 INTERNAL C hecked Revision JobNo
Originated from TCC13.xls Version 3.0 on CD © 2003-2006 TCC COLUMN chg - FB625

2
MATERIALS fck N/mm 35 ST A T U S L E GE ND
2
fyk N/mm 500 VALID DESIGN
Steel class A .

DIMENSIONS A mm 400 E mm 200

B mm 400 F mm 50
G mm 150 H mm 150

LOADING VEd kN 965.5 ß VEd = kN 1060.7

ult UDL kN/m2 16.10

2
SLAB h mm 250 dx mm 215 Asx mm /m 1608 in B + 6d
2
dy mm 195 Asy mm /m 1608 in A + 6d
d mm 205 100ρL % 0.786

RESULTS VEd = 1060.7 kN vRd,c = 0.7199 N/mm2 Equation (6.47)

2 2
At hole face, vEd = 3.612 N/mm At 2d perimeter, vED,red = 1.3793 N/mm
Uout required = 6542 mm Equation (6.54)

SOLUTION Fig 6.22 (A)

12 link spurs of 5H10 @ 135 84 links
plus 12 spurs of 2H10 @ 135
St = 175.7 mm Sr= 135 mm
Asw/Sr req = 6.949 (6.52) & (9.11)

Asw/Sr prov = 6.981 mm

First link perimeter 100 mm from column face
Uout = 7389 mm > 6,542 mm
SPUR
See GEOMETRY page for link locations. PLAN
Some links shown may need to be re-located to avoid holes.

197

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:197 17/07/2006 17:11:40

 TCC13 Slab Punching/ EDGE!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M adeby Date Page

Location Column
B2 rmw 30-Jun-2006 208198

PUNCHING SHEAR to BS EN 1992-1: 2004 EDGE C hecked Revision JobNo

Originated from TCC13.xls Version 3.0 on CD © 2003-2006 TCC COLUMN chg - FB625

2
MATERIALS fck N/mm 35 ST ATU S L E GE N D
2
fyk N/mm 500 VALID DESIGN
Steel class A .

DIMENSIONS A mm 400 E mm -75

B mm 250 F mm -275
G mm 150
D mm 0 H mm 150

LOADING VEd kN 500.9 ßVEd= kN 627.7

ult UDL kN/m2 16.10

2
SLAB h mm 250 dx mm 215 Asx mm /m 2010 in B + 3d+D
2
dy mm 195 Asy mm /m 1340 in A + 6d
d mm 205 100ρL % 0.802

RESULTS VEd = 627.7 kN vRd,c = 0.7248 N/mm2 Equation (6.47)

2
At col. face, vEd = 4.069 N/mm At 2d perimeter, vED,red = 1.9656 N/mm2

Uout required = 3371 mm Equation (6.54)

SOLUTION Fig 6.22 (A)

7 link spurs of 5H10 @ 110 35 links
.
St = 157.6 mm Sr= 110 mm
Asw/Sr req = 4.886 (6.52) & (9.11)

Asw/Sr prov = 4.998 mm

First link perimeter 100 mm from column face
Uout = 3528 mm > 3,371 mm
SPUR
See GEOMETRY page for link locations. PLAN
Some links shown may need to be re-located to avoid holes.

198

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:198 17/07/2006 17:11:47

 TCC13 Slab Punching.xls

TCC13 Slab Punching/ CORNER!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M adeby Date Page

Location ColumnsA1,D1,A5&D5 rmw 30-Jun-2006 209 199

PUNCHING SHEAR to BS EN 1992-1: 2004 CORNER C hecked Revision JobNo

Originated from TCC13.xls Version 3.0 on CD © 2003-2006 TCC COLUMN chg - FB625

2
MATERIALS fck N/mm 35 ST AT US LE GE N D
2
fyk N/mm 500 VALID DESIGN
Steel class A .

DIMENSIONS A mm 400 E mm 50
B mm 250 F mm -275
C mm 0 G mm 150
D mm 0 H mm 150

LOADING VEd kN 272.0 0 350

ult UDL kN/m2 16.10

2
SLAB h mm 250 dx mm 215 Asx mm /m 2010 in B + 3d+D
2
dy mm 195 Asy mm /m 2010 in A + 3d+C
d mm 205 100ρL % 0.982

2
RESULTS VEd = 408.0 kN vRd,c = 0.7754 N/mm Equation (6.47)
2
At hole face, vEd = 4.185 N/mm At 2d perimeter, v = 2.5486 N/mm2
Uout required = 1711 mm Equation (6.54)

SOLUTION Fig 6.22 (A)

4 link spurs of 4H12 @ 130 16 links
.
St = 157.6 mm Sr= 130 mm
Asw/Sr req = 3.379 (6.52) & (9.11)

Asw/Sr prov = 3.480 mm

First link perimeter 100 mm from column face
Uout = 1886 mm > 1,711 mm
SPUR
See GEOMETRY page for link locations. PLAN
Some links shown may need to be re-located to avoid holes.

199

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:199 17/07/2006 17:11:55

 TCC13 Slab Punching/ REENTRANTS!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M adeby Date Page

Location An
example rmw 30-Jun-2006 210200
PUNCHING SHEAR to BS EN 1992-1: 2004 RE-ENTRANT R evision JobNo
Originated from TCC13.xls Version 3.0 on CD © 2003-2006 TC COLUMN chg - FB625

2
MATERIALS fck N/mm 35 STAT U S L E GE ND
2
fyk N/mm 500 VALID DESIGN
Steel class A .

DIMENSIONS A mm 400 E mm 200

B mm 400 F mm -50
C mm -100 G mm 100
D mm -100 H mm 100

LOADING VEd kN 478.0 ßVEd= kN 1065

ult UDL kN/m2 16.10

2
SLAB h mm 250 dx mm 215 Asx mm /m 1340 in B + 6d
2
dy mm 195 Asy mm /m 1340 in A + 6d
d mm 205 100ρL % 0.654

RESULTS VEd = 1064.9 kN vRd,c = 0.6774 N/mm2 Equation (6.47)

2
At col. face, vEd = 3.974 N/mm At 2d perimeter, v = 1.7068 N/mm2
Uout required = 3442 mm Equation (6.54)

SOLUTION Fig 6.22 (B)

12 link spurs of 3H10 @ 115 36 links
.
St= 130 mm Sr= 115 mm
Asw/Sr req = 8.030 (6.52) & (9.11)

Asw/Sr prov = 8.195 mm

First link perimeter 100 mm from column face
Uout = 4212 mm > 3,442 mm
SPUR
See GEOMETRY page for link locations. PLAN
Some links shown may need to be re-located to avoid holes.

200

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:200 17/07/2006 17:12:03

 TCC14 Crack Width.xls

TCC14 Crack Width.xls

Crack Width!
In the design of reinforced concrete structures, it is assumed
that the tensile capacity of concrete does not contribute to the
strength of the structure, and steel reinforcement is provided
to resist the internal tensile forces that develop. Because steel
reinforcement can develop the resisting tensile force only by
extension (i.e. steel needs to extend to develop stress), and
hence cracks are formed in the surrounding concrete: cracks in
reinforced concrete structures cannot be avoided. In day-to-
day practical design, crack widths are controlled by limiting the
maximum spacing of the tension reinforcement. However there
are times when the engineer will need to carry out more rigorous
analysis and calculations, e.g. in the design of water-retaining
structures, and design for severe exposure where estimation/
prediction of crack width is important.

This spreadsheet calculates crack widths in accordance with BS

EN 1992-1-1, Section 7.3.

Recommended maximum crack widths for the various exposure

classes are given in Table 7.1N (BS) of the National Annex to BS
EN 1992-1-1. Essentially crack widths for reinforced concrete
members under quasi-permanent loading is restricted to 0.3mm.

For exposure conditions XO and XCI this limit may be relaxed

[to 0.4mm].

The calculations shown are in accordance with Section 7.3.4 of

BS EN 1992-1-1 and should be self-explanatory.

For bridges reference should be made to BS EN 1992-2 Section

7.3 and the appropriate National Annex.

For liquid retaining structures refer to BS EN 1992-3 Section 7

Notes!
This sheet contains disclaimers and revision history.

201

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:201 17/07/2006 17:12:10

 TCC14 Crack widths/ RECTANGULAR!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M adeby Date Page
1 line
Location Grid rmw 30-Jun-06 202
212
FLEXURAL CRACK WIDTH CALCULATION to BS EN 1992-1 : 2004 C hecked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC14.xls v3.0 on CD © 2002-2005 BCA for RCC RECTANGULAR chg - FB625

LEGEND

INPUT
ck= 30 N/mm2 Area of tension steel, As = 565 mm
yk= 500 N/mm = 129 mm
= 1000 mm Area of compression steel,As2 = 314 mm
h= 160 mm d2 = 31 mm
QP moment, M = 24.9 KNm Maxmum tension bar spacing,S = 200 mm
Ageatcracking= 14 days Max tension bar dia,Øeq = 12 mm
Cementtype= N (S,N,RorRS) Shorttermorlongterm? L (SorL)
Creep factor,  = 2.0 ACover
to s, c = 25 mm

CALCULATIONS
modulus of elasticity of concrete = 22[(f ck+8)/10]0.3 Ecm = 32.8 Gpa
moduli of elasticity of steel Es = 200.0 Gpa
Modular ratio e = 18.27
' = 0.0024 = 0.0044
mean concrete strength at cracking fcm,t = 34.26 Mpa
mean concrete tensile strength fct,eff = 2.61 Mpa
uncracked neutral axis depth
[bh²/2+(e-1)(Asd+As2d2)]/[bh+(e-1)(As+As2)] xu = 81.21 mm
uncracked 2 nd moment of area
bh³/12+bh(h/2-x)²+(e-1)[As(d-x)²+As2(x-d2)²] Iu = 378 mm4 106
cracking moment = fctI/(h-x) Mcr = 12.51 kNm
< 24.9 kNm  section is CRACKED
½
fully cracked x = d[- e(-') + {e²(-')²+2e(+'d2/d)} ] xc = 41.19 mm
concrete stress = M/[bx(d-x/3)/2+(e-1)As2(x-d2)/x(d-d2)] c = 9.939 Mpa
c e s =
stress in tension steel =  (d-x)/x 387.2 Mpa2
effective tension area = min[2.5(h-d), (h-x)/3, h/2]b Ac,eff = 39605 mm
As /Ac,eff p,eff = 0.0143
max final crack spacing = min[1.3/(h-x),3.4c+0.17Ø/p,eff)] sr,max = 154.5 mm
average strain for crack width calculation sm-cm = 1474.6 µstrain
CALCULATED CRACK WIDTH Wk = 0.228 mm

202

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:202 17/07/2006 17:12:11

 TCC14 Crack Width.xls

TCC14 Crack widths/ SPANTEE!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M adeby Date Page
2 line
Location Grid rmw 30-Jun-06 33
203
FLEXURAL CRACK WIDTH CALCULATION to BS EN 1992-1 : 2004 TEE IN Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC14.xls v3.0 on CD © 2002-2005 BCA for RCC COMPRESSION chg - FB625

LEGEND

INPUT
=ck 35 N/mm2 Area of tension steel, s = 1473 mm
=yk 500 N/mm = 399.5 mm
w= 300 mm Area of compression steel, s2 = 236 mm
= 450 mm 2 = 33 mm
f= 2170 mm Maxmum tension bar spacing, = 87 mm
f = 125 mm Max tension bar dia, eq = 25 mm
QP moment, M = 114.2 KNm Shorttermorlongterm? L (SorL)
Ageatcracking= 14 days CovertoA s, c = 38 mm
Cementtype= N (S,N,RorRS)
Creep factor,  = 2.0
CALCULATIONS modulus of elasticity of concrete = 22[(f ck+8)/10]0.3 Ecm = 34.1 Gpa
moduli of elasticity of steel Es = 200.0 Gpa
Modular ratio e = 17.61
mean concrete strength at cracking fcm,t = 38.77 Mpa
mean concrete tensile strength fct,eff = 2.89 Mpa
uncracked neutral axis depth
[bwh²/2+(bf-bw)hf²/2+(e-1)(Asd+As2d2)]/[bwh+(bf-bw)hf+(e-1)(As+As2)] xu = 138.21 mm
uncracked 2nd moment of area
bwh³/12+bwh(h/2-x)²+(bf-bw)hf³/12+(bf-bw)hf(x-hf/2)²+(e-1)[As(d-x)²+As2(x-d2)²] Iu = 6653 mm4 106
cracking moment = fctI/(h-x) Mcr = 61.75 kNm
< 114.2 kNm  section is CRACKED
fully cracked x (within flange) xc = 85.53 mm
concrete stress (x within flange) c = 3.234 Mpa
stress in tension steel =ce(d-x)/x s = 209.0 Mpa
effective tension area = min[2.5(h-d), (h-x)/3, h/2]b Ac,eff = 36447 mm2
w
As /Ac,eff p,eff = 0.0404
max final crack spacing = min[1.3/(h-x),3.4c+0.17Ø/p,eff)] sr,max = 234.4 mm
average strain for crack width calculation sm-cm = 800.1 µstrain
CALCULATED CRACK WIDTH Wk = 0.188 mm

203

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:203 17/07/2006 17:12:19

 TCC14 Crack widths/ SUPPORTTEE!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M adeby Date Page
2 line
Location Grid rmw 30-Jun-06 204
33
FLEXURAL CRACK WIDTH CALCULATION to BS EN 1992-1 : 2004 TEE IN Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC14.xls v3.0 on CD © 2002-2005 BCA for RCC TENSION chg - FB625

LEGEND

INPUT
=ck 35 N/mm2 Area of tension steel, s = 1000 mm
=yk 500 N/mm = 417 mm
w= 300 mm Area of compression steel, s2 = 236 mm
= 450 mm 2 = 34 mm
f= 1222 mm Maxmum tension bar spacing, = 87.4 mm
f = 125 mm Max tension bar dia, eq = 10 mm
QP moment, M = 147 KNm Shorttermorlongterm? L (SorL)
Ageatcracking= 14 days CovertoA s, c = 28 mm
Cementtype= N (S,N,RorRS)
Creep factor,  = 2.0
CALCULATIONS modulus of elasticity of concrete = 22[(f ck+8)/10]0.3 Ecm = 34.1 Gpa
moduli of elasticity of steel Es = 200.0 Gpa
Modular ratio e = 17.61
' = 0.0019 = 0.0080
mean concrete strength at cracking fcm,t = 38.77 Mpa
mean concrete tensile strength fct,eff = 2.89 Mpa
uncracked neutral axis depth
[bwh²/2+(bf-bw)hf(h-hf/2)+(e-1)(Asd+As2d2)]/[bwh+(bf-bw)hf+(e-1)(As+As2)] xu = 303.18 mm
uncracked 2nd moment of area
bwh³/12+bwh(h/2-x)²+(bf-bw)hf³/12+(bf-bw)hf(h-x-hf/2)²+(e-1)[As(d-x)²+As2(x-d2)²] Iu = 4572 mm4 106
cracking moment = fctI/(h-x) Mcr = 90.12 kNm
< 147 kNm  section is CRACKED
fully cracked x = d[- e(-') + {e²(-')²+2e(+'d2/d)}½] xc = 162.30 mm
concrete stress = M/[bx(d-x/3)/2+(e-1)As2(x-d2)/x(d-d2)] c = 14.668 Mpa
stress in tension steel =ce(d-x)/x s = 405.3 Mpa
height of tension zone = min[2.5(h-d), (h-x)/3, h/2] hc,eff = 82.50 mm
effective tension area Ac,eff = 100815 mm2
As /Ac,eff p,eff = 0.0099
max final crack spacing = min[1.3/(h-x),3.4c+0.17Ø/p,eff)] sr,max = 266.6 mm
average strain for crack width calculation sm-cm = 1341.0 µstrain
CALCULATED CRACK WIDTH Wk = 0.357 mm

204

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:204 17/07/2006 17:12:26

 TCC21 Subframe Analysis.xls

TCC21 Subframe Analysis.xls

TCC21 Subframe Analysis.xls analyses sub-frames one bay wide The user is required to input desired amounts of redistribution
in accordance with BS EN 1992-1-1 using moment distribution. to the initial moments in line 26. Cell L14 allows three types of
Inputs are required on two sheets. distribution according to the user’s preference for calculating
span moments (see Table 1). Redistribution input is included
close to the bending moment diagrams in order to give the user
MAIN! control rather than relying on blanket redistribution.

This single sheet consists of the main inputs, most of which should The sheet also tabulates elastic and redistributed ultimate shears
be self-explanatory. As in other spreadsheets, avoid pasting input and column moments according to the various load cases.
from one cell to another as this may cause formatting and other
errors.
Uls! and Sls!
The dimensions of the flange widths, beff, are entered manually,
but maximum permitted values can be seen in cells M12:M17. These sheets detail the moment distribution analyses carried
It is important that the correct usage of the members under out for the ultimate and serviceability limit states respectively,
consideration is selected from the combo-box to the right of the but are not necessarily intended for printing out other than for
screen, as this affects the magnitude of quasi-permanent SLS checking purposes.
moments.
All load cases to BS EN 1992-1-1 are calculated (but see Refs!)
Unwanted data cells are ‘greyed-out’.

Supports may be specified by giving dimensions, etc. in C20: J26. Graf!

The use of C, K or E in column C can alter the characteristics of a
support from cantilever to knife-edge to encastre. This sheet comprises data for graphs used on other sheets,
particularly in ACTIONS! It is not necessarily intended for printing
Where supports are dimensioned, their remote ends (i.e the out other than for checking purposes.
top of a column above or the bottom of a supporting column
below) may be specified as being ‘F’ for fixed or ‘P’ for pinned in
spreadsheet columns F and J. Extraneous data is highlighted in Refs!
red or by messages in red.
This sheet comprises the values for nationally determined
Under ‘Operating Instructions’ a number of checks, mainly parameters that have been used in the spreadsheet. These data
for missing entries, are carried out and any problems are reflect the values given in draft UK National Annexes for EN 1990
highlighted. and EN 1992.

Designers should ensure that these data are current when the
At the bottom of the sheet a simplistic but to-scale arrangement spreadsheet is used. When using TCC21 for permanent design,
and loading diagram is shown. This is given to aid data checking. designers are strongly advised to include a copy of this sheet with
It may prove prudent to write down expected values for any design calculations. It should be noted that it is possible to
bending moments at each support down before progressing to switch on the adjacent spans loaded combination by changing ‘b’
ACTIONS!. to ‘a’ in cell D4. BS EN 1992-1-1 recommends using the adjacent
and alternate load arrangements. However to the UK National
UDLs are input as line loads per unit area e.g. 4kN/m2. Annex only the all spans and alternate load arrangements need
to be considered.
Ultimate and characteristic support reactions are given at the
bottom of the sheet.
Notes!
ACTIONS! This sheet contains disclaimers and revision history.

This sheet includes charts showing the elastic bending moment

diagram, redistributed moment envelope, elastic shear forces
and envelope of redistributed shear forces. These diagrams are
based on data from the analysis undertaken in Analysis! at 1/20
span points. Maximum span and support moments are given.

205

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:205 17/07/2006 17:12:34

 TCC21 Subframe Analysis MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M adeby Date Page

Location Worked Examples: Main beam Grids C to J rmw 03-Jul-06 206

216
SUBFRAME ANALYSIS to EN 1992-1 : 2004 C hecked Revision Job No

Originated from v3.0 on CD © 2002-2005 TCC chg - FB625

LOCATION Supports from grid B to grid E Usage: Office

Bay width 5000 mm LOADING PATTERN

SPANS L (m) h (mm) bw (mm) hf (mm) Type beff (mm) BS EN 1990: (6.10b)

SPAN1 6 .000 450 300 125 T 2140 min ma x

SPAN2 6 .000 450 300 125 T 1680 DEAD 1.25 1.25
SPAN3 6.000 450 300 125 T 1680 IMPOSED 1.50
SPAN4 6 .000 450 300 125 T 2140
SPAN 5
SPAN 6 STATUS OK

SUPPORTS ABOVE (m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond BELOW (m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond
Support
1 3.750 250 250 F 3.750 250 250 F
Support
2 3.750 300 300 F 3.750 300 300 F
Support
3 3.750 300 300 F 3.750 300 300 F
Support
4 3.750 300 300 F 3.750 300 300 F
Support
5 3.750 250 250 F 3.750 250 250 F
Support 6
Support 7

LOADING DIAGRAM

LOADING UDLs (kN/m²) PLs (kN) Position (m)

D ead I mp o s e d Pos it ion Lo a d ed D ea d Im p o s e d Po sit io n Lo a d ed
Span 1 Lo ad Lo a d f r o ml e f t Le n g t h Span 4 Lo a d Lo a d f r o ml e f t Le n g t h
UDL 37.8 15.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL 37.8 15.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~
1PL ~~~~~ 1PL ~~~~~
2PL ~~~~~ 2PL ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 2 Span 5
UDL 37.8 15.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 3 Span 6
UDL 37.8 15.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL

REACTIONS(kN)
S UP POR T 1 2 3 4 5
ALLSPANSLOADED 178.7 454.7 407.4 454.7 178.7
MAXULTIMATE 179.3 454.7 407.4 454.7 179.3
CharacteristicDead 93.3 252.2 217.0 252.2 93.3
MaximumImposed 41.1 100.0 86.0 100.0 41.1
MinimumImposed -4.1 49.8 43.0 49.8 -4.1

206

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:206 17/07/2006 17:12:36

 TCC21 Subframe Analysis.xls

TCC21 Subframe Analysis ACTIONS!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Madeby Date Page
Location WorkedExamples:MainbeamGridsCtoJ rmw 03-Jul-06 207
217
SUBFRAME ANALYSIS to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision JobN o

Originated from TCC21.xls v3.0 on CD © 2002-2005 TCC chg - FB625

BENDING MOMENTS(kNm) .

0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25 30
400 300
250
300
200
200 150
100
100 50

0 0
-50
-100 -100
-150
-200
-200
-300 -250

B Elastic Moments E ULS B Redistributed Envelope E

S U P P ONRoT 1 2 3 4 5
FullSLSM 33.2 203.2 158.2 203.2 33.2 ~ kNm/m
Quasi-permanentM 25.4 161.2 119.9 161.2 25.4 ~ kNm/m
ElasticULSM 44.3 263.9 190.8 263.9 44.3 ~ kNm/m
RedistributedULSM 44.3 224.3 190.8 224.3 44.3 ~ kNm/m
δ 1.000 0.850 1.000 0.850 1.000 ~ ~
Redistribution 15.0% 15.0%

SNPoA N 1 2 3 4
FullSLSM 137.1 88.2 88.2 137.1 ~ ~
Quasi-permanentM 106.2 62.7 62.7 106.2 ~ ~
ElasticULSM 183.2 119.8 119.8 183.2 ~ ~
RedistributedULSM 188.1 116.9 116.9 188.1 ~ ~
δ 1.027 0.976 0.976 1.027 ~ ~
ULS SHEARS(kN)

300 300

200 200

100 100

0 0

-100 -100

-200 -200

-300 -300
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25 30

B Elastic Shears E B Redistributed Shears E

N oS P A N 1 2 3
ElasticV 178.2 246.5 218.5 201.4 201.4 218.5
RedistributedV 179.3 239.9 218.2 203.7 203.7 218.2

S PN
AoN 4

Elastic
V 246.5 178.2 ~ ~ ~ ~
Redistributed
V 2 39.9 179.3 ~ ~ ~ ~

COLUMN MOMENTS(kNm) 12345 ultimate

ALL SPANS Above 20.3 -8.8 8.8 -20.3
LOADED Below 20.3 -8.8 8.8 -20.3
MAXIMUM Above 22.2 18.1 10.8 18.1 22.2
MOMENT Below 22.2 18.1 10.8 18.1 22.2

207

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:207 17/07/2006 17:12:41

 TCC31 One-way Slabs.xls
This spreadsheet analyses and designs up to six spans of one-way Current interpretation of EC2 requires that all spans should be
solid slabs to BS EN 1992-1-1 using continuous beam analysis. loaded with both γGk,sup and γGk,inf , Gk, sup is used initially, and
There is user input on each of the first four sheets and the choice for γGk, the “Run γ , Loadcase” button must be activated. A
inf
of reinforcement for each span is implicit. red warning message Gkwill
inf
appear if this has not been done, or if
any relevant input data are subsequently changed. Using γGk,inf
(=1.0) leads to higher hogging moments in spans.
MAIN!
This single sheet consists of the main inputs, most of which Maximum moments at supports are taken at centre of supports
should be self-explanatory. rather than side of supports as in the beam spreadsheets. Unless
overwritten, reinforcement diameter specified for a support
The number of spans is altered by entering or deleting data under carries through both sides of the support, i.e. the diameter
L (m) in cells C16:C21. Unwanted data cells are ‘greyed-out’. The specified for the right hand support of a span carries over to
use of C, K or E in J17:J18 can alter the characteristics of the end the left hand support of the next span. It may be possible to
supports from cantilever to knife-edge or encastre. Erroneous obtain different numbers of bars each side of the support due to
data is highlighted in red or by messages in red. Under Operating differences in depth or to comply with minimum percentage of
Instructions a number of checks are carried out and problems are span steel; issues of practicality and buildability should dictate
highlighted. that the largest number of bars is used throughout for each
support.
For the purposes of defining load, the section is assumed to be
1.00 m wide. At the bottom of the sheet a simplistic loading With regard to deflection, the area of steel required, A s mm 2/m,
diagram is given to aid data checking. It may prove prudent to shown under ‘Design for the Centre’ part of the span, may have
write down expected values of bending moments at each support been automatically increased in order to reduce service stress,
down before progressing to ACTIONS! σs, and increase modification factors to satisfy deflection criteria.
The percentage increase, if any, is shown under ‘Deflection’.
Support reactions are given at the bottom of the sheet.
With respect to cantilevers, neither compression steel
The top and bottom covers specified at J10:J11 should be enhancement nor consideration of rotation at supports is
nominal covers including ∆cdev. ∆ cdev is required in the checking included.
of maximum bar size allowed.
Hogging moments at 1/4 span are checked and used in the
determination of top steel in the centre of spans.
ACTIONS!
Careful examination of the Bending Moment Diagram and
This sheet shows bending moment and shear force diagrams Graf! should help to determine whether any curtailment of this
from the analysis undertaken in Analysis! reinforcement is warranted (but see shift rule in Eurocode 2
Clause 9.2.1.3).
The user is required to input the desired amount of redistribution
to the initial moments in line 25. Cell J14 allows three types of To avoid undue sensitivity, especially with regard to deflection,
distribution according to the user’s preferences. Requesting reinforcement may be theoretically over-stressed by up to 2.5%
redistribution at a cantilever produces a warning message in the
remarks column. The top steel in the centre of spans is determined by adding
together the steel required for hogging at 1/4 span and the
appropriate additional tensile force due to shear ∆Ftd (see CI
SPANS! 9.2.1.3). It is assumed that 100% hogging steel at supports will
be curtailed at 0.25 span or max 50% at 0,2 span and 50% at
SPANS! designs sections taken at the left, centre and right of 0.3 span.
each span. The user is required to choose the diameters for top,

bottom
amountsand if necessary,
of bending link reinforcement
and shear reinforcement required
for eachand
span. The
checks WEIGHT!
are derived from detailed calculations in Bar! The designer and
detailer should agree as to how these minimum reinforcement Weight! gives an estimate of the amount of reinforcement for
arrangements are to be rationalised in the final detailed drawings. both design and distribution steel required in the slab per bay and
Unwanted cells are ‘greyed-out’. per cubic metre. Bay and support widths are required as input.

208

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:208 17/07/2006 17:12:46

 TCC31 One-way Slabs.xls

Simplified curtailment rules, as explained above and similar to

those used with BS 8110, are used to determine lengths of bars.
Refs!
The figures should be treated as estimates only as they cannot
This sheet comprises the values for Nationally Determined
deal with the effects of designers’ and detailers’ preferences,
Parameters that have been used in the spreadsheet. These data
rationalisation, etc, etc. They do not allow for reinforcement in
reflect the values given in draft UK National Annexes for EN 1990
supporting beams or for mesh.
and EN 1992.

Uls! Designers should ensure that these data are current when the
spreadsheet is used. When using TCC31 for permanent design,
designers are strongly advised to include a copy of this sheet with
This sheet details the moment distribution analysis carried out
any design calculations. It should be noted that it is possible to
at the ultimate limit state. The following patterns for imposed
switch on the adjacent spans loaded combination by changing ‘b’
loading are considered to find a worse case.
to ‘a’ in cell D6. BSEN 1992-1-1 recommends using the adjacent
and alternate load cases. However to the UK NA only the cell
■ All spans loaded spans and alternate load cases need to be considered.
■ Odd spans loaded
■ Even spans loaded
■ Adjacent spans loaded*
Notes!
● Spans 1 & 2 and 5 & 6 loaded* This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
● Spans 2 & 3 loaded*
● Spans 3 & 4 loaded*
● Spans 4 & 5 loaded*

* According to the UK National Annex, it is not necessary to

consider the adjacent-spans-loaded case and the option of using
this case may be switched on or off at Refs!D6.

Uls! is not necessarily intended for printing out other than for
checking purposes.

Sls!
This sheet details the analysis carried out at the serviceability
limit states corresponding to full service load and to quasi-
permanent load. It uses the same load cases as Uls! and finds
upper and lower bound limits at 1/20 th points along the spans.
Again this sheet is not necessarily intended for printing out other
than for checking purposes.

Bar!
This sheet shows design calculations, complete with references
to BS EN 1992-1-1. It is not necessarily intended for printing
out other than for checking or educational purposes. In many
instances, service stress, σs, has been set to 1.0 or 0.0001 N/mm 2
to avoid problems with division by zero.

Graf!
This sheet comprises data for graphs used on other sheets,
particularly in ACTIONS! It is not necessarily intended for printing
out other than for checking purposes.

209

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:209 17/07/2006 17:12:47

 TCC31 One-way Slabs/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M adeby Date Page
Location 8th
Floor
slab from
to
AG rmw 03-Jul-06 220
210
ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to EN 1992-1: 2004
C hecked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC31.xls v3.0 on CD © 2003- 2006 TCC chg - FB625

LOCATION Supportsfromgrid A togrid G Wk 0.4 mm top

Wk 0.3 mm btm
M A T E R IA L S C O V ER S
fck 30 N/mm² dg 20 mm Top cover 25 mm
fyk 500 N/mm² γs 1.15 steel Btm cover 25 mm
fywk 500 N/mm² γc 1.50 concrete c,dev 10 mm
Steelclass B
Usage: Shopping With brittle partitions
SPANS L (m) H (mm) SUPPORTS
SPAN 1 5.000 160 Supt No T ype
SPAN 2 5.000 160 LOADING PATTERN 1 K
SPAN 3 5.000 160 BS EN 1990: (6.10b) 5 K
SPAN 4 5.000 160 mi n max K(nife), C(antilever) or E(ncastre)
SPAN 5 DEAD 1.25 1.25
SPAN 6 IMPOSED 1.50

LOADING UDLs (kN/m²) PLs (kN/m) Position (m) LOADING

D e ad Imp o s ed Po sitio n De ad Impo s e d Po sitio n
Span 1 Lo ad Lo ad f r o m le f t Span 4 Load Load f r o ml e f t
UDL 7.34 3.00 ~~~~ UDL 7.34 3.00 ~~~~
PL 1 PL 1
PL 2 PL 2
2Sp a n 5S p a n
UDL 7.34 3.00 ~~~~ UDL ~~~~
PL 1 PL 1
PL 2 PL 2
3Sp a n 6S p a n
UDL 7.34 3.00 UDL ~~~~
PL 1 PL 1
PL 2 PL 2

LOADING DIAGRAM

A G
REACTIONS(kN/m)
SUPPOR T 1 2 3 4 5
Characteristic Dead 14.42 41.94 34.08 41.94 14.42
Max Imposed 6.70 17.14 13.93 17.14 6.70
Min Imposed -0.80 8.57 6.97 8.57 -0.80
MAX ULTIMATE 27.94 75.89 65.65 75.89 27.94

210

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:210 17/07/2006 17:12:49

 TCC31 One-way Slabs.xls

TCC31 One-way Slabs/ ACTIONS!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Madeby Date Page
Location 8thFloorslab,fromAtoG rmw 03-Jul-06 211
221
ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to EN 1992-1: 2004 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from TCC31.xls v3.0 on CD © 2003- 2006 TCC chg - FB625
BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAMS(kNm/m)

40 40
30 30
20 20
10 10
0 0
-10 -10

-20 -20

-30 -30

-40 -40
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22

A Elastic Moments G A Redistributed Envelope G

S U P P ON
RoT 1 2 3 4 5
Elastic M 36.6 24.4 36.6 ~ ~
Redistributed M 31.1 24.4 31.1 ~ ~
ßb 1.000 0.850 1.000 0.850 1.000 ~ ~
Redistribution 15.0% 15.0%

SN
PoAN 1 2 3 4
Elastic M 28.8 17.4 17.4 28.8 ~ ~
Redistributed M 28.6 17.1 17.1 28.6 ~ ~
ßb 0.992 0.986 0.986 0.992 ~ ~

SHEAR FORCE DIAGRAMS(kN/m)

50 50
40 40
30 30
20 20
10 10
0 0
-10 -10
-20 -20
-30 -30
-40 -40
-50 -50
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22

A Elastic Shears G A Redistributed Shears G

N oS P A N 1 2 3
Elastic V 28.1 41.5 36.6 32.1 32.1 36.6
Redistributed V 27.9 40.4 36.3 32.8 32.8 36.3

S P ANNo 4
Elastic V 41.5 28.1 ~ ~ ~ ~
Redistributed V 40.4 27.9 ~ ~ ~ ~

211

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:211 17/07/2006 17:12:55

 TCC31 One-way Slabs/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location 8th
Floor
slab,from
to
AG rmw 03-Jul-06 222 212
ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to EN 1992-1: 2004 Checked Revision Job
No
Originated from TCC31.xls v3.0 on CD © 2003- 2006 TCC chg - FB625
.
SPAN 1 L EF T CE N T R E RI G H T
Av mm 0 5000
ACTIONS M kNm/m 4.3 28.6 31.1
δ 1.00 0.99 0.85
VEd kN/m 27.94 40.38
DESIGN d mm 131.0 129.0 129.0
As mm²/m 187 538 589
As' mm²/m 0 top1
As 94 As' 0
TOP STEEL B 8 2@
50 B 8 2@
50 B 12 1@
75
As prov mm²/m 201 As'
prov 201 As
prov 646
BTM STEEL B 10 3@5 0 B 12 1@7 5 B 10 3@5 0
As' prov mm²/m 224 As
prov 646 As'
prov 224
SHEAR vEd N/mm2 0.203 . 0.299
vRdct N/mm2 0.542 0.592
Linksnotrequired
DEFLECTION L/d 38.760 Allowed 39.995 ok (As increased by 16.2%)
& CHECKS % As ok ok ok
d'/x ok ok ok
σs ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok

SPAN 2 L EF T CE N T R E RI G H T
Av 0 5000
ACTIONS M 31.1 17.1 24.4
δ 0.85 0.99 1.00
VEd 36.31 32.83
DESIGN d 129.0 129.0 129.0
As 589 321 458
As' 0 topAs 194 0
TOP STEEL Y 12 1@7 5 Y 10 4@0 0 Y 12 2@2 5
As
prov 646 As'
prov 196 As
prov 503
BTM STEEL Y 10 4@0 0 Y 12 3@5 0 Y 10 4@0 0
As'
prov 196 As
prov 323 As'
prov 196
SHEAR vEd 0.271 . 0.241
vRdct 0.592 0.545
Linksnotrequired
DEFLECTION L/d 38.760 Allowed 90.491 ok
& CHECKS % As ok ok ok
d'/x ok ok ok
σs ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok

212

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:212 17/07/2006 17:12:59

 TCC31 One-way Slabs.xls

TCC31 One-way Slabs/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made

by Date Page
Location 8th
Floor
slab,from
to
AG rmw 03-Jul-06 223 213
ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to EN 1992-1: 2004 Checked Revision Job
No
Originated from TCC31.xls v3.0 on CD © 2003- 2006 TCC chg - FB625

SPAN 3 L EFT C EN T R E RI G H T
Av 0 5000
ACTIONS M 24.4 17.1 31.1
δ 1.00 0.99 0.85
VEd 32.83 36.31
DESIGN d 129.0 129.0 129.0
As 458 321 589
As' 0 top
As 194 As' 0
TOP STEEL Y 12 2@2 5 Y 10 4@0 0 Y 12 1@7 5
As
prov 503 As'
prov 196 As
prov 646
BTM STEEL Y 10 4@0 0 Y 12 3@5 0 Y 10 4@0 0
As'
prov 196 As
prov 323 As'
prov 196
SHEAR vEd 0.244 . 0.268
vRdct 0.545 0.592
Linksnotrequired
DEFLECTION L/d 38.760 Allowed 90.491 ok
& CHECKS % As ok ok ok
d'/x ok ok ok
σs ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok

SPAN 4 L EFT C EN T R E RI G H T
Av 0 5000
ACTIONS M 31.1 28.6 4.3
δ 0.85 0.99 1.00
VEd 40.38 27.94
DESIGN d 129.0 129.0 131.0
As 589 538 187
As' 0 top
As 194 As' 0
TOP STEEL Y 12 1@
75 Y 8 2@
50 Y 8 2@
50
As
prov 646 As'
prov 201 As
prov 201
BTM STEEL Y 10 3@5 0 Y 12 1@7 5 Y 10 3@5 0
As'
prov 224 As
prov 646 As'
prov 224
SHEAR vEd 0.302 . 0.200
vRdct 0.592 0.542
Linksnotrequired
DEFLECTION L/d 38.760 Allowed 39.995 ok (As increased by 16.2%)
& CHECKS % As ok ok ok
d'/x ok ok ok
σs ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok

213

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:213 17/07/2006 17:13:03

 TCC31R Rigorous One-way Slabs.xls
This spreadsheet allows the estimation of deflections in one-way The number of spans is altered by entering or deleting data under
solid slabs according to BS EN 1992-1-1. L (m). Unwanted data cells are ‘greyed-out’. The use of C, K or E
can alter the characteristics of the end supports from cantilever
Eurocode 2 recognises that members in bending exist in a state to knife-edge to encastre. Extraneous data is highlighted in red or
partway between uncracked and fully cracked. The spreadsheet by messages in red. Under ‘ Operating Instructions’ a number of
considers both construction and design pattern loading in checks are carried out and problems are highlighted.
assessing whether a section is cracked or not (i.e. whether the
flexural tensile strength of the concrete is exceeded during these For the purposes of defining load, the section is assumed to be
stages of the slabs life). Once cracked, it is assumed that a 1.00 m wide. At the bottom of the sheet a simplistic loading
section remains cracked. diagram is given to aid data checking. Great care should be
taken to ensure this sheet is completed correctly for the case
The spreadsheet is based on TCC31 but has an initial sheet in hand. It may prove prudent to write down expected values of
JOBDATA! to allow input of all the variables and performance bending moments at each support down before progressing to
criteria required. Deflections are given as a range in a chart at the ACTIONS!
bottom of ACTIONS!
Support reactions are given at the bottom of the sheet.
They are shown as a range due to potential pattern loading. In
SPANS!, the worst case is compared with the
specified serviceability criteria. ACTIONS!
It should be noted that the number of assumptions and This sheet shows bending moment and shear force diagrams
uncertainties in the material and design criteria and construction from the analysis undertaken in Analysis!
process render deflection calculations carried out in this manner
can be inaccurate (and usually conservative) compared to actual The user is required to input the desired amount of redistribution
measured deflections. For instance, a slab’s deflection is very to the initial moments in line 25. Cell J14 allows three types of
dependent upon whether the slab has cracked in bending during distribution according to the user’s preferences (see Table 1).
construction or not. The calculated deflections might be regarded Requesting redistribution at a cantilever produces a warning
as being akin to a 95% confidence limit that they will not be message in the remarks column.
exceeded in service.
The chart at the bottom of the page shows calculated deflections
The spreadsheet analyses and designs up to six spans of one-way at construction of partitions, and ranges for longer term
solid slabs to BS EN 1992-1-1 using continuous slab analysis. deflections due to patterns of permanent and imposed loading.
There is user input on each of the first four sheets and choice The worst case is taken in subsequent checks and this might be
of reinforcement for each span must be done/ assumed to have viewed as being unduly conservative.
been done by the user. Input of spans and loads is in MAIN!,

User input is required for bar sizes used in SPANS! SPANS!

In SPANS! the user is required to choose top, bottom and where
JOBDATA! necessary link reinforcement for each span.

This sheet consists of the main inputs of material, loading, The amounts of bending and shear reinforcement required and
construction and serviceability criteria pertaining to the checks are derived from detailed calculations in Bar! Unwanted
calculation of deflection to BS EN 1992-1-1. Users are expected to cells are ‘greyed-out’.
use their knowledge of the project and judgement in completing
this sheet. For creep reference is made to Eurocode 2. Reference Eurocode 2 requires that all spans should be loaded with both
may be made to the Concrete Centre publication How to design γGk,sup and γGk,inf (=1.0) γGk,sup is used initia lly, and for γGk,inf the Run
(27) -γ (=1.35 or 1.25) Loadcase button must be activated. A red
concrete
values to structures to Eurocode
be used. The 2: Deflection
default values given in’ thisforsheet
guidance on
are not
Gk,inf
warning message will appear if this has not been done, or if any
unusual. relevant input data are subsequently changed. Using γGk,inf (=1.0)
leads to higher hogging moments in spans.

MAIN! Unless overwritten, reinforcement diameter specified for a

support carries through both sides of the support, i.e. the
This single sheet consists of the main inputs of span and loads, diameter specified for the right hand support of a span carries
most of which should be self-explanatory. over to the left hand support of the next span. It may be possible
214

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:214 17/07/2006 17:13:08

 TCC31R Rigorous One-way Slabs.xls

to obtain different numbers of bars each side of the support due to - εc, z, final x, concrete stresses – σc, curvature -1/r, slope and
differences in depth or to comply with the minimum percentage curvature to calculate deflection. The sheet is rather large and is
of span steel; practicality may dic tate that the maximum number not necessarily intended for printing out other than for checking
of bars at each support should be used. purposes.

Hogging moments at 1/4 span are checked and used in the

determination of top steel in spans. Careful examination of the Graf!
Bending Moment
whether any Diagram
curtailment of and Graf! should help
this reinforcement to determine
is warranted. This sheet comprises data for graphs used on other sheets,
particularly in ACTIONS! It is not necessarily intended for printing
out other than for checking purposes.
WEIGHT!
Weight! gives an estimate of the amount of reinforcement Refs!
required in one direction of the slab per bay and per cubic metre.
Bay and support widths and distribution steel diameters are This sheet comprises the values for nationally determined
required as input. parameters that have been used in the spreadsheet.

Simplified curtailment rules, similar to those defined in BS 8110, These data reflect the values given in draft UK National Annexes
are used to determine lengths of bars. for EN 1990 and EN 1992.

The figures should be treated as estimates only as they cannot Designers should ensure that these data are current when the
deal with the effects of designers’ and detailers’ preferences, spreadsheet is used. When using TCC31R for permanent design,
rationalisation, etc. They do not allow for reinforcement in designers are strongly advised to include a copy of this sheet with
supporting beams or for mesh. any design calculations. It should be noted that it is possible to
switch on the adjacent spans loaded combination by changing ‘b’
to ‘a’ in cell D6. BSEN 1992-1-1 recommends using the adjacent
Uls! and alternate load arrangements. However to the UK National
Annex only the cell spans and alternate load arrangements need
This sheet details the moment distribution analysis carried out to be considered.
at the ultimate limit state but is not necessarily intended for
printing out other than for checking purposes. All load cases to
BS EN 1992-1-1 are calculated. Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
Sls!
This sheet details the analysis carried out at the serviceability
limit state at 1/20th points along each span.

The results are used in Def!. This sheet is not necessarily intended
for printing out other than for checking purposes.

Bar!
This sheet shows design calculations, complete with references
to prEN 1992-1-1. It is not necessarily intended for printing out
other than for checking purposes. In many instances, service
stress, σs, has been set to 1.0 or 0.0001 N/mm 2 to avoid problems
with division by zero.

Def!
This sheet calculates deflections at 1/20th points for each span
and for each load condition. For each point and loading stage it
considers moment, As, A s’, d, d2 , uncracked neutral axis depth
- x, uncracked inertia - I, cracked neutral axis depth - x, cracked
inertia – I, uncracked moment capacity – Mcr, distribution factor

215

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:215 17/07/2006 17:13:10

 TCC31R Rigourous One-way Slabs/ JOBDATA!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M adeby Date Page

Location 8th
Floor
slab from
A
to
G rmw 03-Jul-06 226
216

RIGOROUS ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 C hecked Revision Job No
Originated from v 3.0 on CD © 2002-2006 TCC chg - FB625

LOCATION Supportsfromgrid A togrid G COVERS

Topcover 25 mm
MATERIALS Btmcover 25 mm
fck 35 N/mm² dg 20 mm
fyk 500 N/mm² s 1.15 steel Concretedensity 25 kN/m³
fywk 500 N/mm² c 1.50 concrete Curingtime 3 days
Steelclass B
SERVICEABILITY CRITERIA Maximum permanent ∆ = L / 250 7.4.1(5)

Maximum imposed ∆= L/ 500

Degreeof restraint 60% Max ∆ af fecting partitions = L / 350 7.4.1(6)

(50% = nominal, 100% = severe) Maximum precamber = 50% of permanent ∆ 7.4.1(5)

Design Crack width, W k= 0.4 mmtopor 0.3 mmbtm Table 7.1

CREEP COEFFICIENTS(to Annex A)

RH 50 %relativehumidity f =
cm 43 N/mm² Table 3.1

Cement N Type(S,N,orR) E cm = 35.781 kN/mm² & Annex B

AMBIENT TEMPERATURESºC from 0 to 7 days from 7 to 90 days from 90 days on

20 20 20

LOADING SEQUENCE(loads rationalised to kN/m²)

Sp a n 1 Sp a n 2 Sp a n 3 Sp a n 4 Sp a n 5 Sp a n 6 At age
kN/m² kN/m² kN/m² kN/m² kN/m² kN/m² Days
Selfweight 6.25 6.25 6.25 6.25 0.00 0.00 7
Partitions 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 60
Otherdeadloads 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! 90
Permanentimposed 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! 90
Variableload 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! ∞
Composite 10.25 10.25 10.25 10.25 #DIV/0! #DIV/0!

COMPOSITE E and Ø VALUES

- Span 1 ( other spans omitted for clarity )
years
70
To To 70 years days
60
To
Et Et Ø (t,t0) Et
Ø0 Ø0
kN/mm² kN/mm² kN/mm²
Selfweight 2.63 9.85 2.63 9.85 1.07 17.33
Partitions 1.75 13.00 1.75 13.00 SW + partitions
Otherdeadloads 1.62 13.65 1.62 13.65
Permanentimposed 1.75 13.00 1.75 13.00 Construction load
Variableload 0 37.77 fromday 14
Composite 2.33 10.75 2.09 11.60 0.70 21.09
Quasi-permanent Totalload

216

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:216 17/07/2006 17:13:12

 TCC31R Rigourous One-way Slabs.xls

TCC31R Rigourous One-way Slabs/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M adeby Date Page
Location 8th
Floor
slab,from
A
to
G rmw 03-Jul-06 217
227
RIGOROUS ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 C hecked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC31R.xls v3.0 on CD © 2002-2006 TCC chg - FB625

SPANS L (m) H (mm) SUPPORTS

SPAN 1 7.600 250 S u p t No T ype
SPAN 2 7.600 250 LOADING PATTERN 1 K
SPAN 3 7.600 250 min ma x 5 K
SPAN 4 7.600 250 DEAD 1.25 1.25 K(nife), C(antilever) or E(ncastre)
SPAN 5 IMPOSED 1.50
SPAN 6 BS EN 1990: (6.10b) Office Useage

LOADING UDLs (kN/m²) PLs (kN/m) Position (m) LOADING

Dead I m po s e d P os it i on Dead I m po s e d Po s i t i on
Span 1 Load L oa d fr o mle f t Span 4 L oa d Load f r o ml e f t
UDL 7.75 2.50 ~~~~ UDL 7.75 2.50 ~~~~
PL 1 PL 1
PL 2 PL 2
Construction 4.90 ~~~~ ~~~~ Construction 4.90 ~~~~ ~~~~
2S p a n 5Sp a n
UDL 7.75 2.50 ~~~~ UDL ~~~~
PL 1 PL 1
PL 2 PL 2
Construction 4.90 ~~~~ ~~~~ Construction
3S p a n 6Sp a n
UDL 7.75 2.50 UDL ~~~~
PL 1 PL 1
PL 2 PL 2
Construction 4.90 ~~~~ ~~~~ Construction

LOADING DIAGRAM

A G
REACTIONS(kN/m)
S U PPOR T 1 2 3 4 5
Characteristic Dead 23.14 67.31 54.70 67.31 23.14
Max Imposed 8.48 21.71 17.65 21.71 8.48
Min Imposed -1.02 10.86 8.82 10.86 -1.02
MAX ULTIMATE 41.74 113.34 98.06 113.34 41.74

217

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:217 17/07/2006 17:13:17

 TCC31R Rigourous One-way Slabs/ ACTIONS!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Madeby Date Page
Location 8th Floor slab, from A to G, rmw 03-Jul-06 218
228
RIGOROUS ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from TCC31R.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2002-2006 TCC chg - FB625
BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAMS(kNm/m) Elastic Redistributed
100 100

50 50

0 0

-50 -50

-100 -100
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 202 2 242 62 83 03 2

A G A G
SUPPORT No 12345
Elastic
M 0.0 83.1 55.4 83.1 0.0 ~ ~
Redistributed
M 0.0 70.6 55.4 70.6 0.0 ~ ~
ßb 1.000 0.850 1.000 0.850 1.000 ~ ~
Redistribution 15.0% 0.0% 15.0%

SPAN No 1234
Elastic
M 64.5 37.7 37.7 64.5 ~ ~
RedistributedM 64.9 38.1 38.1 64.9 ~ ~
ßb 1.005 1.011 1.011 1.005 ~ ~

SHEAR FORCE DIAGRAMS(kN/m) Elastic Redistributed

80 100
60
40 50
20
0 0
-20
-40 -50
-60
-80 -100
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 262 83 03 2

A G A G
SPAN No 1 2 3
ElasticV 41.6 62.0 54.7 47.9 47.9 54.7
RedistributedV 41.7 60.3 54.0 49.0 49.0 54.0

SPAN No 4
Elastic
V 62.0 41.6 ~ ~ ~ ~
Redistributed V 60.3 41. 7 ~ ~ ~ ~

DEFLECTIONS (mm) Precamber not included

10

0
-10

-20

-30

-40

SPAN No 1234
SW
parts
+ (inst) 15.8 1.8 1.8 15.8 mm
Quasipermanent 25.5 4.6 4.6 25.5 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! mm
Variable 5.1 2.3 2.3 5.1 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! mm

218

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:218 17/07/2006 17:13:22

 TCC31R Rigourous One-way Slabs.xls

TCC31R Rigourous One-way Slabs/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location 8thFloorslab, fromAtoG, rmw 03-Jul-06 229 219
RIGOROUS ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job
No
Originated from TCC31R.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2002-2006 TCC chg - FB625
.
SPAN 1 LEF T CE N T R E RI GH T
Av mm 0 7600
ACTIONS M kNm/m 9.7 64.9 70.6
δ 1.00 1.01 0.85
VEd kN/m 41.74 60.32
DESIGN d mm 220.0 219.0 219.0
As mm²/m 210 717 781
As' mm²/m 0 top2
As 19 As' 0
TOP STEEL B 10 3@5 0 B 8 2@2 5 B 12 1@2 5
As prov mm²/m 224 As'
prov 223 As
prov 905
BTM STEEL B 10 2@5 0 B 12 1@2 5 B 10 2@5 0
As' prov mm²/m 314 As
prov 905 As'
prov 314
SHEAR vEd N/mm2 0.184 0.262
vRdct N/mm2 0.565 0.572
Linksnotrequired
DEFLECTIONS Permanent=2 5.53<30.40 Imposed=5 .13<15.20 Precamber (mm) = 0
mm Affecting partitions = 9.82 < 21.71 ok Increase btm As by 10%
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
d'/x ok ok ok
σs ok ok ok
Crack width ok 0.00 ok 0.15 ok 0.21

SPAN 2 LEF T CE N T R E RI GH T
Av 0 7600
ACTIONS M 70.6 38.1 55.4
δ 0.85 1.01 1.00
VEd 54.04 49.03
DESIGN d 219.0 219.0 219.0
As 781 422 613
As' 0 topAs 219 0
TOP STEEL T 12 1@2 5 T 8 2@2 5 T 12 1@7 5
As
prov 905 As'
prov 223 As
prov 646
BTM STEEL T 10 3@5 0 T 12 2@5 0 T 10 3@5 0
As'
prov 224 As
prov 452 As'
prov 224
SHEAR vEd 0.241 0.210
vRdct 0.572 0.566
Linksnotrequired
DEFLECTIONS Permanent=4 .58<30.40 Imposed=2 .34<15.20 Precamber (mm) = 0
mm Affecting partitions = 2.81 < 21.71 ok Increase btm As by 0%
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
d'/x ok ok ok
σs ok ok ok
Crack width ok 0.21 ok 0.17 ok 0.21

219

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:219 17/07/2006 17:13:26

 TCC31R Rigourous One-way Slabs/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location 8thFloorslab, fromAtoG, rmw 03-Jul-06 230 220
RIGOROUS ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job
No

Originated from TCC31R.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2002-2006 TCC chg - FB625

SPAN 3 L E FT C E N T RE R I G HT
Av 0 7600
ACTIONS M 55.4 38.1 70.6
δ 1.00 1.01 0.85
VEd 49.03 54.04
DESIGN d 219.0 219.0 219.0
As 613 422 781
As' 0 top
As 219 As' 0
TOP STEEL T 12 1@7 5 T 8 2@2 5 T 12 1@2 5
As
prov 646 As'
prov 223 As
prov 905
BTM STEEL T 10 3@5 0 T 12 2@5 0 T 10 3@5 0
As'
prov 224 As
prov 452 As'
prov 224
SHEAR vEd 0.218 0.233
vRdct 0.566 0.572
Linksnotrequired
DEFLECTIONS Permanent= 4.58<30.40 Imposed=2 .34<15.20 Precamber(mm)= 0
mm Affecting partitions = 2.81 < 21.71 ok Increase btm As by 0%
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
d'/x ok ok ok
σs ok ok ok
Crack width ok 0.21 ok 0.17 ok 0.21

SPAN 4 L E FT C E N T RE R I G HT
Av 0 7600
ACTIONS M 70.6 64.9 9.7
δ 0.85 1.01 1.00
VEd 60.32 41.74
DESIGN d 219.0 219.0 220.0
As 781 717 210
As' 0 top
As 219 As' 0
TOP STEEL T 12 1@2 5 T 8 2@2 5 T 10 3@5 0
As
prov 905 As'
prov 223 As
prov 224
BTM STEEL T 10 2@5 0 T 12 1@2 5 T 10 2@5 0
As'
prov 314 As
prov 905 As'
prov 314
SHEAR vEd 0.269 0.176
vRdct 0.572 0.565
Linksnotrequired
DEFLECTIONS Permanent=2 5.53<30.40 Imposed=5 .13<15.20 Precamber (mm) = 0
mm Affecting partitions = 9.82 < 21.71 ok Increase btm As by 10%
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
d'/x ok ok ok
σs ok ok ok
Crack width ok 0.21 ok 0.15 ok 0.00

220

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:220 17/07/2006 17:13:31

 TCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A&D).xls

TCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A&D).xls

Using continuous beam analysis, this spreadsheet analyses and It should be noted that hogging moment is checked both at the
designs up to six spans of ribbed slab to EN 1992-1-1[3]. There centre of support (solid section) and the solid/ rib intersection
is user input on each of the first three sheets and choice of (ribbed section). As the moments at the solid/ rib intersection
reinforcement for each span is implicit. each side of the support may differ, it may be possible to obtain a
design giving different numbers of bars each side of the support.

MAIN! Practicality should dictate that the maximum number of bars at

each support is used for detailing.
This single sheet consists of the main inputs, which should be
self-explanatory. The number of spans is altered by entering The top steel in the centre of spans is determined by adding
or deleting data under L (m). Unwanted data cells are ‘greyed- together the steel required for hogging at 0.25L (¼ span) and
out’. The use of C, K or F can alter the characteristics of the end the appropriate additional tensile force due to shear = ∆ Ftd (see
supports from cantilever to knife-edge to fixed. Extraneous data BS EN 1992-1-1 9.2.1.3). Similarly at 3/4 span. The higher figure
is highlighted in red or by messages in red. Under ‘Operating is used to determine for top steel in the span. It is assumed
Instructions’ a number of checks are carried out and any problems that 100% hogging steel at supports is curtailed at 0.25L or a
are highlighted. maximum of 50% is curtailed at 0.2L span and the remainder
at 0.3L.
For the purposes of defining load the section under consideration
2
is assumed to be 1.00 m wide. It will be seen from Bar! that With regard to deflection, the area of steel required, As mm /m,
moments per metre are converted to moments per rib, and shown under ‘Design for the Centre’ part of the span, may be
calculations of reinforcement areas required etc. are based on automatically increased in order to reduce service stress, σs,
moments and shears per rib. Great care should be taken to ensure and therefore increase modification factors to satisfy deflection
this sheet is completed correctly for the case in hand. criteria. The percentage increase, if any, is shown under
‘Deflection’.
Combo-boxes to the right under ‘Operating Instructions’ define
minimum bar sizes to be used (e.g. at supports between ribs), the
type of usage of the slab (this affects the magnitude of quasi- With respect nor
enhancement to consideration
cantilevers, neither compression
of rotation steel
at supports is
permanent SLS moments) and whether the user wants to use included.
links or not. If links are required these may be either designed or
nominal links; the centres of nominal links can be changed.
WEIGHT!
Towards the bottom of the sheet a simplistic loading diagram is
given to aid data checking. At the bottom of the sheet, support WEIGHT! gives an estimate of the amount of reinforcement
reactions are given. required in one direction of the slab per rib and per square metre.
Simplified curtailment rules, similar to those defined in BS 8110,
are used to determine lengths of bars. The figures should be
ACTIONS! treated as estimates only as they cannot deal with the effects of
designers’ and detailers’ preferences, rationalisation, etc. They do
This sheet shows bending moment and shear force diagrams not allow for reinforcement in supporting beams or for mesh.
from the analysis undertaken in Analysis!

The user is required to input the desired amount of redistribution

to the initial moments in line 26. Cell L14 allows three types of
Uls!
distribution according to the user’s preferences. See Table 1. This sheet details the moment distribution analysis carried out
at the ultimate limit state. The following patterns for imposed
loading are considered to find a worse case.
SPANS!
■ All spans loaded
In SPANS! the user is required to choose top, bottom and link ■ Odd spans loaded
reinforcement for each span. The amounts of bending and shear ■ Even spans loaded
reinforcement required and checks are derived from detailed
calculations in Bar!Unwanted cells are ‘greyed-out’. ■ Adjacent spans loaded*
● Spans 1 & 2 and 5 & 6 loaded*
The reinforcement diameter specified for a support carries ● Spans 2 & 3 loaded*
through both sides of the support, i.e. the diameter specified for
● Spans 3 & 4 loaded*
the right hand support of a span carries over to the left hand
support of the next span. ● Spans 4 & 5 loaded*

221

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:221 17/07/2006 17:13:36

 * According to the UK National Annex, it is not necessary to
consider the adjacent-spans-loaded case and the option of using
this case may be switched on or off at Refs!D6.

Uls! is not necessarily intended for printing out other than for
checking purposes.

Sls!
This sheet details the analysis carried out at the serviceability
limit states corresponding to full service load and to quasi-
permanent load. It uses the same load cases as Uls! and finds
upper and lower bound limits at 1/20th points along the spans.
Again this sheet is not necessarily intended for printing out other
than for checking purposes.

Bar!
This sheet shows design calculations, complete with references
to prEN 1992-1-1. It is not necessarily intended for printing out
other than for checking purposes. In many instances, service
stress, ss, has been set to 1.0 or 0.0001 N/mm 2 to avoid problems
with division by zero.

Graf!
This sheet comprises data for graphs used on other sheets,
particularly in ACTIONS! It is not necessarily intended for printing
out other than for checking purposes.

Refs!
This sheet comprises the values for nationally determined
parameters that have been used in the spreadsheet. These data
reflect the values given in draft UK National Annexes for EN 1990
and EN 1992.

Designers should ensure that these data are current when the
spreadsheet is used. When using TCC31R for permanent design,
designers are strongly advised to include a copy of this sheet with
any design calculations. It should be noted that it is possible to
switch on the adjacent spans loaded combination by changing ‘b’
to ‘a’ in cell D6. BSEN 1992-1-1 recommends using the adjacent
and alternate load arrangements. However to the UK National
Annex only the cell spans and alternate load arrangements need
to be considered.

Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.

222

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:222 17/07/2006 17:13:38

 TCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A&D).xls

TCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A&D)/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M adeby Date Page
Location 3rd
Floor
slab from
to
15a rmw 03-Jul-06 223
233
RIBBED SLABS to EN 1992-1: 2004 C hecked Revision JobNo
Originated from v 3.0 on CD © 2003-2006 TCC chg - FB625

LOCATION Supports from grid 1 to grid 5a 

COVERS (to links, or if no links, to reinf)
MATERIALS dg 20 mm Topcover 25 mm
fck 35 N/mm² γs 1.15 steel Btmcover 30 mm
fyk 500 N/mm² γc 1.50 concrete Sidecover 30 mm
fywk 500 N/mm² Wk 0.40 mm top c,dev 10 mm
Steelclass A (Normal weight concrete) 0.30 mm btm RIBS
Density 25 kN/m³ slab depth, hf 100 mm
SPANS Solid (mm) Ribwidth 150 mm
L (m) H (mm) Le ft R igh t Centres 900 mm
SPAN
1 8.000 275 300 450 in1 10 taper
SPAN2 9.000 275 450 450 SUPPORTS
SPAN3 8.000 275 450 300 Sup po rt N o T ype
SPAN4 1 K
SPAN5 4 K
SPAN 6 K(nife), C(anti (antilever) or (ncastre)
Usage: Vehicle<= 30kN With brittle partitions
LOADING UDLs (kN/m²) PLs (kN/m) Position (m)
S e lf A d dD e a d Impo s e d P o s itio n S e lf A d dD e a d Im po s e d P o s itio n

Span 1 W e ig ht Lo ad Lo ad f r o ml e f t Sp an 4 W e igh t Lo ad Lo ad f r o ml e f t
UDL 3.65 2.50 4.00 ~~~~ UDL ~
~~~~
1 PL 1 PL~
2~~~~
PL 2 PL ~
Span 2 S5p a n
UDL 3.67 2.50 4.00 ~~~~ UDL
PL1 ~~~~ 8.50 1.00 1.450 PL1 ~
2~~~~
PL 2 PL ~
S3p a n S6p a n
UDL 3.65 2.50 4.00 ~~~~ UDL ~
~~~~
1 PL 1 PL~
2~~~~
PL 2 PL~

L O A D I N GPA T T ER N m in m ax
DEAD 1.25 1.25
IMPOSED 1.50
LOADING DIAGRAM

1 5a
REACTIONS (kN/m)
SUPPORT 1 2 3 4
CharacteristicDead 18.5 65.9 59.3 18.8 ~ ~ ~
MaxImposed 14.5 38.5 37.8 14.5 ~ ~ ~
Min
Imposed -2.2 2.2 2.1 -2.1 ~ ~ ~
MAX
ULTIMATE 43.5 138.1 128.8 43.9 ~ ~ ~

223

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:223 17/07/2006 17:13:39

 TCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A&D)/ ACTIONS!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Madeby Date Page

Location 3rd
Floor
slab,from
to
15a rmw 03-Jul-06 224
234
RIBBED SLABS to EN 1992-1: 2004 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from TCC32.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2003-2006 TCC chg - FB625

BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAMS

(kNm/m)

120 120
100 100
80 80
60 60
40 40
20 20
0 0
-20 -20
-40 -40
-60 -60
-80 -80

-100 -100
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25 30

1 Elastic Moments 5a 1 Redistributed Envelope 5a

SU P P O
NRoT 1 2 3 4
Elastic
M 0.0 105.2 101.6 0.0 ~ ~ kNm/m
RedistributedM 0.0 89.4 86.4 0.0 ~ ~ kNm/m
 1 .000 0.850 0.850 1.000 ~ ~ ~

Redistribution 15.0% 15.0%

SNPoA N 1 2 3
Elastic
M 73.49 62.07 74.78 ~ ~ ~
RedistributedM 69.27 59.73 70.49 ~ ~ ~
 .943
0 0.962 0.943 #VALUE! #VALUE! #VALUE!
(kN/m)
SHEAR FORCE DIAGRAMS

80 80

60 60

40 40

20 20
0 0
-20 -20
-40 -40
-60 -60
-80 -80
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25 30

1 Elastic Shears 5a 1 Redistributed Shears 5a

N oS P A N 1 2 3
ElasticV 44.8 67.9 72.2 63.2 67.4 45.2
RedistributedV 43.5 65.9 72.2 63.3 65.5 43.9

S PN
AoN
Elastic
V ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
Redistributed
V ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~

224

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:224 17/07/2006 17:13:46

 TCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A&D).xls

TCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A&D)/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location 3rd
Floor
slab,from
to
15a rmw 03-Jul-06 235
225
RIBBED SLABS to EN 1992-1: 2004 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from TCC32.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2003-2006 TCC chg - FB625
.
SPAN 1 L EF T C EN T R E R IGHT
ACTIONS M kNm/m 0.0 69.3 89.4
 1.00 0.94 0.85
DESIGN d mm 236.0 224.5 (x=28.1<hf/) 232.0
As mm² 0 672(755
for
defln) 840
As2 mm² 0 T As203 As 2 245
TOP STEEL 3H 12 /r i b 4H 10 /r i b 2H 20 /r i b
2H8
+ between 2H12
+ between
As prov mm² 440 As
prov
T 314 As
prov 855
BTM STEEL 2H 16 /r i b 2H 25 /r i b 2H 16 /r i b
As2 prov mm² 402 As
prov 982 As 2p rov 402
SHEAR VEd kN 43.53 VEd 65.89
VEd per rib kN 35.24 VEdp er rib 53.39
VRd,c kN 29.96 LinkØ 8 VRd,c 35.42
LINKS 2 H 8@1 7 5f o r 3 50 2H 8@1 , 2 0 0 2H 8@1 5 0f o r 3 0 0
DEFLECTION L/d 35.63 Allowed 45.8 ok (As increased by 12.4%)
& CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Bar Ø & cover ok ok ok
Bar spacing ok ok ok
Max Asw/s ok ok

SPAN 2 L EF T C EN T R E R IGHT
ACTIONS M kNm/m 89.4 59.7 86.4
 0.85 0.96 0.85
DESIGN d mm 232.0 224.5 (x=28.1<hf/) 232.0
As mm² 840 580(631for
defln) 811
As2 mm² 233 TAs 242 As 2 240
TOP STEEL 2H 20 /r i b 4H 10 /r i b 2H 20 /r i b
2H12
+ between 2H12
+ between
As prov mm² 855 As
prov
T 314 As
prov 855
BTM STEEL 2H 16 /r i b 2H 25 /r i b 2H 16 /r i b
As2 prov mm² 402 As
prov 982 As 2p rov 402
SHEAR VEd kN 72.18 VEd 63.29
VEd per rib kN 59.05 VEd p er rib 51.05
VRd,c kN 35.42 LinkØ 8 VRd,c 35.42
LINKS 2 H 8@1 5 0f o r 3 00 2H 8@1 , 2 0 0 2H 8@1 5 0f o r 3 0 0
DEFLECTION L/d 40.09 Allowed 61.2 ok (As increased by 8.9%)
& CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Bar Ø & cover ok ok ok
Bar spacing ok ok ok
Max Asw/s ok ok

225

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:225 17/07/2006 17:13:50

 TCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A&D)/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location 3rd
Floor
slab,from
to
15a rmw 03-Jul-06 /236
226

RIBBED SLABS to EN 1992-1: 2004 Checked Revision JobNo

Originated from TCC32.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2003-2006 TCC chg - FB625

SPAN 3 L EF T CEN T R E R I G HT
ACTIONS M kNm/m 86.4 @col face 70.5 0.0
 0.85 0.94 1.00
DESIGN d mm 232.0 224.5 (x=28.1<hf/) 236.0
As mm² 811 684(792
for
defln) 0
As2 mm² 208 TAs 179 As 2 0
TOP STEEL 2H 20 /r i b 4H 10 /r i b 3H 12 /r i b
2H12
+ between 2H8
+ between
As prov mm² 855 As
prov
T 314 As
prov 440
BTM STEEL 2H 16 /r i b 2H 25 /r i b 2H 16 /r i b
As2 prov mm² 402 As
prov 982 As 2p rov 402
SHEAR VEd kN 65.51 VEd 43.91
VEd per rib kN 53.05 VEd p er rib 35.58
VRd,c kN 35.42 LinkØ 8 VRd,c 29.96
LINKS 2H 8 @ 15 0f o r 3 00 2H 8 @ 1, 2 00 2H 8 @ 17 5 f o r 3 5 0
DEFLECTION L/d 35.63 Allowed 43.78 ok (As increased by 15.7%)
& CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Bar Ø & cover ok ok ok
Bar spacing ok ok ok
Max Asw/s ok ok

226

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:226 17/07/2006 17:13:55

 TCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A&D).xls

TCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A&D)/ WEIGHT!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location 3rdFloorslab,from1to5a rmw 03-Jul-06 227
237
RIBBED SLABS to EN 1992-1: 2004 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from TCC32.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2003-2006 TCC chg - FB625

APPROXIMATE WEIGHT of REINFORCEMENT

TOP STEEL Lo c a tio n No T ype Di a Leng th U n i tW t W e i g ht

Support
1 3 T 12 2375 0.888 6.3
2 T 8 2375 0.395 1.9
Span
1 4 T 10 4775 0.617 11.8
Support
2 2 T 20 4250 2.466 21.0
2 T 12 4250 0.888 7.5
Span
2 4 T 10 5275 0.617 13.0
Support
3 2 T 20 4250 2.466 21.0
2 T 12 4250 0.888 7.5
Span
3 4 T 10 4775 0.617 11.8
Support
4 3 T 12 2375 0.888 6.3
2 T 8 2375 0.395 1.9

BOTTOM STEEL Support

1 2 T 16 1000 1.578 3.2
Span
1 2 T 25 7200 3.853 55.5
Support
2 2 T 16 2175 1.578 6.9
Span
2 2 T 25 8050 3.853 62.0
Support
3 2 T 16 2175 1.578 6.9
Span
3 2 T 25 7200 3.853 55.5
Support
4 2 T 16 1575 1.578 5.0

LINKS Span
1 11 H 8 825 0.395 3.6
Span
2 12 H 8 825 0.395 3.9
Span
3 11 H 8 825 0.395 3.6

SUMMARY All figures approximate - see User Guide

Reinforcement density (kg/m²) 13.71 Total rebar per rib, excluding mesh (kg) 315.9

227

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:227 17/07/2006 17:14:00

 TCC33 Flat Slabs (A&D).xls
TCC33.xls analyses and automatically designs bays of simple Cantilevers less than 1.00 m should be described as end distances
rectangular flat slabs to BS EN 1992-1-1. rather than cantilevers; otherwise certain logic regarding breadth
of effective moment transfer strip, b (see BSEN1992-1-1 Clause
e
The spreadsheet uses sub-frame analysis with pattern loading 9.4.2), goes wrong. On edge columns, be restricts the transfer
(as TCC21.xls) to calculate a bending moment envelope. This moment, M, which in itself restricts the amount of moment
envelope may be subjected to redistribution. transferred into columns above and below. End distances
equivalent to the half width of the column should be used to
For a complete rectangular flat slab the user is expected to use define slabs whose edge is flush with the outside of the column.
the spreadsheet at least four times (internal bay(s) x - x, internal
bay(s) y - y, edge bay(s) x - x and edge bay(s) y - y). Punching Load input should define the loads on the slab only. A combo-
shear should be checked using TCC13.xls, or by hand. See also box is used to switch between the internal or edge bays. If EDGE
Eurocode 2 Clause 6.4., Punching. is chosen, cells F17 I15:J15 and E17:G17 become operative and
information about the perimeter load along the edge and the
Beyond panel aspect ratios of 1.5 consideration might be given to distance of the edge from the centreline is required as input.
the appropriateness of using other forms of analysis (e.g. grillage Perimeter loading is assumed to be dead load.
or finite element).
Cell L52 gives an estimate of reinforcement requirements for
the element considered in the direction considered (not both
MAIN! directions).

This sheet provides the main inputs to the spreadsheet (although The spreadsheet takes automatic measures to ensure deflection
other inputs occur in other sheets). criteria are met.

Most inputs are self-explanatory. LEGEND! should help with To the right under Operating instructions a number of checks are
definition of dimensions, e.g. end distance in MAIN! F18: F19 is carried out. Box markers indicate where checks have been carried
actually from centreline of column to the end/edge of the slab. out and proved satisfactory.
Cover is defined as being to the layer under design.

The layering is set at T1 - B1 (& T2 - B2) although T1 - B2 might be ACTIONS!

deemed more appropriate (e.g. with prefabricated mats)., Some
cells have comments attached to them where terms might be This sheet shows bending moment and shear force diagrams
unfamiliar to UK users. from the analysis undertaken in Analysis! The user is required
to input the desired amount of redistribution to the initial
To the right hand side, by using the various combo boxes, the user moments in line 26. Cell L14 allows three types of distribution
should choose the type of usage, whether internal or edge bay, according to the user’s preference. The sheet also provides output
the preferred maximum size of bar, and whether brittle partitions reactions and column moments. For punching shear calculations,
need to be considered in the design. These all have effects on the values of ex/by and u1/u1* given in D60:I61 may be used for
the detailed design. Covers requested at J9:J10 should be nominal determination of the shear enhancement factor, ß
covers (including ∆cdev).

The number of spans is altered by entering data in the appropriate SPANS!

cells. Unwanted data cells are ‘greyed-out’.
SPANS! details the amounts of reinforcement required derived
As with TCC 21, where support dimentions are not used the use from detailed calculations in Bar!
of C, K, F or P can alter the characteristics of a support from
Cantilever to Knife-edge to Fixed to Pinned. Extraneous data The warning message “Results Invalid - Run with G k,inf may appear.
is highlighted in red or by messages in red. Under Operating This occurs when a check of the left hand side of support 2 reveals
that the γG load case has not been calculated. The button to
Instructions in column
problems found L, a numberAtofthe
are highlighted. checks are carried
bottom of the out anda
sheet
k,inf
the right should be depressed to run the γGk,inf load case.
simplistic loading diagram is given to aid data checking. Great
care should be taken to ensure that this sheet is completed EC2 requires that all spans should be loaded with both γGk,sup
correctly for the case in hand. It may prove prudent to estimate and γGk,inf. γGk,sup is used initially, and for γGk,inf the “Run- γGk,inf
values for bay width bending moments at each support by hand Loadcase” button must be activated. A red warning message will
before progressing to ACTIONS! appear if this has not been done, or if any relevant input data
are subsequently changed. Using γGk,inf (=1.0) leads to higher
hogging moments in spans.
228

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:228 17/07/2006 17:14:04

 TCC33 Flat Slabs (A&D).xls

The top steel in the centre of spans is determined by adding

together the steel required for the greater hogging at 1/4 span
Bar!
and the appropriate additional tensile force due to shear ∆Fed (see
This sheet shows design calculations, complete with references
CI 9.2.1.3). It is assumed that 100% hogging steel at supports
to BS EN 1992-1-1. It is not necessarily intended for printing out
will be curtailed at 0.25 span or max 50%at 0,2 span and 50%
other than for checking purposes. The selection of bar sizes is
at 0.3 span.
automated.

LEGEND! Hogging moments at 1/4 span positions within a span are

checked and are used in the determination of top steel in spans.
LEGEND! gives an explanation of the dimensions used in MAIN!
and for the analysis and design.
Graf!
WEIGHT! This sheet comprises data for graphs used on other sheets,
particularly in ACTIONS!
WEIGHT! gives an estimate of the amount of reinforcement
required in one direction of the slab for the internal or end bays
considered. Simplified curtailment rules, similar to those used
Refs!
with BS 8110, are used to determine lengths of bars. The figures
This sheet comprises Nationally Determined Parameters (NDP’s)
should be treated as approximate estimates only as they cannot
contained within in the UK’s (draft) National Annexes to EN1990
deal with the effects of designers’ and detailers’ preferences,
(basis of design) and BS EN 1992-1-1. This page should be
rationalisation, the effects of holes etc, etc. They do not allow for
reviewed each time the spreadsheet is used to ensure the values
punching shear links or link carrier bars.
remain valid for the UK or are valid for the country where the
works are to be carried out or changed to suit. It is suggested that
Uls! this page is printed out to accompany submissions of calculations
that include this spreadsheet. It should be noted that it is possible
This sheet details the moment distribution analysis carried out to switch on the adjacent spans loaded by changing ‘b’ to ‘a’ in
at the ultimate limit state. The following patterns for imposed cell D6. BSEN 1992-1-1 recommends using the adjacent and
loading are considered to find a worse case. alternate loadspans
only the cell arrangement. However
and alternate load to the UK National
arrangements needAnnex
to be
considered.
■ All spans loaded
■ Odd spans loaded
■ Even spans loaded Notes!
■ Adjacent spans loaded* This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
● Spans 1 & 2 and 5 & 6 loaded*
● Spans 2 & 3 loaded*
■ Spans 3 & 4 loaded*
■ Spans 4 & 5 loaded*

* According to the UK National Annex, it is not necessary to

consider the adjacent-spans-loaded case and the option of using
this case may be switched on or off at Refs!D6.

Uls! is not necessarily intended for printing out other than for
checking purposes.

Sls!
This sheet details the analysis carried out at the serviceability
limit states corresponding to full service load and to quasi-
permanent load. It uses the same load cases as Uls! and finds
upper and lower bound limits at 1/20th points along the spans.
Again this sheet is not necessarily intended for printing out other
than for checking purposes.

229

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:229 17/07/2006 17:14:05

 TCC33 Flat Slabs (A&D)/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M adeby Date Page
Location ECBP Typical Floor from grids A to D rmw 03-Jul-06 230
240
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004
C hecked Revision JobNo
Originated from TCC33.xls v3.0 on CD © 2003 - 2005 TCC chg - FB625

MATERIALS fck 35 N/mm² dg 20 mm COVERS mm TO LAYER

fyk 500 N/mm² s 1.15 steel Topcover 25 1
fywk 500 N/mm² c 1.50 concrete Btmcover 25 1
Steel
class A Wk 0.4 mm top c,dev 10 mm
0.3 mm btm
SPANS L (m) GEOMETRY PERIMETER LOADScharacteristic
SPAN
1 7.500 Bay
type INTERNAL 4.00 kN/m outside supports 1 & 6
SPAN2 7.500 Slabdepth,h 230 mm
SPAN 3 7.500 Int Panel width, b 7500 mm LOADING PATTERN
SPAN 4 7.500 min m ax
SPAN5 7.500 Enddistance 325 from supt 1 DEAD 1.25 1.25
SPAN 6 End distance 325 from supt 6 IMPOSED 1.50

SUPPORTS ABOVE (m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond BELOW(m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond
Support
1 3.750 450 450 F 3.75 450 450 F
Support
2 3.750 450 450 F 3.75 450 450 F
Support
3 3.750 450 450 F 3.75 450 450 F
Support
4 3.750 450 450 F 3.75 450 450 F
Support
5 3.750 450 450 F 3.75 450 450 F
Support
6 3.750 450 450 F 3.75 450 450 F
Support 7
Usage: Office With brittle partitions
LOADING UDLs (kN/m²) PLs (kN/m) Position (m)
Dead I m po s e d P o s itio n Lo ad e d Dead I mpo s e d P o s itio n L o ad e d
Span 1 Lo ad Lo ad f r o ml e f t Span 4
L e ng t h Lo ad Lo a d f r o ml e ft L e ng t h
UDL 6.75 5.00 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL 6.75 5.00 ~~~~~ ~~~~~
1 PL ~~~~~ 1 PL ~~~~~
2 PL ~~~~~ 2 PL ~~~~~
Part
UDL Part
UDL
S2p a n S5pa n
UDL 6.75 5.00 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL 6.75 5.00 ~~~~~ ~~~~~
1 PL ~~~~~ 1 PL ~~~~~
2 PL ~~~~~ 2 PL ~~~~~
Part
UDL Part
UDL
S3p a n S6pa n
UDL 6.75 5.00 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
1 PL ~~~~~ 1 PL ~~~~~
2 PL ~~~~~ 2 PL ~~~~~
Part
UDL Part
UDL

LOADING DIAGRAM

A D

230

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:230 17/07/2006 17:14:07

 TCC33 Flat Slabs (A&D).xls

TCC33 Flat Slabs (A&D)/ ACTIONS!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Madeby Date Page
Location ECBPTypicalFloor,fromgridsAtoD rmw 03-Jul-06 231
241
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision JobNo

Originated from TCC33.xls v3.0 on CD © 2003 - 2005 TCC chg - FB625

BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAMS
(kNm/m)

800 800

600 600

400 400

200 200

0 0

-200 -200

-400 -400

-600 -600

E l a s t i cM o m e n t s R e d i s t r i b u t e dE n v e lo p e

SUPPORT No 12 34 56
ElasticM 400.8 632.5 558.0 558.0 632.5 400.8 ~
RedistributedM 249.4 506.0 530.1 530.1 506.0 249.4 ~
δ 0.622 0.800 0.950 0.950 0.800 0.622 ~
Redistribution 2 0.0% 5.0% 5.0% 20.0%
End
support
reinf.
mmØ 16 16
* *
SPAN No 123 45
ElasticM 363.0 320.2 328.4 320.2 363.0 ~
RedistributedM 468.8 322.2 309.9 322.2 468.8 ~
δ
1.291 1.006 0.944 1.006 1.291 ~
SHEAR FORCE DIAGRAMS (kN/m)
600 600

400 400

200 200

0 0

-200 -200

-400 -400

-600 -600
0 10 20 30 40 0 10 20 30 40

E la s t i cS h e a r s R e d i s t r i b u t e dS h e a r s
SPAN No 1 2 3
ElasticV 427.2 482.3 452.5 443.9 448.0 448.0
RedistributedV 413.8 482.6 444.9 451.2 448.0 448.0

SPAN No 4 5
ElasticV 443.9 452.5 482.3 427.2 ~ ~
RedistributedV 451.2 444.9 482.6 413.8 ~ ~
REACTIONS(kN/m)
S U PP O RT 1 2 3 4 5 6
ALLSPANSLOADED 490.1 927.0 899.2 899.2 927.0 490.1
MAXIMUM 4 90.1 927.0 899.2 899.2 927.0 490.1
Characteristic
D ead 222.0 395.8 377.8 377.8 395.8 222.0
CharacteristicImposed 141.9 288.5 285.0 285.0 288.5 141.9
For punching ex/by 0.2225 0.2107 0.2107 0.2225 (6.43)
u1 /u1 1.3114 1.3114 (6.44)

COLUMN MOMENTS(kNm) 12 34 56
ALL SPANS Above 115.5 -23.9 3.6 -3.6 23.9 -115.5 #DIV/0!
LOADED Below 115.5 -23.9 3.6 -3.6 23.9 -115.5 #DIV/0!
WITH MAX Above 115.5 -23.9 3.6 -3.6 23.9 -115.5 #DIV/0!
REACTION Below 115.5 -23.9 3.6 -3.6 23.9 -115.5 #DIV/0!

231

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:231 17/07/2006 17:14:12

 TCC33 Flat Slabs (A&D)/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page

Location ECBPTypicalFloor,fromgridsAtoD rmw 03-Jul-06 232
242
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No

Originated from TCC33.xls v3.0 on CD © 2003 - 2005 TCC chg - FB625

.

SPAN 1 LEF T C EN T R E R IG H T
ACTIONS δ 1.000 1.291 0.800
Be 1000 3750
Total M kNm 165.0 468.8 430.4
Mt max kNm 230.9 883.6

MIDDLE STRIP Width mm 6500 3750 3750

M kNm 16.0 211.0 107.6
d mm 199.0 199.0 201.0
As mm²/m 30 684 346
As deflection mm²/m 321
Provide H12 @ 375 T1 Provide H12 @ 150 B1 Provide H8 @ 125 T1
As prov mm²/m 302 754 402
Top steel Provide H12 @ 375 T1
Deflection L/d = 7,500 /199 = 37.69 < 45.40 x 1.00 x 0.830 = 84.74 OK

COLUMN STRIP Width mm 1000 3750 3750

M kNm 165.0 257.8 322.8
d mm 197.0 199.0 199.0
As mm²/m 2195 837 1056
As deflection mm²/m 542
Provide H16 @ 75 T1 Provide H12 @ 125 B1 Provide H12 @ 75:150 T1
As prov mm²/m 2681 905 1131
Top steel Provide H12 @ 325 T1
Deflection L/d = 7,500 /199 = 37.69 < 34.09 x 1.00 x 1.105 = 61.54 OK

CHECKS ok ok ok
Singly%reinforced
As ok ok ok
σs ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok

SPAN 2 LEF T C EN T R E R IG H T
ACTIONS δ 0.800 1.006 0.950
Be 3750 3750
Total M kNm 430.4 322.2 432.3
Mt max kNm 883.6 883.6

MIDDLE STRIP Width mm 3750 3750 3750

M kNm 107.6 145.0 108.1
d mm 201.0 200.0 200.0
As mm²/m 346 468 349
As deflection mm²/m 133
Provide H8 @ 125 T1 Provide H10 @ 150 B1 Provide H10 @ 225 T1
As prov mm²/m 402 524 349
Top steel Provide H12 @ 375 T1
Deflection L/d = 7,500 /200 = 37.50 < 83.02 x 1.00 x 0.452 = 131.56 OK

COLUMN STRIP Width mm 3750 3750 3750

M kNm 322.8 177.2 324.2
d mm 199.0 199.0 199.0
As mm²/m 1056 575 1061
As deflection mm²/m 246
Provide H12 @ 75:150 T1 Provide H12 @ 175 B1 Provide H12 @ 75:150 T1
As prov mm²/m 1131 646 1131
Top steel Provide H12 @ 325 T1
Deflection L/d = 7,500 /199 = 37.69 < 59.36 x 1.00 x 0.635 = 92.94 OK

CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Singly reinforced ok ok ok
σs ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok

232

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:232 17/07/2006 17:14:18

 TCC33 Flat Slabs (A&D).xls

TCC33 Flat Slabs (A&D)/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page

Location ECBPTypicalFloor,fromgridsAtoD rmw 03-Jul-06 233
243
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC33.xls v3.0 on CD © 2003 - 2005 TCC chg - FB625

SPAN 3 LEF T CE N T R E RIG H T

ACTIONS δ 0.950 0.944 0.950
Be 3750 3750
Total M kNm 432.3 309.9 432.3
Mt max kNm 883.6 883.6

MIDDLE STRIP Width mm 3750 3750 3750

M kNm 108.1 139.5 108.1
d mm 200.0 200.0 200.0
As mm²/m 349 450 349
As deflection mm²/m 128
Provide H10 @ 225 T1 Provide H10 @ 150 B1 Provide H10 @ 225 T1
As prov mm²/m 349 524 349
Top steel Provide H12 @ 375 T1
Deflection L/d = 7,500 /200 = 37.50 < 88.38 x 1.00 x 0.424 = 135.85 OK

COLUMN STRIP Width mm 3750 3750 3750

M kNm 324.2 170.5 324.2
d mm 199.0 199.0 199.0
As mm²/m 1061 553 1061
As deflection mm²/m 238
Provide H12 @ 75:150 T1 Provide H12 @ 200 B1 Provide H12 @ 75:150 T1
As prov mm²/m 1131 565 1131
Top steel Provide H12 @ 375 T1
Deflection L/d = 7,500 /199 = 37.69 < 63.12 x 1.00 x 0.597 = 84.96 OK

CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Singly reinforced ok ok ok
σs ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok

SPAN 4 LEF T CE N T R E RIG H T

ACTIONS δ 0.950 1.006 0.800
Be 3750 3750
Total M kNm 432.3 322.2 430.4
Mt max kNm 883.6 883.6

MIDDLE STRIP Width mm 3750 3750 3750

M kNm 108.1 145.0 107.6
d mm 200.0 200.0 201.0
As mm²/m 349 468 346
As deflection mm²/m 133
Provide H10 @ 225 T1 Provide H10 @ 150 B1 Provide H8 @ 125 T1
As prov mm²/m 349 524 402
Top steel Provide H12 @ 375 T1
Deflection L/d = 7,500 /200 = 37.50 < 83.02 x 1.00 x 0.452 = 131.56 OK

COLUMN STRIP Width mm 3750 3750 3750

M kNm 324.2 177.2 322.8
d mm 199.0 199.0 199.0
As mm²/m 1061 575 1056
As deflection mm²/m 246
Provide H12 @ 75:150 T1 Provide H12 @ 175 B1 Provide H12 @ 75:150 T1
As prov mm²/m 1131 646 1131
Top steel Provide H12 @ 325 T1
Deflection L/d = 7,500 /199 = 37.69 < 59.36 x 1.00 x 0.635 = 92.94 OK

CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Singly reinforced ok ok ok
σs ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok

233

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:233 17/07/2006 17:14:22

 TCC33 Flat Slabs (A&D)/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page

Location ECBPTypicalFloor,fromgridsAtoD rmw 03-Jul-06 234
244

FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC33.xls v3.0 on CD © 2003 - 2005 TCC chg - FB625

SPAN 5 L EF T CEN T RE RI G HT
ACTIONS δ 0.800 1.291 1.000
Be 3750 1000
Total M kNm 430.4 468.8 165.0
Mt max kNm 883.6 230.9

MIDDLE STRIP Width mm 3750 3750 6500

M kNm 107.6 211.0 2.1
d mm 201.0 199.0 199.0
As mm²/m 346 684 4
As deflection mm²/m 321
Provide H8 @ 125 T1 Provide H12 @ 150 B1 Provide H12 @ 375 T1
As prov mm²/m 402 754 302
Top steel Provide H12 @ 375 T1
Deflection L/d = 7,500 /199 = 37.69 < 45.40 x 1.00 x 0.830 = 84.74 OK

COLUMN STRIP Width mm 3750 3750 1000

M kNm 322.8 257.8 165.0
d mm 199.0 199.0 197.0
As mm²/m 1056 837 2195
As deflection mm²/m 542
Provide H12 @ 75:150 T1 Provide H12 @ 125 B1 Provide H16 @ 75 T1
As prov mm²/m 1131 905 2681
Top steel Provide H12 @ 325 T1
Deflection L/d = 7,500 /199 = 37.69 < 34.09 x 1.00 x 1.105 = 61.54 OK

CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Singly reinforced ok ok ok
σs ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok

234

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:234 17/07/2006 17:14:27

 TCC33 Flat Slabs (A&D).xls

TCC33 Flat Slabs (A&D)/ LEGEND!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Madeby Date Page
Location ECBPTypicalFloor,fromgridsAtoD rmw 03-Jul-06 235
245
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from TCC33.xls v3.0 on CD © 2003 - 2005 TCC c g -

Legend for input data on MAIN sheet

Diagram shows legend for frames centred on EW gridlines - rotate 90° for frames centred on NS
gridlines.

235

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:235 17/07/2006 17:14:32

 TCC33 Flat Slabs (A&D)/ WEIGHT!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location ECBPTypicalFloor,fromgridsAtoD rmw 03-Jul-06 246
236
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from TCC33.xls v3.0 on CD © 2003 - 2005 TCC chg - FB625
No
WEIGHT of REINFORCEMENT M i dS t r i p C o lS t r i p Type Di a L en g th U n i tw t We ig ht
TOP STEEL Support
1 18 T 12 2725 0.888 43.5
15 T 16 2725 1.578 64.5
Span
1 10 T 12 5050 0.888 44.8
2 1 T 12 5050 0.888 53.8
Support
2 30 T 8 3750 0.395 44.4
38 T 12 3750 0.888 126.5
Span
2 10 T 12 5050 0.888 44.8
12 T 12 5050 0.888 53.8
Support
3 17 T 10 3750 0.617 39.3
38 T 12 3750 0.888 126.5
Span
3 10 T 12 5050 0.888 44.8
10 T 12 5050 0.888 44.8
Support
4 17 T 10 3750 0.617 39.3
38 T 12 3750 0.888 126.5
Span
4 10 T 12 5050 0.888 44.8
12 T 12 5050 0.888 53.8
Support
5 30 T 8 3750 0.395 44.4

38 T 12 3750 0.888 126.5

Span
5 10 T 12 5050 0.888 44.8
12 T 12 5050 0.888 53.8
Support
6 18 T 12 2725 0.888 43.5
15 T 16 2725 1.578 64.5

BTM STEEL Span

1 25 T 12 6975 0.888 154.8
30 T 12 7950 0.888 211.7
Span
2 25 T 10 6825 0.617 105.2
22 T 12 7650 0.888 149.4
Span
3 25 T 10 6825 0.617 105.2
19 T 12 7650 0.888 129.0
Span
4 25 T 10 6825 0.617 105.2
22 T 12 7650 0.888 149.4
Span
5 25 T 12 6975 0.888 154.8
30 T 12 7950 0.888 211.7

SUMMARY Rebar for single direction only. All figures approximate - see User Guide.
3
TOTAL REINFORCEMENT IN BAY (kg) 2850 REINFORCEMENT DENSITY (kg/m ) 43.3

236

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:236 17/07/2006 17:14:39

 TCC33X Flat Slabs (A&D).xls

TCC33X Flat Slabs (A&D).xls

TCC33X designs flat slabs in both orthogonal directions by running indicates that the central half of the column strip has bars at
TCC33 for each grid line and collecting the data generated. It 125 mm centres, with 250 mm centres being required over the
uses macros heavily and takes some time to run, once the “Run remainder of the strip width.
Results” button is pressed. It is i ntended to be used for the design
of flat slabs in braced structures only, where all columns are on Summary 5gives principal design bending moments throughout
grid and where there are no major openings. each gridline.

This spreadsheet also checks basic punching shear stresses around Summary 6gives both characteristic and maximum ultimate
each column and gives an indication of the degree of shear column reactions.
reinforcing required. As it is impractical within this spreadsheet
to model a variety of holes adjacent to columns, the user should Summary 7 similarly displays column design moments and
check the effects of holes separately by using TCC13. values of ß V Ed for punching shear.

Sheets ACTIONS!, SPANS!, LEGEND!, Weight!, Uls!, Sls!, Bar!, Summary 8indicates the levels of punching shear stress by
Gra!, Refs! and Notes!, work in the same way as TCC33. summarizing actual stress divided by allowable stress at both the
basic control perimeter, u1 and at the column face. Where values
are greater than unity, shear links or studs are required and may
INPUT! be designed using TCC13. Alternatively or additionally, greater
punching resistance may be provided at a column by either a)
All relevant materials, geometric and loading data is input on this increasing levels of top reinforcement, or b) adding shear heads
sheet. at columns (see INPUT! cell K34).

As spans are entered into cells C13:E18, the key diagram below
will change in order to serve as a visual check on the correct input MAIN! ACTIONS! SPANS! LEGEND!
of geometry. Although the plan is to scale, the columns on this
key diagram are indicative only and do not reflect the column
sizes entered. WEIGHT! Uls! Sls! Bar! Graf! Refs!
These sheets are identical to the sheet of the same name in
Correct gridlines must be entered at cells G13 to H19. These TCC33, except that input values are controlled from INPUT!
are used to name the various runs on individual grids, so it is and may not be amended. In MAIN! if it is required to print out
important that there are no duplicates and that the correct detailed calculations for a particular gridline, the gridline should
number of grids are entered. be selected via the combo-boxes in L16. First select direction
(either EW or NS), then the required gridline.
The edge distances (centre line of column to edge of slab) in cells
O12 to O15 are equally important, as both analysis and punching In ACTIONS!, the redistribution is controlled by INPUT! L22.
shear calculations are very sensitive to these values.
In SPANS! the γGk,inf case is run automatically when the Run
When all input is complete, the “RUN RESULTS” button should Results Button is used.
be clicked. This then designs the frame on each gridline in turn,
and summarizes data on the RESULTS sheet. If any data changes
are subsequently made, the RESULTS VALID message at cell P17 Punch!
will change to “PRESS RUN BUTTON”.
This sheet gives details of the various values used in punching
shear calculations at all columns. These being, d ave, pl, vRdc, u1, u1*,
RESULTS! u0, ß and v Ed.

This sheet has eight printable pages:

Summary 1 repeats the key and legend diagrams, displays

validity checks for the sub-frames on all gridlines, gives a guide
Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.

to the levels of shear stress and gives the reinforcement density

as designed.

Summary 2to Summary 4display reinforcement call-ups for

each of the four layers, T1, T2, B1 and B2. The top steel in some
column strips will have a call-up such as 20 H16 @ 125:250. This
237

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:237 17/07/2006 17:14:43

 TCC33X Flat Slabs (A&D)/ INPUT!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M ade
by Date Job
No

Location Third floor slab Rod 03-Jul-06 FB625

FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Page

Originated from TCC33X.xls v3.0 on CD © 2004-6 The Concrete Centre chg - 238
248

MATERIALS fck 35 N/mm² dg 20 mm COVERS (mm) SLAB DEPTH(mm)

fyk 500 N/mm² c,dev 5 mm Top
cover 25 =h 250
Steel
class A Wk 0.4 mm top Btm cover 25
0.3 mm btm EDGE DISTANCES(mm)
SPANS (m) S -N W- E N /S E /W COLUMN SIZES(mm) North 125
SpanA-B 7.500 Span1-2 7.500 1 A   South 125
SpanB
C- 7.500 Span3
2- 7.500 2 B Internal 400 400 East 125
S
SpanCD
- 7.500 Span34- 7.500 3 E C Northedge 250 400 West 125
IN
Span
E7
-D .500 4 L D Southedge 250 400
ID
R E Eastedge 400 250 LOADING(kN/m²)
G
Westedge 400 250 Applieddead 0.50
Corners 250 250 Partitions 1.00
1 4 Imposed 2.50
Perimeter cladding
A Redistribution 15% % kN/m 8.50

Preferred max bar Ø 20 mm AGE at 1s

End support reinf. Ø 20 mm CRACKING
14
Brittle partitions ? Yes days (3 - 28)
Usage Office

Columnsbelow Yes Columnsabove? Yes

Length 3.750 m Length 3.750 m
Endc ondition F F or P Endcondition F F or P

E Columns heads ? No Projection from mm

column face

238

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:238 17/07/2006 17:14:45

 TCC33X Flat Slabs (A&D).xls

TCC33X Flat Slabs (A&D)/ RESULTS!

Summary 1 and Summary 2

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M ade
by Date Page
Location Third
floor
slab Rod 03-Jul-06 239
249
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 C hecked Revision JobNo
Originated from TCC33X.xls v3.0 on CD © 2004-6 The Concrete Centre chg - FB625

Summary 1
1 4
A R eb ar
S
Layering N
n
B1 & T1 o
d
e
 r
t
n
e
c
B2 & T2 s s.
e e
m in
l
 ra d
f ri
r g
o
f
°
0
9
e
t
at
o
R

T O SCALE PLAN Legend for frames on EW gridlines

VALIDIT Y Deflection %ageAs EndbarØ Deflection %ageAs EndbarØ

Grid 1    Grid A   
Grid 2    Grid B   
Grid 3    Grid C   
Grid 4    Grid D   
Grid E   

PUNC HING SHEA R VE RY HI GH a t SO ME C OLUM NS Heads with a 400 projection should give few or no links at internal columns.
See page Summary 8 Alternatively, increases in top steel over columns will reduce link requirements.
REINFORCEMENT Estimated quantities (excluding any shear links)
Quantities allow for laps, but not for wastage, rationalisation or steel increases for shear. Concrete volume, m³ 172.0
Total weight, Tonnes 12.84 Rebar density, kg/m³ 74.7 Rebar density, kg/m² 18.7

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M ade
by Date Page
Location Third
floor
slab Rod 03-Jul-06 239
250
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 C hecked Revision JobNo
Originated from TCC33X.xls v3.0 on CD © 2004-6 The Concrete Centre chg - FB625
Summary 2
RESULTS - DESIGN
T O PR E I N F O R C E M E N T L a y e rT 2
Grid1 Grid2 Grid3 Grid4
Support A Column strip 4H20@150 4H20@225 4H20@225 4H20@150
Middle strip 13H10@ 275 25H10@275 25H10@275 13H10@ 275
Span A - B Column strip 8H10@275 14H10@275 14H10@275 8H10@275
Middle strip 7H10@275 14H10@275 14H10@275 7H10@275
Support B Column strip 15 H 16 @ 1 00:200 23 H 16 @ 1 25:250 23 H16 @ 1 25:250 15 H 16 @ 1 00:200
Middle strip 19H8@100 30H8@125 30H8@125 19H8@100
Span B - C Column strip 10H10@ 200 10H12@ 375 10H12@ 375 10H10@200
Middle strip 7H10@275 14H10@275 14H10@275 7H10@275
Support C Column strip 10 H16 @ 150:300 17 H16 @ 175:350 17 H16 @ 175:350 10 H16 @ 150:300
Middle strip 15H8@125 22H8@175 22H8@175 15H8@125
Span C - D Column strip 10H10@ 200 10H12@ 375 10H12@ 375 10H10@200
Middle strip 7H10@275 14H10@275 14H10@275 7H10@275
Support D Column strip 15 H 16 @ 1 00:200 23 H 16 @ 1 25:250 23 H16 @ 1 25:250 15 H 16 @ 1 00:200
Middle strip 19H8@100 30H8@125 30H8@125 19H8@100
Span D - E Column strip 8H10@275 14H10@275 14H10@275 8H10@275
Middle strip
7H10@275 14H10@275 14H10@275 7H10@275
Support E Column strip 4H20@150 4H20@225 4H20@225 4H20@150
Middle strip 13H10@ 275 25H10@275 25H10@275 13H10@ 275
Column strip
Middle strip
Column strip
Middle strip
Column strip
Middle strip
Column strip
Middle strip

239

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:239 17/07/2006 17:14:51

 TCC33X Flat Slabs (A&D)/ RESULTS!
Summary 3 and Summary 4

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M ade
by Date Page
Location Third
floor
slab Rod 03-Jul-06 240
251
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 C hecked Revision JobNo
Originated from TCC33X.xls v3.0 on CD © 2004-6 The Concrete Centre chg - FB625
Summary 3
T O PR E I N FO R C E M E N T L a y e rT 1
GridA GridB GridC GridD GridE
Support 1 Column strip 4H20@175 4H20@250 4H20@250 4H20@250 4H20@175
Middle strip 9H12@400 18H12@400 18H12@400 18H12@400 9H12@400
Span 1 - 2 Column strip 5H12@400 11H12@350 11H12@350 11H12@350 5H12@400
Middle strip 5H12@400 10H12@400 10H12@400 10H12@400 5H12@400
Support 2 Column strip 12 H 16 @ 1 25:250 19 H 16 @ 1 50:300 19 H16 @ 1 50:300 19 H16 @ 1 50:300 12 H 16 @ 1 25:250
Middle strip 19H8@100 25H8@150 25H8@150 25H8@150 19H8@100
Span 2 - 3 Column strip 9H10@225 11H12@350 11H12@350 11H12@350 9H10@225
Middle strip 8H10@250 10H12@400 10H12@400 10H12@400 8H10@250
Support 3 Column strip 12 H 16 @ 1 25:250 19 H 16 @ 1 50:300 19 H16 @ 1 50:300 19 H16 @ 1 50:300 12 H 16 @ 1 25:250
Middle strip 19H8@100 25H8@150 25H8@150 25H8@150 19H8@100
Span 3 - 4 Column strip 5H12@400 11H12@350 11H12@350 11H12@350 5H12@400
Middle strip 5H12@400 10H12@400 10H12@400 10H12@400 5H12@400
Support 4 Column strip 4H20@175 4H20@250 4H20@250 4H20@250 4H20@175
Middle strip 9H12@400 18H12@400 18H12@400 18H12@400 9H12@400
Column strip
Middle strip
Column strip
Middle strip
Column strip
Middle strip
Column strip
Middle strip
Column strip
Middle strip

Column strip
Middle strip

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M ade
by Date Page
Location Third
floor
slab Rod 03-Jul-06 240
252
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 C hecked Revision JobNo
Originated from TCC33X.xls v3.0 on CD © 2004-6 The Concrete Centre chg - FB625
Summary 4
BOTTOM REINFORCEMENT Layer B2
Grid1 Grid2 Grid3 Grid4
Span A - B Column strip H16@225 H12@125 H12@125 H16@225
Middle strip H16@250 H12@175 H12@175 H16@250
Span B - C Column strip H16@325 H10@150 H10@150 H16@325
Middle strip H16@375 H10@175 H10@175 H16@375
Span C - D Column strip H16@325 H10@150 H10@150 H16@325
Middle strip H16@375 H10@175 H10@175 H16@375
Span D - E Column strip H16@225 H12@125 H12@125 H16@225
Middle strip H16@250 H12@175 H12@175 H16@250
Column strip
Middle strip
Column strip
Middle strip

Layer B1 GridA GridB GridC GridD GridE

Span 1 - 2 Column strip H16@225 H12@150 H12@150 H12@150 H16@225
Middle strip H16@275 H10@125 H10@125 H10@125 H16@275

Span 2 - 3 Column strip H12@250 H8@150 H8@150 H8@150 H12@250

Middle strip H12@300 H8@150 H8@150 H8@150 H12@300
Span 3 - 4 Column strip H16@225 H12@150 H12@150 H12@150 H16@225
Middle strip H16@275 H10@125 H10@125 H10@125 H16@275
Column strip
Middle strip
Column strip
Middle strip
Column strip
Middle strip

240

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:240 17/07/2006 17:14:58

 TCC33X Flat Slabs (A&D).xls

TCC33X Flat Slabs (A&D)/ RESULTS!

Summary 5 and Summary 6

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M ade
by Date Page
Location Third
floor
slab Rod 03-Jul-06 241
253
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 C hecked Revision JobNo
Originated from TCC33X.xls v3.0 on CD © 2004-6 The Concrete Centre chg - FB625
Summary 5
RESULT S FROM ANALYSIS - BENDING MOMENT S at support centrelines and maxima in spans kNm
Grid1 Grid2 Grid3 Grid4
Support A 76.86 107.26 107.26 76.86
Span A - B 261.97 424.88 424.88 261.97
Support B 316.53 524.40 524.40 316.53
Span B - C 174.50 272.06 272.06 174.50
Support C 231.18 377.92 377.92 231.18
Span C - D 174.50 272.06 272.06 174.50
Support D 316.53 524.40 524.40 316.53
Span D - E 261.97 424.88 424.88 261.97
Support E 76.86 107.26 107.26 76.86

GridA GridB GridC GridD GridE

Support 1 78.11 108.45 108.45 108.45 78.11
Span 1 - 2 265.64 428.91 428.91 428.91 265.64
Support 2 306.08 513.05 513.05 513.05 306.08
Span 2 - 3 141.25 208.30 208.30 208.30 141.25
Support 3 306.08 513.05 513.05 513.05 306.08
Span 3 - 4 265.64 428.91 428.91 428.91 265.64
Support 4 78.11 108.45 108.45 108.45 78.11

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M ade
by Date Page
Location Third
floor
slab Rod 03-Jul-06 241
254
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 C hecked Revision JobNo
Originated from TCC33X.xls v3.0 on CD © 2004-6 The Concrete Centre chg - FB625
Summary 6
COLUMN REACT IONS
Characteristic dead load, kN
Grid1 Grid2 Grid3 Grid4
Grid A 146.52 280.63 280.63 146.52
Grid B 287.30 420.33 420.33 287.30
Grid C 248.58 412.30 412.30 248.58
Grid D 287.30 420.33 420.33 287.30
Grid E 146.52 280.63 280.63 146.52

, kN
Characteristic imposed load
Grid1 Grid2 Grid3 Grid4
Grid A 49.04 105.23 105.23 49.04
Grid B 108.33 213.80 213.80 108.33
Grid C 95.99 206.33 206.33 95.99
Grid D 108.33 213.80 213.80 108.33
Grid E 49.04 105.23 105.23 49.04

Maximum ultimate loadVEd, kN without enhancement factor, 

Grid1 Grid2 Grid3 Grid4
Grid A 256.52 508.29 508.29 256.52
Grid B 521.27 845.59 845.59 521.27
Grid C 454.40 824.36 824.36 454.40
Grid D 521.27 845.59 845.59 521.27
Grid E 256.52 508.29 508.29 256.52

241

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:241 17/07/2006 17:15:03

 TCC33X Flat Slabs (A&D)/ RESULTS!
Summary 7 and Summary 8

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M ade
by Date Page
Location Third
floor
slab Rod 03-Jul-06 242
255
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 C hecked Revision JobNo
Originated from TCC33X.xls v3.0 on CD © 2004-6 The Concrete Centre chg - FB625
Summary 7
COLUMN MOMENTS
Ultimate, kNm
Grid1 Grid2 Grid3 Grid4
             
Grid A Above 32.70 / 33.46 44.52 / -13.95 44.52 / 13.95 32.70 / -33.46
Below 32.70 / 33.46 44.52 / -13.95 44.52 / 13.95 32.70 / -33.46
Grid B Above -10.84 / 45.24 -31.72 / -38.97 -31.72 / 38.97 -10.84 / -45.24
Below -10.84 / 45.24 -31.72 / -38.97 -31.72 / 38.97 -10.84 / -45.24
Grid C Above 0.00 / 45.24 0.00 / -38.97 0.00 / 38.97 0.00 / -45.24
Below 0.00 / 45.24 0.00 / -38.97 0.00 / 38.97 0.00 / -45.24
Grid D Above 10.84 / 45.24 31.72 / -38.97 31.72 / 38.97 10.84 / -45.24
Below 10.84 / 45.24 31.72 / -38.97 31.72 / 38.97 10.84 / -45.24
Grid E Above -32.70 / 33.46 -44.52 / -13.95 -44.52 / 13.95 -32.70 / -33.46
Below -32.70 / 33.46 -44.52 / -13.95 -44.52 / 13.95 -32.70 / -33.46
Above
Below
Above
Below

Punching shear load VEd, kN

Grid1 Grid2 Grid3 Grid4
Grid A 327.4 601.5 601.5 327.4
Grid B 609.6 990.7 990.7 609.6
Grid C 511.5 936.4 936.4 511.5
Grid D 609.6 990.7 990.7 609.6
Grid E 327.4 601.5 601.5 327.4

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M ade
by Date Page
Location Third
floor
slab Rod 03-Jul-06 256
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 C hecked Revision JobNo
Originated from TCC33X.xls v3.0 on CD © 2004-6 The Concrete Centre chg - FB625
Summary 8
PUNCHING,v Ed / v Rdc Adjacent holes will increase values Without column heads
Grid1 Grid2 Grid3 Grid4
Grid A 2.270 2.107 2.107 2.270 No links
Grid B 2.101 1.640 1.640 2.101
Grid C 1.886 1.640 1.640 1.886 Some links
Grid D 2.101 1.640 1.640 2.101
Grid E 2.270 2.107 2.107 2.270 Many links

Very many

PUNCHING,v Ed / v Rd.max Adjacent holes will increase values v Rd.max (Mpa) = 6.020
Grid1 Grid2 Grid3 Grid4
Grid A 0.531 0.539 0.539 0.531 < 50%
Grid B 0.546 0.497 0.497 0.546
Grid C 0.458 0.470 0.470 0.458 50 to 75%
Grid D 0.546 0.497 0.497 0.546
Grid E 0.531 0.539 0.539 0.531 75 to 100%

FAILS

242

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:242 17/07/2006 17:15:09

 TCC41 Continuous Beams.xls

TCC41 Continuous Beams.xls

The spreadsheet designs multiple-span rectangular or flanged The dimensions of the flange widths, beff, are entered manually,
beams to BS EN 1991-1-1 using sub-frame analysis to derive but maximum permitted values can be seen in cells M12:M17.

momentsofand
analysis up shears. The intention
to six spans is to provide
of continuous beamsthe design
with and
columns It is importantis that
consideration the from
selected correct
theusage of thetomembers
combo-box the right under
of the
above and below. Spans may incorporate cantilevers, fixed ends screen, as this affects the magnitude of quasi-permanent SLS
or knife-edge supports. There are three main sheets: MAIN!, moments.
ACTIONS! and SPANS!

ACTIONS!
MAIN!
ACTIONS! includes bending moment and shear force diagrams,
This sheet contains user input of materials, frame geometry and summaries of moments and shears and user input for amounts
load data. of redistribution. Users should ensure that the amounts of
redistribution are always considered and selected in line 26 as
Input data is blue and underlined. New data may be input by there are no default values.
overwriting default values or by entering values in ‘greyed-out’
cells. Entering a value of 5.0 in cell C18 will clear a line of data
in both the span and support data ready for input. Guidance on SPANS!
input for the type of section and type of end condition of the
support is given under ‘Operating instructions’. This sheet designs reinforcement for bending in spans and
supports and for shear in the spans. User input is required for
The dimensions of the flange widths, beff, are entered manually, reinforcement sizes – some intuition may be required to obtain
but maximum permitted values can be seen in cells M12:M17. sensible arrangements of reinforcement. Non-existent spans are
It is important that the correct usage of the members under blanked out. Support moments (including cantilever moments)
consideration is selected from the combo-box to the right of the are considered at the face of the support. This may lead to
screen, as this affects the magnitude of quasi-permanent SLS unequal amounts of reinforcement being designed for each side
moments. of the support. See Bar!

The sheet has been set up with as many ‘carry throughs’ as EC2 requires that all spans should be loaded with both γGk,sup
possible, i.e. input cells are made equal to preceding input and γGk,inf . γGk,sup is used initially, and for γGk,inf the “Run γGk,inf
cells to make the inputting of regular beams easier. Inputting Loadcase” button must be activated. A red warning message will
C18 as = C17 will insert 6.00 in the remaining spans: it will also appear if this has not been done, or if any relevant input data are
remove the grey conditional background to the remaining spans, subsequently changed. Using γGk,inf (=1.0) leads to higher hogging
supports and loads and allow data entry. Deleting C18, indeed moments in spans.
C19, will blank out remaining spans, etc. Generally, values in red
or red backgrounds indicate either incorrect or excess data. For With regard to deflection, the area of steel required, As mm2 /m,
instance, if knife-edge supports are required, entering ‘K’ in cell shown under ‘Design for the Centre’ part of the span, may have
C24 will elicit red data to the right, which needs to be cleared been automatically increased in order to reduce service stress,
manually. Point loads should be at least 0.001m from a support. σs, and increase modification factors to satisfy deflection criteria.
The percentage increase, if any, is shown under ‘Deflection’.
Do not copy and paste input values as this can corrupt formatting
(copy and paste values only is OK). An additional limit of maximum allowable area of steel to comply
with deflection criteria, As def, = 1.5 x As reqd has been imposed in
‘Rebar layering’ refers to whether there are beams in the other line with UK Nation Annex, Note 5 to Table 7.4.N (BS). With
direction. Answering yes drops by one bar diameter the steel at respect to cantilevers, neither compression steel enhancement
the supports. For instance when using splice bars at the support nor consideration of rotation at supports is included.
bars in the other direction have to be avoided - and allowed for

in the design. The top steel

together in therequired
the steel centre of
forspans is determined
hogging at 1/4 spanbyand
adding
the
With respect to cantilevers, design for bending caters for appropriate additional tensile force due to shear ∆Fed (see CI
moments at the face of support; design for deflection considers 9.2.1.3). It is assumed that 100% hogging steel at supports will
the cantilever from the centre line of support. In beam-to-beam be curtailed at 0.25 span or max 50%at 0,2 span and 50% at
situations the width of support can be input as being very small 0.3 span.
to avoid under-design in bending.

243

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:243 17/07/2006 17:15:15

 WEIGHT! Refs!
This sheet estimates the weight of reinforcement in the beam This sheet comprises the values for nationally determined
when designed according to normal curtailment rules similar to parameters that have been used in the spreadsheet. These data
those defined in BS 8110. Workings are shown on the right hand reflect the values given in draft UK National Annexes for EN 1990
side of the sheet. The estimate may be printed out using File/print and EN 1992.
or the print button on the normal toolbar. It should be recognised
that different engineers’ and detailers’ interpretations of these Designers should ensure that these data are current when the
clauses, and different project circumstances and requirements spreadsheet is used. When using TCC31 for permanent design,
will all have a bearing on actual quantities used. designers are strongly advised to include a copy of this sheet with
any design calculations.

Uls! It should be noted that it is possible to switch on the adjacent

spans loaded arrangement by changing ‘b’ to ‘a’ in cell D7. BS
This sheet details the moment distribution analysis carried out EN 1992-1-1 recommends using the adjacent and alternate
at the ultimate limit state. The following patterns for imposed load arrangements. However to the UK National Annex, only
loading are considered to find a worse case. the alt spans and alternate spans load arrangements need to be
considered.
■ All spans loaded
■ Odd spans loaded Notes!
■ Even spans loaded
■ Adjacent spans loaded* This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
● Spans 1 & 2 and 5 & 6 loaded*
● Spans 2 & 3 loaded*
■ Spans 3 & 4 loaded*
■ Spans 4 & 5 loaded*

* According to the UK National Annex, it is not necessary to

consider the adjacent-spans-loaded case and the option of using
this case may be switched on or off at Refs!D6.

Uls! is not necessarily intended for printing out other than for
checking purposes.

Sls!
This sheet details the analysis carried out at the serviceability
limit states corresponding to full service load and to quasi-
permanent load. It uses the same load cases as Uls! and finds
upper and lower bound limits at 1/20th points along the spans.
Again this sheet is not necessarily intended for printing out other
than for checking purposes.

Bar!
Intended mainly for first time users and young engineers, this
sheet gives further details of the calculations summarised in

SPAN! Support
checks at moments
1/4 span relate toare considered
hogging and anyattop
faces ofrequired
steel supports;
is
provided in the span.

Graf!
This sheet provides data for the charts in MAIN! and ACTIONS!:
it is not intended for formal printing.
244

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:244 17/07/2006 17:15:17

 TCC41 Continuous Beams.xls

TCC41 Continuous Beams/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M adeby Date Page
Location WorkedExamples:MainbeamGridsCtoJ rmw 03-Jul-06 245
255
CONTINUOUS BEAM ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 C hecked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC41.xls
v3.0 on CD © 2000-2006 TCC chg - FB625

MATERIALS STATUS OK COVERS(to links)

fck 30 N/mm² dg (mm) 20 Wk (mm)Top 0.4 Topcover 20 mm
fyk 500 N/mm² γs 1.15 W k (mm)Btm 0.3 Btmcover 30 mm
fywk 500 N/mm² γc 1.50 c,dev 10 Sidecover 30 mm
Steelclass A Baywidth 5000 mm
SPANS L (m) h (mm) bw (mm) hf (mm) Type beff (mm) LOADING PATTERN (6.10b)
SPAN 1 6 .000 450 300 125 T 2170 m in ma x
SPAN 2 6.000 450 300 125 T 1715 DEAD 1.25 1.25
SPAN 3 6 .000 450 300 125 T 1715 IMPOSED 1.50
SPAN 4 6 .000 450 300 125 T 2170 REBAR LAYERING
SPAN 5 Support steel in alt layer ?
SPAN 6 N

SUPPORTS ABOVE(m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond BELOW(m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond
Support
1 3.750 250 250 F 3.750 250 250 F
Support
2 3.750 300 300 F 3.750 300 300 F
Support
3 3.750 300 300 F 3.750 300 300 F
Support
4 3.750 300 300 F 3.750 300 300 F
Support
5 3.750 250 250 F 3.750 250 250 F
Support 6
Support 7
Usage: Shopping With brittle partitions
LOADING DIAGRAM

LOADING UDLs (kN/m²) PLs (kN) Position (m)

Dea d Im p ose d P osi t i on Lo ad ed D ea d I m p ose d P o si t i on Lo ad ed
Span 1 L oa d Lo ad f r om l e f t L en g t h Span 4 L oa d L oa d f r o m l ef t Leng th
UDL 37.8 12.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL 37.8 12.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~
1PL ~~~~~ 1PL ~~~~~
2PL ~~~~~ 2PL ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 2 Span 5
UDL 37.8 12.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 3 Span 6
UDL 37.8 12.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL

REACTIONS(kN)
S U PP OR T 1 2 3 4 5
ALLSPANSLOADED 169.2 421.3 385.2 421.3 169.2
MAXULTIMATE 169.7 421.3 385.2 421.3 169.7
CharacteristicDead 93.3 252.3 217.0 252.3 93.3
MaxImposed 32.8 80.0 68.8 80.0 32.8
MinImposed -3.3 39.9 34.4 39.9 -3.3

245

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:245 17/07/2006 17:15:18

 TCC41 Continuous Beams/ ACTIONS!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Madeby Date Page
Location WorkedExamples:MainbeamGridsCtoJ rmw 03-Jul-06 246
256
CONTINUOUS BEAM ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision JobN o

Originated from TCC41.xls v3.0 on CD © 2000-2006 TCC chg - FB625

BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAMS
(kNm)

300 250
250 200
200 150
150 100
100 50
50 0
0 -50
-50 -100
-100 -150
-150 -200
-200 -250

E l a s ticM o m e nts R e d is tr ib ute dE nve l o p e

SUPPORT No 12345
ElasticM 40.9 246.9 178.5 246.9 40.9 ~ kNm/m
RedistributedM 40.9 197.5 178.5 197.5 40.9 ~ kNm/m
δ 1.000 0.800 1.000 0.800 1.000 ~ ~
Redistribution 20.0% 20.0%

SPAN No 1234
ElasticM
169.8 108.9 108.9 169.8 ~ ~
RedistributedM
181.3 113.9 113.9 181.3 ~ ~
δ 1.068 1.046 1.046 1.068 ~ ~
SHEARS FORCE DIAGRAMS(kN)

300 250
200
200
150
100
100
50
0 0
-50
-100
-100
-150
-200
-200
-300 -250

E l a sticSh e a r s R e d istr ib ute dS h e a r s

SPAN No 1 2 3
ElasticV 165.8 230.6 204.4 188.2 188.2 204.4
RedistributedV 169.7 222.4 201.6 192.6 192.6 201.6

SPAN No 4

Elastic
VV 230.6
Redistributed 222.4 165.8
169.7 ~~ ~~ ~~ ~~

COLUMN MOMENTS(kNm) 12345

ALL SPANS Above 19.0 -8.3 8.3 -19.0
LOADED Below 19.0 -8.3 8.3 -19.0
ALT SPANS Above 20.4 -15.6 8.6 15.6 -20.4
LOADED Below 20.4 -15.6 8.6 15.6 -20.4

246

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:246 17/07/2006 17:15:25

 TCC41 Continuous Beams.xls

TCC41 Continuous Beams/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location WorkedExamples:MainbeamGridsCtoJ rmw 03-Jul-06 247
257
CONTINUOUS BEAM ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from TCC41.xls v3.0 on CD © 2000-2006 TCC chg - FB625
.
SPAN 1 LE FT C E NT R E RI G H T
ACTIONS M kNm 45.3 181.3 172.4
 1.00 1.07 0.80
DESIGN d mm 416.0 399.5 417.0
As mm² 264 1099 1068
As2 mm²
TOP STEEL Layer 1 3 H 12 3 H 12 14 H 10

As prov mm² 339 Asp2 rov 339 Asprov 1100

BTM STEEL Layer 1 5 H 10 3 H 25 3 H 10

As2 prov mm² 393 As

prov 1473 As 2p rov 236
DEFLECTION L/d 15.02 Allowed 24.52 ..
SHEAR VEd kN 161.5 LINK Ø 212.6
VRd,ct kN 52.7 8 75.6
VEd,max kN 409.0 NOMINAL 410.0
s req mm 305 382 221
LINKS H8@300for600 H8@300 H8@200for1200
legs No 2 2 2
.
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Deflection ok

SPAN 2 LE FT C E NT R E RI G H T
ACTIONS M kNm 175.5 113.9 150.3
 0.86 1.05 1.00
DESIGN d mm 417.0 404.0 416.0
As mm² 1089 683 917
As2 mm²
TOP STEEL Layer 1 14 H 10 4 H 12 9 H 12

As prov mm² 1100 Asp2 rov 452 Asprov 1018

BTM STEEL Layer 1 3 H 10 4 H 16 3 H 10

As2 prov mm² 236 As

prov 804 As 2p rov 236
DEFLECTION L/d 14.85 Allowed 31.12 ..
SHEAR VEd kN 191.8 LINK Ø 182.8
VRd,ct kN 75.6 8 73.6
VEd,max kN 410.0 NOMINAL 409.0
s req mm 249 382 263
LINKS H8@225for900 H8@300 H8@250for750
legs No 2 2 2

.
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Deflection ok

247

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:247 17/07/2006 17:15:29

 TCC41 Continuous Beams/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location WorkedExamples:MainbeamGridsCtoJ rmw 03-Jul-06 248
258
CONTINUOUS BEAM ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from TCC41.xls v3.0 on CD © 2000-2006 TCC chg - FB625

SPAN 3 L E FT C E NT R E RI G H T
ACTIONS M kNm 150.3 113.9 175.5
 1.00 1.05 0.86
DESIGN d mm 416.0 404.0 417.0
As mm² 917 683 1089
As2 mm²
TOP STEEL Layer 1 9 H 12 4 H 12 14 H 10

As prov mm² 1018 Asp2 rov 452 Asprov 1100

BTM STEEL Layer 1 3 H 10 4 H 16 3 H 10

As2 prov mm² 236 As

prov 804 As 2p rov 236
DEFLECTION L/d 14.85 Allowed 31.12 ..
SHEAR VEd kN 182.8 LINK Ø V 191.8
VRd,ct kN 73.6 8 v 75.6
VEd,max kN 409.0 NOMINAL vc 410.0
s req mm 263 382 249
LINKS H8@250for750 H8@300 H8@225for900
legs No 2 2 2
.
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok

max S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Deflection ok

SPAN 4 L E FT C E NT R E RI G H T
ACTIONS M kNm 172.4 181.3 45.3
 0.80 1.07 1.00
DESIGN d mm 417.0 402.0 417.0
As mm² 1068 1092 263
As2 mm²
TOP STEEL Layer 1 14 H 10 3 H 12 4 H 10

As prov mm² 1100 Asp2 rov 339 Asprov 314

BTM STEEL Layer 1 3 H 10 4 H 20 4 H 10

As2 prov mm² 236 As

prov 1257 As 2p rov 314
DEFLECTION L/d 14.93 Allowed 21.25 ..
SHEAR VEd kN 212.6 LINK Ø 161.5
VRd,ct kN 75.6 8 52.8
VEd,max kN 410.0 NOMINAL 410.0
s req mm 221 382 305
LINKS H8@200for1200 H8@300 H8@300for600
legs No 2 2 2
.
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Deflection ok

248

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:248 17/07/2006 17:15:34

 TCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams.xls

TCC41R RigorousContinuous Beams.

xls
This spreadsheet allows the estimation of deflections in
continuous beams according to BS EN 1992-1-1 and generally in
ACTIONS!
accordance with Concrete Society TR58, Deflections in concrete
beams and slabs [30]. This sheet shows bending moment and shear force diagrams
from the analysis undertaken in Analysis! The user is required to
input the desired amount of redistribution to the initial moments
Deflection is very dependant on whether and how much of an
in line 21. Cell L14 allows three types of distribution according
element cracks under service loads. Eurocode 2 recognises that
to the user’s preferences (see Table 1, page 14) in General Notes.
members in bending exist in a state partway between uncracked
Requesting redistribution at a cantilever produces a warning
and fully cracked. This spreadsheet considers construction and
message in the remarks column.
design pattern loading in assessing whether a section is cracked
or not (i.e. whether the flexural tensile strength of the concrete is
The chart at the bottom of the page shows calculated deflections
exceeded during these stages of the beam’s life). Once cracked,
at construction of partitions, and ranges for longer term
it is assumed that a section remains cracked.
deflections due to patterns of permanent and imposed loading.
The worst case is taken in subsequent checks and this might be
The spreadsheet is based on TCC41 but has an initial sheet
viewed as being unduly conservative.
JOBDATA! to allow input of all the variables and performance
criteria required. Deflections are given as a range in a chart at the
bottom of ACTIONS!
SPANS!
They are shown as a range due to potential pattern loading. In SPANS! the user is required to choose top, bottom and link
In SPANS!, the worst case is compared with the specified reinforcement for each span. The amounts of bending and shear
serviceability criteria. reinforcement required and checks are derived from detailed
calculations in Bar!
It should be noted that the number of assumptions and
uncertainties in the material and design criteria and construction Unwanted cells are ‘greyed-out’.
process mean that deflection calculations carried out in this
manner can be inaccurate (and usually conservative) compared EC2 requires that all spans should be loaded with both γGk,sup
with actual measured deflections. For instance, a slab’s deflection and γGk,inf , γGk,sup is used initially, and for γGk,inf the ‘Run -γGk,inf -
is very dependent upon whether the slab has c racked in bending Loadcase’ button must be activated. A red warning message will
during construction or not. The calculated deflections might be appear if this has not been done, or if any relevant input data are
regarded as being akin to a 95% confidence limit that they will subsequently changed. Using γGk,inf (=1.0) leads to higher hogging
not be exceeded in service. moments in spans.

The spreadsheet analyses and designs up to six spans of Unless overwritten, reinforcement diameter specified for a
continuous beams using sub-frame analysis. There is user input support carries through both sides of the support, i.e. the
on each of the first four sheets and choice of reinforcement for diameter specified for the right hand support of a span carries
each span is implicit. Input of spans and loads is in MAIN!. User over to the left hand support of the next span. It may be possible
input is required for bar sizes used in SPANS! to obtain different numbers of bars each side of the support due to
differences in depth or to c omply with the minimum percentage
of span steel; practicality may dictate that the maximum number
JOBDATA! of bars at each support should be used.

This sheet consists of the main inputs of material, loading, The top steel in the centre of spans is determined by adding
construction and serviceability criteria pertaining to the together the steel required for hogging at 1/4 span and the
calculation of deflection to EN 1992-1-1. Users are expected to appropriate additional tensile force due to shear ∆FEd (see CI
use their knowledge of the project and judgement in completing 9.2.1.3). It is assumed that 100% hogging steel at supports will
this sheet. For creep reference is made to Eurocode 2. Reference be curtailed at 0.25 span or max 50%at 0,2 span and 50% at
0.3 span.
may beConcrete
by the made to the ‘Howduring
Centre to Design’
2006)leaflet (due to bedeflections
on calculating published
for guidance on values to be used. The default values given in this
sheet are not unusual. WEIGHT!
Weight! gives an estimate of the total amount of reinforcement
MAIN! required in the beam and per c ubic metre.

Input is identical to TCC41.

249

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:249 17/07/2006 17:15:39

 Simplified curtailment rules, similar to those defined in BS 8110, It should be noted that it is possible to switch on the adjacent
are used to determine lengths of bars. The figures should be spans loaded arrangement by changing ‘b’ to ‘a’ in cell D6. BSEN
treated as approximate estimates only as they cannot deal with 1992-1-1 recommends using the adjacent and alternate load
the effects of designers’ and detailers’ preferences, rationalisation arrangements. However to the UK National Annex only the all
etc. spans and alternate load arrangements need to be considered.

Uls! Notes!
This sheet details the moment distribution analysis carried out This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
at the ultimate limit state but is not necessarily intended for
printing out other than for checking purposes.

Sls!
This sheet details the analysis carried out at the serviceability
limit state at 1/20th points along each span. The results are used
in Def!. This sheet is not necessarily intended for printing out
other than for checking purposes.

Bar!
This sheet shows design calculations, complete with references to
EN 1992-1-1. It is not necessarily intended for printing out other
than for checking purposes. In many instances, service stress, σs,
has been set to 1.0 or 0.0001 N/mm2 to avoid problems with
division by zero.

Def!
This sheet calculates deflections at 1/20th points for each span
and for each load condition. For each point and loading stage it
considers moment, As, A s’, d, d2 , uncracked neutral axis depth
- x, uncracked inertia - I, cracked neutral axis depth - x, cracked
inertia – I, uncracked moment capacity – Mcr, distribution factor
- ε, z, final x, concrete stresses – σc, curvature -1/r, slope and
curvature to calculate deflection. The sheet is rather large and is
not necessarily intended for printing out other than for checking
purposes.

Graf!
This sheet comprises data for graphs used on other sheets,
particularly in ACTIONS! It is not necessarily intended for printing
out other than for checking purposes.

Refs!
This sheet that
parameters comprises the used
have been values forspread-sheet.
in the nationally determined
These data
reflect the values given in draft UK National Annexes for EN 1990
and EN 1992. Designers should ensure that these data are current
when the spreadsheet is used. When using TCC31R for permanent
design, designers are strongly advised to include a copy of this
sheet with any design calculations.

250

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:250 17/07/2006 17:15:41

 TCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams.xls

TCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams/ JOBDATA!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M adeby Date Page

Location WorkedExamples:MainbeamGridsCtoJ rmw 03-Jul-06 251

261
CONTINUOUS BEAM ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 C hecked Revision Job No
Originated from T CC41R.xlsv 3.0 on CD © 2002-2006 BCA for RCC chg - FB625

MATERIALS COVERS (to links)

fck 35 N/mm² dg 20 mm Top
cover 25 mm
fyk 500 N/mm² γs 1.15 Btm cover 25 mm
fywk 500 N/mm² γc 1.50 Side cover 25 mm
Steel class B
SERVICEABILITY CRITERIA Maximum permanent  = L / 250 7.4.1(5)

Maximum imposed  = L / 500

Degree of restraint 60% Max  affecting partitions = L / 500 * 7.4.1(6)
(50% = nominal, 100% = severe) Maximum precamber = 50% of permanent  7.4.1(5)

Design Crack width, Wk = 0.4 mm top or 0.3 mm btm Table 7.1

CREEP COEFFICIENTS(to Annex A) Curing time 3 days

RH 80 % relative humidity fcm = 43 N/mm² Table 3.1

Cement N Type (S, N, R or RS) Ecm = 35.78 kN/mm² & Annex A

AMBIENT TEMPERATURESºC from 0 to 7 days from 7 to 60 days from 60 days on

18 18 18

LOADING SEQUENCE(loads rationalised to kN/m)

Sp an 1 Sp an 2 Spa n 3 Spa n 4 S pan 5 Sp an 6 At age
kN/m kN/m kN/m kN/m kN/m kN/m Days
Self weight 17.34 17.34 17.34 17.34 0.00 0.00 7
Partitions/walls 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 28
Other dead loads 15.66 16.86 16.86 15.66 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! 60
Permanent imposed 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! 60
Variable load 7.00 7.00 7.00 7.00 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! ∞
Total 48.00 49.20 49.20 48.00 #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
Construction loading 14
COMPOSITE E and Ø VALUES
- Span 1
To70years To70years To28days
Et Et Et
0 0  (t,t0)
kN/mm² kN/mm² kN/mm²
Self weight 2.11 11.49 2.11 11.49 0.61 22.22
Partitions/walls 1.63 13.62 1.63 13.62 SW + partitions
Other dead loads 1.41 14.87 1.41 14.87
Permanent imposed 1.63 13.62 1.63 13.62
Variable load 0 37.77 from 14 to 28 days
Composite 1.75 13.02 1.49 14.35 0.53 23.42
Quasi-permanent Totalload Constructionload

251

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:251 17/07/2006 17:15:42

 TCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M adeby Date Page
Location WorkedExamples:MainbeamGridsCtoJ rmw 03-Jul-06 252
262
CONTINUOUS BEAM ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 C hecked Revision Job No

Originated from TCC41R.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2002-2006 BCA for RCC chg - FB625

Bay width 5000 mm STATUS OK Office Useage

SPANS L (m) h (mm) bw (mm) hf (mm) Type beff (mm) LOADING PATTERN
SPAN1 6 .000 450 300 125 T 2150 min max
SPAN
2 6 .000 450 300 125 T 1700 DEAD 1.25 1.25
SPAN
3 6.000 450 300 125 T 1700 IMPOSED 1.50
SPAN
4 6 .000 450 300 125 T 2150 REBAR LAYERING
SPAN 5 Support steel
SPAN 6 in alt layer ? N

SUPPORTS ABOVE (m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond BELOW (m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond
Support
1 3.750 250 250 F 3.750 250 250 F
Support
2 3.750 250 250 F 3.750 250 250 F
Support
3 3.750 250 250 F 3.750 250 250 F
Support
4 3.750 250 250 F 3.750 250 250 F
Support
5 3.750 250 250 F 3.750 250 250 F
Support 6
Support 7

LOADING DIAGRAM

LOADING UDLs (kN/m²) PLs (kN) Position (m)

De ad I mp ose d Posi t i on L oa d e d De ad I mp ose d Posi t i on L oa d e d
Span 1 Lo a d Lo a d f r om l e f t Len g th Span 4 L oa d Lo a d f r om l e f t Len g th
UDL 33.0 15.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL 33.0 15.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~
1PL ~~~~~ 1PL ~~~~~
2PL ~~~~~ 2PL ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Construction 1 2.14 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ ~~~~~ Constr'n 12.14 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ ~~~~~
Span 2 Span 5
UDL 34.2 15.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Construction 12.14 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ ~~~~~ ~~~~~ ~~~~~ ~~~~~
Span 3 Span 6
UDL 34.2 15.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Construction 12.14 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ ~~~~~ ~~~~~ ~~~~~ ~~~~~

REACTIONS(kN)
SU P P O RT 1 2 3 4 5
ALLSPANSLOADED 165.4 417.7 380.7 417.7 165.4
ODDSPANSLOADED 166.1 350.3 312.5 353.1 95.0
EVENSPANSLOADED 95.0 353.1 312.5 350.3 166.1
MAXULTIMATE 166.1 417.7 380.7 417.7 166.1
CharacteristicDead 81.5 223.6 196.3 223.6 81.5
Max characteristic Imposed 42.9 92.3 90.4 92.3 42.9
Min characteristic Imposed -4.5 47.4 44.9 47.4 -4.5

252

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:252 17/07/2006 17:15:50

 TCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams.xls

TCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams/ ACTIONS!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Madeby Date Page
Location WorkedExamples:MainbeamGridsCtoJ rmw 03-Jul-06 253
263
CONTINUOUS BEAM ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision JobNo

Originated from TCC41R.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2002-2006 BCA for RCC chg - FB625
BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAMS
(kNm) E la s t ic Re d i s t r i b u t e d

300 300

200 200

100 100

0 0

-100 -100

-200 -200

SUPPORT No 12345
ElasticM 41.5 239.4 177.8 239.4 41.5
RedistributedM 41.5 191.5 160.0 191.5 41.5
δ 1.000 0.800 0.900 0.800 1.000 ~ ~
Redistribution 2 0.0% 10.0% 20.0%

SPAN No 1234
ElasticM 171.0 117.4 117.4 171.0
RedistributedM 177.5 117.9 117.9 177.5
δ 1.038 1.003 1.003 1.038 HOGS HOGS

SHEARS FORCE DIAGRAMS

(kN) E la s t ic Re d i s t r i b u t e d
300 300

200 200

100 100

0 0

-100 -100

-200 -200

-300 -300

SPAN No 1 2 3
ElasticV 164.6 224.8 204.5 188.0 188.0 204.5
RedistributedV 166.1 216.8 200.9 190.4 190.4 200.9
SPAN No 4
Elastic V 224.8 164.6
Redistributed V 216.8 166.1

COLUMN MOMENTS(kNm) 12345

ALL SPANS Above 18.6 -4.1 4.1 -18.6

LOADED Below 18.6 -4.1 4.1 -18.6
ODD SPANS Above 20.8 -9.3 6.2 -2.6 -9.9
LOADED Below 20.8 -9.3 6.2 -2.6 -9.9
EVEN SPANS Above 9.9 2.6 -6.2 9.3 -20.8
LOADED Below 9.9 2.6 -6.2 9.3 -20.8

DEFLECTIONS(mm) Precamber not included

5.0

0.0

-5.0

-10.0

-15.0

SPN
ANo 1 2 3 4
Atstriking 3.1 0.7 0.7 3.1 mm
Quasipermanent 8.0 3.4 3.4 8.0 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! mm
Variable 2.2 1.4 1.4 2.2 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! mm

253

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:253 17/07/2006 17:15:54

 TCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page

Location WorkedExamples:MainbeamGridsCtoJ rmw 03-Jul-06 254

264
CONTINUOUS BEAM ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision JobNo

Originated from TCC41R.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2002-2006 BCA for RCC chg - FB625
.
SPAN 1 L E FT C E NT R E RI G H T
ACTIONS M kNm 44.4 177.5 172.8
d 1.00 1.04 0.80
DESIGN d mm 411.0 407.0 407.0
As mm² 261 1056 1082
As2 mm²
TOP STEEL Layer 1 3 B 12 3 B 12 4 B 20
Layer 2
As prov mm² 339 Asp2 rov 339 Asprov 1257
BTM STEEL Layer 1 3 B 10 4 B 20 3 B 10
Layer 2
As2 prov mm² 236 As
prov 1257 As 2p rov 236
DEFLECTION Permanent= 8.04<24.00 Imposed= 2.18<12.00 Precamber(mm)=
mm Affecting partitions/walls = 4.91 < 12.00 ok Increase btm As by
SHEAR VEd kN 158.2 LINK Ø 208.9
VRd,ct kN 56.5 8 82.3
VEd,max kN 460.7 NOMINAL 456.2
s req mm 306 354 219
LINKS B8@300for600 B8@300 B8@200for1200
legs No 2 2 2
.
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok

min S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Crack width mm ok 0.09 ok 0.29 ok 0.30

SPAN 2 L E FT C E NT R E RI G H T
ACTIONS M kNm 175.1 117.9 140.4
d 0.83 1.00 0.90
DESIGN d mm 407.0 407.0 407.0
As mm² 1098 701 860
As2 mm²
TOP STEEL Layer 1 4 B 20 4 B 12 3 B 20
Layer 2
As prov mm² 1257 Asp2 rov 452 Asprov 942
BTM STEEL Layer 1 3 B 10 3 B 20 3 B 10
Layer 2
As2 prov mm² 236 As
prov 942 As 2p rov 236
DEFLECTION Permanent= 3.44<24.00 Imposed= 1.43<12.00 Precamber(mm)=
mm Affecting partitions/walls = 2.78 < 12.00 ok Increase btm As by
SHEAR VEd kN 192.7 LINK Ø 182.2
VRd,ct kN 82.3 8 74.8
VEd,max kN 456.2 NOMINAL 456.2
s req mm 241 354 257
LINKS B8@225for900 B8@300 B8@250for750
legs No 2 2 2
.
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Crack width mm ok 0.29 ok 0.21 ok 0.31

254

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:254 17/07/2006 17:16:00

 TCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams.xls

TCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page

Location WorkedExamples:MainbeamGridsCtoJ rmw 03-Jul-06 255

265
CONTINUOUS BEAM ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision JobNo

Originated from TCC41R.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2002-2006 BCA for RCC chg - FB625

SPAN 3 L E FT C EN T RE RI GH T
ACTIONS M kNm 140.4 117.9 175.1
d 0.90 1.00 0.83
DESIGN d mm 407.0 407.0 407.0
As mm² 860 701 1098
As2 mm²
TOP STEEL Layer 1 3 B 20 4 B 12 4 B 20
Layer 2
As prov mm² 942 Asp2 rov 452 Asprov 1257
BTM STEEL Layer 1 3 B 10 3 B 20 3 B 10
Layer 2
As2 prov mm² 236 As
prov 942 As 2p rov 236
DEFLECTION Permanent= 3.43<24.00 Imposed= 1.43<12.00 Precamber(mm)=
mm Affecting partitions/walls = 2.77 < 12.00 ok Increase btm As by
SHEAR VEd kN 182.2 LINK Ø 192.7
VRd,ct kN 74.8 8 82.3
VEd,max kN 456.2 NOMINAL 456.2
s req mm 257 354 241
LINKS B8@250for750 B8@300 B8@225for900
legs No 2 2 2
.
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Crack width mm ok 0.31 ok 0.21 ok 0.29

SPAN 4 L E FT C EN T RE RI GH T
ACTIONS M kNm 172.8 177.5 44.4
d 0.80 1.04 1.00
DESIGN d mm 407.0 407.0 411.0
As mm² 1082 1056 261
As2 mm²
TOP STEEL Layer 1 4 B 20 3 B 12 3 B 12
Layer 2
As prov mm² 1257 Asp2 rov 339 Asprov 339
BTM STEEL Layer 1 3 B 10 4 B 20 3 B 10
Layer 2
As2 prov mm² 236 As
prov 1257 As 2p rov 236
DEFLECTION Permanent= 8.04<24.00 Imposed= 2.18<12.00 Precamber(mm)=
mm Affecting partitions/walls = 4.90 < 12.00 ok Increase btm As by
SHEAR VEd kN 208.9 LINK Ø 158.2
VRd,ct kN 82.3 8 56.5
VEd,max kN 456.2 NOMINAL 460.7
s req mm 219 354 306
LINKS B8@200for1200 B8@300 B8@300for600
legs No 2 2 2
.
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Crack width mm ok 0.30 ok 0.29 ok 0.09

255

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:255 17/07/2006 17:16:05

 TCC42 Post-tensioned Analysis & Design.xls (Beta)
This spreadsheet designs post-tensioned beam and one-way
spanning slab elements in accordance with BS EN 1992-1:2004.
JOBDATA!
In essence the spreadsheet checks a number of parameters:-
The first sheet includes all the general and material input data
used in the subsequent sheets. Load combinations and load
■ stresses at transfer, factors are defined. The input under Options should be self-
■ stresses in service, explanatory. Some of the input is controlled via the combi-boxes
■ moments of resistance at ULS, in the right margin. The choices have implications on the design
as shown below.
■ shear,
■ vibration, ■ Stressing endsdetermines where prestressing losses occur.
■ deflection, ■ Prestressing system – Specifying unbonded or bonded
■ neutral axis depth, and changes the prestress loss calculations. Prestress losses tend
■ reinforcement service stress to be higher with bonded tendons as wobble factors and
coefficients of friction are higher but using several strands in
The spreadsheet is set out in several sheets. a single duct can lead to overall economy, especially in more
heavily loaded beams. Bonded systems may require less
conventional reinforcement.
■ JOBDATA!Defines load cases, various options and material
properties. ■ The exposure classto Eurocode 2 determines both the
permissible crack width and the allowable flexural tensile
■ LOADS!Is where loadings, spans and section data are stresses in prestressed beams (and slabs).
entered.
■ The Slab or Beampull-down varies shear requirements and
■ CONTROL!Is where tendons and bonded reinforcement are determines whether nominal top bonded reinforcement is
adjusted to find a solution. included in the spans or not. Nominal top steel is included
■ RESULTS! Summarises
outputs from the rest ofthe
thedesign, analysis, checks and
spreadsheet. in mid-span
choose of nominal
to use beams. Iftop
slabs aretospecified,
steel overcome thehogging
user may
■ TYPICALC!Shows a typical longhand calculation for the first moments or reduce deflection in the spans. Invoking the
span. nominal bonded reinforcement in mid-span should overcome
most problems with hogging in say, dissimilar spans of slabs.
■ DETAILS!Shows the workings for the moment distribution
for the various load cases, profiles, prestress losses and checks ■ Beams requires a second input; slab type(type of slab
in some detail. supported by the beam) alters parameters used in checking
vibration.
■ Def!Shows workings for deflection at 1/20 points a long each
span. ■ Normal curtailment rules for conventional reinforcement
are not necessarily satisfactory for post-tensioned slabs and
■ Gra! Provides the data for the graphs, and values generated
beams. Nonetheless the spreadsheet assumes that curtailment
are used for checking.
occurs at 0.3 x span.
■ Refs!Is where nationally determined parameters are set.
With regard to concrete, the usual minimum cylinder strength
Users are referred to Concrete Society TR43 Post-tensioned
used in prestressing is 32 MPa, although 40 MPa would be more
concrete floors – Design Handbook[33] for further details of
usual. Ambient temperatures during curing may be taken as 15°C
methods and values used.
for a UK summer, but otherwise may be dependent upon curing/
A maximum of three spans may be considered. Cantilevers are insulation regimes. Typically, long-term Relative Humidity may
be taken as 55% indoors, or 80% outdoors.
not available. Shortening is calculated in the losses section, but is
not used to modify column moments. The effects of restraint to
Under loading sequence, the ages of transfer and additional
both columns and prestress in the member must be considered.
loading are entered. These values are used to determine relevant
The spreadsheet considers one direction at a time only. creep and shrinkage factors. These factors are case specific and
The nub of this spreadsheet is CONTROL! page. The source have been derived from Annex B of EC2.
of any failures or missing information (e.g. no tendons or no
tendon height specified) will become apparent on CONTROL! Details of strand used in the UK are given at the bottom of the
Users may wish to create a split window in this part of the sheet. Users should ensure that their chosen strand is readily
spreadsheet (Window/ Split) to obtain a more comprehensive available. TR43 Post-tensioned concrete floors – design handbook
view. CONTROL! Also shows the results of the parameter checks gives typical values for µ (coefficient of friction), K (wobble
from RESULTS! factors), Rel% (relaxation) and draw-in (mm).

256

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:256 17/07/2006 17:16:10

 TCC42 Post-tensioned Analysis & Design.xls (Beta)

Pi / Pj (initial force/ jacking force),

LOADS! ■

■ Pf / Pj (final force/ jacking force),

The top part of this page is for input of data for the sub-frame ■ number and height of tendons, and
analysis, i.e. dimensions and loads. ■ amounts of conventional reinforcement.
Input should be fairly self explanatory. It should be noted that
There are also two charts. The ‘efficiency’ chart gives the user
H is in the plane of the screen and b, bw etc. are at right angles
to the plane of the screen. Several warnings are given under an idea of how hard the section is working or how far it is out
or what is critical to the design. The second chart, ultimate limit
‘Operating Instructions’ and with conditional formatting should
state moment envelope and moments of resistance (capacity),
data be incorrect.
should be used in conjunction with choosing amounts of bonded
reinforcement.
Supports may be specified as being knife-edge by inputting K in
column D: remote ends of supporting columns may be either F With regard to Tendons, the spreadsheet automatically
for fixed, or P for pinned. The line can be left blank. A support calculates a recommended number of tendons for each span
width (h below) can be used in conjunction with a ‘K’ support so using an algorithm. The algorithm uses either the maximum
that design moments at the face of support are used. of the median stress levels, or the maximum permitted. The
spreadsheet calculates the minimum number of strands required
Data under ‘Normal Direction’ are used for the vibration checks. The so that permissible concrete tensions or compressions are not
number of bays affects possible modes of vibration, which is checkedexceeded
in at either the initial or final stages. The numbers of
accordance with the srcinal Concrete Society TR43[14] . The vibration tendons are then shown as recommended values, and the user
response factors calculated are accordance with Concrete Society should override them as required. Once the number of tendons
guidelines. Vibration should not be a problem in post-tensioned for each span has been fixed, the program attempts to find an
slabs and beams. Normally, vibration response factors of 12 are optimum single level of initial prestress for all strands (this often
used for very busy offices, 8 for normal offices, or 4 for high appears to be the maximum permissible). If the minimum force
specification offices or laboratories where vibration is critical. required generates excessive stresses, the section is deemed to
Designers should be aware that the 2005 version of Concrete have failed.
Society TR43 Appendix G gives revised recommendations on
vibration. (At the time of releasing the Beta 3 version, it was Tendons are assumed to be level through supports and follow a
considered that these recommendations were unsuited to parabolic profile between. The points of inflection are taken to be
spreadsheet Further guidance is being prepared by The Concrete at 1/10 of the clear span points.
Centre). If vibration is considered to be critical more specialist
software and experience should be sought and used. Besides number of tendons, the main user control is to adjust the
tendon heights. The recommended tendon heights given in row
Loads specified should be characteristic and for the whole bay 16 should normally be used. Short and long-term prestress losses
width (not expressed as kN/m 2 – unless a 1 m bay width is being are initially assumed by the spreadsheet and then actual losses
analysed). Under ‘dead at transfer’, the self-weight should be are calculated, based on the remaining data. This process results
input together with any other loads present at transfer. However, in calculated and assumed losses being different. To equalise (or
designers should consider the load history of the slab to ensure balance) these, the ‘Balance Losses’ button needs to be clicked
worst cases are checked, e.g. temporary loads while casting (in some cases more than once).
floors above. Bay widths in the normal direction do not affect the
loading unless, of course, the user chooses to introduce a suitable Details of bonded rebar should then be entered under
relationship (in the loads input). ‘REINFORCEMENT’ (this may then require the ‘Balance Losses’
button to be clicked again). If the message in cell N46 reads
The current configuration being designed is shown in a chart. This “no links required’, links may be omitted by entering zero in cell
gives a scale representation of the spans, supports, loads and an D46.
idealised cross section of each member.
The checks carried out are listed below.
At the bottom of the page, charts also show representations of ■ Tendons (a)
the tendon profiles and equivalent loads used in the analysis.
■ Stresses at transfer (b)
For the tendons, a reversed parabolic profile is used but
minimum lengths of straight tendon are used at the supports as ■ Stresses in service (c)

recommended by Khan(16). Service equivalent loads are shown: ■ ULS MOR (d)
those at transfer may be viewed at Gra! C368: N369. ■ Shear (e)

■ Vibration (f)
CONTROL! ■ Deflection (g)
■ Neutral axis depth
This page is the nub of the spreadsheet: it has a number of key
inputs and outputs. These include inputs of ■ Rebar stress

257

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:257 17/07/2006 17:16:12

 In the spreadsheet, those that are unsatisfactory are highlighted ■ equivalent loads,
and directions are given for further information. These checks are ■ ULS moments and capacities,
visualised in the ‘efficiency’ chart.
■ shear envelopes,
A second chart shows the ultimate limit state moment envelope ■ deflections,
and the moments of resistance of the section (capacity). It is ■ stresses at transfer and
intended that it is used in conjunction with choosing amounts of
■ stresses in service
bonded reinforcement.
Each chart is plotted at 1/20 points along each span. Many values
RESULTS! within Gra! are used and checked for being minima or maxima
for the various criteria. For instance it may be here that problems
This page shows stresses at transfer and in service in both tabular with hogging moments are found.
and chart form. It should be noted that, in keeping with current
practice, moments are considered at the face of columns. Thus
peak moments are not necessarily at column centrelines and Refs!
moments might be different each side of an internal column.
This sheet comprises Nationally Determined Parameters (NDP’s)
The convention used in the stress charts is: contained within in the UK’s National Annexes to EN1990 (basis
of design) and to BS EN 1992-1-1. This page should be reviewed
■ Red squares – tension, blue circles – compression
each time the spreadsheet is used to ensure the values remain
■ Solid markers – bottom, hollow markers – top valid for the UK or are valid for the country where the works are
■ Dotted lines – permissible stresses to be carried out or changed to suit. It is suggested that this page
is printed out to accompany submissions of calculations that
Below the stress diagrams, there are details of shear envelopes, include this spreadsheet. It should be noted that it is possible
vibration and deflection together with support reactions and to switch on the adjacent spans loaded by changing ‘b’ to ‘a’ in
column moments. cell D11. BS EN 1992-1-1 recommends using the adjacent and
alternate load arrangement. However to the UK National Annex,
only the all spans and alternate load arrangements need to be
TYPICALC! considered.

This sheet is intended to illustrate typical calculations for a

particular point in a span in order to show how all the criteria Notes!
are satisfied. The sheet illustrates the transfer and service stress
checks and the calculation of Moment of Resistance carried out This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
in tabular form in Gra! The point chosen is at 0.3L in the first span
and is highlighted in Gra!

DETAILS!
Over nine pages, DETAILS! shows detailed calculations regarding
section properties, distribution factors, moment distribution
used for the sub-frame analysis, profiling constants, pre-stressing
losses, balanced loads, ULS moment and shear checks, and finally
vibration.

Def!
The deflection sheet gives details of calculations dealing with
defections.

Gra!
Graf! provides the data for the charts within CONTROL! and
RESULTS! That show:
■ the configuration and loads,
■ tendon profile,

258

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:258 17/07/2006 17:16:14

 TCC42 Post-tensioned Analysis & Design.xls (Beta)

TCC42 Post-tensioned Analysis & Design/ JOBDATA!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location Level
Beam
-2 on
Grid
7 rmw 03-Jul-2006 269 259
POST-TENSIONEDANALYSIS&DESIGNtoBSEN1992-1:2004 Checked Revision JobNo

Originated from TCC42.xls v6 on CD © 2005 TCC chg - FB625

POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS EN 1992-1:2004 - GENERAL DATA
LOAD COMBINATIONS
TRANSFER SLS 1 Transfer prestress + dead load at transfer
SLS 2 Final prestress + dead + full imposed load on all spans NOTES
RARE SLS 3 Final prestress + dead + full imposed load on odd spans INPUT IS UNDERLINED.
SLS 4 Final prestress + dead + full imposed load on even spans FRAMES ARE ASSUMED TO BE
SLS 5 Final prestress + dead + frequent imposed load on all spans BRACED
FREQUENT SLS 6 Final prestress + dead + frequent imposed load on odd spans
SLS 7 Final prestress + dead + frequent imposed load on even spans USAGE
SLS 8 Final prestress + dead + QP imposed load on all spans Office
QUASI-
SLS 9 Final prestress + dead + QP imposed load on odd spans
PERMANENT
SLS 10 Final prestress + dead + QP imposed load on even spans
ULS 1 Final prestress + factored dead and imposed load on all spans VIBRATION
ULTIMATE ULS 2 Final prestress + factored dead + factored imposed load on odd spans Limiting reponse factor
ULS 3 Final prestress + factored dead + factored imposed load on even spans R= 8

UL L
S O A D IN G
P A T T E RN min m ax D E FL E C T IO N
Dead 1.25 1.25 Limit QP deflection to L/ 250
Imposed 0 1.50 BS EN 1990: (6.10b) Limit after construction  to L/ 500

OPTIONS Exposureclassis XC2, XC3, XC4 Prestresssystemis unbonded and stressed from left end
Beam supporting solid slab Wmax, mm = 0.3
Jacking force /f pk = 0.8 Top bonded rebar in spans? Yes (Helps to reduce deflections - recommended)

Slab type S (S)olid, (R)ibbed or (W)affle, supported by beam Damping, ζ (1% to 4½%) 1.5%

MA TE RIALS CO NC RE TE fck = 40 Ecm = 35.22  c,max = 18.00 t,max = 5.09 Design hypothetical
tensile stresses to limit
At transfer, 4 days, fck(i) = 26.54 Ecm(i) = 31.91 c,max(i) = 11.94 t,max(i) = 3.66
cracking
Cement type R Curing time (days) = 3  c = 1.50
Ave ambient during curing = 18ºC Longterm R/H % 55 .

STRAND fpk = 1860 Aps, mm² = 100 µ = 0.060 K=0 .0050

Eps = 195 Rel % = 2.5 , draw in = 6 Depth to strand centre = 41

REBAR fyk = 500 Grade A COVERS Top Bottom Sides

m = 1.15 to links 25 25 25

LOADING SEQUENCE Loading sequence for  assessment 2 = 0.3 Rare combination

L oa d @ Ag e fctm fctm,fl  Ecm(t) L oa d  Ecm(t)
kN/m days MPa MPa Creep GPa kN/m² Creep GPa
Dead at transfer 14.63 4 2.52 2.71 2.12 11.31 14.63 2.12 11.31
Applied dead 42.00 30 3.51 3.77 1.65 13.30 42.00 1.65 13.30
Quasi-permanent imposed 7.50
- = - 25.00
COMBINED 64.13 - 1.76 12.78 81.63 1.73 12.89

NOTES on MATERIALS
BRITISH LOW RELAXATION STRAND
Ty pe Dia A r ea fpk Weight RELAXATION at 0.7fpk
Standard 15.2 139 1670 1.090 Ambient ºC 20 40 60 80 100
12.5 93 1770 0.730 Relaxation 1.8 3.5 5.1 7.5 10.7
Super 15.7 150 1770 1.180
12.9 100 1860 0.785
Compact 15.2 165 1820 1.295
12.7 112 1860 0.890

259

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:259 17/07/2006 17:16:16

 TCC42 Post-tensioned Analysis & Design/ LOADS!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location Level
Beam
-2 onGrid
7 rmw 03-Jul-2006 270 260
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS EN 1992-1:2004 Checked Revision Job
No
Originated from TCC42.xls v6 on CD © 2005 TCC chg - FB625
Dimensions and Loads
NORMAL DIRECTION
SPANS Lm H mm bw mm hf mm Section beff mm No Bays Bay widthm
Span 1 12.000 525 1800 200 T 3000 5 6.000
Span 2 12.500 525 1800 200 T 3000 5 6.000
Span 3

SUPPORTS Above m H mm b mm End cond Below m H mm b mm End cond

Support 1 4.000 300 600 F
Support 2 4.000 300 600 F
Support 3 K
Support 4

CONFIGURATION SLAB supporting Solid Slab, Exposure class XC2, XC3, XC4, Wk = 0.3 mm, fck = 40, Stressed from Both Ends

LOADING UDLs~kN/m (char), PLs~kN (char), Position~m

D ead a t A p pl i e d I m p o se d P osi t i on Lo a d e d De ad at A pp l i ed I m pose d P o si t i o n Lo a d e d
SPAN 1 t r a n sf e r D ead L oa d f r om l e f t Le n g t h SPAN 3 t r a n sf e r De ad Lo a d f r om l e f t Len g th
UDL 14.63 42.00 25.00 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
SP AN 2
UDL 14.63 42.00 25.00 ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ GLOBAL STATUS
Part UDL VALID DESIGN

TENDON PROFILE (heights to strand centre: see heights specified under TENDONS below)

484
295 295

41 43

EQUIVALENT LOADSin service

400 301 kN/m 266 kN/m

300 222 kN/m
169 kN/m
200
100 -50 kN/m 0 kN/m
-57 kN/m
0
-100
-200

260

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:260 17/07/2006 17:16:23

 TCC42 Post-tensioned Analysis & Design.xls

TCC42 Post-tensioned Analysis & Design/ CONTROL!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location Level
Beam
-2 on
Grid
7 rmw 03-Jul-2006 271 261
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS EN 1992-1:2004 Checked Revision Job
No
Originated from TCC42.xls v6 on CD © 2005 TCC chg - FB625
Tendons & bonded reinforcement
(a) TENDONS Pj = 149 kN Pi/A = 2.18 MPamax
S u p t1 S p a n1 S u p t2 S p a n2 S u p t3 S p a n3 S u p t4
Pi/Pj 93.3% 90.4% 100.0%
P30/Pj 90.9% 89.1% 100.0%
Pf/Pj 87.7% 84.9% 100.0%
No of strands
Recommended  10  10  10  13  13 1  3 0 0 0
Use 18 18 18 18 18 18 0 0
Recommend'd height 295 41 484 41 295 0
Height mm 295 41 484 484 41 295 295 0
Length Straightmm 150 150 150 0 0 0
x to max Sag mm 5272 7047 0
Pi kN 2581 2545 2498 2498 2453 2421 0 0 0
Balance Load kN 252.5 342.8 315.2 228.5 0.0 0.0
Pf kN 2431 2377 2349 2350 2282 2274 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
Balance Load kN 233.0 316.4 292.2 211.9 0.0 0.0

CHECKS 'EFFICIENCY' a 44%

Tendons (a) OK 51%
Stresses at transfer (b) OK
b(T) 81%
Stresses in service (c) OK
37%
ULS MOR (d) OK
Shear (e) OK c(T) 63%
Vibration (f) OK - see note 61%
Deflection (g) OK e 20%
Neutral axis depth OK 9%
Rebar stress OK
g 96%

GLOBAL STATUS VALID DESIGN 0% 20% 40% 60% 80% 100% 120%

REINFORCEMENT Input bonded rebar arrangement (Support bars cutailed at 0.3L)

S1p a n S2p a n 0
Supt 1 btm top Supt 2 btm top Supt 3 btm top Supt 4
Required at SLS 2638 1590 1898 2638 2723 1898 2638 0 0 0
Main
bar
Ø 20 16 20 20 25 20 20 16 16 12
No 9 9 9 9 8 9 9 8 10 15
As provided 2827 1810 2827 2827 3927 2827 2827 1608 2011 1696
% 0.299% 0.191% 0.299% 0.299% 0.416% 0.299% 0.299% 0.000% 0.000% 0.000%
Link Ø = 8
No of legs 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 8 8 8

(d) ULS MOMENTS With bonded reinforcement

S u p t1 S p a n1 S u p t2 S p a n2 S u p t3 S p a n3 S u p t4
Mu 60.9 633.8 948.7 945.9 872.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
MOR 1128.8 1418.5 1543.6 1544.1 1773.0 1099.3 0.0 0.0 0.0

ULS MOMENT ENVELOPE/MOR

2000
1500
1000
500
0
-500
-1000
-1500
-2000

261

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:261 17/07/2006 17:16:28

 TCC42 Post-tensioned Analysis & Design/ RESULTS!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page
Location Level
Beam
-2 on
Grid
7 rmw 03-Jul-2006 273 262
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS EN 1992-1:2004 Checked Revision Job
No
Originated from TCC42.xls v6 on CD © 2005 TCC chg - FB625
Results(2)
(e) SHEAR Link Ø = 8
S1p a n S2p a n 0
Left Right Left Right Left Right
VEd - Vtd 444.4 566.1 610.3 512.4 #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
cracked ? N Y Y N N N
(VEd - Vtd)/VRdc 0.661 0.854 0.921 0.783 #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
No of legs 4 4 4 4 8 8
Link spacing 0 0 0 0 0 0

ULS SHEAR ENVELOPE (V

Ed)
1000
758.6
500 571.3

0 0.0

-500 -594.0
-727.3
-1000

(f) VIBRATION S pa n
1 S pan2 S pan
3
Responsefactor 0.62 0.73 0.00
OK OK OK

(g) DEFLECTION
MAX DEFLECTIONS
(mm)
10
5
0
-5
-10
-15
-20
-25
-30

At transfer Span
-4.2mm
=1 Span
-4.2mm
=2 .
Quasi-permanent Span=12mm
1 <48 OK Span
2=26.3mm<50 OK . .
After construction Span
=11.7mm
1 <24 OK Span2=23.9mm<25 OK . .

S U PPO RTREA C T I O NS S u p t1 S u p t2 S u p t3 S u p t4
ULS 1 534.3 1557.3 559.6 0.0 kN
ULS 2 534.3 1322.9 325.2 0.0 kN
ULS 3 303.0 1338.6 559.6 0.0 kN
Dead 274.0 823.7 289.6 0.0 kN
Imposed 114.8 378.5 119.2 0.0 kN

C O LUMN
M O M EN T S S u p1t S u p2t S u p3t S u p4t
Above 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 kNm
ULS 1
Below 54.82 15.81 0.00 0.00 kNm
Above 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 kNm
ULS 2
Below 105.14 -100.24 0.00 0.00 kNm
Above 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 kNm
ULS 3
Below -92.58 118.22 0.00 0.00 kNm

262

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:262 17/07/2006 17:16:34

 TCC42 Post-tensioned Analysis & Design.xls (Beta)

TCC42 Post-tensioned Analysis & Design/ TYPICALC!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Madeby Date Page
Location Level 2 - Beam on Grid 7 rmw 03-Jul-06 263
274
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS EN 1992-1:2004 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from TCC42.xls v6 on CD © 2005 TCC chg - FB625

TYPICAL CALCULATION
for Span 1 at 3.60 m from C/L of LH support EC2 Ref
Class XC2, XC3, XC4 Tee section, h = 525 mm, bw = 1800 mm hf = 200 mm, bf =3000 mm. Table 4.1

Ac = 1185000mm², Z top = 120.0E6 mm³, and Z bottom = 93.3E6 mm³

Tendons are unbonded, Ap = 100mm², fpk = 1,860 N/mm2 and 75.0 mm from soffite
There are 18 tendons, jacked to 1 ,488 N/mm² or 80% fpk
Prestress losses at this section are 121.4 kN at transfer and 283.3 kN longterm 5.10.5 & 6

(b) STRESSES at TRANSFER

M = 311 .4 kNm hogging, and prestressing force = 2,557.0 kN
Max compression (bottom) = M/Z + P/A = -311.4E3 / 120.0 + 2,557.0 / 1185 = 5.50 N/mm²
< 1 1.94 N/mm² allowed 5.10.2.2(5)

Max tension (bottom) = M/Z - P/A = 311.4E3 / 120.0 - 2,557.0 / 1185 = 0.44 N/mm²
< 3.66 N/mm² allowed TR43
(c) STRESSES in SERVICE
Frequent M = 314.7 kNm sagging, and prestressing force = 2,395.1 kN
Max compression (top) = 314.7E6 / 120.0E6 + 2,395.1E3 / 1185E3 = 4.19 N/mm²
< 18.00 N/mm² allowed 5.10.2.2(5)

Quasi-permanent M = 260.4 kNm sagging

Max tension (bottom) = 260.4 / 93.3 - 2,395.1 / 1185 = 1.35 N/mm²
< 5.09 N/mm² allowed TR43
(d) MOR at ultimate limit state
M = 611.7 kNm sagging, and prestressing force = 2,395.1 kN
pe = 1000 x 2,395.1 / 18 / 100 = 1,330.6 N/mm²
Reinforcement d = 484 mm
Tendon force = 0.9 (2,395.1 + 100 /1000 x 18 x 100) = 2,317.6 kN 5.10.8(2)

As = /4 x 16² x 9 = 1,810 mm²

Rebar force = 500 / 1.15 x 1,810 / 1 000 = 786.8 kN
Total tensile force = 2,317.6 + 786.8 = 3,104.4 kN
fcd = 1 x 0.85 x 40/1.5 = 22.67 N/mm² 3.1.7(3)

Compression block depth, x = 1000 x 3,104.4 / 22.67 / 3000 = 45.65 mm Fig 3.5

MOR = (2,317.6 ( 525 - 75.0 - 45.65 / 2) + 786.8 x (484 - 45.65 / 2)) / 1000
= 1,352.8 kNm > 611.7 ok

263

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:263 17/07/2006 17:16:38

 TCC43 Wide Beams (A & D).xls
This spreadsheet designs multiple-span rectangular or flanged The sheet has not been set up with many ‘carry-throughs’
beams, to prEN 1992-1, using sub-frame analysis to derive (making the value of one cell equal another).
moments and shears. The intention is to provide the design
and analysis of up to six spans of continuous wide beams with Users may choose to emulate cell D17 in other cells in their saved
columns above and below. Spans may incorporate cantilevers, version to speed input. Generally, values in red or red backgrounds
fixed ends or knife-edge supports. There are three main sheets: indicate either incorrect or excess data. For instance, if knife-edge
MAIN!, ACTIONS! and SPANS! supports are required, entering ‘K’ in cell C25 will elicit red data to
the right, which needs to be c leared manually.
This spreadsheet is very similar to TCC41.xls, but caters for wide
beams by allowing two sizes of bar in one layer and by allowing ‘Rebar layering’ refers to whether there are beams in the other
top steel in the span to be augmented to help satisfy span:depth direction. Answering yes drops by one bar diameter the steel at
criteria. the supports. For instance when using splice bars at the support
bars in the other direction have to be avoided - and allowed for
The selection of size and number of top and bottom bars is in the design.
automated. The number of bars determined by either:
With respect to cantilevers, design for bending caters for
■ area of steel required/ area of maximum sized bar, moments at the face of support; design for deflection considers
the cantilever from the centre line of support. In beam-to-beam
■ spacing rules or situations (where the beam soffits are the same depth), the width
■ number of legs of links required in shear. of support can be input as being very small to avoid under-design
in bending.
Where the latter two may govern, two diameters of bending steel
are allowed in the same layer to avoid excessive over-specification
of reinforcement. ACTIONS!
Input to the right of SPANS! allows top steel to be increased to ACTIONS! includes bending moment and shear force diagrams,
satisfy span:depth criteria. The designer and detailer are expected summaries of moments and shears and user input for amounts
to rationalise this output (but always remembering that bar of redistribution. Users should ensure that the amounts of
spacings should not be increased). redistribution are always considered as at line 26 there are no
default values.
The size of link to be used remains as manual input.

SPANS!
MAIN!
This sheet designs reinforcement for bending in spans and
This sheet contains user input of materials, frame geometry and supports and for shear in the spans. User input is required for link
load data. sizes (e.g. at cell I22) and the amount by which span top steel
should be increased (e.g. at cell N21). Non-existent spans are
Input data is blue and underlined. New data may be input by blanked out. Support moments (including cantilever moments)
overwriting default values or by entering values in ‘greyed-out’ are considered at the face of the support. This may lead to
cells. Entering a value of 5.0 in cell C20 will clear a line of data unequal amounts of reinforcement being designed for each side
in both the span and support data ready for input. It will also of the support. See Bar!
initiate red data that will clear as the appropriate missing data is
added. Guidance on input for the type of section and type of end Beneath ‘Operating instructions’, both maximum and minimum
condition of the support is given under ‘Operating instructions’. main bar diameters may be selected. Also, for each span, the
percentage of span top steel may be increased in order to improve
The dimensions of the flange widths, beff, are entered manually, the permissible span:depth ratio.
but maximum permitted values can be seen in cells M14:M19.
It is important that the correct usage of the members under Besides the limit of maximum modification factor for deflection
consideration is selected from the combo-box to the right of the = 2.0, an additional limit of maximum allowable area of steel
screen, as this affects the magnitude of quasi-permanent SLS to comply with deflection criteria, As def, = 1.5 x As reqd, i.e. an
moments. allowable increase of 1.5 As req ie.50% bottom span steel, has
been imposed in line with Note 5 to Table 7.4 N(BS) in the UK
The ‘brittle partitions’ switch affects the span:depth modifier for National Annex.
spans greater than 7 m.

264

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:264 17/07/2006 17:16:44

 TCC43 Wide Beams (A & D).xls

EC2 requires that all spans should be loaded with both γGk,sup
and γGk,inf. γGk,sup is used initially, and for γGk,inf the Run γGk,inf
Bar!
Loadcase button must be activated. A red warning message will
Intended mainly for first time users and young engineers, this
appear if this has not been done, or if any relevant input data are
sheet gives further details of the calculations summarised in
subsequently changed. Using γGk,inf (=1.0) leads to higher hogging
SPAN! Support moments are considered at faces of supports;
moments in spans.
checks at 1/4 span relate to hogging and any top steel required at
either of these points is provided throughout the span.
The
the top
steelsteel in the centre
required ofspansatis determined
for hogging by adding
1/4 span and together
the appropriate
additional tensile forces due to shear ∆ EdF (see CI 9.2.1.3). It is
assumed that 100% hogging steel at supports will be curtailed at
Graf!
0.25 span or max 50%at 0,2 span and 50% at 0.3 span.
This sheet provides data for the charts in MAIN! and ACTIONS!:
it is not intended for formal printing.
WEIGHT!
Weight! gives an estimate of the total amount of reinforcement
Refs!
required in the beam and per cubic metre.
This sheet comprises the values for nationally determined
parameters that have been used in the spreadsheet.
Simplified curtailment rules, similar to those defined in BS 8110,
are used to determine lengths of bars. The figures should be
These data reflect the values given in draft UK National Annexes
treated as estimates only as they cannot deal with the effects of
for EN 1990 and EN 1992.
designers’ and detailers’ preferences, rationalisation etc.
Designers should ensure that these data are current when the
Uls! spreadsheet is used. When using TCC31 for permanent design,
designers are strongly advised to include a copy of this sheet with
any design calculations.
This sheet details the moment distribution analysis carried out
at the ultimate limit state. The following patterns for imposed
It should be noted that it is possible to switch on the adjacent
loading are considered to find a worse case.
spans loadedrecommends
EN 1992-1-1 arrangementusing
by changing ‘b’ toand
the adjacent ‘a’ in cell D6.load
alternate BS
■ All spans loaded arrangements. However to the UK National Annex only the cell
■ Odd spans loaded spans and alternate load arrangements need to be considered.
■ Even spans loaded
■ Adjacent spans loaded* Notes!
● Spans 1 & 2 and 5 & 6 loaded*
● Spans 2 & 3 loaded* This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
● Spans 3 & 4 loaded*
● Spans 4 & 5 loaded*

* According to the UK National Annex, it is not necessary to

consider the adjacent-spans-loaded case and the option of using
this case may be switched on or off at Refs!D6.

Uls! is not necessarily intended for printing out other than for
checking purposes.

Sls!
This sheet details the analysis carried out at the serviceability
limit states corresponding to full service load and to quasi-
permanent load. It uses the same load cases as Uls! and finds
upper and lower bound limits at 1/20th points along the spans.
Again this sheet is not necessarily intended for printing out other
than for checking purposes.

265

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:265 17/07/2006 17:16:46

 TCC43 Wide Beams (A & D)/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M adeby Date Page

Location WorkedExamples:MainbeamGridsCtoJ rmw 03-Jul-06 276

266
WIDE BEAM ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 C hecked Revision Job No

Originated from TCC43.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2003-2006 TCC chg - FB625

MATERIALS . STATUS OK COVERS(to links)
fck 35 N/mm² dg (mm) 20 Wk (mm)Top 0.4 Topcover 27 mm
fyk 500 N/mm² γs 1.15 Wk (mm)Btm 0.3 Btmcover 27 mm
fywk 500 N/mm² γc 1.50 c,dev 10 Side cover 27 mm
Steelclass A Baywidth 5000 mm
SPANS L (m) h (mm) bw (mm) hf (mm) Type beff (mm) LOADING PATTERN
SPAN15 .500 390 1200 125 T 2600 m in ma x
SPAN28 .000 390 1200 125 T 2900 DEAD 1.25 1.25
SPAN3 8 .500 390 1200 125 T 3000 IMPOSED 1.50
SPAN44 .000 390 1200 125 T 2700 REBAR LAYERING
SPAN 5 Support steel
SPAN 6 in alt layer ? N

SUPPORTS ABOVE (m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond BELOW (m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond
Support
1 3.750 300 300 F 3.750 300 300 F
Support
2 3.750 300 300 F 3.750 300 300 F
Support
3 3.750 300 300 F 3.750 300 300 F
Support
4 3.750 300 300 F 3.750 300 300 F
Support
5 3.750 300 300 F 3.750 300 300 F
Support 6
Support 7
Usage: Office With brittle partitions
LOADING DIAGRAM

LOADING UDLs (kN/m²) PLs (kN) Position (m) Office usage

Dea d I mp ose d P osi t i on Lo a d e d D ea d I m p ose d P osi t i on Lo a d e d
Span 1 Lo a d Lo a d f r om l e f t Le n g t h Span 4 L oa d L oa d f r om l e f t Len g t h
UDL 63.0 30.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL 63.0 30.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~
1PL ~~~~~ 1PL ~~~~~
2PL ~~~~~ 2PL ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 2 Span 5
UDL 63.0 30.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 25.0 25.0 4.00 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 3 Span 6
UDL 63.0 30.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL

REACTIONS(kN)
S U P P O RT 1 2 3 4 5
ALLSPANSLOADED 245.2 952.5 1078.4 889.1 117.4
MAXULTIMATE 278.6 952.5 1078.4 889.1 169.4
CharacteristicDead 126.1 471.4 558.1 446.7 59.4
MaxImposed 80.8 232.9 273.5 211.3 63.5
MinImposed -22.3 75.8 131.2 44.4 -34.7

266

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:266 17/07/2006 17:16:48

 TCC43 Wide Beams (A & D).xls

TCC43 Wide Beams (A & D)/ ACTIONS!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Madeby Date Page
Location WorkedExamples:MainbeamGridsCtoJ rmw 03-Jul-06 267
277
WIDE BEAM ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from TCC43.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2003-2006 TCC chg - FB625
BENDING MOMENTS
(kNm)

0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25 30
1000 800

800 600

600 400
400
200
200
0
0
-200
-200

-400 -400

-600 -600

E las ti cM o me nt s Re d i st ri bute dE nv e lo p e

SUPPORT No 12345
ElasticM 63.7 602.9 812.5 601.2 15.4 ~ kNm/m
RedistributedM 63.7 602.9 690.6 601.2 15.4 ~ kNm/m
δ 1.000 1.000 0.850 1.000 1.000 ~ ~
Redistribution 15.0%

SPAN No 1234
ElasticM
250.3 488.5 475.2 100.7 ~ ~
RedistributedM
250.3 487.7 482.8 100.7 ~ ~
δ 1.000 0.998 1.016 1.000 ~ ~
SHEARS FORCE DIAGRAMS
(kN)

800 600

600
400
400
200
200

0 0

-200
-200
-400
-400
-600

-800 -600
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25 30

E last i cS he a rs Re d i st ri b ut e dShe a rs
SPAN No 1 2 3
ElasticV 278.6 434.6 516.0 554.2 552.9 515.8
RedistributedV 278.6 434.6 517.8 541.8 538.6 514.8

SPAN No 4
Elastic
V 377.1 169.4 ~ ~ ~ ~
Redistributed
V 377.1 169.4 ~ ~ ~ ~

COLUMN MOMENTS
(kNm) 12345
ALL SPANS Above 22.1 18.9 3.3 -30.3 1.0
LOADED Below 22.1 18.9 3.3 -30.3 1.0
ALT SPANS Above 31.9 35.1 30.6 -39.9 9.4
LOADED Below 31.9 35.1 30.6 -39.9 9.4

267

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:267 17/07/2006 17:16:54

 TCC43 Wide Beams (A & D)/ SPANS

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page

Location WorkedExamples:MainbeamGridsCtoJ rmw 03-Jul-06 268

278
WIDE BEAM ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision JobNo

Originated from TCC43.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2003-2006 TCC chg - FB625

.
SPAN 1 LEF T C ENT RE R IG HT
ACTIONS M kNm 62.6 250.3 501.3
 1.00 1.00 1.00
DESIGN d mm 348.0 345.0 340.5
As mm² 435 1756 3767
As2 mm² 0 0 0
TOP STEEL Layer 1 7H10 + 3H8 7H16 + 3H12 6H25 + 3H20
. . .
As prov mm² 701 As2p rov 1747 Asprov 3888
BTM STEEL Layer 1 4 H 12+2H 1 0 8H16 + 2H12 4 H 12+2H 1 0
0 . 0 . 0 .
As2 prov mm² 609 As
prov 1835 As 2p rov 609
DEFLECTION L/d 15.94 Allowed 46.06 .
SHEAR VEd kN 260.1 LINK Ø 416.1
VRd,ct kN 201.6 10 278.6
VEd,max kN 1560.4 NOMINAL 1526.8
s req mm 415 415 415
LINKS H10@250for500 H10@250 H10@250for500
legs No 6 6 6

CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok

max S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Deflection ok

SPAN 2 LEF T C ENT RE R IG HT

ACTIONS M kNm 526.6 487.7 636.4
d 1.00 1.00 0.86
DESIGN d mm 340.5 343.0 340.5
As mm² 3982 3442 4958
As2 mm² 0 0 0
TOP STEEL Layer 1 7 H 22+5H 2 0 6H16 + 2H12 9 H 22+5H 2 0
. . .
As prov mm² 4064 Asp2 rov 1433 Asprov 5046
BTM STEEL Layer 1 4 H 12+2H 1 0 10H20 + 2H16 4 H 12+2H 1 0
. . .
As2 prov mm² 609 As
prov 3544 As 2p rov 609
DEFLECTION L/d 23.32 Allowed 25.99 .
SHEAR VEd kN 499.3 LINK Ø 523.3
VRd,ct kN 282.8 10 304.0
VEd,max kN 1526.8 NOMINAL 1526.8
s req mm 343 415 326
LINKS H10@250for500 H10@250 H10@250for500
legs No 6 6 6

CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Deflection ok

268

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:268 17/07/2006 17:16:59

 TCC43 Wide Beams (A & D).xls

TCC43 Wide Beams (A & D)/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made
by Date Page

Location WorkedExamples:MainbeamGridsCtoJ rmw 03-Jul-06 269

279
WIDE BEAM ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision JobNo

Originated from TCC43.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2003-2006 TCC chg - FB625

SPAN 3 L EFT C EN T RE R IG H T
ACTIONS M kNm 635.3 482.8 525.3
d 0.85 1.02 1.00
DESIGN d mm 340.5 343.0 340.5
As mm² 4949 3408 3972
As2 mm² 0 0 0
TOP STEEL Layer 1 9 H2 5+2 H2 0 7 H1 2+5 H1 0 7H25 + 2H20
. . .
As prov mm² 5046 Asp2 rov 1184 Asprov 4064
BTM STEEL Layer 1 4 H 1 2+ 2 H 1 0 1 1 H 2 0 + 2 H1 6 4H12 + 2H10
. . .
As2 prov mm² 609 As
prov 3858 As 2p rov 609
DEFLECTION L/d 24.78 Allowed 26.19 Asauto-increasedby6.9%
SHEAR VEd kN 520.1 LINK Ø V 496.3
VRd,ct kN 304.0 10 v 282.8
VEd,max kN 1526.8 NOMINAL vc 1526.8
s req mm 328 415 346
LINKS H10@250for500 H10@250 H10@250for500
legs No 6 6 6

CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Deflection ok

SPAN 4 L EFT C EN T RE R IG H T
ACTIONS M kNm 478.5 100.7 25.2
d 1.00 1.00 1.00
DESIGN d mm 340.5 348.0 348.0
As mm² 3575 700 175
As2 mm² 0 0 0
TOP STEEL Layer 1 8H25 7H20 + 2H16 7H10 + 3H8
. . .
As prov mm² 3927 Asp2 rov 2601 Asprov 701
BTM STEEL Layer 1 4H12 + 2H10 8H10 + 2H8 4H12 + 2H10
. . .
As2 prov mm² 609 As
prov 729 As 2p rov 609
DEFLECTION L/d 11.49 Allowed 250.52 .
SHEAR VEd kN 358.5 LINK Ø 150.8
VRd,ct kN 279.6 10 201.6
VEd,max kN 1526.8 NOMINAL 1560.4
s req mm 415 415 415
LINKS H10@250for500 H10@250 H10@250for500
legs No 6 6 6

CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Deflection ok

269

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:269 17/07/2006 17:17:03

 TCC51 Column Load Take-down Design.xls
Conventional column load take-downs by hand can be time- in the remainder of rows 28 to 39. Slab spans may be parallel to
consuming. This spreadsheet emulates conventional column x or y, or two-way spanning.
design to Eurocode 2 by providing load take down from inputs of
location, dimensions, levels and loads to give design axial loads If there are more than twelve storeys in a structure, upper storeys
and moments per floor, and to foundations. TCC51.xls is intended (>12) may be calculated first with “No” entered in the “column
as a stand-alone column design spreadsheet for use when a sub- above” cell, D22. For the remaining lower storeys, cell D22 may
frame analysis is not available or is unwarranted. This spreadsheet then be set to “Yes”, with data related to the upper storeys being
also determines the area and arrangement of steel required (A s) entered on row 22 and cells M27 to P27.
for all lifts in RESULTS! or individual lifts in CALC!.
The check box to the top right hand side of this page allows the
This spreadsheet is intended for use with braced columns only. user to select whether or not EN 1990 loading equations 6.10a
Moments and vertical loads for unbraced structures should be and 610b should be used to determine ULS loads and moments.
derived from a frame analysis, and then should be designed via This may make a considerable difference to results, and it is
TCC53 or TCC54. recommended that this box should be un-checked unless the
user is fully familiar with these equations.
Load distribution is according to shear force factors from Tables in
the ISE/ ICE Manual for the design of reinforced concrete building When all input on this page has been completed, go to the next
structures to EC2(28). Column moments are assessed via a limited page called:
moment distribution routine making conservative assumptions
regarding remote spans etc.
RESULTS!
There is no double counting of floor slabs due to allowances for
floor slabs in design of, therefore reactions from, edge beams This page displays the following results:
spanning parallel to floor slab span.
■ Characteristic dead and imposed loads applied to the column
As a default the level with maximum axial load with concurrent at each level, including imposed load reduction factors to
maximum moment, i.e. the bottom level, is chosen for EN1991 and its’ UK National annex.
consideration in CALC! (long-hand design). The user may
■ Cumulative loads at each level, both characteristic and
investigate other levels by choosing the appropriate level via the
ultimate (N Ed).
arrows on the right hand side of CALC!.
■ The summation of ultimate initial moments and additional
moments due to slenderness on each axis.
INPUT! ■ The reinforcement arrangement required at each level, based
on a user specified number of bars.
All relevant materials, geometric and loading data is input on this
sheet. The number of main bars is entered at each level or the “Set all
lifts to” button may be used to insert the specified number of
After materials data, number of storeys, column location and bars in each lift of the column. Initially and after changing the
base condition should be selected. If the number of storeys is number of bars at any level, “CHECK” buttons to the right will be
reduced below 12, rows at the foot of this page will be “browned highlighted in red to indicate that the arrangement has yet to be
out” so that the correct number of storeys is displayed. determined. Then clicking either an individual CHECK button or
the “Check all levels” button will calculate bar arrangements.
The base condition refers to whether or not the column should
be fixed or pinned at foundation level. The recommended procedure is to initially set all lifts to a standard
number of bars, click the “Check all levels” button, then change
Under column location, the selection from a list of five differing and check any lifts that appear unsuitable or where “NO FIT”
locations should be self-explanatory. “Double penultimate” appears under the number of bars. It should also be remembered
means a column
selection is made,that
the is
keypenultimate in bothtodirections.
diagram changes As this
indicate relevant that theO39
O27 to concrete grade for each lift may be amended in cells
of INPUT!
plan dimensions with the column to be designed highlighted in
red.
CALC!
The X and Y spans should then be input together with edge
distances. Next, level references should be entered in cells B28 to This sheet shows detailed calculations for a single lift of the
B39, and the general, geometric and loading data for each floor column. As a default, the level with maximum axial load with

270

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:270 17/07/2006 17:17:08

 TCC51 Column Load Take-down Design.xls

concurrent maximum moment, i.e. the bottom level, is chosen

for consideration here. The user may investigate other levels by
Refs!
choosing the appropriate level via the arrows on the right hand
Relevant National Annex values are tabulated here, both for BS
side of the page.
EN 1990 and BS EN 1992. These values are editable for use in
other countries.
After summarising the actions on the chosen lift of column, a
check is made to determine whether or not the column is slender,
then
aboutthe section
both is analysed
axes for the giventoaxial
findload.
the moments of resistance
On the second page of Notes!
CALC!, firstly moments due to imperfections are calculated and
This page contains details of spreadsheet status, revision history
it is decided about which axis these will be critical. Design first
and program assumptions, as well as a standard disclaimer
order moments (M0Ed) are then derived by adding imperfection
clause.
(Mi) moments to the basic first order design moment (m 0E).
Finally, single axis and biaxial checks are carried out to ensure
that applied moments are less than the section’s moments of
resistance.

Select!
On this page, checks for the chosen number of bars at each level
are carried out for six different bar diameters. The smallest bar
diameter that passes all checks is then selected for display on
RESULTS!

Col~M
On this page, flexural stiffnesses are calculated for all beams and
columns and limited moment distributions are carried out to
determine column moments.

Slen!
Here the effective heights of columns and slenderness ratios
are determined from relative rotational stiffnesses, as well as
nominal moments due to imperfections.

M2!
This is where second order moments are calculated, for each lift
and for each possible bar diameter.

Secs!
Here the section moments of resistance are determined for the
given axial load at each level, for each possible bar diameter and
on both axes.

Gra!
This page contains data for generation of the diagrams.

271

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:271 17/07/2006 17:17:10

 TCC51 Column Load Take-down Design/ INPUT!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client BigBucks PLC BRACED FRAMES ONLY Made by D ate Page
Location Column G14 Rod 03-Jul-06 272
282
COLUMN LOAD TAKE DOWN & DESIGN for RECTANGULAR COLUMNS to EN 1992: 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC51.xls version 3.0 on CD © 2004 - 2005 TCC CHG - FB625
Beam fck (N/mm²) 30 No of storeys (this sheet) 10 ColumnLocation EN
1990
Yes
Concrete density (kN/m³ ) 25 Double penultimate 6.10b
? Allow
&
610a
fyk (N/mm² ) 500 Span X1 Span X2 (,t0) = 2.00
class
Steel
A 1 · No
Y
n
a
p
S Base condition
2 Pinned
Y
n
a
p
S

KEY PLAN

Beam spans(m ) Edge distances(mm ) COLUMN SECTION

Span Y1 3.750 S pXan1 5.500 W es t 0 Min column cover ( mm ) 30
Span Y2 4.000 S p aXn2 6.000 N or t h 0 c,dev (mm ) 10

Column above?No Storeys Gk Qk 0 M0EX M0EY

D I M EN S I O N S L O A DS
S LAB S pan BEAM SIZES mm
( ) C O L U MB
NEL O W SLAB BEAM LINE LOADS
Solid hf Direction || to Span
Y1 Span Y2 Span X1 Span
X2  mm m m fck Height (m ) gk qk Cat N-S E-W
Level mm X,YorB h bw h bw h bw h bw H B N/mm² floortofloor kN/m²k N/m²A toK kN/m kN/m
.
Roof 125 Y 300 250 300 250 350 300 350 300 250 300 30 3.750 5.20 1.50 I 0.00 0.00
9 125 Y 300 250 300 250 350 300 350 300 250 300 30 3.750 5.20 4.00 B 0.00 0.00
8 125 Y 300 250 300 250 350 300 350 300 250 300 30 3.750 5.20 4.00 B 0.00 0.00
7 125 Y 300 250 300 250 350 300 350 300 250 300 30 3.750 5.20 4.00 B 0.00 0.00
6 125 Y 300 250 300 250 350 300 350 300 300 450 30 3.750 5.20 4.00 B 0.00 0.00
5 125 Y 300 250 300 250 350 300 350 300 300 450 30 3.750 5.20 4.00 B 0.00 0.00
4 125 Y 300 250 300 250 350 300 350 300 300 450 30 4.500 6.30 5.00 D 0.00 0.00
3 125 Y 300 250 300 250 350 300 350 300 300 450 35 4.500 6.30 5.00 D 0.00 0.00
2 125 Y 300 250 300 250 350 300 350 300 300 450 35 4.500 6.30 5.00 D 0.00 0.00
1 125 Y 300 250 300 250 350 300 350 300 300 450 35 4.500 6.30 5.00 D 0.00 0.00

272

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:272 17/07/2006 17:17:11

 TCC51 Column Load Take-down Design.xls

TCC51 Column Load Take-down Design/ RESULTS!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client BigBucks PLC M adeby Date Page
Location Column
G14 Rod 03-Jul-06 273
283
COLUMN LOAD TAKE DOWN & DESIGN to EN 1992: 2004 Ch ecked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC51.xls version 3.0 on CD © 2004 - 2005 TCC CHG - FB625
Braced frames only
C h a r a c t e r i s ti c D e sig n Re in f or ce m e n t
Below Gk Qk Moments about No Ba r
Level from above 0.0 0.0 NE d X -X Y -Y a n dØ L a yo u t
Loaded area Category 164.8 41.3 M0Ed 5.15 2.54
Roof 4
27.536 I reduction 0.0 267.7 M2 0.00 0.00
Clear height 3.400 Cumulative 1 6 4 .8 41 . 3  5 .1 5 2.54 H12
Loaded area Category 164.8 110.1 M0Ed 5.12 1.42
9 4
27.536 B reduction 15.1 616.1 M2 0.00 0.00
Clear height 3.400 Cumulative 3 2 9 .6 13 6 . 4  5 .1 2 1.42 H12
Loaded area Category 164.8 110.1 M0Ed 5.12 1.42
8 4
27.536 B reduction 15.1 964.5 M2 0.00 0.00
Clear height 3.400 Cumulative 4 9 4 .4 23 1 . 4  5 .1 2 1.42 H12
Loaded area Category 164.8 110.1 M0Ed 5.11 0.88
7
27.536 B 43.6 0.00 0.00
4
reduction 1270.1 M2
Clear height 3.400 Cumulative 6 5 9 .2 29 8 . 0  5 .1 1 0.88 H16
Loaded area Category 169.9 110.1 M0Ed 5.55 1.33
6 4
27.536 B reduction 43.6 1582.1 M2 0.00 0.00
Clear height 3.400 Cumulative 8 2 9 .1 36 4 . 5  5 .5 5 1.33 H12
Loaded area Category 169.9 110.1 M0Ed 5.52 2.16
5
27.536 B 43.6 0.00 0.00
4
reduction 1894.1 M2
Clear height 3.400 Cumulative 9 9 9 .0 43 1 . 1  5 .5 2 2.16 H12
Loaded area Category 202.7 137.7 M0Ed 6.20 1.74
4
27.536 D 52.1 0.00 0.00
4
reduction 2275.6 M2
Clear height 4.150 Cumulative 1 2 0 1 .7 51 6 . 7  6 .2 0 1.74 H20
Loaded area Category 202.7 137.7 M0Ed 6.17 1.45
3
27.536 D 52.8 0.00 0.00
4
reduction 2656.0 M2
Clear height 4.150 Cumulative 1 4 0 4 .4 60 1 . 5  6 .1 7 1.45 H20
Loaded area Category 202.7 137.7 M0Ed 6.18 0.96
2
27.536 D 53.2 0.00 0.00
6
reduction 3035.9 M2
Clear height 4.150 Cumulative 1 6 0 7 .1 68 6 . 0  6 .1 8 0.96 H25
Loaded area Category 202.7 137.7 M0Ed 7.80 0.20
1
27.536 D 53.5 45.29 30.20
6
reduction 3415.3 M2
Clear height 4.150 Cumulative 1 8 0 9 .8 77 0 . 2  5 3. 0 9 30.41 H32
Loaded area Category 0.0 0.0 M0Ed #N/A #N/A
0
27.536 0.00 #N/A #N/A #N/A
6
reduction #N/A M2

Clear height 0.000 Cumulative 1 8 0 9 .8 #N/ A  #N/ A # N/A #N/A

Loaded area Category 0.0 0.0 M0Ed #N/A #N/A
0
27.536 0.00 #N/A #N/A #N/A
6
reduction #N/A M2
Clear height 0.000 Cumulative 1 8 0 9 .8 #N/ A  #N/ A # N/A #N/A

273

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:273 17/07/2006 17:17:17

 TCC51 Column Load Take-down Design/ CALC!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client BigBucks PLC M adeby Date Page
Location Column
G14 Rod 03-Jul-06 274
284
COLUMN LOAD TAKE DOWN & DESIGN to EN 1992: 2004 C hecked Revision JobNo
Originated from TCC51.xls version 3.0 on CD © 2004 - 2005 TCC CHG - FB625

Section calculation for column below level 2 300 x 450 with 6 H25 bars
fcd = cc x fck / c = 0.85 x 35 /1.5 = 19.83 N/mm²
fyd = fyk /s = 500 /1.15 = 434.78 N/mm²
STATUS Valid design

ACTIONS
from load take-down, N Ed = 3,035.9 kN n = 1000 x 3,035.9 /19.83 /300 /450 = 1.134 5.8.8.3 (3)
from bending analysis, M 0xx top = 0.10 kNm M0yy top = 1.42 kNm M 0 are applied moments

M0xx btm = 0.12 kNm M0yy btm = 0.27 kNm

combining top and bottom moments, m0Exx = 0.11 kNm and m0Eyy = 0.96 kNm (5.32)

SLENDERNESS
from flexural stiffness analysis, L0x = 2.576 m and L0y = 3.084 m (5.15)

rxx = (300²/12)=86.60mm ryy= (450² /12) = 129.90 mm gross section

therefore, x=2 ,576/86.60=29.74 and y = 3,084 /129.90 = 23.74

efx = 2 x 0.741 = 1.481 efy = 2 x 0.611 = 1.222 (5.19)
limx = 22x2.538/(1+0.2 x 1.481)/ 1.134 = 40.46 limy = 22x1.893/(1+0.2 x 1.222)/ 1.134 = 31.42 (5.13N)

29.74  4 0.46 therefore column is short 23.74  31.42 therefore column is short

SECTION ANALYSIS
cu3 = 0.0035 and c3 = 0.00175 from Table 3.1  = 0.80  = 1.00 3.19) to (3.22)

.fcd= 19.83x 1.00=19.83N/mm² netfyd= 434.78- 19.83= 414.95N/mm²

d2 = 30 + 8 + 25/2 = 50.5 mm As =  x 25² /4 x 6 = 2,945 mm²

A b oux
t xa x i s A bo uy
t ya x i s
d=3 00-50.5=249.5mm d=4 50-50.5=399.5mm
(1-c3/c3u)h = 300(1 - 175 /350) = 150 mm (1- c3/c3u)h = 450(1 - 175 /350) = 22 5 mm hinge point
thereare2 barsinxxfaces and3 barsinyyfaces (total of 6 bars)
Neutralaxisdepthx= 305.33mm x=4 76.29mm by iteration

Conc comp force, Fc = MIN(0.8 x 305.33 ; 300)450 x 19.83 /1000 Fc = MIN(0.8 x 476.29 ; 450)300 x 19.83 /1000
= 2,180.1
kN = 2,267.1
kN
Limiting strain, c max = c3 /[x-(1-c3/c3u)h]x  0.00344 c max = c3 /[x-(1-c3/c3u)h]x  0.00332 Figure 6.1

Intermediate bars are at 150, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 & 0 and at No intermediate bars from column face

µ-strain at main compression steel = 3,440(305.3- 50.5)/305.3 = 2,871 sc = 3,317(476.3- 50.5)/476.3 = 2,965
µ-strains at intermediate bars = 1,750, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 si = No intermediate bars
µ-strain at main tension steel = 3,440(305.3- 249.5)/305.3 = 629 st = 3,317(476.3- 399.5)/476.3 = 535
Net stress at main compression steel = Min(200000s, fyd) - .fcd = 414.95 sc = Min(200000s, fyd) - .fcd = 414.95 N/mm²

Net stresses at intermediate bars = 330.2, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0 si = No intermediate bars N/mm²

Net stress at main tension steel = Min(200000s, fyd) = 125.80 st = Min(200000s, fyd) = 106.95 N/mm²
Force at main compression steel = 414.95 x 982 /1000 = 407.4 kN Fsc = 414.95 x 1,473 /1000 = 611.1 kN
Forces at intermediate bars = As
324.1
=s kN Fsi
= Ass = 0.0 kN
Force at main tension steel = 125.80 x 982 /1000 = 123.5 kN Fst = 106.95 x 1,473 /1000 = 157.5 kN
NRd = Fc + Fs = 2,180.1 + 407.4 + 324.1 + 123.5 NRd = 2,267.1 + 611.1 + 0.0 + 157.5
= 3,035.1 kNN Ed kN  NEd
= 3,035.7 value of x selected to

Conc lever arm, z = Max(d - x/2,d-h/2)=127.37mm z= 208.98mm match N Ed & N Rd

MRd = fcz + Fsa - NRd(d - h/2) = 277.67 + 113.32 - 301.99 MRd = 473.80 + 213.26 - 529.73
Moment of resistance, M = 89.00 kNm = 157.33 kNm

274

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:274 17/07/2006 17:17:22

 TCC51 Column Load Take-down Design.xls

TCC51 Column Load Take-down Design/ CALC!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client BigBucks PLC
Location Column
G14 Rod 03-Jul-06 275
285
COLUMN LOAD TAKE DOWN & DESIGN to EN 1992: 2004

Originated from TCC51.xls version 3.0 on CD © 2004 - 2005 TCC CHG - FB625

Section calculation for column below level 2 continued

IMPERFECTIONS n = MIN(1, MAX(, 2 /4.5) = 0.943 5.2 (5)

x = 0.943 x 0.005 x 2.576 x 500 = 6.07 kNm y = 0.943 x 0.005 x 3.084 x 500 = 7.27 kNm (5.1) & (5.2)
Inperfections critical about xx axis, therefore set Miy = 0 5.8.9 (2)

SECOND ORDER MOMENTS

x = 0.35 + 35 /200 - 29.74 /250 = 0.406 y = 0.35 + 35 /200 - 23.74 /250 = 0.430 5.8.8.3 (4)
isx = 81.24 mm isy = 174.50 mm radius of gyration of steel
dx
= 231.2mm dy
= 399.5 mm 5.8.8.3 (2)
Kx = Max(1, 1 + 0.406 x 1.481) = 1.602 Ky = Max(1, 1 + 0.430 x 1.222) = 1.526 5.8.8.3 (1)
nu = Asfyd /(Acfcd) = 1.478 Kr = (nu - n) /(nu - nbal) = 0.319 5.8.8.3 (1)
1/r0 = yd /(0.45d) = 2.08910E-5 1/r0 = 1.20910E-5 5.8.8.3 (1)
1/r = KrK1/ro = 1.068710E-5 1/r = 0.589310E-5 (5.34)
M0Edx = m0E + Mi = 6.18 Knm M0Ed y = 0.96 Knm 5.8.2 (5)P
x = NEd(1/r)L0² /² = 21.81 kNm y = 17.24 kNm (5.32)
Column is short I GNORE Columnisshort  IGNORE 5.8.2 (6)

SINGLE AXIS CHECKS

M0Ed + M2 = 6.18 kNm M0Ed + M2 = 0.96 kNm (5.31)
Minimum moment, MEd,min x = 20 x 3,035.9 /1000 = 60.72 kNm MEd,min y = 20 x 3,035.9 /1000 = 60.72 kNm 6.1 (4)
Therefore design moment, M x = 60.72 kNm < 89.00  OK and M y = 60.72 kNm < 157.33  OK

BIAXIAL CHECK
Max of x/y and y/=x 1.253
2< e xbeyh = 0.103 (5.38a & b)
BIAXIAL CHECK NOT REQUIRED 5.8.9 (3)
.3 ,958.0kN .3 ,035.9/3,958.0=0.767 5.8.9 (4)
a = 1.612 from table
. 0.7555 <1  OK

275

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:275 17/07/2006 17:17:28

 TCC52 Column Chart generation.xls
This spreadsheet generates axial load:design moment interaction
charts for symmetrically reinforced rectangular columns. It
Refs!
checks the capacity of the columns with various arrangements
of reinforcement against input load cases of axial load and uni- This sheet comprises the values for nationally determined
parameters that have been used in the spreadsheet. These data
axial bending.
reflect the values given in draft UK National Annexes for BS EN
1990 and BS EN 1992. Designers should ensure that these data
Within TCC11.xls, COLUMN! allows the user to determine the area
are current when the spreadsheet is used.
of steel required from inputs of axial load and moment about the
x - x axis. The approach of TCC52 is to give an interaction chart.
When using TCC31R for permanent design, designers are
This shows axial load against moment for symmetrical sections
strongly advised to include a copy of this sheet with any design
of specified size, strength and reinforcement. It works on the
calculations.
premise of calculating the moment and axial load capacities of
a section with assumed amounts of reinforcement and assumed
neutral axis depth. Iterations of neutral axis depth give data
for the Axial load:Moment interaction chart for the specified
Notes!
section. The spreadsheet also checks the reinforcement required
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
for input load cases. The user may try different arrangements of
reinforcement.

RCC52.xls assumes that the moments input in the load cases

have already been adjusted, if necessary, for bi-axial bending.
For many side and all corner columns, there is no choice but to
design for bi-axial bending, and TCC53.xls should then be used.
Moments due to imperfections and second order moments in
slender columns are added automatically.

MAIN!
Main! contains all input and output data, including details of
members connected to the top and bottom of the column. These
are used to assess slenderness criteria and additional moments.

Bending is assumed to be about the x - x, i.e. horizontal axis,

and the input moment is assumed to be the maximum design
moment as defined in EC2. Any additional moments due to
slenderness are added by the program.

The dotted line within the chart indicates minimum design

moment.

Calcs!
Calcs! shows the derivation of the charts where moment capacity
is calculated at intervals of neutral axis depth from n.a. depth for
N = 0 to n.a. depth for N = N bal, then at intervals from n.a. depth
for N = N to n.a. depth for N = N .
bal uz

Cases!
Cases! identifies the smallest bar diameter that satisfies each of
the load cases.

276

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:276 17/07/2006 17:17:35

 TCC52 Column Chart generation.xls

TCC52 Column Chart generation/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Madeby Date Page

Location Columns
A1,
etc
A2
at RMW 03-Jul-06 277
287
COLUMN CHART FOR SYMMETRICALLYREINFO RCEDRECTANGULARCOLUMNSBENT ABOUT THEX-X AXISTO
EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from TCC52.xls v3.0 on CD © 2003-05 TCC chg - FB625

MATERIALS
fck 32 N/mm² s 1.15 steel Cover 35 mm
fyk 500 N/mm² c 1.5 concrete dg 20 mm
 2 ef 1.15 c,dev 10 mm Remote
Steelclass A CONNECTING BEAMS/SLABS end
DESIGN SECTION Clear height, L = 3600 mm b (mm) h (mm) L (m) (F) or (P)
h 400 mm RESTRAINTS Top
left 350 500 7.5 F
b 250 mm Top F Fixed Top
right 350 500 6 F
Barsperface 2 No Btm F Fixed Bottom left 350 500 7.5 F
Allbarsin 250 widefaces Braced Y Bottomright 350 500 6 F
. Beam stiffnesses are 70% of uncracked stiffness
Columnabove? Y Colbelow? Y
BAR ARRANGEMENTS Data on connecting beams only affects loadcases, not charting.
T y pe B a rØ Asc % Li n k Ø Ba r c/ c Nbal (kN) Nuz (kN) Checks
H 40 5.03 10 120.0 0.0 0.0 Asc > 4 %
H 32 3.22 8 132.0 733.7 2880.9 ok
H 25 1.96 8 139.0 752.9 2465.0 ok
H 20 1.26 8 144.0 764.9 2230.4 ok
H 16 0.80 8 148.0 773.5 2080.2 ok
H 12 0.45 8 152.0 781.1 1963.5 ok

N:M INTERACTION CHART for 400 x 250 column, grade C32, 35 mm cover and 2 bars on 250 mm faces
3500

3000
Min M

) 2600
kN
( 2500 2500
d
E H32
N
,
N 2000 H25
O
I
S H20
S 1750
E H16
R
P
M
1500 H12
O 1350
C
L
IA
X 1000
A
Nbal
610
500 500

0
0 50 100 150 20 0 250 300

MOMENT MEd (kNm)

LOADCASES Load case NEd (kN) m0e (kNm) MEd (kNm) Load case NEd (kN) m0e (kNm) MEd (kNm)
Double 1 500 165 167.7 4 H25 4 610 80 83.2 4 H12
curvature? 2 1750 120 129.3 4 H32 5 1350 185 192.2 4 H32
Yes 3 2600 35 52.0 4 H32 6 2500 150 163.3 No Fit

277

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:277 17/07/2006 17:17:36

 TCC53 Column Design.xls
TCC53.xls generates column design charts for symmetrically considered and the critical axis identified. MEd is calculated by
reinforced rectangular columns bent about two axes and checks adding NEde1 for imperfections and where necessary M2(=NEde2)
input load cases. for second order moments in slender columns. M is used in the
Ed
design and plot (in CHARTS!).
TCC53.xls also gives interaction charts, showing axial load against
moment for the critical axis for symmetrical rectangular sections
of specified size, strength and reinforcement arrangement. The Refs!
user may try different arrangements of reinforcement. It also
provides designs for input load cases, which are plotted on the This sheet comprises the values for nationally determined
relevant x- or y- axis chart. parameters that have been used in the spreadsheet. These data
reflect the values given in draft UK National Annexes for EN 1990
TCC53.xls takes account of any side-bars specified. and EN 1992.

Designers should ensure that these data are current when the
MAIN! spreadsheet is used. When using TCC31R for permanent design,
designers are strongly advised to include a copy of this sheet with
MAIN! contains all input data and gives designs for the input load any design calculations.
cases.

Guidance for the input is given within the spreadsheet but users Notes!
should be familiar with BS EN 1992-1-1 Section 5.8 The input
moments are the initial end moments due to ultimate design This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
loads as defined in BS EN 1990 about the appropriate axes. Madd,
the critical direction for bi-axial bending and design moments are
calculated.

CHARTS!
CHARTS! shows two charts, one chart for when MEdx is critical and
one for when MEdy is critical. These Axial load:Moment interaction
charts for the specified section also show relevant input load
cases. The load cases are identified by axial load only (a quirk of
Excel!).

Xcal! and Ycal!

These sheets show the derivation of the charts where moment
and axial load capacity is calculated at intervals of neutral axis
depth (in intervals from n.a. depth for N = 0 to n.a. depth for N
= Nbal, then in intervals from n.a. depth for N = N bal to n.a. depth
for N = Nuz).

Slen!
The calculations on this sheet determine slenderness criteria and
effective column lengths about both axes.

Cases!
Cases! identifies the smallest bar diameter that satisfies each of
the load cases. Calculations are made for both directions and the
spreadsheet decides which axis is dominant. Bi-axial bending is

278

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:278 17/07/2006 17:17:43

 TCC53 Column Design.xls

TCC53 Column Design/ MAIN!

Project EC2 Comparative Design The Concrete Centre

Client BRE Madeby Date Page
Location Column
D2 RMW 03-Jul-06 279
289
SYMMETRICALLY REINFORCED RECTANGULAR COLUMN DESIGN, BENT ABOUT TWO AXES
TO EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC53.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2002-2005 TCC - FB625

MATERIALS
fck 35 N/mm² s 1.15 Covertolink 30 mm
fyk 500 N/mm² c 1.5 dg2 0 mm
 2.9 ef 1.6 c,dev 10 mm
SECTION Steelclass A
h 325 mm .
b 275 mm
with 2 bars per 275 face X X
and 2 bars per 325 face
ie. 325 x 275 columns with 4 bars
Remote
RESTRAINTS Storey Top Btm CONNECTING BEAMS/SLABS end
height (mm) Condition Condition Braced ? b (mm) h (mm) L (m) (F) or (P)
X-AXIS 5 000 F P Y Top
West 300 500 8 F
Y-AXIS 5 000 F P Y Top
East 300 500 6 F
Top
North 7000 175 5 F
TopSouth 7000 175 5 F
L (mm) L0 (mm) h0 (mm) Bottom West
X-AXIS 4500 3459 149 BottomEast
Y-AXIS 4825 3709 BottomNorth

Bottom South
Beam stiffnesses are 70% of uncracked stiffness
Columnabove? Y Colbelow? Y
BAR ARRANGEMENTS BAR CENTRES(mm)
Bar Ø Asc % Li n k Ø 2 7 5 F a ce 3 2 5 F a ce Nuz (kN) Checks
H 32 3.60 8 167 217 2835 ok
H 25 2.20 8 174 224 2421 ok
H 20 1.41 8 179 229 2188 ok
H 16 0.90 8 183 233 2038 ok
H 12 0.51 8 187 237 1922 ok
H 10 8 189 239 As or Ø < minimum

LOADCASES AXIAL TOP MOMENTS(kNm) BTM MOMENTS(kNm)

N (kN) m0x m0y m0x m0y
1 2126.1 19.5 2.5
Moments m 0 at top and bottom of column (from
2 2030.5 29.9 2.5
analysis) are combined to find m 0e . The moment
3 1025 50.0 2.5
due to imperfections (e 1 N) and the second
4 783 80.0 2.5 order moment (M 2 ) are then added to obtain
5 600 120.0 2.5 M Ed In the table below.
6 1570 130.0 2.5

DESIGN XA XI S YA XI S C r i t i c al Biaxial Check

MOMENTS MEd x MRd x MEd y MRd y axis Equation (5.39) R E BA R
1 42.5 57.6 38.4 100.1 X 0.691 4 H25
2 48.4 69.3 41.0 107.2 X 0.634 4 H25
3 58.8 87.3 40.3 98.2 X 0.878 4 H12
4 80.0 92.7 6.3 96.2 X 0.863 4 H12
5 120.0 126.3 5.2 117.5 X 0.965 4 H20
6 130.0 157.7 11.2 164.7 X 0.807 4 H32
SEE CHARTS ON NEXT SHEET

279

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:279 17/07/2006 17:17:44

 TCC54 Circular Column Design.xls
TCC54.xls generates a column design chart for symmetrically
reinforced circular columns of an inputted size with an inputted
Refs!
number of bars. It checks input load cases of ultimate axial load
and resolved moment. This sheet comprises the values for Nationally Determined
Parameters that have been used in the spreadsheet. These data
reflect the values given in draft UK National Annexes for BS EN
MAIN! 1990 and BS EN 1992. Designers should ensure that these data
are current when the spreadsheet is used. When using TCC54 for
MAIN! contains all input data and gives designs for the input load permanent design, designers are strongly advised too include a
cases. copy of this sheet with any design calculations.

Guidance for the input is given within the spreadsheet but users
should be familiar with BS EN 1992-1-1 especially Section 5.8.
Notes!
The input moments are the ultimate design moments from
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
analysis resolved around an appropriate axis. Allowances for
imperfections (NEde1) and where appropriate for second order
effects (M2=NEde2) in slender columns are added automatically
to the first order moment input at E57 to give MEd in cells F57etc.
The input moment at E57 should have been resolved for bending
in two directions by the user.

The axial load:moment interaction chart for the specified section

also show relevant input load cases.

The load cases are identified.

Calcs!
These sheets show the derivation of the charts where moment
and axial load capacity is calculated at intervals of neutral axis
depth (in intervals from n.a. depth for N = 0 to n.a. depth for N
= Nbal, then at intervals from n.a. depth for N = N bal to n.a. depth
for N = Nuz.

Circle!
The calculations on this sheet determine slenderness criteria and
effective column lengths about both axes.

Cases!
Cases! identifies the smallest bar diameter that satisfies each of
the load cases. Calculations are made for both directions and the
spreadsheet decides which axis is dominant.

280

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:280 17/07/2006 17:17:50

 TCC54 Circular Column Design.xls

TCC54 Circular Column Design/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Madeby Date Page

Location Columns
A1,
etc
A2
at RMW 03-Jul-06 281
291
CIRCULAR COLUMN DESIGN TO EN 1992-1 : 2004
Checked Revision JobNo
Originated from TCC54.xls v3.0 on CD © 2004-05 TCC chg - FB625

MATERIALS
fck 30 N/mm² s 1.15 steel Cover 30 mm
fyk 500 N/mm² c 1.5 concrete dg 20 mm
 2.41 ef 1.45 c,dev 5 mm Remote
Steelclass A CONNECTING BEAMS/SLABS end
DE S I G N S E C T I O N RE S T RA I N T S b (mm) h (mm) L (m) (F) or (P)
h 475 mm L= 3600 mm Top
left 350 500 7.5 F
with 8 bars Top F Fixed Top
right 350 500 6 F
Btm F Fixed Bottom left 350 500 7.5 F
Braced Y . Bottom
right 350 500 6 F
Beam stiffnesses are 70% of uncracked stiffness
Columnabove?Y Colbelow?Y
BAR ARRANGEMENTS Data on connecting beams only affects loadcases, not charting.
T yp e B a rØ Asc % Li n k Ø Ba r c / c Nbal (kN) Nuz (kN) Checks
H 40 5.67 10 163.0 0.0 0.0 Asc > max %
H 32 3.63 8 165.3 899.0 5264.4 ok
H 25 2.22 8 166.7 963.0 4386.9 ok
H 20 1.42 8 167.7 1185.1 3892.1 ok
H 16 0.91 8 168.5 1355.4 3575.5 ok
H 12 0.51 8 169.3 1363.9 3329.2 ok

N:M interaction chart for 475 diameter column, grade C30/37 concrete and 30 mm cover

6000

Min M
5000

8H32
) 4000
N
(k
d 8H25
E LC2
N
D 8H20
A 3000 8H16
O LC3
L LC5
L LC1 8H12
IA
X
A
2000

LC6

1000

LC4

0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450

MOMENT MEd X (kNm)

LOADCASES Loadcase NEd (kN) m0e (kNm) MEd (kNm) Loadcase NEd (kN) m0e (kNm) MEd (kNm)
Double 1 2600 40 57.6 H81 2 4 610 170 174.1 8 H16
curvature ? 2 3500 110 133.7 H82 5 5 2750 315 333.6 8 H32
Yes 3 2850 120 139.3 H82 0 6 1500 240 250.1 8 H20

281

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:281 17/07/2006 17:17:51

 TCC55 Axial Column Shortening.xls
This spreadsheet works out column shortenings in accordance Any differential shortening between connected vertical members
with BS EN 1992-1-1 Clauses 3.1.3(1), 3.1.3(3)and Annex B, creep will generate a transfer of vertical load. If connecting slabs or
and shrinkage strain. It works from the roof down and assumes beams are stiff and/ or short, such load transfer can be substantial
that time 0 equates to construction of the lowest column. and, in tall buildings, may even be critical at ULS. If such effects
When ‘shortenings between floors’ need to be considered, this are considered to be critical between a group of vertical members,
spreadsheet calculates the longterm floor displacements due to the following procedure is recommended:
columns being loaded incrementally.
■ Run each column or wall and save it under an individual file
A detailed construction history is input so that time-dependent name.
creep and shrinkage factors may be computed. A maximum of 12
lifts of columns are currently catered for. It would not be practical ■ Write a routine within one of these worksheets to assess the
to superimpose further storeys by running this spreadsheet more amount of load transfer at each level, using long-term cracked
than once, but an extended version could be produced at a later section properties for connecting horizontal members. This
date if demand exists. will link the results between worksheets. Remember to adjust
estimated displacements by any elastic shortening that may
To investigate particular situations it is suggested that the have been included in a global frame analysis.
spreadsheet is run more than once. For instance, to investigate ■ Add a routine in each linked worksheet to modify the long-
column shortenings that affect partitions, it is suggested that term floor loads at each level, by adding transfer loads into
the spreadsheet is run twice once at partition installation and cells MAIN!Q15:Q26, which are already set up for this purpose.
secondly at say 30 years. NOTE: transfer of loads should be damped by a constant
factor, to reduce the number of iterations required.
■ Write a VBA macro to iterate this transfer process until a
MAIN! balance is reached (ie. residual transfer is close to zero).
■ Differential foundation displacements may also need to be
MAIN is used to input materials, dimensional and load data. Enter
general data first, before geometry and loading sequence. considered within this process.
Eurocode 2 permits RH (relative humidity) values between 10%
and 100%. Values of 50% (internal exposure) and 80% (external
Creep1!
exposure) are considered typical in the UK. Exposure will be
In a series of cascading calculations, Creep1 calculates the
external during the construction period, followed by a reduced
total creep and elastic shortenings based on applied dead and
RH in use, so when in doubt, a value of 65% could be appropriate.
permanent imposed loads. Concrete E values are based on the
The formulae in BS EN 1992-1-1 are used for concrete strength
mean 28 day strength f cm, adjusted by creep factors ϕ that allow
gain (3.1.2(6)) with age and for Young’s modulus, E (Table 3.1).
for both age at loading and load duration.
At present, specific values of gain of strength and E (determined
from tests) cannot be accommodated by this spreadsheet, but
may be accommodated at a later date. Creep2!
`Shortenings between floors’ are the amounts by which individual Again, in a series of cascading calculations, Creep2 similarly
column lifts may shorten in length following construction of calculates elastic shortenings that occur before each floor is
the floor immediately above. This value will directly affect any constructed.
cladding or brittle partitions between floors.

‘Floor Displacements’ are the long-term net displacements of

floors from the level at which they were constructed. The floor
Shrink!
at an individual column may therefore be cast at say 50% of Shrink! calculates the amount of drying shrinkage; for both total
this value above the nominal floor level, in order to minimise long-term and before construction of each floor.
racking effects.
effects of The particular
incremental shape
loading and the of the curve
effects is defined
of drying by
shrinkage.
It is assumed that any ‘shortenings between floors’ have been
compensated for and therefore dealt with prior to a floor’s
Notes!
construction. The difference between floor displacements of This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
adjacent columns will create a racking effect on any attached
cladding or brittle partitions.

282

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:282 17/07/2006 17:17:57

 TCC55 Axial Column Shortening.xls

TCC55 Axial Column Shortening/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M adeby Date Page
Location Column K2 rmw 03-Jul-06 283
293
AXIAL COLUMN SHORTENING to EN 1992-1 : 2004 C hecked Revision JobNo
Originated from TCC55.xls v3.0 on CD © 2002-2005 TCC chg - FB625
General Data Aggregate Quartzite
Quartzite
No of Storeys 12 Cementtype RR Occupancyat 250 daysfromlevel0
Curingtime 3 days
Ambient temp, ºC 20 Relative humidity % 50 2 . 0.3
0.3
Geometry & Loading Sequence
Permanent Load
Time Column below Col Floor At
ageB alanceA ge Perm Age
LEVEL
gap days fck Length H B ASL SW SW days ofGk days Imposed days
Roof 14 40 3750 300 300 452 2.2 354.4 7 118.1 28 44.3 82
11 14 40 3750 300 300 1257 2.2 354.4 7 118.1 28 62.0 96
10 14 40 3750 400 400 1257 3.8 354.4 7 118.1 28 62.0 110
9 14 40 3750 450 450 1257 4.9 354.4 7 118.1 28 62.0 124
8 14 40 3750 450 450 1963 4.9 354.4 7 118.1 28 62.0 138
7 14 60 3750 450 450 1257 4.9 354.4 7 118.1 28 62.0 152
6 14 60 3750 450 450 2592 4.9 354.4 7 118.1 28 62.0 166
5 14 60 3750 500 500 3217 6.0 354.4 7 118.1 28 62.0 180
4 14 60 3750 500 500 3217 6.0 354.4 7 118.1 28 62.0 194
3 14 80 3750 500 500 3217 6.0 354.4 7 118.1 28 62.0 208
2 14 80 3750 500 500 3217 6.0 354.4 7 118.1 28 62.0 222
1 14 80 3750 500 500 4825 6.0 354.4 7 118.1 28 62.0 236

Shortenings Between Floors

(mm)
C r e ep & Sh r in -
L i ft T o ta l 12.7 20.0 32.7
E l a s t ic kage 45.00
11 - R 1.87 2.15 4.02 0.11%
11.6 22.0 33.7
10 - 11 3.16 1.89 5.05 0.13%
41.25
9 - 10 2.59 1.95 4.54 0.12%
8-9 2.90 1.94 4.84 0.13% 10.8 22.0 32.7
37.50
7-8 3.40 1.85 5.25 0.14%
6-7 3.18 1.83 5.01 0.13% 9.7 21.9 31.7
5-6 3.45 1.71 5.16 0.14% 33.75
4-5 3.15 1.67 4.82 0.13% 8.6 21.2 29.8
3-4 3.51 1.67 5.18 0.14% 30.00
)
2-3 3.26 1.63 4.88 0.13% (m
l 7.6 19.5 27.1
1-2 3.56 1.63 5.19 0.14% e
v 26.25
0-1 3.69 1.55 5.24 0.14% e
L 6.6 17.7 24.3
22.50
Floor Displacements(mm)
Cr ee p & Sh rin- 5.6 15.3 20.9
Floor Level Total 18.75
E l a s ti c kage
Roof 45.00 20.0 12.7 32.7 4.6 13.0 17.6
11 41.25 22.0 11.6 33.7 15.00

10 37.50 22.0 10.8 32.7 3.5 10.0 13.5

9 33.75 21.9 9.7 31.7 11.25
8 30.00 21.2 8.6 29.8
2.5 7.1 9.6
7 Floors
26.25 19.5 7.6 27.1 7.50
6 22.50 17.7 6.6 24.3 C and E
1.3 3.75.0 Shrinkage
5 18.75 15.3 5.6 20.9
Total 3.75
4 15.00 13.0 4.6 17.6
3 11.25 10.0 3.5 13.5 0
0.0
2 7.50 7.1 2.5 9.6
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
1 3.75 3.7 1.3 5.0
Vertical Displacement
(mm)

283

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:283 17/07/2006 17:17:59

 TCC71 Stair Flight & Landing - Single.xls
TCC71.xls designs simply supported flights and landings to BS EN
1992. Input is required on two sheets.

FLIGHT!
This single sheet consists of the input and main output. Inputs
are in blue and underlined and most should be self-explanatory.

Only simply supported spans are catered for. If flights are

continuous with floors, the user should specify continuity steel
over supports as appropriate. Calculations are done per metre
width of flight. Input loads are assumed to be characteristic and
acting vertically. They should account for any undercuts. Self-
weight, moments and reactions are calculated automatically.
The area of steel required, Asreq, may be automatically increased
to increase modification factors and satisfy deflection criteria.
Nominal top reinforcement may be specified in order to help
overcome deflection problems. Dimensions are not checked for
compliance with Building Regulations.

Ultimate, characteristic dead and characteristic imposed

reactions are given below the indicative diagram.

LANDING!
Again, this single sheet consists of the input and main output.
Input defaults in magenta have been derived from FLIGHT! but
may be overwritten. Calculations are done per metre width of
landing.

Inputs are underlined and most should be self-explanatory.

As defaults, which can be overwritten, the material data and
characteristic flight reactions carry over from FLIGHT! Self-
weight, moments and reactions are calculated automatically.
The maximum width of landing over which flight loads can be
dispersed has been restricted to 1.8 m as with BS 8110.

Reactions are ultimate, both total and per metre run. The area
of steel required, As, can be automatically increased to satisfy
deflection criteria.

Dias!
Dias! calculates the reinforcement sizes and reinforcement
percentages for deflection modification factors used in FLIGHT!
and LANDING!

Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.

284

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:284 17/07/2006 17:18:05

 TCC71 Stair Flight & Landing - Single.xls

TCC71 Stair Flight & Landing -single/ LANDING!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M adeby Date Page
Location South
Staircase rmw 03-Jul-06 285
295
STAIR FLIGHTS AND LANDINGS to EN 1992-1: 2004 FLIGHT C hecked Revision JobNo
Originated from TCC71.xls v3.0 on CD © 2005 TCC chg - FB625

MATERIALS
fck 30 Mpa c 1.5 concrete Min bar Ø = 10
fyk 500 Mpa s 1.15 steel Max bar Ø = 16
dg 20 mm Density 25 kN/m³ Steel class = A
Cover 25 mm (Normal weight concrete) Nominal top steel ? Y

DIMENSIONS SECTIONAL ELEVATION

a= 600 mm landing A, h = 200

b= 2500 mm flight waist = 175
c= 1200 mm landing C, h = 200
d= -600 mm
e= -100 mm
Going = 250 mm L= 4
Rise = 1900 mm total 10 treads
Rise = 173 mm each step Rake = 34.64 º

LOADING
Imposed 4.00 kN/m² 43.64k N/mult 34.37k N/mult
Flight finishes 1.60 kN/m² (21.54+11.16) (16.91+8.84)
Landing finishes 1.30 kN/m²

DESIGN
LANDING A, gk = 5.00 + 1.30 = 6.30 kN/m² n = 1.25 x 6.30 + 1.50 x 4.0 = 13.87 kN/m²
FLIGHT, gk = 7.48 + 1.60 = 9.08 kN/m² n = 1.25 x 9.08 + 1.50 x 4.0 = 17.33 kN/m²
LANDING C, gk = 5.00 + 1.30 = 6.30 kN/m² n = 1.25 x 6.30 + 1.50 x 4.0 = 13.87 kN/m²

Zero shear is at 0.6 + (43.64 - 16.64) /17.33 = 2.157 m from left

M = 43.64 x 2.157 - 16.64 x 2.157 - 17.33 x 1.557²/2 = 37.22 kNm/m
d= 175-25-8=142mm K= 0.0615 As= 640mm²/m
PROVIDE H16 @ 270 B = 745 mm²/m
s= 232.8 Mpa Enhanced by 16.0 % for deflection H10 @ 350 T in span
L/d = 4,300 /142 = 30.28 > 22.7 x 1.331 x 1.000 = 30.28 allowed OK

285

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:285 17/07/2006 17:18:06

 TCC71 Stair Flight & Landing - single/ LANDING!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M adeby Date Page

Location South
Staircase rmw 03-Jul-06 296
286

STAIR FLIGHTS AND LANDINGS to EN 1992-1: 2004

Originated from TCC71.xls v3.0 on CD
LANDING
© 2005 TCC
C hecked
chg
Revision JobNo
FB625

MATERIALS
fck 30 N/mm² c 1.5 concrete Min bar Ø = 10
fyk 500 N/mm² s 1.15 steel Max bar Ø = 16
dg 20 mm Density 25 kN/m³
Cover 25 mm (Normal weight concrete) Nominal top steel ? Y

DIMENSIONS
a = 1200 mm depth, h = 175 mm
b = 1200 mm width, w = 1200 mm
c= 250 mm
d= 175 mm L= 3 mm

LOADING
LANDING Imposed 4.00 kN/m² 73.50 kNult 68.12 kNult
Finishes 1.50 kN/m² 61.25k N/mult 56.77k N/mult
Slab 4.38 kN/m²
n = 1.25 x 5.88 + 1.5 x 4.0 = 13.34 kN/m²
gk qk n1 = (1.25 x 21.54 + 1.5 x 11.16)/1.20 = 36.37 kN/m²
Flight a reaction 21.54 11.16 kN/m n2 = (1.25 x 16.91 + 1.5 x 8.84)/1.20 = 28.64 kN/m²
Flight b reaction 16.91 8.84 kN/m

DESIGN
Zero shear is at (61.25 - 2.33) /(13.34 + 36.37) + 0.175 = 1.360 m from left
M = 61.25 x 1.360 - 13.34 x 1.360²/2 - 36.37 x 1.185²/2 = 45.43 kNm/m
d= 175-25-8=142mm K= 0.0751 As= 792mm²/m
PROVIDE H16 @ 160 B = 1257 mm²/m
s= 310.1 Mpa Enhanced by 50.0 % for deflection H10 @ 350 T in span
L/d = 3,000 /142 = 21.12 > 19.1 x 1.000 x 1.000 = 19.05 allowed FAILS

286

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:286 17/07/2006 17:18:12

 TCC81 Foundation Pads.xls

TCC81 Foundation Pads.xls

(Subject to further interpretation)

This spreadsheet designs simple pad foundations from input of

material properties, dimensions and characteristic loads and
DOUBLE!
moments. Single column bases and combined double bases
are catered for on separate sheets. This version is “subject to In addition to graphs showing plan layout and ‘efficiency’,
this sheet gives moment diagrams for the two principal axes.
interpretation” as the full implications of Eurocode 7 and its
Design moments are taken at the edge of both column sections
National Annex have yet to be incorporated. For example, ground
Suggestions are made, under the ‘ Operating instructions’ column,
bearing pressure distribution at ULS will in due course be changed
for the optimum plan size of the base and eccentricities given the
from trapezoidal to rectangular.
column offsets from one another.
This spreadsheet was prepared in line with BS EN 1997 [29]
The user’s attention is drawn to the fact that the analysis is done
but before UK National Annex to EN1997-1 was available. The
in two orthogonal directions. When column eccentricities are
spreadsheets therefore may not fully integrate with the NA
large in both directions the analysis may not account adequately
but has been prepared on the basis of Prescriptive measure (i.e.
for local effects (e.g. bottom cantilever moments on two sides of
comparable experience) and therefore in line with ‘traditional’
each column – loads in opposite corners gives bottom moments of
methods of design (including the 25% allowable overload
0 kNm). In such cases, it may be better to change the orientation
for wind load and trapezoidal or triangular ground pressure
of the base in such a way that eccentricity in one direction is
distributions at ULS rather than rectangular).
minimal. Warnings about double eccentricities are given when
the distances between column centrelines exceed 15% of the
A diagram is provided to illustrate the dimensions: a chart
showing scale plan views is provided to help ensure gross errors relevant base dimension in each orthogonal direction.
are avoided. The ‘efficiency’ diagrams are provided so that the user
Comparison with FE analysis suggests this is reasonable so long
may gauge how hard the base is working in respect to allowable
as the base is thick and rigid.
increase in ground bearing pressure, bending and shear in the two
axes together with a measure on punching shear capacity. If the
design is invalid, this chart should help identify the problem.

The spreadsheet does not allow for punching shear links – bending Legends!
This sheet shows dimensions, axes, corners and notation used.
reinforcement is increased to ensure allowable shear, v Rd c, is
adequate. The user should note that punching shear perimeters
can jump from being four-sided to being two- or three-sided,
leading to unexpectedly large increases in reinforcement for
SingleDet!
increases in base thickness. This sheet shows workings and is not necessarily intended for
printing out other than for checking purposes.
TCC81.xls allows the user to specify whether or not equations
6.10a and 6.10b of EN 1990 may be employed. Allowable bearing pressure is taken as an allowable increase in
bearing pressure and density of concrete –density of excavated
Warnings are given if columns overlap base edges. material (i.e. soil) is used in the calculations. The program
assumes that pads are embedded to depth H in the soil.
SINGLE! Design moments are generally those at the face of the column.
Both sides of the column are checked for moment in each
Suggestions are made, under the ‘ Operating instructions’ column,
direction to ensure maxima are identified. Shear enhancement is
for the optimum plan size of the base. It is important that the
allowed for both beam and punching shear.
principal usage of the structure is selected from the combo-box
in column L.
Neither crack widths, factors of safety against sliding, nor water
tables are catered for. Where resultant eccentricities are outside
This is used in the determination of partial load factors, if EN 1990
the base a warning message is given; the general status message
equations 6.10a
is also utilised onand
the6.10b are permitted.
DOUBLE! sheet. The usage selected here is updated as well.
Factors of safety against overturning are checked (The equilibrium
Where two centres are given, e.g. 14 T16 @ 200 & 325 B2, bars
limit state EQU to EN 1990). Warnings are also given at the onset
need to be grouped more closely in the central part of the base.
of an uplift situation.

287

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:287 17/07/2006 17:18:18

 DoubleDet!
This sheet shows workings and is not necessarily intended for
printing out other than for checking purposes.

The notes for SingleDet! above also apply.

Graf!
This sheet comprises data for graphs for both SINGLE! and
DOUBLE!

Refs!
This sheet comprises the values for nationally determined
parameters that have been used in the spreadsheet. These data
reflect the values given in draft UK National Annexes for EN 1990
and EN 1992.
Designers should ensure that these data are current when the
spreadsheet is used. When using TCC81 for permanent design,
designers are strongly advised to include a copy of this sheet with
any design calculations.

Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.

288

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:288 17/07/2006 17:18:20

 TCC81 Foundation Pads.xls

TCC81 Foundation Pads/ SINGLE!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M adeby Date Page
Location Level
Base
-1B1 RMW 03-Jul-06 289
299
PAD FOUNDATION DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Single column base Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC81.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2003-2006 TCC chg - FB625
Usage: Office
MATERIALS fck 30 N/mm² dg 20 mm c 1.5 concrete
fyk 500 N/mm² cover 50 mm s 1.15 steel
Densities - Concrete 25 kN/m³ Soil 18 kN/m³ Wk 0.3 mm
Bearing pressure 200 kN/m² (net allowable increase)
Steel class A
DIMENSIONS mm
BASE COLUMN
L=3 000 h=5 00
B=3 000 b=5 00
depth H = 500
ex
= 0 ey
= 0

COLUMN REACTIONS kN, kNm characteristic P ot (to scale) Key

DEA D IM PO SE D WIND
Axial (kN) 1500.0 128.0
Grnd Brg Pressure 94%
Mx (kNm) -20.0
My (kNm) As/Asprov sx 61%
Hx (kN)
Hy (kN) sy 59%

ψ0 = 0.7 0.5 Shear vEd xx 49%

see EN 1990 - Table A1.1
STATUS VALID DESIGN vEd yy 50%

BEARING PRESSURES kN/m² characteristic Punching 99%

CORNER 1234
now ind 188.8 179.9 188.8 179.9 0% 25% 50% 75% 100% 125%

withwind 188.8 179.9 188.8 179.9 Efficiency

REINFORCEMENT  of As within 1,820 mm  of As within 1,760 mm

Mxx = 572.5 kNm Myy = 562.3 kNm
b = 3000 mm b = 3000 mm
d= 440 mm d= 420 mm
As = 3150 mm² As = 3242 mm²
Provide 17H20 @ 160 & 205 B1 Provide 17H20 @ 155 & 215 B2
As prov = 5341 mm² As p rov = 5341 mm²
Asx increased 67% for shear Asy increased 60% for shear
BEAM SHEAR . .
VEd xx = 593.7 kN at d from col face VED yy = 597.4 kN at d from col face
vEd = 0.450 N/mm² vEd = 0.474 N/mm²
or VEd xx = 272.2 kN at 2d from col face or VED yy = 295.1 kN at 2d from col face
vEd = 0.206 N/mm² vEd = 0.234 N/mm²
vRd,c = 0.462 N/mm² vRd,c = 0.473 N/mm²

PUNCHING SHEAR . .
d ave = 430 mm u crit = 7404 mm
As prov = 0.414 % vEd max = 2.750 N/mm² at col face
vEd = 0.464 N/mm² vRd,c = 0.467 N/mm²

289

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:289 17/07/2006 17:18:21

 TCC81 Foundation Pads/ DOUBLE!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group M adeby Date Page
Location B3/B4
Base RMW 03-Jul-06 290
300
PAD FOUNDATION DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Combined base Checked Revision JobNo

Originated from TCC81.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2003-2006 TCC chg - FB625

Usage: Office
MATERIALS fck 30 N/mm² dg 20 mm c 1.5 concrete
fyk 500 N/mm² cover 50 mm s 1.15 steel
Densities - Concrete 25 kN/m³ Soil 18 kN/m³ teel class A
Bearing pressure 125 kN/m² (net allowable)

COLUMN REACTIONS kN, kNm characteristic

Column 1 (rhs) DEAD IMPOSED WIND Column 2 (lhs) DEAD IMPOSED WIND
Axial 225.0 2 25.0 112.5 Axial 225.0 225.0 112.5
Mx Mx
My My 50.0
Hx Hx
Hy Hy 25.0
DIMENSIONS mm
BASE COLUMN 1 (rhs) COLUMN 2 (lhs)
L= 3000 h1 = 300 h2= 300
B= 3000 b1 = 300 b2= 300
depth H = 475
ex = 300 ex1 = 150 ex2 = 150
ey = 1000 ey1 = 500 ey2 = 500

STATUS VALID DESIGN PLOT (to scale)

BEARING PRESSURES kN/m² characteristic
Grnd Brg Pressure 91%
CORNER 1234
no wind 103.3 103.3 103.3 103.3 As/Asprov sx 85%

with wind 142.1 142.1 114.6 114.6 sy 97%

Shear vEd xx 45%

REINFORCEMENT
Btm Mxx - 421.7 kNm Myy - 235.6 vEd yy 28%
b= 3000 mm b = 3000 Punching 84%
d= 419 mm d = 4 07
As = 2437 mm² As = 1401 0% 133%

PRO VID E 23H1 2 @ 150 B1 & 17H12 @ 150 & 200 B2 Efficiency
As prov = 2601 mm² As prov = 1923
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5
Detail to clause 3.11.3.2 50
Top Mxx + 0.0 kNm Myy + 0.0 0
-50
d= 421 mm d = 4 13 -100
As= 0 mm² As= 0 -150
-200
PRO VI DE 19 H8 @ 1 75 T1 & 1 9H 8 @ 12 5 & 17 5 T-250
2
As prov = 955 mm² As prov = 955 -300
-350
. . Moment Columns Zeroaxis

BEAM SHEAR . . Mx Diagram (1.35G+1.05Q)

Vxx = 365.9 kN at d Vyy = 219.3 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5
v= 0.291 N/mm² v= 0.180 50
or Vxx = 169.6 kN at 2d or Vyy = 18.0 0
v= 0.135 N/mm² v= 0.015 -50
vc = 0.324 N/mm² vc = 0.326 -100

-150
PUNCHING SHEAR . .
-200
d ave = 413 mm u crit = 8990 mm

290

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:290 17/07/2006 17:18:29

 TCC82 Pilecap Design.xls

TCC82 Pilecap Design.xls

(Subject to further interpretation)

This spreadsheet designs pilecaps with between two and six piles, allow for this possible deviation. Pile reactions are not similarly
and then prepares a sketch drawing of each type of cap together increased.
with a bar schedule. Bending theory is employed throughout to
design the caps. This version is “subject to interpretation” as the Dimensional data for a double pile cap and the supported
full implications of Eurocode 7 and its National Annex have yet column are then entered, then column axial loads, moments and
to be incorporated. horizontal shears for dead load, imposed load and wind load. The
results of calculations for all Eurocode 2 loading combinations
This spreadsheet was prepared in line with BS EN 1997 [29] are then displayed below (on page 1), together with the required
but before UK National Annex to EN1997-1 was available. The arrangement of reinforcement. More detailed calculations may
spreadsheets therefore may not fully integrate with the NA be found by scrolling down to page 2.
but has been prepared on the basis of Prescriptive measure (i.e.
comparable experience) and therefore in line with ‘traditional’
methods of design (including the 25% allowable overload for 3CAP!, 4CAP!, 5CAP! and 6CAP!
wind load).
These sheets are identical in function to DOUBLE!, but deal with
This spreadsheet was prepared in line with BS EN 1997 [29] caps having 3, 4, 5 and 6 piles respectively. Material properties,
but before UK National Annex to EN1997-1 was available. The pile diameter and tolerance are picked up from DOUBLE!.
spreadsheets therefore may not fully integrate with the NA
but has been prepared on the basis of Prescriptive measure (i.e. Page numbers for printing do not follow on from previous sheets,
comparable experience) and therefore in line with ‘traditional’ so must be entered by the user. This allows for intermediate
methods of design (including the 25% allowable overload for calculation pages (perhaps for loading) to be inserted.
wind load).

Depending upon the pilecap’s dimensions, the alternative strut- SCHEDULE!

and-tie method of design may be possible, but is not covered by
this spreadsheet. There are seven main sheets: DOUBLE!, 3CAP!, This sheet is a bar schedule complying with BS 8666, for the
4CAP!, 5CAP!, 6CAP!, SCHEDULE! and DRAWING! pilecap drawing on the DRAWING! sheet.

Each of the first five sheets contains two pages that may be Beneath the ‘ Operating instructions’, the number of each type
printed out. The first (or upper) page contains input data and of cap must be entered. These numbers are then used on the
a summary of results, while the second (or lower) page shows schedule and the drawing.
more detailed calculations.

The selection of size and number of top and bottom bars is DRAWING!
automated. The number of bars determined by either:
This sheet draws approximately to scale plans and elevations
with reinforcement and bar marks for each of the cap types. It
■ area of steel required/ area of maximum sized bar (taken to
is intended for printout to an A3 sheet. If the user wishes to add
be 32 mm diameter),
additional notes, these may be added in cell U27.
■ spacing rules or
■ number of legs of links required in shear.
Graf!
The size of link to be used has also been automated.
This sheet provides data for the charts in all sheets. It is not
The designer and detailer may wish to rationalise the output intended for formal printing
given on the DRAWING! sheet. But doing so will obviously affect
the bar data on SCHEDULE!
Notes!
DOUBLE! This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.

The DOUBLE! sheet is where all material properties are entered,

together with covers, pile diameter and pile tolerance. All
subsequent sheets use these same properties. Pile tolerance is the
amount by which a pile may deviate from its intended position.
This value is used in calculation to increase bending moments to

291

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:291 17/07/2006 17:18:34

 TCC82 Pilecap Design/ DOUBLE!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client BigBucks PLC M adeby Date Page
Location Pilecap
G14 Rod 03-Jul-06 292
302
PILECAP DESIGN to EN 1992-1: 2004 Double Pilecap C hecked Revision JobNo

Originated from TCC82.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2003-2006 TCC - - FB625

Usage: Traffic, 30 to 160kN
MATERIALS fck 35 N/mm² dg 20 mm γc 1.5 concrete
fyk 500 N/mm² T&S cover 50 mm γs 1.15 steel
Steelclass A Btmcover 75 mm Concdensity 25 kN/m³
Pile capacity 525 kN
DIMENSIONSmm
OLUMN
C PILECAP
→ = 350 A
= 400
↑ = 350 B= 1500
PileØ=4 50 C=4 00
Tolerance= 0 E= 750
depth H = 400
COLUMN ACTIONSkN, kNm characteristic
DEAD IMPOSED WIND
Axial (kN) 218 104.2 27.5 PLOT (to scale) KEY
M (kNm) 23.2 10.4 2.7
H (kN) 0 0 0 STATUS VALID DESIGN
0 = 0.7 0.5
REINFORCEMENT PILE REACTIONSkN
BOTTOM M = 164.2 kNm PILE1 PILE2
d=309.0mm, As=1,296mm² Gk+Qk 147.9 192.7
7H16 B= 1,407mm² Gk+Qk+Wk 159.9 208.3
TOP M = 0.0 kNm
d = 338.0 mm, As = 0 mm²
4H8 T = 201 mm² 4H8 02 T
LINKS
VEd = 293 kN, vEd = 1.185 N/mm²
vRd 2d/av = 0.825 N/mm² 7H16 01 B
Asw/S = 0.9691 mm Links 11H8 03.200 + 2x11H8 04.200
4 Legs H8 @ 200 LINKS= 1.0053 mm ELEVATION

292

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:292 17/07/2006 17:18:37

 TCC82 Pilecap Design.xls

TCC82 Pilecap Design/ DOUBLE!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client BigBucks PLC M adeby Date Page
Location PilecapG14-DetailedCalculations Rod 03-Jul-06 293
303
PILECAP DESIGN to EN 1992-1: 2004 Double Pilecap C hecked Revision JobNo

Originated from TCC82.xlsv3.0on CD ©2003-2006TCC - - FB625

Cap load (kN) = 18.4 Piles @ (m) 1.500 PILE REACTIONSkN

or (kN/m) = 8.00 PILE1 PILE2
Gk+Qk 147.9 192.7 
OVERTURNING MOMENTS
- kNm characteristic Gk+Qk+Wk 159.9 208.3 
DEAD IMPOSED WIND 1.35Gk + 1.5Qk 206.4 269.0
23.2 10.4 2.7 1.0Gk+1.5Wk 120.7 157.0 
1.35Gk + 1.5Qk + 0.75Wk 229.2 294.4
BENDING MOMENTS- kNm
1.35Gk + 1.5Qk 1.0Gk + 1.5Wk 1.35Gk + 1.5Qk + 0.75Wk
of col M 113.6 65.6 126.6
arm (m) 0.575
of col M 149.5 86.5 164.2
arm (m) 0.575
(including tolerance)
B OTT OMS T EE L TOPS T EE L
Bottom M = 164.2 Ø16 TopM= 0.0 Ø8 K' = 0.2067
=d 309.0 =d 338.0 min
As
=0.167%
=K 0.0614 =0
K .0000
= z 291.2 = z 321.1
=As1296 =As
0
Provide 1296 Provide 0
= No7 = No
4
Asprov= 1407 Asprov= 201
s = 286 s = 0
Max=
S 193.1 Max=
S 300.0
Min
=S 41.0 Min
=S 33.0
S= 111.3 7H16 B S= 225.3 4H8 T

SHEAR Crit sectionis 135.0 from pile centres 0.569%

PILE 1 1.35Gk + 1.5Qk 1.0Gk + 1.5Wk 1.35Gk + 1.5Qk + 0.75Wk
VEd 205.0 119.6 227.7
a=v 440.0 =v
Ed 0.9211 =
cot 2.50 v 2d/av = 0.8246
Rd
PILE 2
VEd 267.5 155.9 293.0
a=v 440.0 =v
Ed 1.1851 =
cot 2.50 v
Rd 2d/av = 0.8246
vRd,max = 4.152
Asw/Sre quired= 0.9691 mm Ø8 links
Nooflegs=4 Linkspacing=2 00 4 Legs H8 @ 200 LINKS

293

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:293 17/07/2006 17:18:42

 TCC82 Pilecap Design/ 3CAP!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client BigBucks PLC M adeby Date Page
Location Pilecap
F13 Rod 03-Jul-06 294
14
PILECAP DESIGN to EN 1992-1: 2004 Triple Pilecap C hecked Revision JobNo
OriginatedfromTCC82.xlsv3.0onCD ©2003-2006TCC - - FB625
DIMENSIONSmm Usage: Office
COLUMN PILECAP
→ = 300 A
= 350
↑ = 300 B= 1300
C = 1126
PileØ=4 50 E=3 75.33
Min spacing = 1300 depth H = 400
Tolerance = 0

COLUMN ACTIONSkN, kNm characteristic PLOT (to scale) KEY

DEAD IMPOSED WIND
Axial (kN) 355.5 118.2 10.0 STATUS VALID DESIGN
Mx (kNm) 10.0 5.0 2.0
My (kNm) 20.0 10.0 5.0 PILE REACTIONSkN characteristic
Hx (kN) PILE1 PILE2 PILE3
Hy (kN) Gk+Qk 141.0 169.4 192.5
0 = 0.7 0.5 Gk+Qk+Wk 139.9 173.4 199.6
REINFORCEMENT
EW (2-3) M = 178.2 kNm, b = 1,050 mm
d = 309.0 mm, As = 1,396 mm² 4H8 06 T1
7H16 B = 1,407 mm²

VEd = 274.1 kN, bw = 1,050 mm 7H16 05 B1

vEd = 0.845 N/mm², Asw/S = 0.994 mm Links 8H8 07 200 + 2x8H8 08 200
4 LegsH8 @ 200 LINKS= 1.005 mm  ELEVATION

NS (1-2/3) M = 117.1 kNm, b = 1,798 mm

d = 293.0 mm, As = 967 mm² 4H8 10 T2
5H16 B = 1,005 mm²

VEd = 194.9 kN, bv = 1,260 mm 5H16 09 B2

vEd = 0.528 N/mm², Asw/S = 1.193 mm Links 8H8 11 150 + 2x8H8 12 150
4 LegsH8 @ 150 LINKS= 1.340 mm  ELEVATION

294

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:294 17/07/2006 17:18:48

 TCC82 Pilecap Design.xls

TCC82 Pilecap Design/ 3CAP!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client BigBucks PLC M adeby Date Page
Location Pilecap
F13 Rod 03-Jul-06 295
15
PILECAP DESIGN to EN 1992-1: 2004 Triple Pilecap C hecked Revision JobNo
Originated fromTCC82.xlsv3.0onCD ©2003-2006TCC - - FB625

Capload= 29.2 kN Groupcentre@ 751 mfrompile1

PILE REACTIONSkN
PILE1 PILE2 PILE3 OVERTURNING MOMENTS
- kNm characteristic
Gk+Qk 141.0 169.4 192.5 . DEAD IMPOSED WIND
Gk+
Qk+Wk 139.9 173.4 199.6 Mx 10.0 5.0 2.0
1.35Gk+1.5Qk 1 94.9 234.7 267.0 My 20.0 10.0 5.0
1.0Gk+1.5Wk 108.8 135.4 155.4 .
1.35Gk +1.5Qk+0.75Wk 193.8 238.7 274.1 .

BENDING MOMENTS- kNm

1.35Gk + 1.5Qk 1.0Gk + 1.5Wk 1.35Gk + 1.5Qk + 0.75Wk
My v of col 117.1 65.4 116.4
My ^ of col 113.1 65.5 115.6 (including tolerance)
Mx 173.6 101.0 178.2

E -W
S T E EL N -SST E EL
M= 178.2 Ø16 M= 117.1 Ø16 K' = 0.2067
=b 1050 =b 1798 min
As
0.167%
=

=3d 09.0 = d 293.0

=0K .0508 =K 0.0217
= z 293.6 = z 278.4
As
= 1396 As
= 967
Provide 1396 Provide 967
= No7 = No
5
Asprov= 1407 Asprov= 1005
s = 307 s = 298
Max=
S 165.6 Max=
S 177.1
Min
=S 41.0 Min
=S 41.0
S= 94.7 7H16 B S= 142.0 5H16 B

SHEAR Crit section is 135.0 from p ile centres

PILES 2 & 3 Ø8 links
VEd= 274.1 b= 1050 l=0 .434% cot  = 2.50
=av 515.0 Ed=0
v .8448 v
Rd2d/a=v 0.6434 v
Rd,max = 4.152
Asw/S= 0.9939 Nooflegs= 4 Spacing= 200 4 LegsH8 @ 200 LINKS
PILE 1 Ø8 links
VEd= 194.9 b= 1260 =0
l .272% cot  = 2.50
=
av 615.7 Ed=0
v .5280 v 2d/a=v
Rd 0.5110 v
Rd,max = 4.152
Asw/S= 1.1926 Nooflegs= 4 Spacing= 150 4 LegsH8 @ 150 LINKS

PUNCHING At column Face At 465.7 from column face (1.55d perimeter)

=VEd 664.7 1= u
4126  = 1.112
vEd= 1.840 dave= 301.0 vEd= 0.5353
vRd,max = 4.152 ok l=0 .231% v Rd 2d/av = 0.6546 ok

295

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:295 17/07/2006 17:18:54

 TCC82 Pilecap Design/ SCHEDULE!

Bar schedule ref : 202 01 Rev: -

The Concrete Centre
Site
ref
: SpreadsheetstoEurocode2 Date
prepared
: 03-Jul-06

Job no : FB625 Prepared by : Rod Checked by : -

No. of A* B* C* D* E/R *
Length of
Type and No. bars Shape
Member Bar mark Total No. each bar †
size of mbrs in code
mm mm mm mm mm mm
each

Double 01 H 16 4 7 28 2375 21 130 2175

Pilecaps 02 H8 4 4 16 2175 00
03 H8 4 11 44 2075 51 270 695 115
04 H8 4 22 88 500 31 115 50 270 115
3-Pile Caps 05 H 16 3 7 21 2475 21 320 1890
06 H 12 3 4 12 1875 00
07 H8 3 8 24 1975 51 270 650 115
08 H8 3 16 48 500 31 115 50 270 115
09 H 16 3 5 15 1975 21 155 1715
10 H 12 3 4 12 1700 00
11 H8 3 8 24 1825 51 240 600 115

12 H8 3 16 48 475 31 115 50 240 115

4-Pile Caps 13 H 16 5 18 90 2225 21 145 1975
14 H8 5 10 50 1975 00
15 H 16 5 18 90 2225 21 145 1975
16 H8 5 10 50 1975 00
17 H 10 5 100 500 600 31 120 60 345 120
5-Pile Caps 18 H 12 2 19 38 2625 21 125 2410
19 H8 2 10 20 2400 00
21 H 12 2 20 40 2625 21 125 2410
22 H 8 2 11 22 2400 00
20 H 10 2 80 160 700 31 120 60 450 120
6-Pile Caps 23 H 12 1 28 28 2100 21 125 1890
24 H 12 1 14 14 1875 00
26 H 12 1 17 17 3400 21 125 3175
27 H 12 1 9 9 3175 00
28 H 10 1 84 84 750 31 120 60 495 120
ThisschedulecomplieswithBS8666. 1,770 kg on this schedule PILECAPDESIGNtoEN1992-1:2004

Specified
* multiples
in 5mm.
of † Specified in multiples of 25mm. 2003-2006
© TCC

296

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:296 17/07/2006 17:18:59

 TCC82 Pilecap Design.xls

TCC82 Pilecap Design/ DRAWING!

. . CL P s kc uBgi B 202 - -
s r g n
e
. d fo in w
o
i s t
. m s g c h
5 s
t neil C o N g wD noi si v eR dekc eh C
o & n e
3 t i n t
C t p w n o
o o a d o n
e b t r si C s
2 edoc or uE ot st eehs daer pS
n
526 BF 60-l uJ- 30 do R
d d
a
r m m a . g .c m
g An s in it a
m m G o n e
te 5 0 ti io w a b t c ej or P o N boJ et a D y b eda M
7 5 to a s a m
S re
E r r r n t en r ra
d &
s
T cn
e
v
e
v e
f e si g b
e ri m
ert ne C et er c no C eh T
O o o o i h a i a
l
N C C C R o d T d s
o N 5 - pa C eli P 4

1 2
B B
3 5
1 1
6 6
1 1
H H 0
) 8 8 0
2 1 1 2
1 N 7
E s 1 N
g IO
p
a e T 0 IO
c L 1 T
k A H A
lie n V
E
0 V
i 1 E
P
( L L x L
0 E 0 E
N 1
A
1
 s 
L k
P 1 2 n
i
T T L
4 6
1 1
8 8
H H
0 0
1 1

o N 3 - pa C eli P 3 o N 1 - pa C eli P 6

1 2
1 2 B B
B B 6 3
5 9 2 2
0 0 0 0 2 2
1
6
1 0
2 6
1 5
1 H
7 1
H
H 8 H 2 1 8
7 0 5 1 2 0
) 8 8 ) 5
3 0 3
1 H H 1
F 8 N 8 N C s N 5 N
x O
I x O g O 2 O
I
p 2 2 I p e I 0
a T T a L T T
c + A + c 1 A
e A k A H
il
0
0
V
E
0
5 V le
i in V 6
V
E
P 2 L 1 E P L E x L
( E L ( L 4 E
7 1 E 4 E 1
N 0 1  N 1  s
A 1 8
 2 8 A k 
L L
P T H T H P in
6 8 0 8 L
0 s 1 s 2
8 k 8 k 1 T
H n
i H n
i T 4
4 L 4 L 7 2
2 2
2 1
1 H
H 4
9 1

o N 4 - pa C eli P 2 o N 2 - pa C eli P 5

B 2 1
1 0 B B
0 0 8 1
6 2 1 2
.
1 4 2 2
H 0 1 1
7 8 H 5 H
) ) 9 2 0
4 H 1 1 3 2
1 1 1
G 1 N N D 0 N s
x IO 2 O g N
p 2
T IO p 0
I
T e IO
a + T a 1 L T
c A A c A
e 0 V e H V k A
il 0 E E
V il 8 E i V
n
P( 2
.
L L (P
x
0 L L EL
E E
N 0 
3 E
 N 1
s  0 
1 E
A 8 A k
L L n
P T H P 2 i 1
1 T L T
2 1
0 s 9 2
k 1 2
8
H in 8 8
4 L H H
0 1
1 1

297

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:297 17/07/2006 17:19:02

 Admin folder
Under the Admin folder will be found several files associated with Column width and cell overlap problems may occur unless the
the use of the spreadsheets. correct fonts and default font size are installed.

To the best of our knowledge these fonts are copyright-free.

Readme.doc
Essential for first time users of the spreadsheets in Word format. By Others
The TCC disclaim any responsibility for programs by others. These
Spreadsheet Issue sheet.xls programs and files are provided to help dissemination. They are
subject to the authors’ conditions of use.
This file shows the version history of the spreadsheets.
Bar Schedule
UserGuid Version 3.doc: This folder contains Barshed8666.xlt, a spreadsheet template
for the scheduling of steel for the reinforcement of concrete to
‘Word’ file of User Guide
BS 8666:2005. The aim of the spreadsheet is to reduce the time
taken to produce a bar schedule, eliminate arithmetical errors,
This file formed the basis of the printed User Guide. It may be
loaded, read and printed out by using Word 97 or subsequent reduce scheduling errors, increase compliance with the BSI
releases. The file is included to provide help and to allow printing specified format for bar scheduling and to facilitate electronic
data interchange. The spreadsheet has the additional ability
of parts of the document. It may also be used as a basis for
to produces weight schedules without the need for additional
comment.
input.

The spreadsheet presents a familiar interface to the user who has

User Guide Version 3.pdf: produced schedules by hand and it is simple to use. It will guide
the user through the scheduling process while checking the input
‘Adobe Acrobat’ file of the User Guide is in accordance with British Standard requirements.
This User Guide will be made available as an Acrobat file on
future editions of the accompanying CD-ROM. It will present the This template is made available as shareware by its author, Chris
full User Guide in colour. Adobe Acrobat Reader v 4.0 or later will Buczkowski. For further information, including registration details
be required to read and interrogate the .pdf file. and support, etc. go to www.structural-engineering.fsnet.co.uk or
email: [email protected]

The Fonts
This folder contains the font files:
■ Tekton~i.ttf
■ Tekton~n.ttf
■ Marker.ttf

These fonts have been included in order to give users access to

the fonts intended for the spreadsheets.

These upright fonts were used in the spreadsheets in order to

emulate a designer’s handwriting and to allow an adequate
amount of information to be shown across the page and in each
cell. As described under Loading a spreadsheet for the first time
see (FAQ), unless the appropriate fonts and default font size have
been installed, the appearance on screen will be different from
the publication and from that intended.

298

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:298 17/07/2006 17:19:07

 References and further reading

References and further reading

References
1 Goodchild, C.H. Economic concrete frame elements. British 19 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 6399: Part 1: 1996. Loading
Cement Association, Crowthorne, 1997. 128 pp. for buildings. Code of practice for dead and imposed loads. British
Standards Institution, London, 1996.
2 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 8110: 1997.
Structural use of concrete. Part 1. Code of practice for design 20 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. CP 110: 1972.Code of practice
and construction. British Standards Institution, London, 1997 up to for the structural use of concrete. British Standards Institution,
and including Amendment 3. London, 1972.
3 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1992-1-1: 2004. 21 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 5400: 1988. Steel, concrete
Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structure (part 1-1) General rules and and composite bridges. British Standards Institution, London, 1988.
rules for buildings, including UK National Annex to BS EN 1992-1-1:
Design of Concrete Structures Part 1-1 BSI London 2005. 22 RAFIQ, M.Y. AND SOUTHCOMBE, C. Genetic algorithms in optimal
design and detailing of reinforced concrete biaxial columns supported
4 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 8002: 1994. Code of by a declarative approach for capacity checking . International Journal
practice for earth retaining structures. British Standards Institution, of Computers and Structures, 69 (1998), pp 443 - 457.
London, 1994.
23 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 8004: 1986. Code of
5 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 8007: 1987. Code of practice practice for foundations. British Standards Institution, London, 1986.
for design of concrete structures for retaining aqueous liquids. British
Standards Institution, London, 1987. 24 NARAYANAN, R S. Comparison of design requirements in EC2 and BS
8110. The Structural Engineer, Vol. 67, No 11, 6 June 1989, pp. 218 -
6 INSTITUTION OF STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS ET AL. Earth retaining 227.
structures. (Civil Engineering Code of Practice No. 2.) Institution of
Structural Engineers, London, 1975. 224 pp. 25 BEEBY, A.W. ET AL.Worked examples for the design of concrete
buildings. British Cement Association, Crowthorne, 1994. 256 pp.
7 MACLEOD, I.A. ET AL. Information technology for the structural
engineer. The Structural Engineer, Vol. 77, No. 3, 2 February 1999. pp. 26 BEEBY, A.W. & NARAYANAN, R.S. Designers handbook to Eurocode 2
23 - 25. Part 1.1: Design of concrete structures. Thomas Telford Ltd, London,
1994. 242 pp.
8 STANDING COMMITTEE ON STRUCTURAL SAFETY. Standing
Committee on Structural Safety , 10th report, July 1992 – June 1994. 27 WEBSTER, R. & Brooker, O. How to design concrete structures using
SETO Ltd, London, 1994. 32 pp. Eurocode 2: Deflections. The Concrete Centre, Camberley, Draft in
preparation 2005, 6pp.
9 ANSLEY, M. Liability concerns require adaptable software. Concrete
International, Vol. 19, No. 12, December 1997. pp. 37, 38. 28 INS TITUTION OF STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS. Manual for the design of
reinforced concrete building structures to EC2 . I Struct E, Draft in
10 KHAN, S. Techno Consultants Ltd, Manchester. Correspondence with preparation 2005.
authors, May 1999.
29 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION BS EN 1997-1: 2004, Eurocode
11 MOSLEY, W.H. & BUNGEY, J.H. Reinforced concrete design (4th 7: Geotechnical design. Part 1. General rules, BSI, London
edition). Macmillan, Basingstoke, 1990. 392 pp.
30 CONCRETE SOCIETY. Deflections in concrete slabs and beams,
12 REYNOLDS, C.E. & STEEDMAN, J.C. Reinforced concrete designer’s Technical Report 58, The Concrete Society, Camberley. 2005
handbook (10th edition). E&FN Spon, London, 1998. 448 pp.
31 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION, PD 6687,Background paper
13 ALLEN, A.H. Reinforced concrete design to BS 8110 - simply explained. to the UK National Annex to BS EN 1992-1-1 and BS EN 1992-1-2, BSI,
E&FN Spon, London, 1988. 256 pp. London. 2006
14 THE CONCRETE SOCIETY. Post-tensioned concrete floors – Design 32 CONSTRUCT, National Structural Concrete Specification for building
Handbook, Technical Report No 43. The Concrete Society, construction (NSCS) Third Edition, 2004, Concrete Society,
Slough (now Crowthorne), 1994. 162 pp. Camberley
15 HIGGINS, J.B. & ROGERS, B.R. Designed and detailed (BS 8110:1997). 33 CONCRETE SOCIETY, Technical Report 43 Post-tensioned concrete
British Cement Association, Crowthorne, 1998. 28 pp. floors – Design Handbook, Second Edition, Concrete Society,
Camberley 2005
16 KHAN, S. & WILLIAMS, M. Post -tensioned concrete floors.
Butterworth Heinnemann, Oxford, 1995. 312 pp. 34 Brooker, O. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2:-
17 CEMENT AND CONCRETE ASSOCIATION.Basic data for the Getting Started. The Concrete Centre, 2005
prediction of shrinkage and creep. Training note TDH 2391. Cement 35 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION BS EN 1991-1: 2002 Eurocode1:
and Concrete Association (now British Cement Association), Slough Actions on structures - Part 1-1 General Actions - Densities, Self
(now Crowthorne), 11 pp. weight, imposed loads for Buildings, BSI, 2002, including UK national
Annex to BS EN 1991-1: 2002 Actions on Structures Part 1-1, BSI,
18 WYATT,T A. Design guide on the vibration of floors. Pub. No. 076, 2005
Steel Construction Institute, Ascot, 1989. 43 pp.

299

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:299 17/07/2006 17:19:08

 Further reading
1 INSTITUTION OF STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS; INSTITUTION OF CIVIL
ENGINEERS. Manual for the design of reinforced concrete building
structures. London, ISE, London, 1985. 88 pp.
2 REYNOLDS, C.E. & STEEDMAN, J.C. Examples of the design of
reinforced concrete buildings to BS 8110 (4th edition). E&FN Spon,
London, 1992. 320 pp.
3 MOSLEY, W.H. Et Al. Reinforced concrete design to Eurocode 2 (EC2).
Macmillan, London, 1996. 426 pp.
4 THE CONCRETE CENTRE - How to design concrete structures
using Eurocode 2 . Guides including Introduction to Eurocodes,
Getting started, Slabs, Beams, Columns, Foundation, Fleet Slabs and
Deflection calculations. The Concrete Centre, Camberley, 2005-2006.
See also www.eurocode2.info
5 THE CONCRETE CENTRE - Concise Eurocode 2 for the design
of concrete structures to BS EN 1992-1-1:2004 and the UK National
Annex:2005. The Concrete Centre Camberley, due 2006.
6THE INSTITUTION OF STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS/CONCRETE
SOCIETY Standard Method of Detailing Structural Concrete – a
manual for best practice. IStructE London 2006.

300

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:300 17/07/2006 17:19:10

The Advisory Group Members
S Alexander H Dikme G King M Perera
S Alhayderi C P Edmondson S King B Quick
Dr H Al-Quarra J Elliott K Kus Y Rafiq
I Baldwin I Feltham I Lockhart A Rathbone
C Barker G Fernando M Lord M Rawlinson
M Beamish M Fernando B Lorimer P Reynolds
A Beasley I Francis M Lovell H Riley
T Bedford A Fung Dr Luker N Russell
G Belton P Gardner J Lupton U P Sarki
R Bhatt J Gay M Lytrides T Schollar
R Bickerton P Green Prof I Macleod A Stalker
P Blackmore A Hall F Malekpour A Starr
D Blackwood N Harris A McAtear M Stevenson
M Brady G Hill A McFarlane B Stoker
C Buczkowski D W Hobbs F Mohammad B Treadwell
A Campbell R Hulse A Mole A Truby
Dr P Chana M Hutcheson M Morton R Turner
G Charlesworth A Idrus R Moss T Viney
L Cheng N Imms B Munton Dr P Walker
Mr Chichger P Jennings C O’Boyle B Watson
R Collison D Kennedy Dr A Okorie J Whitworth
A Craddock G Kennedy T O’Neill C Wilby
M Morton R Jothiraj B Osafa-Kwaako S Wilde
J Curry Dr S Khan D Patel A Wong
J Dale A King D Penman E Yarimer
 CI/Sfb

UDC
624.04

User Guide to RC Spreadsheets: v3

This user guide provides guidance on the use of Charles Goodchild is Principal Structural Engineer for
RC Spreadsheets v3 for the design of reinforced The Concrete Centre where he promotes efficient concrete
concrete elements. design and construction. He was responsible for the concept,
content and management of this publication and of the
The release of Version 3 of the spreadsheets and user guide RC Spreadsheets.
follows the publication of BS EN 1992-1-1 (Eurocode 2) and its
UK National Annex and the publication of Amendment 3 to Rod Webster of Concrete Innovation & Design is
BS 8110 Part 1: 1987. principal author of the spreadsheets. He has been writing
spreadsheets since 1984 and is expert in the design of tall
For more information on the spreadsheets visit concrete buildings and in advanced analytical methods.
www.concretecentre.com/rcspreadsheets

CCIP-008
Published July 2006
ISBN 1-904818-38-2
Price Group O
© The Concrete Centre

Riverside House, 4 Meadows Business Park,

Station Approach, Blackwater, Camberley, Surrey, GU17 9AB
Tel: +44 (0)1276 606800 Fax: +44 (0)1276 606801
www.concretecentre.com